X\fe-' b 



LB 

F6f7 



JX 




i o Fibrida 

Tcdchers' 

T-nilbrm 
Examinations 

ibozL-1903 



KEY 



TO 



Florida Teachers^ Uniform Examinations 



1894-1903. 



COMPILED BY 



AL. H. FOSTER, Ph.B., B.L.. Supt. Clayton County, (Ga.) Schools; Prea. 
Middle Ga. College. Formerly: Chair Latin and Greek, Fla. Con- 
ference College; Dept. of English, Boys' High School, Atlanta, Ga. 



AND 



MRS. AL. H. FOSTER. Dept. English and History, Middle Ga. College. 
Formerly: Instructor in Jasper (Fla.) Normal Institute; English 
and Latin, Ocala High School; Dept. of Latin, Fla. Conference Col- 
lege. 



u 



p6 



V'^ 



I ubrahTTcongress 

i Two Copies Received 
MAY 9 1904 
\] Cepyrleht Entry 

tiuASSi ^ XXc. NO. 



ZAA^ 



Copyright, 1903 
By AL. H. FOSTEE. 



PKEFACE. 

By no means is it the purpose of this compilation to encourage 
superficial work, for it does not claim to be a short cut to a teacher's 
certificate. However, it will prove a helpful manual to any one de- 
siring to make thorough preparation. Also invaluable for teacher's 
desk, for use in supplementary wOrk. 

In preparing this compilation, best libraries — public and private — 
were constantly consulted. 

As successive examinations are not based on the same text in The- 
ory and Practice of Teaching, it was deemed unnecessary to include 
answers to questions on this branch. 

In re-reading manuscript, it was found necessary to cut out pars- 
ing-save in instances of peculiar difficulty-and other unimportant matter, 
in order to reduce volume to more convenient size. Arithmetical work 
was prepared by Miss Catherine Tatum of Milledgeville, Georgia. Se- 
cure a copy of "Florida Teachers' Uniform Examination Questions" 
from the publisher, O. L. Strickland, Palatka, FJorida. 

Any corrections thankfully received. 

A. H. F. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 

Sept. '94. 

1. Expressing the elements of words orally or in writing. 

2. The chief advantage of oral spelling is the drill it affords in syllab- 
ication, clear enunciation, and correct pronunciation. 

(a) Written spelling gives a double opportunity to imprint visual 
images, and it strengthens the impression through both eye and ear. 
Teaches pupils the forms of English, capitalization, punctuation, etc. 
Keeps all the pupils engaged. 

(b) Gives better chance for criticism and correction. Enables pupils 
to spell automatically, as it were, when they write, hence more easily 
and with greater facility and accuracy. 

3. The analysis of a word is the resolution of it into its component 
elements. 

4. See 3, Sept. '99. 

5. Phonic spelling: spelling by sound of letters. 

6. Orthographic or written spelling: expressing elements of words in 
writing. 

Print, to mark, to stamp. 
'i im-print, to mark on, to stamp on. 

fair, clear, equitable, just. 

un-fair, not fair. 

modest, restraint by a sense of propriety, diffident. 

Im-modest, not modest. 
"^ sight, act of seeing, vision. 

iw-sight, act of seeing into, vision into, introspection. 

Tate, to estimate. 

over-rate, to estimate above, to rate at too much. 

8. (a) Homonyms, (b) Synonyms. 

9. Write, to form letters, 
right, correct. 

rite, a ceremony. 

road, a way. 

rode, did ride. 

rowed, did row. 

raise, to lift up. 

raze, to pull down. 

rays, of light. 

seen, beheld. 

scene, a view. 

seine, a large net for fish. 

sight, vision. 

cite, to quote. 

site, situation, position. 

10. Cylinder, scintillate, preferable, embarrass, thorough, caterpillar, 
privilege, slight, camphene, sergeant. 



Oct. '94. 

1. See dictionary. 

2, (a) Dividing words into syllables. 

(b) See dictionary. 



3. (a) A primitive word is one that cannot be reduced to a more sim- 
ple form in tlie language to whicli it is native; as, man, good, run. 

(b) A derivative word is one made up of a root and one or more for- 
mative elements : man-ily, good-ness. 

(c) A compound word is one made up of two or more simple words 
united : school-master, rainbow. 

(d) man?iooct, man-eater. 

4. Monosyllable, a word of one syllable. 
Dissyllable, a word of two syllables. 
Trisyllable, a word of three syllables. 
Polysyllable, a word of four or more syllables. 

5. wn-kind, not kind. 
(Zis-loyal, not loyal. 
6e-dim, to make dim. 
anfe-natal, before birth, 
en-force, to force on. 

6. Sweet-er, more sweet. 
bsihy-ish, like a baby. 
cred-ible, that may &e believed. 
popul-OMS, abounding in people, 
earth-en, made of earth. 

7. See 7, Sept. 1900. 

8. (a) Words in ce and ge retain e before able and ous to keep c and 
tf soft. 

(b) "Words in oe and ee retain the e unless the suflSx begins with e. 

(c) Final e is retained before suffix beginning with a consonant. 

(d) The final consonant is not doubled when in the derivative, the ac- 
cent is thrown from the last syllable of the primitive. But we have ex- 
cel ; ex cellent; ex cellence. 

(e) Some words retain e to preserve their identity. 

9. One, a number, 
won, gained. 

rye, a grain. ; 

wry, crooked, distorted. , 

holy, sacred. 

wholly, entirely. ' ■ t • 

beau, a gay, foppish man. . ' 

bow, something curved. ' 1 

choir, a band of singers, 

quire, twenty-four sheets of paper. 

10. Conscience, pageantry, liquidate, conquer, requisition, sufficient, 
creatable. blasphemy, menagerie, amateur. 

May, 1895. 

1. See dictionary. 

3. Sucker, a fish; that which sucks, 
succor, to help. 

niarshal, an officer. 

martial, warlike. 

collar, for the neck. 

choler, anger. 

assent, agreement. 

ascent, a rising. 

sweet, like sugar; pleasing. 

suite, attendants; a set of rooms. 

4. mis-lead, to lead wrong, 
ad-here, to cling to. 

dis-pleased, not pleased. ' 



6 ;- 

a«^i-cipate, to take before. 
ea;^ra-ordinary, beyond ordinary. 

5. Pay-ee, one to whom money is to be paid. 
hope-?ess, without hope. 

whit-isTi, somewhat white. 
quadru-pZe, tonrfold. 
clerlc-sTiip, office of clerk, 

6. -ible, that may be. 
-iful, full of. 
-ish, like. 

-en, to make {past, par.) 
-ule, little. 

7. Gladden, Rule II., Sec 1, June '99. 
daintiness, Rule III., See 1, June, '99. 

copyist — sufBx begins with i; hence y is retained. 

serviceable. — words in ce and ge retain e before able and ous to 

keep c and g soft, 
deference— See 8(d), Oct. '94. 

8. Bring, motion toward the speaker. 

fetch, motion, first from, then toward the speaker (go and bring). 
indolent, denotes a love of ease, or an aversion to effort, 
lazy, averse to bodily effort — more contemptuous than indolent. 
economy, avoids waste and uses money to the best advantage, 
parsimony, carries frugality to an extreme, involving meanness, 
doctrine, a principle; tenet; we believe doctrines, 
precept, a rule authoritatively given; we obey precepts. 
9-10. Fleecy, abscess, precede, pedagogue, flimsy, scallop, separation 
efficiency, cholera, bronchitis, cession, decision, retrieve, sleigh, 
rhubarb, enough, czar, licorice, privilege, strychnine. 
Sept. 189.5. 



1. A letter is a character used to represent either an elementary 
sound or a combination of elementary sounds; as, a, x. 

A syllable is a sound, or a combination of sounds, uttered with 
one impulse of the voice, and may be represented by a letter or 
a group of letters, as, m,an, man-ner, man-u-mit. 

A word is either a syllable or a combination of syllables; as, day, 
dic-tion, com-pre-hen-sion. 

A root is either a word or that part of a word which is modified 
by a prefix or a suffix. 
An affix. 
2-3. See dictionary. 

4. Prefix. Signification. Example. Definition, 
un — not. in adj. and noun, tm-like — not like 

M/j-healthiness — state of being not healthy. 
opposite act, in verb. un-Ao — opposite of do 
pre — before pre-dict — to say before 

se — aside, apart se-cede — to go apart 

syn — ivith, together syn-thesis — placing together 

meta — beyond me^a-physics — science beyond physics 

5. (a) Homonyms are words that sound alike but are spelled differ- 

ently, 
(b) Ascent, a rising 
assent, agreement 
council, assembly 
counsel, advice 
rain, water from the clouds 



reign, to rule 
rein, for a horse 
metal, iron, gold, etc. 
mettle, spirit, courage. 
6. Synonyms are words having the same or similar signification. 
One is always surrounded by clanger. 
One's life is sometimes in Tperil. 
Poverty, deficiency in the means of living. 
Indigence, absence of the necessaries of life. 
Genius implies high and peculiar gifts of nature; extraordinary 

power of originating; as, genius for poetry. 
Talent implies natural strength of intellect; power to execute; as, 

talent for business. 
A fortress is protected by its walls, defended by its guns. 

8. (a) Pre-cede. (b) Pro-duce. (c) Signi-ty. (d) Dis-miss. (e) 
Manuscript. 
Busily, see 1 June, '99 — Rule III. 

trafficing, not accented on last syllable, hence consonant not dou- 
bled. '' 
concealed, final consonant preceded by two vowels, hence not dou- 
bled, 
furious, Rule III. 
traceable. See 7, May '95. 
10. Scissors, feud, office, symmetry, separable, dissolve, tongue, differ- 
ence, capillary, decision. 



June, 1896. 

1. (a-b) See 1, Sept. '95. 

(c) The alphabet is a system of characters used to represent the 
elementary sounds of a language. 

(d) See 1, Sept. '94. 

(e) Orthography is the art of expressing the elements of words. 
Treats of elementary sounds, letters, syllables and spelling. 

2. See 5, June 1900 and 3, Oct. '94. 
Synonyms — genius, talent. 
Homonyms — ascent, assent. 
Paronyms — manly, mankind. 

o. Sa;-tort, to twist out. 

re-pel, to drive back. 

o6-ject, to throw against. 

sub-merge, to dip under. 

pro-gress, to go fortvard. 
4. Valient, surely, irascible, loser, Connecti«ut, incense, dogmatical, 
exhaust, hygiene, prejudice. 

6. Cheerful — merry 
clamorous — noisy, 
defective — imperfect, 
edifice — building, 
enormous — immense. 

7. See 7 and 8, Oct. '94. 

8. Need, knead, step, steppe, seal, ceil, seed, cede, pique, peak, ere, 

e'er, air, heir, meddle, medal, counsel, council, stationary] 
stationery, lock, loch. 
^-10. Vicious, dominoes, lettuce, benefited, seditious, gaugeable, attorney, 
bouquet, sheckel, bilious, chisel, weevil, lachrymal, mortise, cor- 
puscle, crystallize, battalion, rhubarb, pseudonym, business. 



Sept. 1896. 

1. See dictionary. 

2. See 6, May '95. 

3. See 5, Sept. '94. 

4. See 8, Sept. '94. 

5. See 8, Sept. '94. 
G. See 9, Sept. '94. 

7. See 7, May '95. 

8. c, soft (=s), in cent. g, soft (=j), in gem. 

■€, hard (=k), in call. g, hard, in get. , 

9-10. Beefsteak, centennial, billiards, exaggerate, surcingle, occur- 
rence, lilies, inflamation, tyrannical, vaccinate. 



June, 1897. 

1. See 1, Sept. 1895 and 2, June '96. 

3. Admittance, see 1, June '99, Rule II. 
preference, see same word 7, June '96. 

modeling, word not accented on last syllable, hence consonant not 
doubled. 

Hating, final e is dropped before a vowel. Rule I. 

desirable, same rule applies. 

outrageous, words ending in ce and ge retain e before ous and 
ahle, to keep c and g soft. 

valuable, final e is dropped before a vowel. 

glorious, y after a consonant becomes i before a suffix not begin- 
ning with i, Rule III. 

plenteous, final y is sometimes changed into e; exception. 

bountiful, Rule III. 

4. Jw-clude, to shut in. 
ad-junct, joined to. 
an^e-cedent, going before. 
lil>er-a,te, to make free. 
joy-fu\, full of joy. 

pre-vent, to come before (hinder), 
semi-circle, half a circle. 
6i-ped, a two-footed animal. 
sub-merge, to dip under, 
free-dom, state of being free. 
, 5. Pole, hole, faint, seed, done, poll, whole, feint, cede, dun. 
6. i?e-print, to print again, 
un-fair, yiot fair, 
mis-judge, to judge wrongly. 
dis-obey, [opposite of obey), 
fore-sight, seeing before. 
7-10. Venison, licorice, vaccinate, strychnine, fragile, sanguine, pla- 
giary, palsied, conscientious, neuter, lettuce, surfeit, icicle, pre- 
cede, teetotaler, facade, audible, parachute, separation, ascension. 



Sept. '97. 

1. (a) See 2, Sept. '94. 

(b) See 2, Sept. '94. The best results are obtained by addressing 
both ear and eye. 

2. Blamable, see last paper Rule I. 

chargeable, words ending in ce and ge retain e before ous and 
able to keep c and g soft. 

paleness, final e is retained before suffix beginning with a con- 
sonant. 



9 

truly, when final e is preceded by a vowel, it is sometimes omit- 
ted (exception), 
business, see last paper Rule III. 

duteous, final y is sometimes changed into e — exception to Rule III, 
spryly, exception to Rule III. 
snobbish, see 1, June '99, Rule II. 
preferred, see 1, June '99, Rule II. 

benefiting, final consonant is not doubled if word is not accented 
on last syllable. 

4. Lead-en, made of lead. 
king-cZom, dominion of a king, 
glad-'rtess, state of being glad, 
barbar-ism, state of a barbarian. 

telic-ity, state of being happy. 
canti-cZe, a litle song. 
ducli-ling, a little duck. 
port-a&Ze, that may be carried. 
Mter-ary, relating to letters or literature. 
envi-OMS, full of envy. 

5. A&-solve, to loose from. ^ 
un-hurt, not hurt. 

a,-spire, to breathe toward, 
^raws-mit, to send beyond. 
con-sent, to feel with, 
inter-cede, to go between, 
de-pose, to put down. 
■pre-fix, to put before, 
circum-scribe, to write around. 
semi-circZe, half a circle. 

6. Man, mankind, principle, prince, pendant, depend, corporal, corpse, 

stationary, statics. 

7. Knead, to work dough, 
rabbet, a groove, to pare down, 
core, the heart of anything, 
cellar, a room underground, 
choir, a band of singers, 
signet, a seal. 

bawled, did bawl. 

brews, does brew. 

fain, gladly. 

plane, a joiner's instrument. 

8. Habit, coarse, easel, domicile, effete, descendant, cylinder, expert- 

ness, discover, distinguished, demagogue, fictitious, caterpillar, 
manacle, etymology, fruitful, calamity, ecstasy, eleemosynary, 
elite, esquimau, efiicient, ancient, rebel, quicken, indelible, rhi- 
noceros, satellite, scintillate, hypocrisy. 



June, '98. 

1. See 1-2, June 189G. 

A prefix is a significant element placed at the beginning of a word 

to modify its meaning. 
A suffix is a significant element placed at the end of a word to 

modify its meaning. 

2. See 7, Sept. 1902. 

3. See 3, Sept. 1900. 

4. Bond-ag'e, conditon of being bound, 
roek-eri/, place where rooks are bred. 



10 

animal-CM^e, a little animal. 
sert-dom, state of being a serf. 
glee-ful, full of glee. 
child-is?i, like a child. 
secur-ity, state of being secure, 
requirement, that which is required, 
firmness, quality of being firm. 
pos^pone, to place after. 
5. See 5, Sept. '99. 

7. Teach-er, trans-fer, two-fold, inter-vene, hoy-ish, op-pose, mole-CM^e, 
life-Zess, popul-ows, wood-en. 
8-10. Damming, bulletin, census, resurrection, restaurant, separation, 
malleable, privilege, chorister, prejudice, hypocrite, progeny, 
orchestra, clique, missile. 



Sept. '98. 

1. (a) See 1, Sept. '95. 

(b) See 4. Oct. '94. 

(c) Accent is stress of voice on a particular syllable of a word. 

(d) A trigraph consists of three vowels written together in the 
same syllable, one only being pronounced or the three together 
representing a single vocal sound or diphthong. 

(e) The ante-penult of a word is the last syllable but two. 

2. See 3, Sept. 1900. 

3. (a) Pre-fer'; (b) con-ten-'tion ; (c) pref'-er-ence; (d) in-dis'-so- 

lu-ble. 

4. (a) See 7, Sept. '97. 

(b) See 8, Sept. '97. 

5. Lamb-fcin, hero-ism, m^Z^i-form, dull-a?'rf-, mis-deed, re-gain, blow- 

ing, strength-en, super-Qne, out-do. 

6. See 6, Nov. 1901. 

7. (a) Final e of a primitive word is dropped on taking a suffix be- 

ginning with a vowel, but retained before a suffix beginning with 
a consonant; as, move, moving; hate, hateful. Exception: words 
in ce and ge retain e before able and ous to keep c and g soft; 
and those in oe and ee retain the e unless the suffix begins with 
e. Some words retain e to preserve their identity. Ex., change, 
changeable ; shoe, shoeing ; singe, singeing. 
(b) In monosyllables and words accented on the last syllable, a 
final consonant after a single vowel doubles before a suffix be- 
gining with a vowel {x, k and v are never doubled). Ex., rob, 
robbed. Exception : The final consonant is not doubled when, 
in the derivative, the accent is thrown from the last syllable of 
the primitive. Ex., refe7\ reference. 

(c) Final y of a primitive word, when preceded by a consonant, is 

generally changed into i, on the addition of a suffix not begin- 
ning with i. Ex., daisy, daisies. Exception : Final y does not 
change before 's. Ex., baby, baby's. 
9-10. Caricature, succulent, resuscitate, sergeant, privilege, vassalage, in- 
terstice, cynosure, tyrannize, scintillate. 



June 1899. 

1. Censurable, that may be censured. '(In adding suffixes, final e is 
dropped before a vowel. Rule I.) 
hateful, causing hate. (Final e is generally retained before suffix 

beginning with a consonant.) 
gladden, to make glad. (In monosyllables and words accented on 
the last syllable, a final consonant after a single vowel doubles 



11 

before a suffix beginning with a vowel {x, k and v are never 

doubled. Rule II.) 
concealed, did conceal. (Final consonant preceded by two vowels, 

hence not doubled.) 
benefited, did benefit. (Word not accented on last syllable, hence 

final consonant not doubled.) 
acquitted, did acquit. (Rule II). 
occurred, did occur. (Rule II.) 
pitiable, causing pity, (t/ after a consonant becomes i before a 

suffix not beginning with i. Rule III.) 
copyist, one who copies, {y after a consonant is retained before 

suffix beginning with i.) 
chargeable, that may be charged. (Words ending in ce and ge re- 
tain e before able and ous to keep c and g soft.) 
-4. Cow-join, to join together. 

ea;-communicate, to exclude from communion, 
re-gain, to gain back, 
sub-way, an under-ground, passage, 
in-sane, not sane. 
dis-connecl, opposite of connect, 
ari-join. to join to. 
o6-solve, to release from. 
trans-S.x, to pierce through. 
2>re-historic, before history. 
5. Contro-versy — contro, against. 
king-dom — dom, domain of. 
semi-annual — semi, half. 
be-little — be, to make. 
citizen-ship — ship, office of, state of. 
animal-cule — cule, little. 
trans-mit — trans, over, beyond. 
api-ary — ary. place where. 

af-flx — af, to. ; 

parent-age — age, state of being. 
<>. Bis-ciiit, ttcice cooked. 

coraira-dict, to speak against. 
wood-e». made of wood. 
multi-pZe, many fold. 
mournful-Zy, in a mournful manner. 
teach-er, one who teaches. 
name-Zess, without a name. 
melodi-OMS, full of melody. 

pre-cede, to go before. j 

poZy-syllabic. consisting of many syllables. 
■7. Cent — scent, odor; sent, did send. 

pear — pair, two of a sort; pare, to peel, 
air — heir, one who inherits; ere, before, 
rain — reign, to rule; rein, the strap of a bridle, 
meat — meet, to assemble; mete, to measure, 
you — yew, a kind of tree; ewe, a female sheep, 
idle — idol, an image; idyl, a poem, 
fain — fane, a temple; feign, to pretend, 
isle — aisle, a passage in a church; I'll, I will, 
raise — rays, of light; raze, to pull down. 
:S. Capacity — ability, capability. 

rivalry — emulation, competition, 
talkative — garrulous, loquacious, 
famous — renowed, illustrious. 



bring — fetch, bear, carry, 
forsake — desert, abandon. 

judgment — penetration, discernment, discrimination, 
final — conclusive, ultimate, 
poverty — indigence, pauperism, 
character — reputation. 
9-10. Aqueduct, cocoa, victuals, courtesy, almond, languor, salmon, gher- 
kin, chamois, equity, consensus, raspberry, reservoir, cupboard,, 
bellov^fs, forehead, scallop, skein, copse, diaphragm. 



Sept. 1899. 

1. See 1, last exam. 

3. RemoY-al, heauti-fy, audit-or, rust-ic, pres-e/ice. 
Foh-age, a collection of leaves. 
tann-ery, place ivhere tanning is done. 
m.o\e-cule, a small mass. 
serf-dom, state of being a serf. 
aw-ful, causing awe. 
child-isTi, like a child. 
ahil-ity, quality of being able, 
induce-men^, that which induces, 
w^icked-ness, state of being wicked. 
pos^humous, done after one's death. 
5. Rude — rood; sear — sere; surf — serf; serge — surge; auger — augur; 
throw — throe; team — teem; suite — sweet; root — ^route; strait — 
straight. 
G. See 8, June '99. 
7-10. See 9-10 last exam. 



June, 1900. 

1. Admiring — continuing to admire. (In adding suffixes, linal e i& 

dropped before a vowel. Rule I.) 
blamable — that may be blamed. (Rule I.) 
movement— act of moving. (Pinal e is generally retained before a. 

consonant.) 
plaguing — continuing to plague. (Rule I.) 
erasing — continuing to erase. (Rule I.) 
melodious — abounding in melody, {y after a consonant becomes 

i before a suffix not beginning with i. Rule III.) 
enviable — that may be envied. (Rule III.) 
greediest — most greedy. (Rule III.) 
ceremonial — relating to ceremony. (Rule III.) 
tardiness — state of being tardy. (Rule III.) 

2. Demoni-ac, vigil-ance, popul-o«s, ta\^-ing, solu-&Ze. 

3. See Rule I. above and 7(a) Sept. '98. 

5. Synonyms are words having the same or simlar signification. 
Homonyms are words agreeing in sound but differing in significa- 
tion. 

Paronyms are words of the same origin. 

Speech — address, oration, harangue, declamation. 

Diction — style, phraseology. 

Judgment — discernment, penetration, discrimination. 

Danger — peril, hazard, jeopardy. 

Cautious — wary, circumspect. 

So — sow; steal — steel; pearl — purl; load — lode; rute — root. 

6. Frightful — dream or shriek. 
tremendous — shock or storm. 

terrible catastrophe, hurricane, or roar. 



13 

shocking news. 

horrible deeds, sights, or stories. 
dreadful gloom. 
fearful contest or wave. 
awful solitude. 
7. Marriage — act of marrying. 

hennery — place where hens are kept, 
animalcule — a minute animal, 
kingdom — domain of a king, 
joyful — full of joy. 
publish — to make public, 
security — state of being secure, 
excitement — state of being excited, 
goodness — state of being good, 
post-script — written after. 
8-10. Coalesce, tariff, paragraph, critique, lyceum, nausea, juicy, covetous, 

badinage, choler, sub-poena, synagogue, mignonette, chrysalis, 

ptyalism. 



Sept. 1900. 

1. See 1, last exam. 

2. See dictionary. 

3. A-bed — a, in. 

after-noon — after, following (in time), 
be-little — be, to make, 
mid-summer — mid, middle, 
mis-name — mis, wrongly, wrong, 
with-stand — with, against, 
un-kind — un, not. 
out-strip — out, beyond, 
dis-obey — dis, not, opposite act. 
fore-sight — fore, before. 

4. See 4, June, 1899. 

5. See 6, June '99. 

6. See 6, Oct. '94. 

7. Bog, boggy. (Rule II; see 1, June 1899.) 
note, noting. (Rule I; see 1, June 1899.) 
begin, beginner. (Rule II; see 1, June 1899.) 
victory, victorious. (Rule III; see 1, June. 1900.) 

daisy, daisies. (Names in y after a consonant add es and change 
y to i according to Rule III. to form plural.) 

8. See 7. June, 1899. 

9. See 6, Sept. '99. 

10. See 9-10, June. 1899. 



June, 1901. 

1. See 7, Sept 1898. 

4. See 5, Oct. '94, and 4, June '97. 

5. Stud-ewi, One ivho studies, 
liber-a^e, to make free. 

refer-ee, one to tohom something is referred. 

preach-er, 07ie who preaches. 

For others, see 4, Sept. '97, and 4, June '98. 

6. See 5, Nov. 1901. 

7. See 6, Sept. '95. 
abstinence — temperance. 

alarm — fright, terror, consternation, 
queer — odd, whimsical, singular. 



14 

eminent — celebrated, distinguished. 

poverty — indigence, pauperism. 

noted — famous, renowned, illustrious, notorious. 

misfortune — calamity, disaster, mischance. 

incompetent — incapable. 

audacity — impudence, boldness. 

heartily — earnestly, sincerely, cordially, zealously. 
8-10. Delusion, antecedent, blackguardism, brigadier, burlesque, courtesy^ 
handkerchief, celibacy, ecstasy, bronchitis, indictment, covetous, 
cognac, circuit, cynic, unction, politician, raspberry, leisure^ 
hearth. 



H 



Sept. 1901. 
1-2. See dictionary. 

3. See 2, Sept. 1902. 

4. A6-duct, to lead away, 
trans-vait, to send heyond. 
Uyper-cviticKl, over critical, 
inier-vention, a coming hetween. 
wn-paid, not paid, 
in^ro-duce, to bring within. 
^osi-prandial, after dinner, 
circttm-navigate, to sail around, 
re-cur, to come liack. 
an^i-podes, v^^ith feet opposite. 

5. See 3, Sept. 1902. Synonyms. 

6. Melodious. (See 1, June '99, Rule III.) 
coniprl. (See 1, June '99, Rule III.) 
playing. (See 1, June '99, Rule I.) 

accountable. (The final consonant of the prefix assimilates to the 
'nitipl Iptter nf the root.) 

supposition. (Same rule applies.) 

occurring. (See 1, June '99, Rule II.) 

duteous. (Final y is sometimes changed into e.) 

dyed. (See 1, June '99, Rule I.) 

preference, i Final consonant is not doubled when accent of de- 
rivative is thrown from last syllable of primitive.) 

virtuous. (See Rule I.) 

7. See 6, Sept. 1902. 

8. Parachute, epoch, attache, besiege, deception, pharmacist, phlegm. 

pacify, occipital, sanction, catarrh, schism, scheme, effete, pique,. 
chlorid, calyx, benzine, piquant. 



Nov. 1901. 
1-2. See dictionary. 
8. See 3, Sept. 1900. 

4. A-vert — to turn from. 
Sis-loyal — not loyal. 
afZ-duce — to bring forward, 
out-do — to do heyond. 
C07i-cur — to agree icith. 
inter-cede — to go between. 
de-pose — to put down, 
ante-eedent — going before. 
circum-na\\gate- — to sail around. 
semi-circle — half a circle. 

5. Sweet, suite; assent, ascent; borough, burrow; vain, vane, vein; 



15 

kernel, colonel; freeze, frieze; serial, cereal; collar, choler; ses- 
sion, cession; pair, pare, pear. 
G. Kingship — office of a king. 

dispel — to drive asunder. 

lioness — a female lion. 

posthumous — after one's death. 

manhood — state of being a man. 

curable — that may be cured. 

hypercritical — over critical. 

liberty — state of being free. 

heroism — state of a hero. 

circumscribe — ^to write around. 
9. Ult. — last month, 

pp. — pages. 

mdse. — merchandise. 

mme. — madame. 

et al. — and others. 

for example — e. g. 

that is — i. e. 

namely-T-viz. 

and the rest — etc. 
8-10. See 9-10, June '99. 



June 1902. 

3. (a) Principle — rule of action. 

principal — chief. 

(b) seed — what is sown. 

cede' — to yield, to transfer. 

(c) bring — motion toward the speaker. 

fetch — motion first from, then toward, the speaker. 

(d) seem — has reference to semblance. 

appear — has reference to a thing's being presented to our view. 

(e) black — of the darkest color, 
white — having the color of snow. 

(f) good — possessed of excellent qualities. 
bad — evil. 

(a) Homonyms; (b) homonyms; (c) synonyms; (d) synonyms; 
(e) antonyms; (f) antonyms. 

4. See 3, Oct. '94. 

5. See dictionary. 

G. con-vene — to come togetTiei. 
in-sane — not sane, 
ad-here — to stick to. 
?'e-capture — to capture again, 
inter -xeniion- — a coming between. 
cuY-ahle — that may be cured, 
puri-f^/ — to make pure, 
teach-er — one loho teaches. 
secnr-ity — state of being secure. 
», ment-aZ — relating to the mind. 

7. Inflexibility — 

Class : Derivative. 

Base : stem flex — bend. 

Adjuncts: prefix in — not; suffix ible — that may be; ity — 

state of being. 
Meaning : state of not being able to be bent. 



10 

Extraordinary — 

Class : Derivative. 

Base : Stem ordin — order. 

Adjuncts: Prefix extra — beyond; suffix ary — relating to. 

Meaning: Beyond that relating to usual order of things. 
Co-ordination — 

Class : Derivative. 

Base : Stem ordin — order. 

Adjuncts: Prefix co — together; suffix ate — having; ion — state. 

Meaning — State of having same rank. 
Prerequisite — 

Class : Derivative. 

Base : Stem requis — to require. 

Adjuncts: Prefix pre — before; suffix ite — being. 

Meaning : Being previously required. 
Infallible — 

Class : Derivative. 

Base : Stem fall — to deceive. 

Adjuncts: prefix in — not; suffix hie — that may be. 

Meaning : That may not tte deceived. 

8-10. Harass, bachelor, cancel, vault, clamor,' psychology, cancel, Egypt- 
ian, conquer, concede, apropos, ascertain, surgeon, discipline, lat- 
tice, unconscious, essential, unction, extirpation, facetious. 



Sept. 1902. 

2. Root, of a plant; route, a way. 

borough, a corporation; burroiv. a hole in the ground made by 

animals. 
ton, a weight; tun, a large cask. 
skull, a bone of the head;scull. a boat. 
pour, to empty out; pore, an opening, to study closely. 
rice, a grain; rise (noun), an ascent. 
peak, the top; pique, ill will. 
ode, a poem; owed, did owe. 

jam, preserved fruit; jamb, side piece of a door. 
core, heart of anything; corps, a body of troops. 

3. Frugality is saving systematically and rigidly. 

parsimony carries frugality to an extreme, involving meanness. 

penitence, sorrow for sin. 

remorse, a gnawing of conscience. 

delusion, deception from want of knowledge. 

illusion, deception from morbid imagination. 

plurality of votes, more votes than those given for any other can- 
didate. 

majority of votes, more than half the votes given for all the can- 
didates. 

narrative, a story of connected incidents. 

description, a sketch or picture in words. 
(Such words are called synonyms.) 

4. See 6, Nov. 1901. * 

5. See dictionary. 

6. See 7, Nov. 1901. 

7. See 2, June '98. 

8. See 3, Nov. 1901. 
8-10. See 9-10, June '99. 



17 

READING. 
Sept. '94. 

1. (a) Reading is the act of the mind in getting thought by means of 
written or printed words arranged in sentences. This act of the iliind 
may or may not be followed by the oral expression of the thought. In 
the former case it is oral reading, in the latter it is silent reading. 

(b) Articulation, strictly defined, is the utterance of single elementary 
sounds composing a syllable or a word; enunciation, the utterance of 
combined elements in syllables or parts of syllables. 

(c) Slurring syllables and leaving off final sound. 

2. Emphasis is special prominence given to words and phrases. This 
may be done by an increase or decrease of force, a change of stress, 
form, quality, pitch or movement or a change in the combination of two 
or more of these elements. 

3. Yes. Quantity has reference to loudness or volume of sound; 
pitch to the elevation or depression of a tone. 

4. (a) Have pupils stand erect while reading, in front of recitation 
seat or out in the aisle. Miltary posture, standing erect on both feet 
and shoulders well thrown back. 

(b) Book should be held in left hand, unless book is too heavy, in 
which case both hands may be used. Should be held below level of the 
face, about fourteen inches from the eye and at right angles to the line 
of vision. 

(c) While teacher slowly elevates hand, class, standing, should inhale 
quietly, filling lungs to utmost capacity. As teacher lowers hand, pupils 
exhale slowly and quietly. Repeat several times. 

(d, e) Give simple drills to the end that gestures and facial express- 
ion will harmonize with sentiment to be expressed and nature of subject. 

5. (a) Corrections should be made by class at end of individual reci- 
tations. Reader should not be interrupted. 

(b, c) Question pupils as to meaning of what they are reading; have 
them reproduce thought in a conversational tone; call for meaning of 
new words; have paragraph read by several pupils until expression is 
satisfactory. See 2, 



Oct. '94. 

1. (a) Getting from the written or printed page exact thought in- 
tended by author and imparting it to hearers in such a manner that 
they may also understand it clearly and without conscious effort. 

Good reading demands skill in instant interpretation of words and 
letters and special attention to articulation, accent, emphasis, inflection, 
modulation, and pauses. 

(b) Word mastery and grasp of thought and feeling. 

2. Lead pupils to clearly apprehend the thought, and appreciate what 
the language describes, then the proper oral expression will be a com- 
paratively easy matter. Give special attention, however, to naturalness. 

3. Punctuation points render the meaning clear in that they are a 
guide to construction. Furthermore, they correspond more or less closely 
to the pauses made. 

4. The loorcl method because it is the natural method. 

5. Pauses for rhetorical effect — that is, pauses that assist in the 
proper modulation of the voice. Grammatical pauses are indicated by 
the marks of punctuation; rhetorical pauses, however, depend for their 
correct usage upon the reader's understanding of thought to be rendered. 



Sept. 189.5. (See Sept. '94.) 



18 

June '96. 

1. The iDord viethod proceeds on the principle of first the idea, then 
the spoken word, then the written or printed word. By this method, 
words are taught as tvholes. No account is taken of the elements of 
words whether sounds or letters, until pupil is thoroughly familiar with 
the written or printed forms of thirty or forty "children's words." 

(b) The pJionic method avoids the names of the letters at first alto- 
gether, and simply seeks to teach their powers. Groups of words are 
given in which the same sounds occur and these words are decomposed 
into their elementary sounds which children are taught to utter sepa- 
rately. 

(c) See 1, Oct. '94. 

2. (a) Pitch is the degree of elevation of the voice. 

(b) Force is the quantity of voice used in reading or speaking. It is 
quantity as applied to vocal delivery. 

(c) Movement is the rate with which words and sentences are uttered. 

(d) See 2, Sept. '94. 

(e) Inflections are the variations of the pitch of the voice on different 
words or syllables of a sentence. 

3. Lessons should be short and intensive. Take special pains that 
pupils read understandingly. Question pupils as to meaning of what 
they are reading and explain allusions. 

Interest pupils in the life of the author, and give information in re- 
gard to his literary productions. 

Let the meaning of every word be tinderstood, every reference ex- 
plained, every choice expression memorized. Have pupil translate selec- 
tion into his thought and language. 

In reading or speaking the head and body should be erect, the chest 
fully expanded, the shoulders well thrown back — not rigid and formal, 
but easy and natural. 

4. See 1, Sept. '97. 

5. (a) See 2, Oct. '94. 

(b) Too rapid utterance by which the effect of the verse is lost to 
the ear; a plain and dry articulation which does not indicate the beauty 
of the sentiments and the rhythm; chanting tone; a sing-song style. 



Sept. 96. (see Sept. '94.) 
June 1897. 

1. See 1, Sept. '99. 

2. Blackboard drill reviewing words already learned. 

Introduce new words by means of objects or pictures and conversation 
lessons. 

From blackboard, teach form of word — script. 
Have pupils copy word in script. 

3. (a) Monotone is a sameness of pitch on and between successive 
words and syllables. 

(b) See 2, June '96. 

(c) Modulation is the variation of the voice made in reading and 
speaking. 

(d, e) See 2, June '96. 

4. (a, b) See Grammar. 2, June '98, 2d or 3d grade. 

(c) See Composition, 1, June '99. 

(d) Two or more lines or verses forming a division of a song or poem. 

(e) Apostrophe, as a figure of rhetoric, is a turning -from, the regular 
course of the narrative to address some real or imaginary person or 
object. 

.5. Lead the pupil to perceive that his articulation is really faulty; 



19 

the ear must be trained to detect the difference in the sounds, and to 
notice when the incorrect one is given. 

The pupil must be taught the position of the organ in making sounds 
and be drilled upon them until he can make them at his will. May be 
largely overcome by persistent and careful drill in the pronunciation of 
words in which most difficulty is experienced. Do not allow rapid or 
careless reading. 

6. See 1, Sep. '94. 

The necessary condition of both silent and oral reading is a clear ap- 
prehension of the thought and feeling as presented in the language read; 
hence reading is not merely an act of the lips but an act of the mind. 
Sept. 1897. 

1. Spelling, writing, composition, history or literature. 

2. Blackboard and crayon. 

3. (a, b). See 1, Sept. '94. 

(c) Reading, correctly taught, is an act of the mind; pupil is required 
to understand words and hence grasps the thought; easy natural expres- 
sion is the result. 

A process of word calling is mechanical — a mere act of the lips. 

Begin with script. If we begin with print, forms must be fixed in the 
mind of child by reproduction work in print. 

(d, e) But making printed forms is not a means of expression that the 
child uses permanently. "Writing, the second great means of language 
expression, should be put into the power of the child as soon as possible 
in order that he may express his thought as freely with the pencil as 
with the tongue. 

4. See 1, June '96. 

(a) The sentence method is that which begins with sentences instead 
of letters or separate words. By it, the child's attention is called to some 
thought orally expressed and then the written expression for this as a 
whole is presented and taught. 

The letter or alphabetic method begins by teaching the child the names 
of the letters. When these, or a sufficient number of them, have been 
learned, the child is taught to pronounce words by means of these names. 

(b) When child has acquired power and habit of constructing the sound 
of a word for himself. 

5. Reading Drill — 

(a) I. Preparation — Word Mastery: Writing all new words. Reading 
copied words. Teaching meaning of words. Their use in original sen- 
tences. 

II. Sentence Reading. Grasp of thought and feeling. Vocal expression 
of thought and feeling. 

(b) Word drill may now be united with the reading exercise proper. 
Not only should there be a more discriminating analysis of the thought 
but also increasing attention to figures of speech, historical and literary 
allusions, style, etc. Each choice selection should be made basis of a 
practical and suggestive lesson in English literature. Lessons should be 
short and intensive. Text should be studied partly with reference to 
beauty of literature contained. Instruction should impart to pupil an 
increasing appreciation of good English, and greater power and facility 
in its use. 



June 1898. 

1. First Steps in Reading — 

I. Words as wholes : Concept or idea represented — objective. Words 
as sounds. Words as forms — script or print. Writing words — script or 
print. 

II. Word in combination : Groups or phrases. Sentences. Paragraphs, 



20 

III. Word analysis : Words as sounds — phonic. Words as forms — 
letters. 

2. To enlarge the pupil's vocabulary, Increase his command of lan- 
guage, train the voice, elevate the taste, sharpen the intellect, and refine 
and ennoble the feelings. See 3, June '96 and 5(b), Sept. '97. 

3. Clear conception, vivid imagination, real sympathy, good judg- 
ment, distinct articulation, full and free respiration, perfect control of 
the voice. 

4. See 1, Sept. '97. 

5. (a) The one begins with the vi^ord as a unit, the other the sentence. 
See 4, Sept. '97. 

(b)) Union method" will give most satisfactory results. Exclusive use 
of any one method, even for a few weeks, results in habits or tendencies 
that must be corrected before natural and accurate reading is possible. 
It is essential that child read not only words but — after a short time — 
increasing by phrases and sentences, and be made familiar with 
phonic elements of spoken words. Begin with word method. 

(a) The getting of the thought comes first. Statement is true, for mas- 
tery of the thought is the first requisite of expression. 

No; such teaching does not lead to self-help and fluency but to the 
reverse. 



Sept. '98. 

1. (a) Thought-getting and thought-giving. 

(b) It is a pre-requisite to the thorough mastery of other lines of 
study. Study of text-books differs from reading solely and simply in 
intensity. 

2. As an act of the lips, mechanics of reading only are involved; but 
reading is thought getting and thought giving. Thinking is the mind's 
mode of action; hence reading is obviously an act of the mind. 

(b) From first lesson. 

3. Use well-selected material to arouse interest; assign short lessons 
but requires intensive study; question pupils as to meaning of what they 
are reading and have them summarize selection read, in their own lan- 
guage. If there is a tendency to slurred and confused utterance, give 
special drill work in articulation. If pupil reads in an artificial tone, 
have book closed and call for substance in his own words, and have 
passage re-read until same variety of inflections is put into printed words. 
See 2, Oct. '94. 

4. (a) Enables pupil to acquire distinct and clear articulation, and 
correct pronunciation. Dull reading and failure to appreciate what Ian 
guage describes characterizes first method. 

(b) The second interests the mind, enlists the attention, awakens the 
feelings, renders the imagination active and responsive, and, in short, 
prepares pupil for lively apprehension of thought to be read. 
June '99. 

1. (a; See 2, June '96. 

(b) Tone or quality of voice is the kind of sound employed in reading 
or speaking. 

(c) Volume is quantity of voice. 

(d) It is the dropping of the voice at the end of the sentence, which 
indicates that the sense is complete. 

(e) The force given to one or more syllables of a word. 

2. See 4(a). Sept. '97 and 5(b) Sept. '98. 

3. See 3, June '98. 

4. Have pupil spell new words as they occur, and teach tvriting by 
copying exercises. Reading lessons furnish abundant subject matter for 
composition work, as sentence-building, reproduction work, original ex- 



21 

ercises, etc. Occasional supplementary reading affords variety in practice 
for young readers and prevents memorizing process. Tests pupil's ability 
to read at sight. In this way, Biography, History and Geography can be 
effectively taught in connection with reading lessons. 



Sept. '99. 

1. (a) To make learner automatic and quick in the recognition of 
words and letter forms and values. 

(b) To secure his interest in the content — the spiritual element of the 
printed forms. 

The first or immediate purpose involves the mechanics of reading — dis- 
tinct and clear articulation and correct pronunciation as well as insLant 
Interpretation of words and letters. 

The second or ultimate purpose involves character-growth of learner, 
his introduction to enjoyment of truth, goodness and beauty as seen by 
others and expressed by them in the world's best literature. 

2. Mastery of words. 

3. (a) Concept or idea represented, sound, and form, 
(b) To be taught in above order. 

4. (a) When pupil acquires power to "make out" and pronounce new 
written or printed words. 

(b) (1) That the ear may acquire a correctness and delicacy of per- 
ception. 

(2) Correct pronunciation and distinct articulation. 

5. Some authorities consider the word as the unit, others the sentence. 

6. Because the sentence is the unit of expression. Pupil taught this 
way reads with more ease and naturalness of expression. 

7. (a) Apprehension of the thought. 

(b) Thought- getting precedes thought-giving. 

8. By means of conversation lessons, mind of pupil is interested, the 
attention enlisted, the feelings awakened and pupil receives the needed 
assistance in the grasp of the thought to be expressed. 

9. It tends to arouse a literary appetite, elevate the taste and refine 
and ennoble the feelings. 

Supplementary reading tests the ability of pupils to read intelligently 
without previous drill, tends to correct the memorizing process, interests 
pupils in reading good books, creates a thirst for knowledge and tends 
to inspire them with a just appreciation of the beautiful and true in 
thought and word. 

10. Author not mentioned. 



June 1900. 

1-3. See- 1-3, June '99. 

4. See 2, Sept. '97. 

5. See 9, Sept. '99. 



5ept. 1900. 

See June 1900 — duplicate. 
June 1901. 

1. (a) The ability to recognize or name word at sight; to utter it 
with ease, accuracy and force; to spell or analyze it by sound and by 
letter, and to apprehend its meaning and use it intelligently. 

2. (a) Give pupil needed assistance in grasp of thought to be ex 
pressed. There is a very small place for vocal imitation. Thought will 
control expression. If the thought is in the child's mind in its fullest 
intensity, the expression will be appropriate. 

(b) Mastery of the thought. 

3. See 4, June '99. 



22 

4. (a) Preparation enables pupil to grasp the thought and hence ac- 
quire fluency and naturalness of expression. 

Recitation affords drill in mechanics of reading. 

(b) Tends to correct and prevent memorizing process. Tests ability of 
pupil. 

(c) Silent reading: See 2(a), Sept. 1901. 

Discussion of matter read leads pupils to enter into the thoughts and 
feelings of the writer. Arouses interest. 
Sept. 1901. 



1. See 5(a), Sept. '97. 

2. (a) Because thought controls expression. See ques. 6, June '98. 
(b) By requiring a thorough mastery of words. Child should not be 

allowed to read a sentence aloud until he knows its words and its mean- 
ing. 

Have child get the thought by means of written words and not by 
hearing the sentence read. 

5. See 3, Sept. '99. 



Nov. 


1901. 






1. 


See 1, 


Sept. 


1901. 


2. 


See 3, 


June 


1901. 


3. 


See 4, 


Sept. 


'97. 


4. 


See 2, 


Sept. 


'99. 


5. 


See 2, 


Sept. 


'97. 



June 1902. 

1-2. (a) Faulty articulation: Have pupil practice upon those exercises 
which will give an easy action of lips, tongue and palate. 

Give drill work in utterance of the elementary sounds and in the 
phonetic analysis of syllables and words. 

(b) Incorrect pronunciation: Encourage habit of consulting diction- 
ary. Call attention to mistakes. Have pupils to keep a list of words 
which they mispronounce and give frequent drill work therein. 

(c) Unnatural tone: Conversation drill. Lead pupil to see the adap- 
tation of the tone to the sentiment. 

(d) Lack of expression: See that pupil has clear grasp of thought. 

(e) Repetition: Require silent reading preparatory to oral. 

3. Punctuation marks serve as guides to the meaning. 

4. By instruction designed to give pupil clear concepts and a vivid 
mental picture of what the language describes. 

5. (a) Manner of delivery, 
(b, c) See 2, June '96. 

(d) See 1, Sept. '95. 

(e) The correct utterance of words. 



Sept. 1902. 

2. Improves the memory, affords drill in expression, extends and re- 
fines the vocabulary. 

3. Material should be of recognized literary standing, entertaining, af- 
ford information and culture to pupils and be simple enough for them 
to understand. At this stage of the work pupil is presumed to have mas- 
tered the mechanics of reading and should now read with ease and en- 
joyment much of the choicest literature. 

5. See 2(a), June 1902 and 5, June '97. 

6. See 5, Sept. '97. 



23 

UNITED STATES HISTORY. 

Second Grade. 
Sept. '94. 

1. (a) The solemn declaration of the Congress of the United States 
of America on July 4, 1776, by which they formally renounced their sub- 
jection to the government of Great Britain. 

(b) Thomas Jefferson. 

2. In 1087, Andros ordered the legislature to deliver to him the char- 
ter of Connecticut. To prevent its coming into his possession it was 
taken from hall and kept safely hidden in a hollow oak tree which was 
called therefrom the "charter oak." 

3. (a) 1829-37. 

(b) Nullification, and National Bank question. 

4. Admission of Texas. 

5. The doctrine of non-interference of European powers in the polit- 
ical affairs of the nations of the American continent. Sentiment ad- 
vanced by President Monroe that the United States government; is op- 
posed to any extension of monarchical institutions on the American con- 
tinents. 

6. Franklin, Pierce, Taylor, Lee, Davis and Grant. 

7. Era of political harmony. Monroe was President. 

8. (a) See 1, May '95. First Grade, 
(b) William D. Mosely. 

9. Morse, telegraph; Fulton, steamboat; Edison, electric light; Howe, 
sewing machine; Whitney, cotton gin. 

10. Bull Run, Confederate; Gettysburg, Union; Atlanta, Union; 
Chickamauga, Confederate; Chancellorsville, Confederate. 



May '95. 

1. On the explorations of John and Sebastian Cabot. 

2. The Puritans came from England to America, that they might 
"worship God in accordance with the dictates of conscience. 

3. See 5, Sept. '94. Second Grade. 

4. Spanish Explorer — Columbus, West Indies; English — John Cabot, 
Atlantic Coast of North America: Dutch — Henry Hudson, Hudson River; 
French — Champlain, Lake Champlain, and Cartier, the St. Lawrence 
River. 

5. See 3, Sept. '94. First Grade. 

6. Jackson inaugurated the "spoils system" by giving offices to his 
political friends, declaring that "to the victors belong the spoils." 

7. (a) His failure to carry out the principles of the party electing 
him — especially his veto of the United States Bank Bill. 

(b) His using too freely the veto power. 

8. The Battle of Gettysburg was fought July 2nd and 3d, 1863, with 
Generals Meade and Lee comanding the opposing forces. At the close 
of the first day the Union troops were entrenched on a range of hills 
south of the town. Gulp's Hill, the eastern spur, had been taken by the 
Confederates but had to be abandoned the following day. The turning 
point of the battle, and of the war, came with the repulse of Pickett's 
brigade as it charged up Cemetery Ridge in the face of a fire which 
cut down three-fourths of their number. Union victory. Confederate 
loss 36,000. Union 23,000 men. 

9. The presidential election of 1876 was claimed by both Democrats 
and Republicans. The Joint Electoral Commission was composed of five 
U. S. senators, five U. S. representatives, and five justices of the Supreme 

Oourt, appointed to settle the dispute. By their decision, Rutherford B. 
Hayes became president. 



24 

10. Important events 1891-'y5 — The settlement of differences between 
the United States and Italy, the Columbian Exposition at Chicago, the 
death of the poet Whittier and of James G. Blaine, the statesman; the 
strike of the Pullman employees, and the establishment of "Greater New 
York." 



June '96. 

1. For Americus Vespucius, who made several voyages to the New 
World, and wrote interesting accounts of his travels. 

2. Virginia was settled in 1607 at Jamestown by Englismen in search 
of wealth and adventure. 

3. See 2, Sept. '94. Second Grade. 

4. (a) See 5(b), Sept. '94. Second Grade. 

(b) The Venezuelan boundary dispute between that country and Great 
Britain in which the U. S. interfered, citing the "Monroe Doctrine as 
authority for so doing. 

5. 1492 — Discovery of America by Columbus; 1607 — Jamestown set- 
tled; 1620 — Landing of Pilgrims at Plymouth; 1754 — French and Indian 
War began; 1775 — Battles of Lexington and Concord; 1787 — Constitution 
adopted; 1812 — Declaration of War with Great Britain; 1845 — Admission 
of Texas and Florida; war with Mexico declared; 1861 — Opening of Civil 
War; 1863 — Emancipation Proclamation, Battle of Gettysburg and fall 
of Vicksburg. 

6. Saratoga — American victory 1777, causing surrender of Burgoyne 
and six thousand troops. 

Yorktown — Surrender of Cornwallis to Washington. 
Gettysburg — Greatest battle of Civil War. Union victory. 
Richmond — Capital of Confederacy and the vicinity of last battles of 
the War. 

Chicago — Terrific conflagration 1871. World's Fair, 1893. 

7. See 9, Sept. '94. Second Grade. 

8. Hayes — Invention of electric light; Garfield — His assassination; 
Arthur — Standard time adopted; Cleveland — Charleston earthquake; Har- 
rison — Passage of McKinley Tariff Bill. 

.9. Thomas Jefferson — Declaration of Independence, Embargo Act, 
Louisiana Purchase; Alexander Hamilton — Successful financial policy; 
Daniel Webster — Nullification tariff; Compromise Bill; Andrew Jackson 
— Nullification; Seminole War; United States Bank; Grover Cleveland — 
Venezuela boundary dispute; Civil Service Reform. 

10. See 4, May '95. First Grade. 



Sept. 1896. 

1. See First Grade, 1, Sept. '94. , 

2. See First Grade, 2, Sept. '94. 

3. (a) Revolutionary War — Cause, "Taxation without representation"; 
result, Independence of America. 

(b) War of 1812-14 — ^Cause, impressment of American seamen by 
Great Britain; result, our prestige as a nation was established abroad 
and England has never since attempted to interfere with our commerce. 

(c) Mexican War — Cause, annexation of Texas; result, the settlement 
of the boundary between Texas and Mexico and the cession to the United 
State of California, Nevada and Utah, nearly all of Arizona, New Mexico, 
Colorado and Wyoming. 

(d) Civil War — Cause, secession of Southern States; "State rights"; 
slavery question; result, the preservation of the Union and emancipation 
of the slaves. 

4. Orators — Lincoln. 



Generals — Washington, Jackson, Wm. H. Harrison, Taylor, Pierce, 
Grant, Garlield and Ben. Harrison. 

5. Jackson — Orphan of Irish parentage, soldier in continental army 
at thirteen, worked at saddler's trade and taught school. 

Fillmore — Without opportunities for education, at fourteen was ap- 
prenticed to a fuller, spending spare moments in study, afterward clerk 
in a law office until admitted to the bar. 

Lincoln — Grew up as a farmer boy, without educational advantages. 

Johnson — Was never at school a day in his life — at ten, apprenticed to 
a tailor. 

Garfield — the son of a widow, his helping to support the family pre- 
vented his attending school; later he was janitor in Hiram College 
that he might become a student there. 

6. Washington, 1789-'97, Federalist; John Adams, 1797-1801, Federal- 
ist; Thos. Jefferson, lS01-'09, Republican; James Madison, 1809-'17, Re- 
publican; James Monroe, lS17-'25, Republican; John Q. Adams, 1825-'29, 
Republican; Andrew Jackson, 1829-'37, Democrat; Martin VanBuren, 
1837-'41, Democrat; Wm. Henry Harrison, 1841-'41, Whig; John Tyler, 
1841-'45, Whig; James K. Polk, 1845-'49, Democrat; Zachary Taylor, 1849- 
'50, Whig; Millard Fillmore, 1850-'53, Whig; Franklin Pierce, 1853-'57, 
Democrat; James Buchanan, 1857-'61, Democrat; Abraham Lincoln, 1861- 
'65, Republican; Andrew Johnson, 1865-'69, Republican; Ulysses S. Grant, 
1869-'77, Republican; Rutherford B. Hayes, 1877-1881, Republican; James 
A. Garfield, 1881, Republican; Chester A. Arthur, 18Sl-'85. Republican; 
Grover Cleveland, 1885-'89, Democrat; Benjamin Harrison, 1889-'93, Re- 
publican; Grover Cleveland, 1893-'97, Democrat; William McKinley, 1897- 
'01, Republican; Theodore Roosevelt, 1901-' — , Republican. 

7. Five. (1903). 

8. William D. Mosely. (b) Andrew Jackson. 

9. See First Grade, 1, May '95. 

10. Free coinage of silver on a basis of 16 to 1. 



June 1897. 

1. The Northmen. Their claim is not a good one, because their ex- 
plorations, long forgotten, failed to benefit mankind. 

2. Indians were divided into tribes, each tribe having its own chief 
or "sachem" who was almost invariably a renowned warrior. Their 
dwellings were tent-like in structure, made by fastening saplings to- 
gether and covering the same with the skins of animals. They had few 
utensils, these being made of stone or copper. For clothing, they wore 
the skins of wild beasts and shoes or "moccasins" of buckskin, with shell 
beads for ornaments. Their food consisted chiefly of wild game and fish, 
Indian corn and beans. 

3. See 2(b), Sept. '98. First Grade. 

4. Author, Thomas Jeferson; adopted July 4, 1776, by the Continen- 
tal Congress in session at Philadelphia. 

5. Virginia — Financial gain. 

Maryland — The founding of an asylum for persecuted Catholics. 

Pennsylvania — The founding of an asylum for persecuted Quakers. 

Rhode Island — The securing of civil and religious liberty to people of 
all denominations. 

Georgia — The establishment of a refuge for the poor and persecuted, 
especially for honest but unfortunate men, imprisoned for debt. 

6. Andre — English officer sent to negotiate with Arnold for West 
Point; he was captured by Americans and hanged as a spy. 

For others, see 7, June '98. Second Grade. 

7. See First Grade 1, May, '95. 

8. In New England, farmers and their sons did their own work; in 



26 

the South it was done by negro slaves, while the owner, a man of wealth 
and influence, lived a life of ease. Roads were few, rivers had to be 
forded, traveling done chiefly on horseback or in heavy coaches. Mail 
was carried in passenger coaches. Material for clothing was made 
largely at home. Candles were used for lighting. Gentlemen wore 
cocked hats, their hair in a cue, knee breeches and shoes with heavy 
buckles. Ladies wore high-heeled shoes and lofty headdresses, and their 
dresses of rich brocade, were fashioned to wear over large hoops. The 
common people wore homespun. 

10. The enactment of the New York legislature in 1897, whereby New 
York, Brooklyn and adjacent towns were all united under one municipal 
government, raising New York to the second in rank, in area and popu- 
lation, among the cities of the world. 



Sept. '1897. 

1. Louisiana — purchased from France. 

Ohio — became undisputed English territory after French and Indian 
War, and passed to the United States after War for Independence. 
Florida — purchased from Spain. 
California — by conquest, from Mexico. 
Alaska — purchased from Russia. 

2. (a) In 1619, by the Dutch. 

(b) In 1808, by the Federal Constitution; q. v., Art I, Sec. 9. 

3. In 1800 an equal number of electoral votes were cast for Thomas 
Jefferson and Aaron Burr respectively; in 1824, of four candidates for 

president, no one received a majority; in 1876, double returns were sent 
in by several of the Southern States, the Democratic electors claiming 
that they had been elected fairly, the Republicans, that voters had been 
prevented from voting. In the first two instances, Jefferson and J. Q. 
Adams respectively were elected by Congress; in the last-mentioned, tie 
electors of both parties submitted their votes to an "Electoral Commis- 
sion" consisting of five U. S. senators, five representatives and five judges 
of the Supreme Court, which decided in favor of the Republican candi- 
date, Rutherford B. Hayes. 

4. (a) New England bitterly opposed the war of 1812-14, and in De- 
cember, 1814, a convention was called at Hartford to protest against it. 
The meeting was conducted secretly, no record was kept, but it was 
found out that they advised secession. Peace was declared before their 
committee, with a statement of their objections, could reach Washington. 

(b) See 4 (b), June, '97. First Grade. 

5. New England view, that Constitution was established by the peo- 
ple of tJie United States as a tvhole, and this, the Constitution, establishes 
a national government. Southern view : That the Constitution is a com- 
pact between the States. 

6. (a) See 4 (b), Oct., '94; (b) Reciprocity, a treaty concluded be- 
tween two nations conferring equal privileges as regards customs or 
charges on imports, (c) See 10 (cK First Grade, June. '96. (d) See 4 
(e), Oct., '94. (e) See 4 (c), Oct., '94. 

7. See Second Grade, 9, Sept., '94. 

8. Samuel Adams — American Independence. 

Wendell Phillips — Abolition of slavery; and other reforms. 
Daniel Webster — Federalism, union and tariff question. 
John C. Calhoun — State rights and opposition to the tariff. 
Benj. H. Hill — State rights in the Union. 

9. Nebraska (1S67) ; North and South Dakota, Montana, and Wash- 
ington (1889); Idaho and Wyoming (1890); Utah (1896). 

10. President McKinley, upon coming into ofiice, immediately called 



27 

an extra session of Congress to consider new tariff measures, 
(b) Dingley Tariff Bill. 



June, 1898. 

1. (a) On the return of Captain John Smith to England (1609), the 
settlers ceased to provide for themselves and the supplies left by him 
were soon exhausted. Famine ensued. Of five hundred souls but sixty 
survived the winter of 1609-10. The settlement was about to be aban- 
doned when ships and supplies arrived from England, thus putting an 
end to the "Starving Time." 

(e) Lord Delaware, the new governor, took charge of the colony and 
conditions improved. Tobacco raising became the chief industry, was 
used as currency. Slavery was introduced in 1619, thus facilitating its 
production. 

2. In 1619, a ship-load of young women were sent from England, and 
each settler so inclined paid one hundred pounds of tobacco for her 
passage and chose one of the number for his wife. 

3. "Bond servants," in some places called "redemptioners," were poor 
children sent over to the colonies, and bound to serve their masters un- 
til they were of age, or adults bound for a term of years. During their 
bondage they could be bought and sold like slaves. This way of procur- 
ing laborers, became very common. 

There were "slaves" in all the colonies, but in New England negroes 
were mostly kept for house-servants, by far the larger number being taken 
to the colonies which raised tobacco, rice and Indigo, where their labor 
could be more profitably employed. 

(b) To no one man or set of men can the credit be given. They were 
guaranteed from interference by the United States government by the 
first amendment to the Constitution, and had been demanded by practi- 
cally all of the States. 

4. Born in Hanover County, Va., May 19, 1736, he practiced law; gained 
a reputation as an orator; became a member of the Virginia House of 
Burgesses, introducing the resolution opposing the Stamp Act; was del- 
egate to Continental Congress in 1774, and first governor of the State of 
Tirginia. 

5. In most of the New England colonies, the congregational form; 
in the South, the regular church of England form was transplanted. The 
Dutch form of church was for a while maintained in what later became 
the New York colony. 

6. (a) At the beginning of the War of 1812, the United States had ttnt 
a small navy. During the summer of 1813, Commodore Perry fitted out 
a fleet on Lake Erie, where, in September, he won an immortal victory. 

(b) The British, under General Ross, on march to Washington, were 
■opposed at Bladensburg Bridge by six hundred sailors from Barney's 
fleet, who were forced to surrender. Resulted in the taking and burn- 
ing of Washington. 

7. Arnold. See 6 (b), Sept., '95. 

Ethan Allen — Revolutionary hero who captured Ticonderoga (1775), 
^iemanding its surrender in the name of the "Great Jehovah," and the 
Continental Congress." 

Roger Williams — Founder of Providence, Rhode Island. 

Lafayette — French nobleman who gave material aid to America in the 
war for independence. 

Daniel Boone — Celebrated pioneer in the settlement of Kentucky. 

Alexander Hamilton — See 3, June, 1902. First Grade. 

Washington Irving — "Father of American literature," author of the 
■"Sketch Book." - 

Alex. H. Stephens — Vice-president of the Confederacy. 



28 

Admiral Dewey — Won the "Battle of Manilla," May, 1898. 

8. Most important campaigns and battles from Bull Run to Gettys- 
burg. 

Campaign of General Sterling Price in Missouri, Confederate Victory. 
(1861). 

Grant's operations in the West (1862-3), resulting in the fall of Vicks- 
burg and the control of the Mississippi by Union forces. 

In the east (1862-3), Jackson's valley campaign (Virginia), Confeder- 
ate victory; McClellan's peninsular campaign, Confederate victory; Lee's 
invasion of Maryland, terminating in the drawn battle of Antietam; 
Battle of Fredericksburg, Confederate victory; Chancellorsville, Confed- 
erate victory, and Lee's invasion of Pennsylvania, ending in the Battle 
of Gettysburg. ' 

On the coast, the Monitor had withstood the Merrimac ('62), the block- 
ade of Southern ports had been made more effective, and Admiral Farra- 
gut had taken New Orleans. 

9. See Second Grade, 10, June, '97. 

10. Spanish misrule in Cuba and the blowing up of the United States 
battleship Maine in Havana Harbor, Feb. 15, 1898. 



Sept. '98. 

1. (a) Spain, England, France, Holland, Norway, 
(b) Spain. 

2. Virginia — Church of England. 
Massachusetts— Puritans. 
Connecticut — Puritans. 

Rhode Island — Dissenting Puritans from Massachusetts. 

Maryland — Roman Catholics. 

Delaware — Swedish Protestants and others. 

Pennsylvania — Quakers. 

New Jersey — Quakers and Presbyterians. 

New York — Dutch Protestants. 

New Hampshire — ^Puritans. i 

North Carolina — Church of England. 

South Carolina — Church of England and French Huguenots. 

Georgia — Church of England and Lutherans. 

3. (a) Governor Berkeley would take no steps to protect the border 
settlements of Virginia from the Indians; accordingly the colonists 
armed themselves and chose Nathaniel Bacon as their leader. They 
were pronounced rebels by the governor, who attempted without success 
to arrest Bacon. Latter continued his Indian warfare and was proclaimed 
a traitor. Civil War reigned and Jamestown was accidentally burned. 
The death of the leaders brought the rebellion to an abrupt end. 

(b) In 1619 a Dutch trading vessel brought to Virginia a cargo of 
African negi^oes, who were sold to the planters as slaves. 

(c) See 179.3, Eli Whitney, a native of Massachusetts and a tutor in 
the family of Nathaniel Green, near Savannah, invented the cotton gin. 

(d) See Second Grade 5 (b), Sept.. '94. 

(e) See "Carpet-baggers," First Grade. 4, June, '97. 

4. (a) See 4 (b), Sept., '94. First Grade, 
(b) See (8), May, '95, Second Grade. 

5. Blue laios, certain laws said to have been adopted in the early gov- 
ernment of the New Haven colony and so called on account of their strin- 
gency. 

Minute-men — were bands of militia organized just prior to the Revolu- 
tion, and ready for service at a "minute's notice." 
Loco-focos. — See First Grade, 4, June, '97. i; 

Henry letters — purported to give evidence of a plot on the part of Eng- 



29 

land, to induce New England States to withdraw from the United States 
and join themselves to Canada. President Madison paid Henry $50,000 
for them, but they proved to be fraudulent. 

Aholitionists — the term by which were known those who demanded the 
abolition of slavery in the South. 

6. The Acadians were French settlers from Normandy who retained 
the customs and traditions of Prance although the territory belonged to 
England. On the breakout of the French and Indian War between those 
countries England ordered them transported, on the plea that they would 
give aid to the enemy. Without warning their homes were burned and 
they were hurried on board ships which scattered them throughout the 
colonies. 

(b) "Evangeline", by Longfellow, gives the pathetic story of their 
wanderings. 

7^ English impressment of American seamen. Orders in council, 
Milan Decree, Embargo Act. 

8. (a) Andrew Jackson was a man of indomitable will and determi- 
nation; of irascible temper and strong prejudices. He became famous 
as the "Hero of New Orleans," in 1815, and in the Creek and Seminole 
war he rendered valuable service to his country- He vetoed, as presi- 
dent, the bill to recharter the National Bank. His political opponents 
were Clay, Webster and Calhoun, though the latter was of his own party. 
On the passage of the Nullification Ordinance, with his characteristic 
promptness, he despatched an armed vessel to enforce the collection of 
duties at the ports of South Carolina. 

9. See 6, Sept., '96. Second Grade. 

10. Cervera — Spanish Admiral whose fleet was captured by American 
naval force in Santiago Harbor. 

Blanco — Captain-general of Cuba during Cuban war with Spain for in- 
dependence, 

Hohson — American naval officer who sank the "Merrimac" in Santiago 
Harbor. 

Shafter — American general in command at battle of Santiago. 

Schley — American Admiral in command of naval forces at Santiago. 



June, 1899. 

1. See 10, May, '95. First Grade. 

2. Balboa with a company of Spaniards, crossing the Isthmus of Da- 
rien, first saw the Pacific Ocean from the top of mountains, from whence, 
descending to the shore, he rushed into the water with flag and sword 
and claimed all countries touched by the ocean for Spain. 

3. Witches were persons supposed to be endowed by Satan with the 
power of harming others, by causing sickness or other misfortune. Ner- 
vous disorders, in particular were attributed to these supposed "witches" 
who were punished severely and even executed. , 

This delusion reached its height in Salem, Mass., in 1692, twenty inno- 
cent persons being hanged in one month. 

4. The Louisiana purchase. See 1 (a). May, '95; First Grade and 7, 
Sept. '95. 

5. Since the trial trip of Fulton's first steamboat, the "Clermont," in 
1807, navigation has been revolutionized in every part of the world. The 
steamboats on the Great Lakes and our western rivers were responsible 
for the unprecedented stream of immigration which in twenty years, gave 
to the States west of the Alleghanies a population of four millions and 
led to the marvelous development of the Middle West. In 1819 commerce 
received a mighty impetus through the introduction of steam on seago- 
ing vessels, thus shortening to less than a week, the two or three 
month's trip from Europe to America. 



30 

G. The Battle of Olustee was fought Feb. 20, 1S64, and was the re- 
sult of an attempted invasion of the State by the Union forces under 
General Seymour, who had begun a march along the line of railway 
from Jacksonville to Tallapoosa. At Olustee, he was opposed by a Con- 
federate force under Generals Finegan and Colquitt, and after a sharp, 
battle lasting several hours was forced to retreat to Jacksonville. This 
was the last expedition undertaken against Florida, during the war. 

7. The hard life of the early settlers gave little time for education. 
Schools were few and generally poor; the discipline in them was severe 
and sometimes brutal. At the close of the Revolution there were schools 
in most of the leading towns and cities. Colleges established before 
that time were Harvard, William and Mary, Yale and Princeton, alsa 
one in New York and another in Philadelphia. Nowhere has the ad- 
vancement of the age been so much felt as in the schoolroom and neither 
time nor money is spared in providing the best text-books, school appa- 
ratus and all appliances helpful in the training of the young, while by 
expenditure of large sums of money for the support of common school 
education has been placed within the reach of all. 

8. In 1766; while Florida was under British control Dr. Andrew Turn- 
bull, at an expenditure of $67,000, planted a colony of Greeks, Italians 
and Minorcans at Mosquito Inlet. The settlement was named New Smyr- 
na and was a success. Indigo and sugar cane were the chief articles 
cultivated. On account of alleged cruel treatment, the colonists after- 
ward removed to St. Augustine. 

9. Fearing the seizure of Florida by the British as a base of opera- 
tions against the United States in the war of 1812, President Madison, 
appointed commissioners from Georgia to negotiate the cession of Flori- 
da by Spain. On a failure to secure the provinces, Congress secretly 
proposed that forcible possession be taken, should a foreign power show 
intention of seizing them. The plan became known and a force of Geor- 
gia frontiersmen, uniting with the border settlers on the Florida side of 
the St. Mary's River formed an independent "Republic of Florida," 
which survived several years but on account of its inability to enforce 
law and order, in 1816, the territory of the "republic'' was again 
brought under Spanish control. 

(b) Francis was a leader in the Creek "War, 1812-13, was captured by 
General Jackson, by means of a decoy vessel flying the British flag, and 
hanged. His daughter, Mollie, barely escaped capture at the same time 
She afterward married a white man, Duncan McRimmon, whose life she 
had once saved, in a manner similar to the story of Pocahontas in Vir- 
ginia. 

10. (a) ThSt.t "West Florida be annexed to Alabama. 

(b) Florida's first provisional governor was General Andrew Jackson. 
The ""Vidal" affair caused some ill-feeling on account of Jackson's arbi- 
trary method of procedure. 

Wm. P. Duval was the first territorial governor. The selection of Tal- 
lahassee as the State capital; the division of the territory into four coun- 
ties — Escambia, Jackson, Duval and St. Johns; and the Seminole "War 
occurred during his term of office. 



Sept. '99. 

1. (a, b) See 3, Sept. '96. Second Grade, also 10, June '98, Second 
Grade. 

(c) Battles of the Revolution — Bunker Hill, Saratoga and Yorktown; 
War of 1812-14 — Perry's Victory on Lake Erie; Battle of the Thames and 
New Orleans; Mexican War — Buena Vista, Monterey and Vera Cruz; 
Civil War — Bull Run, Gettysburg and Antietam; Spanish-American War 



31 

— Manila, Santiago, and the sinking of Cervera's fleet outside Santiago 
Harbor. 

(d) Revolution — American commanders: Washington and Schuyler; 
War of 1812 — American: Commodore Perry and Gen. Jackson; British 
Commodore Barclay and Gen. Prevost; Mexican War — Americans; Gen- 
erals Taylor and Scott; Mexican: Generals Ampudia and Santa Anna; 
Civil War; Federal: General Grant and Sheridan; Confederate: Gen- 
erals Lee and Jackson ; Spanish-American War — American : General Shat- 
ter and Admiral Dewey; Spanish, Admiral Cervera and General Toral. 

2. (7) Sept. '94, First Grade. 

3. (1) May '95. First Grade. 

4. Treaty of Paris, by which England recognized the independence of 
the thirteen colonies and gave America the right to fish off the banks of 
Newfoundland; Treaty of Peace with France in 1800; Treaty of Ghent 
following war of 1812-14, declaring peace with England; Treaty of Wash- 
ington, between England and the United States, providing that all causes 
of difference between the two countries be settled by arbitration; Treaty 
toith Mexico, following the Mexican War, which gave us California, Utah, 
Arizona and part of New Mexico and Colorado. 

5. Philip Livingston.— Signer of Declaration of Independence. 
Horace Greely. — Founder of New York Tribune; candidate for the 

presidency on Liberal Republican ticket and defeated by Grant. 

Wm. H. Setvard — Secretary of State during Lincoln's administration. 

Marchand — French army officer who planted the French flag at Fasho- 
da, Africa, in 1898, barring the British passage to Uganda. He after- 
ward withdrew. 

Dreyfus — French army ofiicer, accused and unjustly convicted of treas- 
on and banished, but afterward pardoned by the president. 

Eruger — President of the Transvaal Republic recently conquered by 
Great Britain. 

Kitchener — British general who conquered the Soudan and took active 
part in the South African war. 

Aguinaldo — See 10 (c), Sept. '98, First Grade. 

Deioey — American naval oflacer who sank the Spanish fleet in Manila 
Bay, May 1, 1898. 

Torral — Spanish General who surrendered Santiago to the Americans 
July 17, 1898. 

6. Bell telephones. For others see 9, Sept. '94, Second Grade. 

7. Spain, England, Spain, United States. 

8. East Florida was the Peninsular, bounded on the west by the Gulf 
of Mexico and the Apalachicola River, and on the north by a line run- 
ning from the junction of the Flint and Chattahoochee Rivers to the 
source of the St. Mary's and down this to the ocean. 

West Florida extended from Lake Pontchartrain and the Mississippi 
River as far north as the thirty-first parallel, which formed the northern 
boundary to the Chattahoochee River, the eastern boundary. 
dary. 

(b) In 1763, when Florida became British territory. 

(c) In 1822, upon its organization as a territory of the United States. 

9. Principal engagements: Murder of Gen. Thompson; Massacre of 
Major Dade's command; Battles in Big Wahoo swamp. Ft. Mellon, Okee- 
chobee and attack on Col. Harney on the Caloosahatchie. 

Officers in command : Generals Clinch, Call, Gaines, Scott, Jesup, Her- 
nandez, Eustis, Taylor, Armistead and Worth. 

Treaties : In 1812, concluded at Payne's Landing, the Indian agreement 
to send certain chiefs to examine the lands in the West appropriated for 
their use by the United States. 



32 

1S3G — Agreement of the chiefs to make peace if allowed to occupy the 
land south of the Withlacoochee. 

1837 — Several chiefs agreed to prepare to go "West at once, the United 
States promising to buy their fai-ms and cattle and to allow the negroes 
to go with them. 

1839 — Indians agreed to stay below Peace Creek and Lake Okeechobee, 
and no white man was to enter territory assigned them. 

10. David S. Walker, constitutional convention; Harrison Reed, inau- 
guration of public schools; O. B. Hart, Florida allowed two representa- 
tives in Congress; Marcellus L. Stearns, disagreement over the election 
of presidential electors in '7(3; Geo. F. Drew, reduction of rate of taxa- 
tion by two and a half mills; Wm. D. Bloxham, sale of huge tract of 
public land to Philadelphia capitalists; Edward A. Perry, yellow fever 
scourge; Francis P. Fleming, discovery of phosphate; Henry L. Mitchell, 
new school law enacted; Wm. D. Bloxham, fishery convention at Tampa; 
W. S. Jennings, Jacksonville fire. 



June 1900. 

1. First voyage, 1492, on which were discovered first San Salvador, 
then Cuba, Haiti and other islands; Second, in 1893, founded a colony 
at San Domingo, Haiti and explored other islands; third, landed at 
mouth of Orinoco River, South America in 1498, and fourth, touched at 
Isthmus of Darien, 1502. 

2. All were patriot leaders in opposing British injustice to the colo- 
nists : Adams, Hancock and Franklin were signers of the Declaration 
of Independence; Otis and Patrick Henry aroused the Americans by 
their oratory. 

3. See tj, Sept., '96, Second Grade. 

4. The International Exposition, at New York, 1853; Centennial Expo- 
sition in Philadelphia, 1876; International Cotton Exposition, New Or- 
leans. 1884; World's Columbian Exposition, Chicago, 1893; International 
and Cotton States Exposition, Atlanta, 1895; Pan-American Exposition, 
Buffalo, 1901. 

5. Charles C. Pinckney — American commissioner to France during 
trouble in 1800; "millions for defense but not one cent for tribute" was 
his famous declaration. 

Sergeant Jasper rescued the flag, shot from its staff, during the siege 
of Fort Moultrie by the British in 1776. 

George Peabody, American philanthropist, who endowed a free library 
and institute of Art and Science at Baltimore and left large sums for 
educational purposes. 

Blaine, statesman, many years member of Congress and Secretary of 
State under Benjamin Harrison. 

Schley, American admiral in Spanish-American War. 

Clarke, Senator from Montana, unseated because convicted of bribery. 

Roberts, Mormon Congressman elected from Utah, but not allowed to 
take his seat because convicted of polygamy. 

Taliaferro, United States Senator from Florida. 

6. See Preface. 

7. Ponce cle Leon was a soldier, broken in health and fortune, who 
sought a fabled fountain of perpetual youth. He landed in Florida in 
1513, and prosecuted his fruitless search among her springs and groves. 

Narvaez, in 1528, explored Florida in search of gold, but found only 
hostile Indians and starvation. They finally constructed rude boats and 
put to sea, but only four survivors reached Mexico to tell of their priva- 
tions. 

8. Gen. Jackson, having been sent to stop the incursions of the Sem- 
inoles into Georgia, drove them out. destroyed their chief village, and 



33 

executed two men — Arbuthnot and Ambristee, who had aided the In- 
dians and were British subjects. 

9. See 4, May, '95, First Grade. First military governor, General An- 
drew Jackson. 

10. For educational progress see 10, Sept., '99 (First Grade). For 
development of resources see 9, June, 1900 (First Grade). Large depos- 
its of lime and kaolin are also being profitably mined; forests of yellow 
pine furnish lumber and turpentine; the palmetto is utilized through the 
fibre it furnishes; tropical fruits are cultivated and early vegetables are 
raised for northern markets — these are a few of the ways in which the 
State's resources are being developed and her industrial interests ad- 
vanced. 



Sept. 1900. 

1. (a) From the name given in one of her charters, "His Majesty's 
Ancient Colony and Dominion of Virginia," and because v/hen banished 
from England, Charles II was invited to reign as king in Virginia. 

(b) The cavaliers possessed large landed estates, owned many slaves, 
spent much time in, hunting and fishing, and in dispensing kindly hospi- 
tality to visitors. Illustrious descendants — Washington and Lee. 

2. (a) The Desire, launched at Marblehead, Mass. 

(b) Attendance at church every Sunday was obligatory upon all and 
absence without a good excuse was punishable. Quakers found in Mas- 
sachusetts were subject to banishment and loss of an ear for first offense; 
for second, loss of the other ear, and for third, the tongue was bored 
through with a red-hot iron. Four were hanged. 

3. (a) The relief of men, imprisoned for debt. 

(b) A treaty of peace and annual presents of guns, ammunition and 
other articles established friendly relations. 

(c) The Salzburgers were Lutherans persecuted in their native valley 
in the Austrian Alps, who sought homes in Georgia, locating on the Sa- 
vannah River at "Ebenezer." 

(d) The importation of slaves was forbidden, as that would encour- 
age indolence on the part of white settlers. 

(e) In 1785 they came to Georgia — Chas. Wesley, as private Secretary 
to Mr. Oglethorpe, and his brother, John, as a missionary to preach to 
the Indians and colonists. 

4. The paper money issued by the Continental Congress, so far ex- 
ceeded the country's ability to redeem it, that it continued to decrease 
in value, until two hundred dollars in bills equaled only one in coin. 
The States also issued paper money which lost its value in the same 
way. After the Revolution, owing to the scarcity of money, produce was 
bartered for necessary articles. 

Taxes were levied by the States to pay running expenses, but fre- 
quently the people were too poor to pay them. In Massachusetts a band 
of men led by Daniel Shays, having refused to pay them, threatened to 
destroy the State government unless paper money was issued to relieve 
them. 

5. See 5, June, '99. First Grade. 

6. See 7, Sept. '94, First Grade. 

Tariff — Democratic party against, Republican, for a high protective 
tariff — a leading issue since 1828. 

United States Bank — A prominent issue in 1868 ; Whigs for; Democrats 
against. 

Annexation of Texas — Supported by Democrats, opposed by Whigs; was 
the issue of campaign of '44. 

Slavery Question, or some phase of it, was a constant bone of conten- 
tion until 18(50; Democratic party favoring its extension in the territo- 



34 

ries, the Whigs and later the Republicans contending for its restriction 
within existing bounds. 

Money question was a prominent issue in 1896 and again in 1900. Free 
and unlimited coinage of silver and gold on a basis of sixteen to one," 
being the Democratic platform, and "sound money" the Republican plat- 
form. 

7. Discovered by Ponce de Leon in 1513, explored by Narvaez in 1528, 
and by DeSoto in 1539; colonized by French protestants 1564 who were 
exterminated by the Spaniards the following year; Menendez, the same 
year founded St. Augustine, the first permanent settlement in the United 
States; Florida became English territory in 1763 and came again under 
Spanish rule 1783 : ceded to United States in 1821. 

8. See 9 (b), June '99, Second Grade. 

9. Commissioners appointed by legislative council in 1823, selected 
for the capital, the Seminole town, Tallahassee. 

First Legislative Council — Pensacola, 1822; Second — St. Augustine, 
1823; Third— Tallahassee, 1824. 

Counties established in 1H22— Escambia, between the Perdido and Apa- 
lachicola Rivers; Jackson, between the latter and the Suwanee River; 
Duval, from the Suwanee to the Ocean and north of a line from the 
mouth of this river to Jacksonville, and St. John, end of the peninsular 
.south of this line. 

(b) 1844, by United States, cost eighty-flve thousand dollars. 

<c^ Decision in favor of Tallahassee for the capital in 1854 and again 
in 1900. 

10. The office of lieutenant governor was done away with and the 
office of Superintendent of Education and other administrative offices be- 
came elective. 



June 1901. 

1. (a) See 1 (a) Sept. '95. 

(h) English. Because of the compactness of their agricultural settle- 
ments and prolific increase. 

2. (a) Henry Clay, (b) (1) That California should be admitted as a 
free State; (2) that New Mexico and Utah should be organized into ter- 
ritories and left to decide the uestion of slavery for themselves; (3) that 
Texas should be paid ten million dollars for her claim on New Mexico, 
and a boundary be made; (4) that the slave trade should be abolished 
in the District of Columbia; and (5) that runaway slaves should be 
arrested in the free States and returned to their masters. 

(c) It repealed the Missouri Compromise and temporarily postponed 
the inevitable conflict between North and South. 

3. Credit Mobilier — Company formed to complete the Union Pacific 
R. R. begun by Congress. 

Electoral Com,mission — See 9, May, '95; Second Grade. 

Kentucky and Virginia Revolutions — See 4 (a), Sept., '97, First Grade. 

Orders in Council — Passed by England in 1806; blockaded all ports not 
open to British vessels and forbade all vessels to trade with France or 
ier allies. 

Missouri Compromise, provided that Missouri should be admitted as a 
slave State, but that all other States north of latitude 36 deg. 30 min, 
and west of the Mississippi should be free States. 

4. Bull Run Campaign ('61) — Federal commander, McDowell; Con- 
federate, Beauregard and E. Kirby Smith; Confederate victory; object of 
the Federals, to reach Richmond and end the war. 

Peninsular Campaign ('62) — Federal leader, McClellan; Confederate, 
Lee and Jackson; object of Union forces to reach Richmond; result — at- 
tempt completely foiled. 



35 

Jackson's Valley Cavipaign ('62)— Federal leaders, Generals Sheilds, 
Banks, Fremont and Milroy; Confederate, "Stonewall" Jackson; object 
of Confederates — to prevent McDowell from reinforcing McClellan; re- 
sult — ^Confederate victory. 

Grant's Gampaig?i around Richmond ('64) — Federal commnader, Grant; 
Confederate, Lee; object — capture of Richmond; result — failure. 

Sheridan's Valley Campaign {'CA) — Federal leaders, Hunter and Sher- 
idan; Confederate, Early and Gordon; object — to cut off Lee's source of 
supplies; result — success. 

Final Campaign around Richmond ('65) — Federal commanders. Grant 
and Sheridan; Confederate, Lee; object — capture of Richmond; result — 
surrender of Lee. 

5. The first National Bank at Philadelphia was chartered in 1789 
for twenty-five years, at the suggestion of Alexander Hamilton. The 
second, in 1816, for twenty years, with branches in twenty-five States. 
President Jackson vetoed the bill to re-charter it. A bill to re-establish 
the United States Bank was passed by Congress in Tyler's administra- 
tion, but was vetoed by the president. 

6. (a) John Tyler; (b) Wm. D. Moseley, Thomas Brown, James E. 
Broome; (c) Henry L. Mitchell, William D. Bloxham and W. S. Jennings. 

7. They were originally Creeks who took possession of the lands 
north of the St. Johns. The name Seminole means separatists or runa- 
ways. 

8. (a) 1824. (b) Old Town, (c) St. Augustine, Pensacola, Palatka, 
Jacksonville, Euchee Anna. 

9. See 8 and 9, June '99, First Grade, and 8, Sept. '99, First Grade. 

10. (a) The harboring by Seminoles of runaway slaves from Georgia 
and Alabama, and the attempt of the United States government to re- 
move the Indians from Florida to the West. 

(b) Major Dade's force of one hundred and thirty-nine men en route 
to Fort King from Tampa betrayed by their negro guide, was attacked 
by the Indians in ambush and all but two were killed. Dec. 28, 1835. 



Sept. 1901. 

1. Born in Virginia, he had learned surveying, served as officer of 
Virginia militia, had been sent by the Governor to the French fort, Le- 

Bouef, on a mission of importance and delicacy. With the rank of Colo- 
nel, he had been sent back to engage the French and built Fort Neces- 
sity; had served as aide-de-camp on Braddock's staff, saving his forces 
from total annihilation after the Fort Duquesne disaster. 

2. (a) Hamilton proposed that the United States assume the debts 
contracted by the separate States during the War for Independence. His 
plan was to fund the entire war debt of about $80,000,000 by issuing in- 
terest-bearing bonds and to set aside each year a sum for the payment 
of the principal. 

(b) Yes. 

(c) Yes. See 3, June, 1902. First Grade. 

8. (a, c) See 3, Sept. '96, Second Grade. Invasion of Canada (1812) 
and loss of Detroit; operations resulting in the recovery of Detroit and 
Michigan Territory (1813); invasion of Canada (1813); northern cam- 
paign (1814) along Niagara frontier; Southern campaign (1814), and 
burning of Washington; Battle of New Orleans (1814). 

4. (a) William Henry Harrison. (b) From his victory over the 
Indians at Tippecanoe, (c) It terminated with his death, one month 
after his inauguration. 

5. (a) 1807 by Robert Fulton, (b) The Savannah. <c) Savannah. 

6. (a) The practice of awarding public offices to the political friends 



36 

of the president and those in power. luauguarated by President Jack- 
son, (b) The Civil Service Reform Bill. 

7. (a) In 1816 by L. G. Hogan. (b) General Andrew Jackson. 

8. See 8 (b), Sept. '90, First Grade. 

9. (a) 1835-42. (b) See 10 (a), June, '01; Second Grade, 
(c) See 9, Sept. '99, Second Grade. 

10. (a) See 8, June, 1900, First Grade. 

(b) After his capture, he aided materially in persuading his band ta 
emigrate to the West and in putting an end to the war. 



November, 1901. 

1. See 1 (a), Sept. '95. 

2. See 3, Sept. 1901, Second Grade. 

3. See 7, May '95, Second Grade. 

4. See 8, June, '96, Second Grade. 

5. See 3, June, 1901, Second Grade. 

6. See 2, Jnue, 1900, Second Grade. 

7. See 8, Sept., '98, Second Grade. 

8. See 9, June, 1901, Second Grade. 

9. See 9, June, '99, Second Grade, 
10. See 10, June, 1900, Second Grade. 



June 1902. 

1. 

2. First, St. Augustine, Florida, by Spaniards in 1565; second, Santa 
Fe, New Mexico, by Spaniards in 1582; Jamestown by English in 1607. 

3. See 1, May, '95, First Grade. 

4. General Grant — Principal campaigns: one in the West (1862 and 
'63), beginning with capture of Fort Donelson and ending with the fall 
of Vicksburg, and that in Virginia terminating with the surrender of Lee 
at Appomattox. 

General Lee — Invasion of the north ('62) and again in '63, ending in 
Battle of Gettysburg and retreat into Virginia. For movements in Vir- 
ginia, also for campaigns of Sheridan and Jackson, see (4) June, '96, 
Second Grade. 

5. See 3 (b), Sept., '96, Second Grade. 

6. (a) See "Nullification," 4, June '97, First Grade — John C. Calhoun. 

(b) See 5 (b), June '97, First Grade — Grover Cleveland. 

(c) Gold Standard — The making of the gold dollar a measurement for 
all other kinds of money — ^William McKinley. 

(d) Protective Tariff — See 4 (a) October '94 — Henry Clay. 

(e) Abolition — The movement advocating the emancipation of all 
slaves — William Lloyd Garrison. 

7. Porto Rico; Philippine Islands. 

8. See 9, Sept. '99, Second Grade, and 10 (a), June 1901, Second 
Grade, 

9. Jacksonville — Began in 1816 by the removal of L. G. Hogan to the 
land belonging to his Spanish wife. Present name given 1822 in honor 
of General Jackson. 

Palatka — Founded 1821 as a trading post. 

Key West — Incorporated in 1829-30 and made a naval station, 

10. Florida was one of the three Southern States which sent in double 
returns, making it uncertain as to the candidate elected. The electoral 
commission gave the electors from the disputed states to the Republican 
candidate, Rutherford B. Hayes, who became president. 



37 

Sept. 1902. 

1. He sailed from Spain, 1519, around South America, through the 
strait that bears his name and across the ocean called by him "Pacific." 
His death occurred in the Philippine Islands but his men, continuing the 
voyage, westward, reached Spain in 1522, thus proving the rotundity of 
the earth. 

2. The explorations of Henry Hudson up the river which perpetuates 
iis name. 

3. Old Charleston settled in 1670, the people afterward removing 
to harbor of Charleston. Government, proprietary. Important events : 
trouble collecting quit rents, introduction and cultivation of rice and 
indigo, the settlement of French Huguenots and the Yemassee War. Be- 
came a royal province, 1729. 

4. (a) At the junction of the Allegheny and Monongahela Rivers. It 
commanded the Ohio valley. 

(b) Braddock's defeat in 1755 and later its capture by the English, who 
named it Fort Pitt. 

5. Following Lexington and Concord, re-enforcements had swelled the 
British army to twelve thousand and great numbers of militia had hur- 
ried to Boston to oppose them. North of the city was a range of hills 
which the American forces fortified by night. The attacking British 
were repulsed with heavy loss until ammunition gave out when they 
carried the breastworks. In effect Bunker Hill was an American vic- 
tory, firing the colonists with determination and zeal in the cause of 
liberty. 

6. In western Pennsylvania payment of the tax on spirits was re- 
fused and government inspectors mobbed. President Washington quelled 
the disturbance by calling out the militia. 

7. Sept. 10, 1813, Commodore Perry, against great odds, engaged the 
British fleet on Lake Erie, resulting in great American victory. 

8. See 9 (a), June, '99, Second Grade. 

9. (a) For founding of St. Augustine. 

(b) Territorial governor (1835-40, 1841-45), and builder of first rail- 
road in the state. 

(c) See 10, June, '99, First Grade. 

(d) See 8 (b), June, 1900, First Grade. 

10. See 8, June, '99, Second Grade. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 
First Grade. 

1. The training of memory and the imagination, the stimulation of 
patriotism, the creation of high ideals of character, and the better un- 
■derstanding of one's civic rights and duties. 

2. Discovery and Exploration, Colonial, Revolutionary, Development, 
Civil War, and Peace and Progress. 

3. Navigation Acts, Stamp Act, Mutiny Act, Boston Port Bill, Writs 
of Assistance, Tax imposed on Tea — in short, "taxation without repre- 
sentation." 

4. (a) Saratoga, October 7, 1777. American commander. Gates; Brit- 
ish, Burgoyne. British invasion from Canada was repulsed and Bur- 
goyne forced to surrender his force of six thousand men. 

(b) Yorktown. British forces under Lord Cornwallis were surrounded 
hy combined French and American armies under Washington and La- 
fayette, the Fench fleet, cutting off escape by sea, and after three weeks 
siege, surrendered October 17, 1781. 



38 

5. See 3 (b), Sept., '96,Second Grade. 

6. See 1, May, '95, First Grade. 

7. Two parties arose soon after declaration of peace — the Republicans 
or Democratic Republicans and Federalists — the former actuated by a 
dread of centralized power, in opposition to views of the latter in favor 
of a strong national government. Federalists ceased to exist after the 
election of J. Q. Adams; the Republicans became divided into the Dem- 
ocratic and National Republican parties. Opposition to Democratic party 
from time of Jackson was known as the Whig party and advocated in- 
ternal improvements and high protective tariff. Free Soil party arose 
with nomination of Martin Van Buren as bolting Democratic candidate 
against Cass in 1848. The Republican party sprang into existence in 
185G from remnants of the Whig and Free-soil parties. In 1884, the Pro- 
hibition party was organized, and in 1892 the People's party began its 
meteoric career. Its adherents demanded the "free and unlimited coin- 
age of silver" and government ownership of railroads, telegraphs and 
telephones. 

8. Lincoln declared that his principal object would be the preserva- 
tion of the Union, that he would continue to collect the public revenues 
at the ports of the seceded states, and that he would "hold, occupy and 
posses" all the United States property within those States. 

9. (a) During the colonial period each colony directed its own finances, 
Massachusetts taking the lead in paper money experiments and banking. 
During the Revolution great distress resulted from the fluctuating value 
of the paper currency issued by authority of Congress. Robt. Morris was 
appointed Superintendent of Finance, 1781. Present system of decimal 
currency adopted in 1785. Alexander Hamilton, Secretary of Treasury 
during Washington's administration, helped to restore our national 
credit by the formulation of a plan for gradually reducing the public 
debt. He also advocated the establishment of a national bank. The bill 
to re-charter the United States Bank was vetoed by President Jackson^ 
who had the public funds placed in local banks. Wild speculation end- 
ing in widespread business failures and the "panic of '37" followed. 
Treasury notes were issued to relieve the distress of the people and the 
sub-treasury bill passed. "Wild cat" banks (the term originating in 
Michigan in 1838, from a bank of this character with the figure of a 
wild cat on its notes), unscrupulously operated under loose laws, issued 
worthless paper money. Followering the Civil War, another period of de- 
pression culminated in the "panic of '73." Silver was demonetized same 
year. Again in 1893 the country suffered serious financial depression and 
Congress repealed the purchase clause of the "Sherman Silver Bill." 
Free coinage of silver "was agitated, but the policy championed by W. 
J. Bryan, was defeated when made a campaign issue, and "sound money" 
continued to be our financial policy. 

10. See 9, June, '96, First Grade. 



October, 1894. 

1. See 2, Sept. '94, First Grade. 

2. See 7, Sept., '94, First Grade. 

3. The battle of Shiloh was fought while Grant, with his forces at 
Pittsburg Landing, and extending to Shiloh Church, was awaiting re-en- 
forcements from Buell. April '62, he was repulsed by the Confederates 
under Gen. A. S. Johnston. Next day the Union forces regained the^ 
ground lost but although one of the hardest fought battles of the war,- 
no advantage was gained by either side., 

4. (a) A protective tariff is duty imposed on imported goods for the 
purpose of encouraging home manufacture. 



39 

(b) Tariff for revenue is duty imposed on imported goods for the sup- 
port of the government. 

(c) Free trade — Applied to national commerce when unrestricted by 
laws or tariffs and not unduly stimulated by bounties. 

(d) Internal revenue. — That part of the revenue or income of a coun- 
try which is derived from duties on articles manufactured or grown at 
home; as spirits, fermented liquors, tobacco, etc. 

(e) A name applied to the duties rendered to the government other 
than naval and military service. 

5. (a) Texas — acquired by annexation. 

(b) See 1, May, '95, First Grade. 

(c) Kentucky — originally a county of Virginia. 

(d) Arkansas — a part of the Louisiana purchase (1803). 

(e) Oregon — acquired by exploration and settlement. 

6. (a) Montgomery, Ala. — as the birthplace of the Confederacy, where 
assembled the convention, adopting its constitution and electing its offi- 
cers. 

(b) Fortress Monroe — for the imprisonment there of Jefferson Davis. 
Appomattox — as the place of Lee's surrender to Grant. 
Philadelphia — as the former capital of the United States. 
Hampton Roads — as the scene of the battle between the Monitor and 
Merrimac. 

7. (a) See 5, Sept. '94, Second Grade. 

(b) 1867 — ^With respect to the French intervention in Mexico. 
1895 — With respect to the Venezuelan boundary question. 
Other instances, but these the best known. 

8. (a) Daniel Boone — ^A scout and pioneer settler of Kentucky. 

(b) General Custer — An officer who with all his men was killed by the 
Sioux Indians in an unsuccessful attack upon their camp. 

(c) Kit Carson — a famous scout prominent in the conquest of Califor- 
nia during the Mexican War. 

(d) Capt. Jack. (1) Famous Indian fighter of Pennsylvania, whose 
proffered services were refused by General Braddock. (2) Chief of Modoc 
Indians, hanged for murder of General Canby. 

(e) John Brown — a half -insane fanatic who with twenty followers at- 
tempted to free the negro slaves. He was hanged after having seized 
the arsenal at Harper's Ferry, Va. (1859). 

9. See 3 (b), Sept., '96, Second Grade. 

10. Leading events of 1894: Death of Oliver Wendell Holmes, poet, 
novelist, essayist and physician; the great Pullman strike at Chicago, in 
connection with which 40,000 railway employees struck in the Western 
States; the passing of the bill by the New York legislature to create 
"Greater New York" by uniting New York, Brooklyn and adjoining 
towns; and the adoption by Congress of the Wilson tariff bill. 



May '95. 

1. (a) The Louisiana Purchase, acquired from France, 1803, by Presi- 
dent Jefferson. Spain's violation of treaty caused investigation, result- 
ing in Bonaparte's ceding region of 1,000,000 square miles to United 
States for $15,000,000. 

(b) Florida, purchased from Spain by President Monroe, in 1819, for 
$5,000,000. Territory ceded by Spain because of trouble and expense In- 
volved in holding it. 

(c) Texas — by annexation, 1845. 

(d) 3Iexican cession of 1848, including California, Nevada, Utah, and 
parts of Arizona, New Mexico, Colorado and Wyoming, acquired during 
Polk's administration as result of Mexican War. 



40 

(e) Gadsden purchase, acquired from Mexico, 1853, for $2,000,000. In- 
cludes part of Arizona and New Mexico. 

(f; Alaska, purchased from Russia, 1867, during Johnson's administra- 
tion, for $7,200,000. 

(g) The Hawaiian Islands, annexed 1898. 

(h) Porto Rico and the Philippine Islands ceded by Spain, 1899, as re- 
sult of Spanish-American War. 

2. The existence of slavery in the South, another potent factor being 
sectional differences of opinion regarding the constitutional rights of 
the States. 

3. (a) See 2 (b), Sept. '95. 

(b) In 1565 by Spaniards under Menendez. 

4. That slavery should be prohibited in the territories, but protected 
within its existing limits. 

5. See 9, Sept. '94, Second Grade. 

6. The "Alabama claims" grew out of injuries inflicted 'on United 
States commerce by the British-built ships "Shenandoah," "Florida," and 
"Alabama." The matter was referred to a board of arbitration, whose de- 
cision, called the "Geneva award," sentenced Great Britain to pay an in- 
demnity of $15,000,000. 

7. See 1. 

8. The McKinley Tariff Bill, the Sherman Silver Bill and its repeal, 
the Force Bill, the Wilson Tariff Bill and the bill establishing the Inter- 
national copyright laws. 

9. See 1, Sept. '94, First Grade. 

10. Recitations are required to be given by topics, supplemented by 
judicious questions on the part of the teacher. Interest is aroused by 
descriptions of historical places and by supplementary reading, consist- 
ing of bright sketches, interesting stories or poems relating to subjects 
assigned for study. Thoroughness is insured by frequent topical reviews 
and written tests. 



Sept. 1895. 

1. The English claimed all the land from Labrador to Florida, as far 
west as the Pacific, by virtue of the discoveries of the Cabots; Dutch, the 
valley of the Hudson and the country from the Delaware to Cape Cod, 
because of Hudson's explorations; French, on account of the expeditions 
of Verrazano, LaSalle and Cartier, the Valley of the St. Lawrence, the 
region of the Great Lakes and of the Mississippi to its mouth, while 
Spain, through the discoveries of Columbus, claimed the entire American 
continent, except Brazil and especially the Southern portion of the 
United States, which was called Florida. 

2. (a) Champlain built forts along the St. Lawrence, founded Que- 
bec, established valuable fur trade with the Indians, made war on the 
Iroquois, and discovered the lake bearing his name. 

(b) DeSoto, a Spanish explorer, traveled from Tampa Bay northward 
through Florida, then westward until he reached the Mississippi River, 
in 1541. Dying the following year, he was buried in its waters. 

3. (a) Royal provinces were Virginia, the Carolinas. Georgia, New 
Jersey, New Hampshire and New York. 

Proprietary — Maryland, Pennsylvania and Delaware. 

Charter — Massachusetts, Rhode Island and Connecticut. 

(b) Royal provinces were ruled by governors appointed by the king of 
England; those under proprietary government were governed by their 
owners or officers appointed by them, while colonies possessing a "char- 
ter," governed themselves. 

4. (a) Conflicting territorial claims of the French and English and 



41 

was precipitated by the encroachments of the French upon t"he territory 
of the Ohio Valley. 

(b) Fort Duquesne, 1755; Louisburg, 175S; Quebec, 1759. 

5. (a) See 5, Second or Third Grades, May '95. 

(b) At Philadelphia, Sept. 5, 1774, the first Continental Congress met 
and made a declaration of the rights of the colonies, sent a petition for 
relief to the king, and addresses to the people of Great Britain, Canada, 
and the colonies asking aid and support in securing liberty. 

6. (a) See 4, Sept. '94, First Grade. 

(b) Gen. Chas. Lee who treacherously retreated at the Battle of Mon- 
mouth, contrary to Washington's commands, was court-martialed and 
dismissed from the army. Gen. Benedict Arnold, having been reproved 
by Washington, sought revenge by promising to betray West Point to the 
British. Since then his name and the word traitor have been synony- 
mous. 

7. (a, b) See 1, (a). May '95, First Grade. 

(c) Louisiana, Arkansas, Indian Territory, Oklahoma, Missouri, Iowa, 
Nebraska, Minnesota, North and South Dakota, and part of Montana, 
Wyoming, Colorado and Kansas, (d) Louisiana the first, 1812. (e) Wy- 
oming the last, 1S90. 

8. (a) Perry's victory on Lake Erie, Sept. 10, 1813, and Battle of the 
Thames, Oct. 5, 1813. (b) Capture of Vera Cruz, March, 1847. (c) Bat- 
tle between Monitor and Merrimac, March 8, 1862, and Gettysburg, July 
2nd and 3d, 1863. 

9. (a) Presidents Wm. H. Harrison, Taylor, Lincoln, Garfield and 
McKinley died in office, (b) Omnibus Bill, 1850, in Taylor's adminis- 
tration; Protective tariff, 1828, in J. Q. Adams'; Sub-Treasury Bill, 1840, 
in Van Buren's; Civil Service Reform Bill, 1883, Arthur's. 



June '96. 

1. History is a record of the deeds of men and nations. 

2. Jamestown, Va., 1607, and Plymouth, Mass., 1620. 

3. The Mexican War, cause — the annexation of Texas; the Civil War, 
cause — slavery agitation. States' rights. 

4. See 1, First Grade, May, '95. 

5. (a) See 4, (e), Second Grade, October '94. 

(b) The Civil Service Bill was designed to make merit rather than 
allegiance to the ruling political party a necessary qualification of appli- 
cants for positions under governmental control. 

6. See 8, May '95, Second Grade. 

7. See 9, May '95, Second Grade. Decision unfair because biased by 
party affiliations. 

8. See 9, Sept. '94, First Grade. 

9. Progress phenomenal. Has kept pace with our unprecedented in- 
dustrial and material development. 

10. (a) and (b). See 4 (a, b), Oct. '94. 

(c) The right to have coined any silver bullion, presented to a United 
States mint for that purpose. 

(b) By initiative "is meant the right to propose legislative projects; 
by "referendum" the submission of a proposed public measure, or law, 
which has been passed upon by the people's representatives in the /legis- 
lature, or a convention, for ratification or rejection. 



First Grade, Sept. '96. 

1. See 9, First Grade, Sept. '94. 

2. The United States at first comprised the thirteen original colonies. 
For later acquisitions see First Grade 1, May, '95. 



42 

3. 1812^The impressment of American seamen. 1832— The tariff. 
1844 — Annexation of Texas. 1850 — The Compromise Bill. 1860 — Slavery 
question, and secession. 

4:... Irving — Sketch Book, Life of Washington. 

Bryant — Thanatopsis. 

Longfellow — Evangeline, Courtship of Miles Standish. 

Whittier — Snow-bound. 

Holmes — Autocrat of the Breakfast Table. 

Poe — The Raven. 

Emerson — Essays. 

Lowell — Bigelow Papers, Among my Books. 

Cooper — Leather-Stocking Tales. 

Hawthorne — Scarlet Letter. Mosses from an Old Manse. 

5. See 3, Sept. 1897, Second Grade. 

6. Chas. C. Pinckney. 

7. Maine, Vermont, Kentucky, West Virginia, Texas and California. 

8. See 5. (b) Oct. '94. (b) William D. Mosley 

9. See Second Grade, 9, Sept. '94. 

10. (a) See 10, Sept. '96, Second Grade. 

(b) Republicans, advocated the gold standard; Democrats and Popu- 
lists, free coinage of silver. 



June '97. 

1. (a) See First Grade, 1, Sept. '94. 
(b) Geography. 

2. See First Grade, 2, Sept. '94. 

3. Provincial Congresses were colonial legislatures whose members, 
chosen through "committees of correspondence," met to decide upon 
measures for resisting the king; Continental, the legislative body com- 
posed of delegates from all the colonies, first assembled at Philadelphia, 
Sept. 5, 1774; Federal Congress, the legislative branch of the United 
States government, consisting of the Senate and House of Kepresenta- 
tives. 

4. Loco focos. — A socialistic wing of the Democratic party, so called 
because of their having re-lighted with loco-foco matches, the gas which 
the Tammany Democrats had turned out in the hall where both had as- 
sembled, 1837. 

Nullification— An ordinance adopted by South Carolina in 1832, declar- 
ing the protective tariff law "null and void." 

Free-Soilers — A wing of the old Whig party whose platform in 1848 
was the restriction of slavery to that territory where it then existed. 

Know-Nothings — or American party organized about 1854 to keep Ro- 
man Catholics and foreigners from holding office. Its adherents so called 
because of the secrecy of their meetings. 

Underground Railroad — Term applied to routes and stations from the 
South to Canada, established by Abolitionists to aid the escape of runa- 
way slaves. 

Secession — The withdrawal, or attempt of a State to withdraw from 
the Union — as did the Southern States in 1860. 

Southern Confederacy — The government established by the states se- 
ceding in 1860. 

Emancipation — The act of freeing from bondage, as the Emancipation 
Proclamation which freed the Negro Slaves in 1863. 

Car pet-hag gers — The tribe of "irresponsible adventurers," who during 
the reconstruction period, were given responsible positions in the South 
for real or assumed party services; so called on account of their recent 
advent from the North. 



43 

Mugwumps — A term of reproach applied, during the presidential cam- 
paign of '84, to those Republicans that bolted the nomination of Blaine 
and gave their support to Cleveland in the interests of Civil Service re- 
form. 

5. (a) William Marcy. (b) The policy which would make the tenure 
of civil office dependent upon fitness and merit, rather than upon party 
services, (c) Grover Cleveland's. (d) Practically nothing until the 
American people as a whole awakened to the general need of civic virtue 
and unselfish service for their country. 

6. (a) See Second Grade, 5 (b), Sept. '94, 
(b) See Second Grade, 4, June, '96. 

7. "What of the history of the case? Why important? What bearing 
had the decision upon the Missouri Compromise? How was the decision 
regarded by the north? Why? 

8. (a) The first Railroad in America, three miles long, was built from 
Quincy, Mass., to the granite quarries. At first, cars were drawn by 
horses. (1828). 

(b) Stcaml^oat — invented by Robert Fulton, first trip New York to 
Albany, in thirty-six hours. (1807). 

(c) Neivspaper — The "Boston News-Letters" established in 1740 by 
Bartholomew Green. 

(d) Telegraph — first line completed in 1844 between Baltimore and 
Washington. First message sent, "What hath God wrought." 

(e) Cotton-gin — invented by Eli Whitney in 1793. 

9. (a) The resumption of specie payments; i. e., the redemption of 
"greenbacks" in gold by the U. S. Treasury. 

(b) The bill passed by Congress in 1890 requiring the government to 
purchase four and a half million ounces of silver monthly and to issue 
silver certificates redeemable in gold or silver. 

10. See 10 (e), June, '96, First Grade. 



Sept. 1897. 

1. (a) The Mound-builders were a prehistoric people of North Amer- 
ica, whose very existence would have been blotted out but for the re- 
mains of their work left us, such as mounds of earth, often many miles 
in extent, and supposed to have been erected as fortifications. 

(b) No traditions of this people exist among the Indians and, besides, 
their remains show a much higher grade of civilization than that of 
the red men. 

2. See 1, Sept. '95. 

3. (a) One of neutrality in European affairs. 

(b) They were divided into two parties; one being in favor of the 
Constitution and a strong central government, and those who were 
jealous of the rights of the States and feared lest they should part with 
too much of their power, (c) This difference of opinion gave rise to 
opposing political parties, the Federalists and anti-Federalists or Repub- 
licans. 

(d) At the beginning of the administration, the infant nation was with- 
out money or credit, and our new government was considered at best 
a doubtful experiment; (e) at its close, credit had been restored and a 
National Bank established; important treaties had been negotiated with 
England and Spain; manufacturing and mining had received their first 
impetus; in short, order had been evolved from the floating chaos of the 
incoherent and conflicting ideas and schemes inevitable at the launching 
of a great nation. 

4. In 1798 the legislatures of Kentucky and Virginia respectively 
passed resolutions protesting against the "Alien and Sedition Acts" aS 



44 

unconstitutional. Resolutions declared the Union to be a compact be- 
tween the states, and insisted upon the right of the states to unite in 
refusing to obey when the federal government assumed power not dele- 
gated to it by the states in the constitution. Legislature of Massachu- 
setts opposed war of 1812 and passed resolutions virtually embodying 
the doctrine later known as "State rights." New England at the Hart- 
ford convention of December, 1814, passed resolutions approving the 
secession clause of the Kentucky resolutions. The Nullification Ordi- 
nance of South Carolina (1832) declared the protective tariff a violation 
of the Constitution, pronounced the Tariff Act null and void, and said 
that the duties would not be paid in that State. Threatened to secede 
if tariff were forced upon her. 

Convention called in South Carolina in 1860 passed a resolution known 
as the "Ordinance of Secession" "declaring" the union between the State 
of South Carolina and the other states united with her under the com- 
pact entitled the "Constitution of the United States" to be dissolved. 
Other Southern States followed her example, believing that the only way 
to preserve their constitutional rights was to separate from the union. 

In short, this, doctrine dated back to the beginning of the government, 
and the South was by no means the only section to declare and support 
it. 

5. The Virginia plan was to "probe the defects of the Constitution to 
the bottom and provide a radical cure;" that of New Jersey was to con- 
fine the work of the convention to revising the old Articles of Confed- 
eration merely. 

6. See First Grade, 9, Sept. '94. 

7. Wm. H. Prescott — Historian. 

Elias Hoioe — Inventor of the sewing machine. 

Chas. Sumner — Statesman; advocate of anti-slavery ideas. 

Wm. Cullen Bryant — Poet. 

Eli Whitney — Inventor of the cotton gin. 

8. (a) Each star in our flag represents a State, the stripes, seven red 
and six white, the original thirteen colonies, (b) 1777. 

9. See 7, Sept. '94, First Grade. 

10. Weyler — ^Captain-general of Cuba, whose atrocities were largely 
responsible for the Spanish-American War. 

Klondike — The gold fields of Alaska, whose recent discovery caused an 
inrush of gold-seekers into the territory. 



June '98. 

See June '97, First Grade. 



Sept. '98. 

1. See 1, (a), Sept. '95. 

2. (a) The "Union of 1643" was a confederation of the Plymouth, 
Massachusetts Bay. Connecticut and New Haven Colonies for the purpose 
of protection against the Indians and also against the French and Dutch. 

(b) House of Representatives — ^Was the legislative assembly of Vir- 
ginia. It was composed of two representatives from each borough, and 
its first meeting at Jamestown, on July 30, 1619, marks also the first 
legislative assembly on American soil. 

(c) Continental Constitution— The body of men, composed of delegates 
from all of the states except Rhode Island, which met in Philadelphia 
in May, 1787, for the purpose of revising the "Articles of Confederation," 
and which drew up and adopted the Constitution of the United States. 

(d) Court of Alabama Claims — This was a board of arbitration com- 
posed of five commissioners chosen by the United States, Great Britain, 



45 

Switzerland, Italy and Brazil which met at Geneva, Switzerland, in 
1872, to which had been referred the claims of th U. S. for damages done 
her comerce during the Civil War by the British-built ships, Florida and 
Alabama. 

(e) For Electoral Commission see First Grade, 9, May, '95. 

3. Miles Standish — Puritan Captain of Plymouth, immortalized by 
Longfellow. 

Oglethorpe — Founder of the colony of Georgia. 

Oliver Hazard Perry — American Naval OflScer who won the famous 
battle on Lake Erie, in War of 1812-14. 

John Jay — First Chief Justice of the United States; negotiated a treaty 
with England in 1794. 

Genet — Minister from France to the United States whose recall was de- 
manded by President Washington, because of his attempts to influence 
Americans to espouse the cause of France against England, thus inter- 
fering with our avowed policy of neutrality in European entanglements. 

George Stephenson — The inventor of the locomotive. 

Ralph Waldo Emerson — Poet, essayist and lecturer. 

Fremont — American officer who effected the conquest of California dur- 
ing the Mexican War. 

Horace Mann — Noted for educational reforms in Massachusetts. 

Cambon — French ambassador to United States who was appointed spe- 
cial representative of Spain to arrange for cessation of hostilities and 
preliminaries for peace in '98. 

4. In 1797, when war with France seemed imminent, our govern- 
ment sent commissioners to Paris to reach, if possible, an amicable set- 
tlement of the differences between us. The French Directory refused to 
receive our envoys but they were secretly informed that the payment of 
a large sum of money would end the trouble. These secret letters were 
signed X. Y. Z., and hence known as the "X. Y. Z. Correspondence." 

Charter Oak — See Second Grade, 2, Sept. '94. 

Ashburton Treaty — The treaty negotiated by Daniel Webster and Lord 
Ashburton, determining the boundary between the United States and 
Canada as far west as the Rocky Mountains. 

Trent Affair — Hoping to obtain aid from England, the Confederate Gov- 
ernment sent commissioners there who took passage on the "Trent," a 
British mail steamer, at Havana. The next day they were seized by 
Capt. Wilkes of the United States navy. This might have precipitated 
a war with England had not the authorities at Washington disapproved 
the act and returned the commissioners. 

Squatter Sovereignty — Was the plan of allowing the people in Kansas 
and Nebraska to settle the question of slavery or no slavery for them- 
selves. 

5. See 7, Sept. '94, First Grade. 

6. See 1, May, '95, First Grade. 

7. Administration of Jefferson — War with Tripoli; Louisiana Pur- 
chase concluded; Embargo act passed by Congress; Steamboat invented. 

James Madison — ^War of 1812-14 with England; Hartford Convention;. 
Andreio Jackson — South Carolina passed Ordinance of Nullification; Com- 
promise bill passed, tariff reduced, and Seminole War; James K. Polk — 
Northwestern boundary of the United States settled; Mexican War, and 
gold discovered in California; Grover Cleveland — (first administration) — 
law of Presidential succession passed; Charleston earthquake; Hay-mar- 
ket riot, and Chinese immigration restricted; (second administration) — 
World's Fair held at Chicago; the Venezuela boundary dispute; and Con- 
federate disabilities removed. 

8. Irving — "Sketch-Book"; Longfellow — "Evangeline"; William Cullen 



46 

Bryant — "Thanatopsis"; Bancroft— "Uisiory of the United States; Edwin 
L. Green — "History of Florida." 

9. Yorktown — Oct. 19, 1781; result, surrender of Cornwallis to Wash- 
ington, and close of the War for Independence. 

iVeiy Orleans — Jan. 1, 1815; great American victory, 

Buena Vista — Feb. 22, 23, 1847; American Victory in Mexican War, 
causing the Mexicans to abandon the northern province to the American 
forces. 

Gettyshurg — See 8, May '95, Second Grade. 

Manila — May 6, 1898; American victory in Spanish-American War; 
Spanish navy in the East vi^as destroyed and the Philippines vv^rested from 
Spanish control. 

10. (a) See Second Grade, 10, June '98. 
Cervera — See Second Grade, 10, Sept. '98. 

Aguinaldo — Filipino leader in their attempts for independence. 
President Dole — President of Hawaii at time of annexation to the 
United States. 
Garcia — Cuban leader in war for independence from Spain. 



June '99. 

1. (1) Sept. '94, First Grade. 

2. The apportionment of representation satisfactorily to the weaker 
states, the question of Federal regulation of commerce, and the further 
importation of slaves. Finally state equality was established in the sen- 
ate, and in slave-holding states three-fifths of the slaves counted as pop- 
ulation; to Congress was entrusted the regulation of commerce, and 
Federal interference in the slave trade was_ prohibited until 1808. 

3 See 6, May, '95, Second Grade. 

4. (1) May '95, First Grade. 

5. The white population of the South was about one-third that of 
the North. The whole number of men enlisted on the Federal side was 
2,600,000 men, on the Confederate side a little over 600,000. The number 
killed on both sides was 450,000. The Federal war debt was .$2,700,000,000. 

6. See 9, June, '96, First Grade. Through invention of the cotton 
gin, telegraph, telephone, cable, perfection of the locomotive, and ma- 
chinery facilitating manufacturing and agriculture, the United States has 
attained first rank among the world's nations in wealth and industrial 
progress. 

7. St. Augustine was founded Sept. 6, 1565, by Spaniards under Me- 
nendez, who had been sent out to destroy colony of French Protestants 
established on the St. Johns. Within a few weeks he had captured Fort 
Caroline and wantonly massacred men, women and children. Two compa- 
nies of Frenchmen cast ashore in a storm, and whose vessels composed 
the fleet sent to attack the Spaniards at St. Augustine, after surrendering 
in good faith, were murdered by Menendez in, cold blood, "not as 
Frenchmen, but as Lutherans." 

8. England came into possession of the Floridas in 1763. They con- 
tained at that time only seven thousand people, chiefly in Pensacola and 
St. Augustine. During the twenty years of British occupation, many 
planters were attracted to the provinces from Georgia and South Caro- 
lina. Pensacola became a thriving city and Florida was fast becoming 
as prosperous as the other British possessions in America, when it was 
ceded back to Spain in 1783. 

9. For several years the United States, through her ministers, had 
been trying, without success, to negotiate the cession of the Floridas by 
Spain. After Jackson's campaign, Spain herself re-opened negotiations 
which finally resulted in a treaty of cession in 1819. It was immediately 
ratified by the United States Senate, but was not signed by the King of 



47 

Spain until October 24, 1820, and tlie actual transfer of the territory 
did not take place until July, 1S21. 

10. First, the removal of two hundred Apalaches from West Florida; 
then the division of the country into military districts under officers re- 
sponsible for the activity of their troops, the attempt at a setlement 
with the Indians by Gen. Macomb: renewal of the war by the attack on 
Col. Harney's forces on the Caloosahatchie, and the importation of blood- 
hounds to hunt down the Indians. 



Sept. '99. 

1. (a) On Roanoke Island, (b) The colony comprised one hundred 
and eight men who within a year grew discouraged and returned to 
England (1583). Shortly after this, a second colony was sent out, which 
disappeared before, supplies could reach them from England. 

2. (a) In 1634 by persecuted Catholics under Lord Baltimore. 

(b) Religious liberty, freedom from taxation by England, enjoyment of 
all the privileges of Englishmen. 

(c) The Protestants gaining a majority in the legislature, passed a 
law denying Catholics the rights of citizenship. Civil war ensued, until 
the Catholics were sustained and their liberties restored. 

3. (a) After the battles of Saratoga, Burgoyne's attempt to retreat 
was foiled by the Americans, and his source of supplies being cut off, he 
surrendered his force of six thousand men, October 17, 1777. 

(b) Great rejoicing throughout the country, the enlistment of fresh 
troops in Washington's army, and assistance from France. 

4. See 2, June '99, First Grade. 

5. See 3, Sept. '96, Second Grade. 

6. Battle of Manila, May 1, 1898; Santiago, July 1, 2 and 3, '98; and 
the destruction of Cervera's fleet outside Santiago harbor July 3, '98. 

The treaty of peace, in which Spain renounced all right of sovereignty 
over Cuba and ceded to the United States Porto Rico, the Island of 
Guam and the Philippine Islands, was signed early in 1899. 

7. See 8, Sept. '99, Second Grade. 

8. (a) It became a possession of Great Britain. 

(b) Florida was too new a possession of England for dissatisfaction 
to have arisen and besides she lacked the provocations of the other 
colonies as she had been well-treated. 

9. Capt. Roderick Mcintosh. On returning home from St. Augustine 
with a bag of gold, the proceeds from a drove of cattle he had sold there, 
the bag came open and a number of coins were spilled on the ground. 
Merely fastening his sack, he left them lying where they had fallen, but 
years afterward when in need of money, he returned and picked them 
up. 

10. Dates from 1849. In 1860 there were ninety-seven public schools, 
and one hundred and thirty-eight private institutions. After the Civil 
War, public education was unpopular until the superintendency of A. J. 
Russell, who succeeded in arousing interest and confidence therein and in 
1892 the number of pupils in attendance reached 93,780. 

Supt. Sheats, in 1893, introduced a new school law, raising the require- 
ments of teachers and making teachers' examinations uniform through- 
out the state. This has resulted in better schools and more efficient 
teachers. As perfected, no better system exists in the South, 



June 1900. 

1. See 1. Sept. '94. First Grade. 

2. See 1 (a), Sept. '95. 

3. Bacon's Rebellion. See 3 (a), Sept. '98, Second Grade. 



4S 

Dorr's Rebellion — Was an uprising in Rhode Island, the result of an 
attempt to overturn the law restricting the right of suffrage to property 
owners. 

Hartford Convention — See 4 (aj, Sept. '97, Second Grade. 

Trent Affair — See 4 (d), Sept. '98, First Grade. 

4. Robert Morris, a patriot of means and financial ability who lent 
Congress large sums of money to prosecute the War for Independence. 
In 1781 made superintendent of finance. 

Nathan Hale — Revolutionary hero, captured by the British and hanged 
as a spy. 

Lafitte — Leader of a band of outlaws in Southern Louisiana, who of- 
fered his services to Gen. Jackson and fought valorously at the battle 
of New Orleans. 

Charles Sumner — Noted as an advocate of anti-slavery ideas. Leading 
opponent of slavery^ in Congress. 

Elias Howe — Inventor of the sewing-machine. 

George W. Childs — American publisher and philanthropist. Editor 
Philadelphia Public Ledger, 1864-1894. 



(S. J. Tilden — Governor of New York in 1814; nominated for Presi- 
dency in 1876 and his adherents claimed his election, which was given 
to his opponent, R. B. Hayes, by the "Electoral Commission." 

Thos. Edison — Inventor of electric light, phonograph, etc. 

Marconi — Inventor of wireless telegraph. 

Thos. Lipton (Sir) — English nobleman famous as participant in in- 
ternational yacht races. 

5. See 6, June '97, First Grade. 

6. See 1, May '95, First Grade. 

7. See 9, June '99, Second Grade. 

8. Weatherford, Creek warrior and leader in the "War of the Red 
Sticks,'' who surrendered himself to Gen. Jackson and afterward became 
a citizen of Alabama. 

Osceola — Seminole chief, prominent in war of 1835-42. Captured, on 
coming into American camp under flag of truce, and confined at Fort 
Moultrie, until he died of a broken heart. 

Goacoo-chee, or "Wild-Cat" — Seminole chief, captured and escaped from 
Fort Marion; later re-taken and sent with his band to the West. 

Billy Bowlegs — Chief of Creek Indians who gave trouble to white set- 
tlers of Florida and Georgia about 1812. 

8. Phosphate was discovered in 1887 and extensive mining operations 
begun near Dunnellon, Marion County, in 1889. Mines are now located 
in many counties of the State. 

The Disston Canal connects Lake Okeechobee with the Caloosahatchie 
River. Its completion so lowered the level of the lake that two million 
acres of land were rendered fit for cultivation. 

The "great freeze" occurred December 29, 1894, destroying almost to- 
tally the orange crop valued at four millions of dollars and killing the 
trees. 

The "great hurricane'' swept over the state, September 29, 1896, de- 
stroying fourteen millions of dollars worth of property. 

Filibustering expeditions were fitted out in Florida waters to aid the 
Cubans in their war for independence. The most prominent and success- 
ful of these "filibusterers" was the "Three Friends." 

10. (a) West Florida Seminary, Tallahassee; East Florida Seminary, 
Gainesville; State Normal School, Defuniak (White); State Normal 
School (Colored), Tallahassee; Institute for the Blind and Deaf, St. Au- 
gustine; State Agricultural College, Lake City. 



49 

(b) Rollins College, Winter Park; John B. Stetson University, Deland; 
Florida Conference Seminary, Sutherland; Jasper Normal Institute, Jas- 
per. 
Sept. 1900. 

See Sept. 1900, Second Grade. 
June, 1901. 

1. Each state had one vote in Congress, to which body but little 
power was entrusted. A two-thirds majority of votes was necessary for 
the adoption of any resolution, and no opposing state could be compelled 
to submit to any measure. Congress might borrow money but had no 
means of paying, as the right to levy taxes was vested in the state; it 
could request the legislatures to contribute money and troops when nec- 
essary, but could not force them to do so — a fatal defect. 

2. 1775-6 — Operations around Boston, ending in its evacuation by 
the British, followed by campaign around New York City with crush- 
ing defeat on Long Island, and the adoption by Washington of his 
"Fabian" policy. 

December 26, he captured one thousand prisoners at Trenton. 

1777 — In January, he won the Battle of Princeton. 

September 11, Was defeated at Brandywine in an effort to prevent 
the capture of Philadelphia by the British, and later, lost the battle 
of Germantown. 

1778 — June, won Battle of Monmouth, N. J. 

1781 — Transferred troops to the "Virginia" and captured Yorktown, Oc- 
tober 19. 

3. Born in Virginia, author of Declaration of Independence and of 
our system of decimal currency; Secretary of State under Washington; 
leader of Republican party; Vice-President during Adams' administration, 
and President for the two succeeding administrations; died July 4, 1826. 
Our greatest statesman. The history of the United States during the 
last century may be described as the development of his political ideas. 

4. (a) Peter Minuet — Bought Manhattan Island from the Indians 
for beads and trinkets amounting to about twenty-five dollars. 

(b) John G. Calhoun — Accepted, as Senator from South Carolina, 
Clay's compromise bill reducing the tariff. 

(c) George R. Clark — Conquered territory north of Ohio River, cap- 
turing forts at Kaskaskia and Vincennes (1779). 

(d) DeWitt Clinton— Governor of New York (1825), dug first spadeful 
of earth in construction of Erie Canal. 

(c) S. J- Tilden — As Governor of New York he saved $8,000,000 of the 
public funds by his expose' of the corrupt practices of the "Canal Ring." 
Also Democratic candidate for President in 1876. 

5. At the breaking out of the Spanish-American war, a rebellion 
against Spanish authority was in progress in the Philippines. After the 
treaty with Spain, by which the islands were ceded to the United States 
for the sum of $20,000,000, the Filipinos, under a native leader, Agui- 
naldo, proceeded to organize a government entirely independent of either 
Spanish or American control. This war against the American occupa- 
tion, drawn out into guerrilla warfare, has continued ever since the ces- 
sion of the islands. 

6. (a) Blaine — Protective tariff. 

(b) Clay — Protective tariff and Compromise of 1850. 

(c) Douglas — "Squatter sovereignty," Kansas-Nebraska bill. 

(d) McKinley — Protective tariff. 

(e) Alexander Hamilton — Federalism; see 3, June *02, First Grade. 

7. From Tallahassee to St. Marks, by Gov. Call. 

8. (a) Olustee — See 6, June '99, Second Grade. 



50 

Battle at Natural Bridge, in March, 1865, resulted from an attempt 
by General Newton to take Tallahassee. He met defeat with heavy loss. 

9. (a) Harrison Reed, (b) That he vetoed a bill to pay expenses of 
members of constitutional convention of 1868, who had already been 
paid, and because he declared that no quorum existed in the senate, (c) 
The Governor was sustained by Supreme Court both of the State and 
of the United States. 

10. (a) In 1881, four million acres of the public land was sold to 
Hamilton Disston and associates. The money received being employed 
by the State to carry out many schemes of improrement. 

(b) See 9, June, 900, First Grade. 

The Jacksonville fire occurred May 3, 1901, destroying several million 
dollars' worth of property. 



Sept. 1901. 

1. Founded in 1733 by James Oglethorpe under charter obtained from 
George II, placed under control of trustees until 1752, when it became a 
royal province. Only settlers "adjudged worthy of the rights of citi- 
zenship" were allowed. The Salzburgers came, 1734; Augusta was 
founded and the "Wesleys arrived 1735; was invaded by Spaniards from 
Florida, 1742. 

2. Agriculture was the chief industry in both sections, but in New 
England farms were small, and fishing and shipbuilding were leading 
occupations. In the South the land was cultivated by negro slaves. 

In New England standing in society depended mainly upon wealth 
and education; in the South, the planter held highest rank. In the 
former, the Puritans, austere and stern, held sway; in the latter, ad- 
herents to the Church of England and the Huguenots prevailed. 

New England was in advance in education, common schools becoming 
popular at an early day. Harvard University, the oldest college in this 
country, was founded 1636. 

3. (a) Vermont, Kentucky and Tennessee; (b) North and South Da- 
kota, Montana, Washington, Wyoming and Idaho. 

4. (a) See 3, Sept. '96, Second Grade; (b) Conquest of New Mexico 
and California hy force under General Kearney, who marched West from 
Fort Leavenworth, Kansas; and invasion of Mexico by General Scott, 
with engagements at Vera Cruz in the mountains and around the city 
of Mexico, all resulting in American victories. 

5. Siege of Yorktown by McClellan and evacuation by Johnston, 
May 4, 1862; Williamsburg, battle indecisive (May 5) ; Seven Pines, no 
advantage gained by either side (May 31 and June 1); Seven Days' Bat- 
tle, Confederate victory (June 25 to July 1). 

6. (a) See 9, Sept. '94, Second Grade. 

(b) See 4, Sept. '96, First Grade. 

(c) See 6, June 1901, First Grade. 

7. The sun and moon were venerated and sacrifice was offered by 
the chief to the sun at dawn. Human sacrifices were occasionally of- 
fered. Supreme Ruler addressed as "Source of Breath," but no belief 
obtained concerning future reward or punishment. 

8. Jackson and Taylor. 

9. (a) A Scotch Indian trader who moved to Florida during the 
Revolutionary War, owing to his influence over the Indians, the Span- 
iards made a special treaty with him in order to retain him in the prov- 
ince, on its again becoming Spanish territory in 1783. 

(b) Head men of the Creeks, educated by his Scotch father, he exerted 
great irfluence over his people and made them more powerful than ever 



51 . ~ 

before. He was a colonel in the Spanish service and their agent to the 
Creek nation at the time of his death. 

10. Ribaut had sailed from Fort Caroline to attack St. Augustine, 
but his fleet encountering a storm, was driven ashore below Montague's 
Inlet. Surrendering to Menendez, his men were all massacred in cold 
blood, Sept. 1565. 
November 1901. 

1. See May '95, First Grade. 

2. See 3, May '95, First Grade. 

3. See 1, June 1901, First Grade. 

4. See 4, Sept. '97, First Grade. 

5. See 3, June 1901, First Grade. 

6. See 6, Sept. 1901, First Grade. 

7. See 9, Sept. '99, Second Grade. 

8. See 9, June '99, Second Grade. 

9. See 9, June 1900, Second Grade. 

10. See 1, Sept. '94, Second Grade, and 1, June '97, Second Grade. 



June 1902. 

1. (a) Massachusetts — See 2, May '95, Second Grade. 

(b) New York — Dutch; trade with the Indians. 

(c) Delaware — Swedes; extension of Protestajatism. 
(c) Virginia — See 5 (a), June '97. 

(f) Georgia — See 5' (e), June '97. 

(g) Florida — Spaniards; extension of Catholicism and the establish- 
ment of military posts. 

(e) Louisiana — French; trade with the Indians and their conversion 
to Catholicism. 

2. Settled at Philadelphia, 1682, by persecuted English Quakers, un- 
der William Penn, who bought land from, and made treaty with, the 
Indians, thus securing their friendship in place of the hostility shown 
other colonists. 

3. Aide-de-camp to Washington in Revolution, "Father" of the Con- 
stitution; leader of Federalist party; Secretary of Treasury during Wash- 
ington's administration; and inaugurator of a brilliant financial policy 
enduring to the present day. Killed in a duel by Aaron Burr. 

4. See 9 (a), Sept. '94, First Grade. 

5. (a) Quebec. The strongest fortress in the New World, it was the 
key to the St. Lawrence and on it hung the fate of Canada. 

(b) Saratoga. It frustrated British plans to sever New England 
from the other colonies, and gained for us the support of France. 

(c) Bombardment of Tripoli. The Dey found himself overpowered 
and sued for peace. 

(d) Chapultepec. Because it commanded the Mexican capital. 

(e) Gettysburg. Decided the fate of the Confederacy since the South 
could not replace the troops lost there. 

(f) Destruction of Cervera's squadron outside Santiago harbor, left 
Spain without an adequate navy with which to oppose us. 

6. See 4, June, 1902, Second Grade. 

7. (a) See 3 (d), June, 1901, Second Grade. 

(b) See 4 (a), Sept. '97, First Grade. 

(c) See 3 (a), June, 1901, Second Grade. 

(d) See 6 (a), Sept. 1901, Second Grade. 

(e) See 6, May '95, First Grade. 

8. Pensacola, 1822, until on the appearance of yellow fever in the 
town it was transferred to Fifteen-mile House; St. Augustine, 1823; Tal- 
lahassee, since 1824. 



52 

9. (a) President Jackson sent to quell the Indians, captured Pensa- 
cola 1814; afterward made military governor; President Taylor com- 
manded forces against the Seminoles 1S3S-40. 

(b) Owned a plantation in the territory, married daughter of Colo- 
nel Bird Willis and is buried at Tallahassee. 

(c) Lafayette, to whom was granted a township of land in Florida in 
1824. 

10. Bank of Pensaoola (1831), whose bonds to the amount of $500,- 
000 were indorsed by the territory, failed 1843. Union Bank (1833) 
with capital of $3,000,00 raised by the sale of territorial bonds, suspend- 
ed payment 1837. Southern Llife Insurance and Trust Company, char- 
tered 1835, with capital stock of $2,000,000. Notes and certificates issued 
were indorsed by the governor of the territory. On Florida's admission 
to the Union (1845) she repudiated all of these debts. 



Sept. 1902. 

1. All known routes of trade with India were long and hence ex- 
pensive, and the inland route through Asia was beset with Arab robbers. 

The Cabots (1496-97), sailing from Labrador southward; Martin Fro- 
bisher (1576) ; Captain John Davis (1585) sailing into the strait now 
bearing his name; Henry Hudson, discovering instead the great bay 
which preserves his memory; and William Baffin sought in vain a north- 
west passage to India. 

2. See 3, Sept. '95. 

3. (a) See 4 (a), Sept. '97, First Grade, 
(b) Doctrine of State rights. 

4. See 4, Sept. 1902, Second Grade. 

5. (a) A part of original area of the United States, organized as the 
Northwest Territory in 1787. 

(b) Acquired by exploration and settlement. 

(c) By cession from Mexico, granted in treaty of peace following Mex- 
ican War. 

(d) Louisiana Purchase, 1803. 

(e) See 5 (a), Oct. '94. 

6. See 6, June, 1902, Second Grade. 

7. (a) The killing of eleven Italians, imprisoned in New Orleans, 
charged with the murder of the Chief of Police, October 15, 1890. 

(b) The Samoani affair, closed in 1889 by the guarantee of an autono- 
mous government to these islands, under the joint control of Germany, 
England and the United States. 

(c) The murder of two sailors from the warship Baltimore, at Valpa- 
raiso, Chile, by a mob of citizens (1891). 

(d) The seal fisheries in Bering Sea (1893). 

8. See 7, June '99, First Grade, and 10, Sept. 1901, First Grade. 

9. See 9, June '99, Second Grade. 

10. (a) Born in Maryland, he joined British army at fourteen, later 
married daughter of Creek chief, and in turn was a comedian in the 
Bahamas, an envoy to England from governor of those islands, a pirate, 
looting the vessels of William Panton, and a conspirator against the 
powerful chief McGillivray. He finally died a prisoner in Moro Castle, 
Havana. 

(b) See "Wild Cat," 8. June, 1900, First Grade. 

(c) See 9, June, 1901, First Grade. 

(e) See "Weatherford," 8, June, 1900, First Grade. 



: 53 . 

ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

Second Grade. 
Sept. '94. 

1. Gender, number, person and case. 
See 7, June lyOO, 2d or 3d grade. 

2. Their or theirs, whose, knights-templars', sons-in-law's. 

3. (a) Nouns and pronouns, (b) Adjectives and adverbs, (c) Verb, 
(d) Sing. Plural. 

N. — Son-in-law Sons-in-law. 

P. — Son-in-law's Sons-in-law's. 

Ob. — Son-in-law Sons-in-law. 

4. Bad, worse, worst (irregular), 
handsome, handsomer, handsomest, 
lovely, lovelier, loveliest. 

polite, politer, politest. 

beautiful, more beautiful, most beautiful. 

See 2, May '95, First Grade. 

5. Dive, dived, dived, 
drink, drank, drunk, 
eat, ate, eaten. 

gird, girt (girded), girt (girded). 

cling, clung, clung. i 

set, set, set. 

shoe, shod, shod. : , 

lie, lay, lain, 
lay, laid, laid. 

6. (a) Voice, mode, tense, person and number. 

(b) By joining past participle of verb to the different forms of the 
verb 6e. 



Oct. '94. 

1. Noun, pronoun, adjective, adverb, verb, conjunction, preposition, 
interjection. 

2. By its use in the sentence. 

3. Nouns, pronouns, verbs, adjectives and adverbs. 

4. Sing and Plu. Sing. Plu. 
Nom. — which thou ye or you 
Pos. — whose thy or thine your or yours 
Obj. — which thee you 

Singular. Plural 

man-servant men-servants 

man-servant's men-servants' 

man-servant men-servants. 

5. Musselman's, madam's, fly's, knight-templar's, 
musselmans', mesdames', flies, knights-templars'. 

6. Past tense — Fled flew lay sat set bereft dreamt clad went. 
Past par. — fled flown lain sat set bereft dreamt clad gone. 



May. 1895. 

1. (a) Subject — Names that of which something is thought. 
Predicate — Tells what is thought. 
(b) A clause is a part of a sentence containing a subject and its 

predicate. 
Independent clause — one not dependent on another clause. 
Dependent clause — one used as an adj., adv. or noun. 
Ex : You can learn, if you study. 



54 

(c) Composed of two or more independent clauses. 
Ex : Man dies, but his memory lives, 

2. Prospectuses, courts-martial, men-servants, 9's, gases, moneys, 
spoonfuls, aides-de-camp, mesdames. 

3. Man's — men's, 
brother-in-law's — brothers-in-law's, 
country's — countries'. 

his — their, 
enemy's — enemies'. 

4. Nouns — ess, trix, ine, a, en, ster, etc. — to denote feminine gender. 
's possession (sing.), s' possession (plur.), s and es denoting 

plurals. 

Adjectives and Adverbs — er and est to denote comparative and su- 
perlative degrees. 

Verbs — d and ed to denote past tense and past participle. 

t, st, est (2d pers.), th, eth (3rd pers.), solemn form Indicative. 
s (3d pers. sing.) Indicative. 

5. Good, better, best, 
polite, politer, politest, 
handsome, handsomer, handsomest, 
ill, worse, worst. 

much, more, most. 

6. Lie, TSy, lain, 
set, set, set. 
sing, sang, sung, 
lay, lay, laid, 
sit, sat, sat. 
rise, rose, risen, 
know, knew, known, 
bea!*, bore, borne, 
raise, raised, raised, 
fly, flew, flown. 



Sept, '95, 

See Sept. '95, First Grade. 



June 1896. 

1. See 1 and 3, Oct. '94, Second or Third Grade. 

2. See 4, Oct. 94, Second or Third Grade. 

3. See 5, May, '95, Second or Third Grade. 

4. See 6, May '95, Second or Third Grade. 

5. A verb is said to be regular when it forms its past tense and past 

participle by adding ed to the verb root, 
set, set, set. 
sit, sat, sat. 

lay, laid, laid, 
lie, lay, lain, 

6. Naming in both numbers the cases of a noun or pronoun. 

(b) Conjugation is the regular arrangement of all the forms of the 

verb. 
(c)A variation in the form of adjectives and adverbs to denote differ- 
ent degrees of meaning. 

(d) Voice is the variation in the use and form of a transitive vferb 
that shows whether the subject acts or receives the act. 

(e) Case is that form of a noun or pronoun which shows its relation 
to some other word in a sentence. 



55 

10. Syntax treats of the relation which words bear to one another in 
a sentence. 



Sept. 1896. 

1. See 2, Sept. '94, Second or Third Grade. 

2. See 3, Sept. '94. Second or Third Grade. 
it: See 4. below, 
who, whose, whom. 

3. Fit, fitter, fittest, 
much, more, most, 
nigh, nigher, nighest or next. 
fore, former, foremost or first, 
up, upper, upmost or uppermost. 

4. Singular, Plural. 
Mas. Fern. 

Nom. — lie she 

Pos. — His her or hers 

Obj. — Him her 

7. The chimneys were built of 
tion.) 

8. The wicked man cruelly killed the innocent woman. 

10. (a) I approached the lonely house that overlooked the lake and 
was startled when I heard a voice. 

(b) Does the wind blow where it listeth? 

(c) I may pass the examination. 

(d) "Give me liberty or give me death." 

(e) Labor or capital must yield. 



Neut. 


! 


it 


they 


its 


their or theirs 


it 


them 


■ick. 


(Unidiomatic use of preposi- 



June 1897. 

1. (a) Concrete, abstract and collective, 
(b) Number, gender, person and case. 

2. (a) Wharves or wharfs, cherubim, crises. Misses Ley or Miss 
Ley's, p's. 

(b) Czarina, testatrix, countess, pea-hen, sultana. 

3. Lily's — lilies' 
son-m-law's — sons-in-law's, 
goose's — geese's. 

ox's — oxen's. 

whose — whose. 

Knights-templar's — Knights-templars'. 

thief's — thieves'. 

poetess' — poetesses'. 

child's — children's. 

thy or thine — your or yours. 

4. A personal pronoun is one that by its form denotes the speaker, 
the one spoken to or the one spoken of. Ex : He, it. 

A relative pronoun is one that relates to some preceding word or 
words, and connects clauses. Ex. : Who, that. 

An interrogative pronoun is one with which a question is asked. Ex. : 
Who? what? 

An adjective pronoun is one that performs the offices of both an adjec- 
tive and a noun. Ex. : All, any. 
5 Pine, finer, finest. 

peaceable, more peaceable, most peaceable. 

witty, wittier, wittiest. 

hot, hotter, hottest. 

ill, worse, worst. ' 



56 

fore, former, foremost or first, 
out, outer or utter, outmost, uttermost or utmost, 
nimble, nimbler nimblest. 

forth, further or farther, furthest, furthermost or farthest. 
6. (a) Regular and irregular. i 

(b) Transitive and intransitive. 

(c) Voice, mode, tense, number and person. 



Sept. 1897. 
1. Miss Ley's, Misses Ley's. 

Bister-in-law's, sisters-in-law's, 
countess', countesses', 
deer's, deer's. 
ox's, oxen's, 
whose, whose, 
its, their, or theirs. 
First Persofi. Second Person. Second Person. 

(Common form.) (Old form.) 

2. I we you you thou ye or you 

my or our or your or your or thy or ^ 
mine ours yours yours thine your or yours 

me us you you thee you 

For third personal pronouns see 4, Sept. 1896, Second or Third Grade, 

4. Little, less or lesser, least, 
able, abler, ablest, 
pretty, prettier, prettiest. 

beautiful, more beautiful, most beautiful. 

infinite {not compared). 

near, nearer, nearest. 

far, farther, farthest. 

much, more, most. 

holy, holier, holiest. 

wholly (not compared). 

5. (a) Person, gender, number and case, 
(b) Mode, tense, voice, person and number. 



June '98. 

By practical grammar is meant grammar as an art. By technical 
grammar is meant that part of grammar which deals strictly with the 
science itself, including the technicalities and idioms. 

Practical grammar should be taught first, for practice logically pre- 
cedes theory. 

The concrete before the abstract, an important educational principle. 

4. Noun, pronoun and verb: See 5, Sept. '97, Second Grade. 
Adjective and Adverb : comparison. See 1, Sept. 1902, First Grade. 

5. (a) Transitive verbs only; for the action expressed by intransi- 
tive verbs, being confined entirely to the subject, no object is acted upon. 

(b) By combining the verb be or some of its variations with the per- 
fect participle. 

6. (1) To live for others is sublime. 

(2) We should learn to govern ourselves. 

(3) God never made his work for man to mend. 

(4) The noblest vengeance is to forgive. 

(5) Delightful task! to rear the tender thought. 

(6) His ability to rule was remarkable. 

(7) We shall strive to do our duty. 

7. (1) How plants grow has puzzled many a brain. 



57 

(2) We know that the earth is round. 

(3) It depends upon how long you stay. 

(4) His order was that he should flank the enemy. 

(5) The fact that mildew is a plant is wonderful. 

8. A restrictive clause is one whose limiting sense is necessary to 
distinguish the antecedent; the non-restrictive adds a thought or makes 
an explanation in a parenthetical sense. Restrictive : The diamond that 
I lost was a present. Non-restrictive: The diamond, which is pure 
carbon, is very costly. 

9. (a) Declarative, interrogative, imperative, exclamatory, 
(b) Their use in sentences. 

10. (a) Pronouns and adverbs called conjunctive or relative pronouns 
and conjunctive adverbs respectively. 

(b) Conj. adv.: I answered him when he spoke to me. 
Conj. pro. : Let those loho stand take heed lest they fall. 



Sept. '98. 

1. (a) A sentence is the expression of a thought. 

(b) Subject and predicate; as, Gold glitters. Gold names the object 
about which something is said; glitters tells what we wish to say about 
object. 

2. (a) See 4, Sept. '94, First Grade. 

(b) When their honor is assailed, nations contend in war. 

3. (a) A noun is the name of anything. 

A pronoun is a word used instead of a noun. 

An adjective is a word which describes or limits a noun or pronoun. 

A verl) is a word that tells, declares, or asserts something. 

An adverl) is a word which modifies the meaning of a verb, an adjec- 
tive, or another adverb. 

A preposition is a word which shows the relation between a noun or 
pronoun and some other word or words in the sentence. 

A conjunction is a word which connects words, phrases or clauses. 

An interjection is a word which expresses surprise, anger, pleasure or 
some other strong feeling. 

(b) See 3, Oct. '94, Second or Third Grade, and 4, June '98, First 
Grade. 

4. Ox — oxen; ox's — oxen's; ox — oxen. 

mother-in-law — mothers-in-law ; mother-in-law's — mothers-in-law's ; 
mother-in-law — mothers-in-law. 

5. Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. 
Earl countess monk nun 
Francis Frances peacock peahen 
Czar czarina Paul Pauline 
Jesse Jessie he-bear she-bear 
tiger tigress widower widow 

For other forms, see 2, Sept. 1897, Second or Third Grade. 

6. (a) See 1, Sept. 1902, First Grade, 
(b) This and that — Demonstratives. 

7. (a) A transitive verb expresses an act done by one person or 
thing to another; an intransitive expresses an action not requiring an 
object to complete its meaning. 

(b) See 5, June '98, Second or Third Grade. 

June '99. 

1. No one has an education of such breadth that he cannot learn. 
from others. 

4. See Sept. '94, 1 (a), and Sept. '98, 3 (b). 

5. Boy, boys, girl, boy's, boys', 
man, men, woman, man's, men's. 



58 

box, boxes, , , . 

money, moneys, , money's, . 

he-bear, he-bears, she-bear, he-bear's, he-bears', 

ox, oxen, cow, ox's, oxen's. 

actor, actors, actress, actor's, actors'. 

executor, executors, executrix, executor's, executors'. 

6. (a) Adjective pronoun — object com. of verb will remember iu 
each case. 

(b) What you say is the object of the verb will remember, and what is 
the object of say. 

That is the object of %vill remember, a.n6^ which is the object of say. 

8. The present participle with the verb be as an auxiliary in all the 
modes and tenses makes the progressive form of the verb; as I am torit- 
ing a letter. 

The past participle of a transitive verb is joined to the verb be as an 
auxiliary in all the modes and tenses to make the passive form of the 
verb; as, The letter is xoritten. 

9. See 7, Sept. '97, and 6, June '98. 

10. Whom, is object of preposition than. 



Sept. '99. 

1. (a) See 1, Sept. '94, First Grade. 

(b) Case is that form of a noun or pronoun which shows its relation 
to some other word in a sentence. 

(c) The termination es marked the possessive (or genitive) case in 
the Anglo-Saxon language; and the apostrophe indicates the omission 
of the e from that termination. 

(d) Child, children, 
child's, children's, 
child, children. 

(e) See 4, Sept. 96, Second or Third Grade. 

2. Most nouns form their plural by adding s to the singular; as 
chair, chairs; boy, boys. 

Nouns ending in ch, sh, x, z and s form their plurals by adding es to 
the singular form; as, church, churches; adz, adzes. 

Nouns ending in y not preceded by a vowel, form their plurals by add- 
ing es, the y being changed to i; as city, cities; lady, ladies. 

Some nouns ending in f, or fe form their plurals by adding es, f or 
fe being changed to v; as knife, knives; wife, wives. 

A few nouns retain termination en; as ox, oxen; child, children. 

Some retain foreign plurals; as, larva, larvse; dictum, dicta. 

Some change vowel sound of the word; as, man, men; foot, feet. 

3. See 1, Sept. 1902, First Grade. 

4. (a) See 6, June '9G, Second or Third Grade. 

(b) Able, abler, ablest. 

dangerous, more dangerous, most dangerous. 

(c) manly, manlier, manliest. 

(d) certainly, perhaps. 

(e) Either . . or, both . . and. 

5. (a) Two or more words used together in a sentence to make an 
assertion are called a verb-phrase. 

(b) A complete verb without help, will form a complete predicate; an 
incomplete verb requires the addition of one or more words to complete 
the predicate. 

(c) He that cometh to God must believe that He is. 

(d) God is love. 



59 

(e) The boy can fly his kite. Transitive. 
The bird flies gracefully. Intransitive. 

6. Do, did, done, 
draw, drew, drawn, 
go, went, gone. 

lie, lay, lain, 
blow, blew, blown. 

7. The root of a verb and the form in s are sometimes used to ex- 
press past time; this' is called the historical present. 

(b, c, d) See 7, Sept. '97, First Grade, 
(e) The star blazing in the east is Sirius. 

8. (a) He who steals my purse steals trash, 
(b) I answered him lohen he spoke. 

(e) For us to know our faults is profitable, 
(d) See preface. 
10. (a) Expletive introducing sentence. 

(b) Conj. pronoun equivalent to that tohich. (See 6, Sept. '99, Second 
•Grade. 

(c) Verbal noun object of in. 

(d) Adj. pronoun — indirect object of give understood. 

(e) Adverbial objective modifying catne. 



June 1900. 

1. (a) Grammar is a record of the forms and constructions of a lan- 
guage as employed by the best speakers and writers. 

(b) Language is the expression of thought in words, and is either 
•oral or written. 

(c, d) See 1 Sept., '98, 2d or 3d grade. 

(e) Analysis is the separation of a sentence into its parts. 

2. A compellative is a word used to call, or compel, the attention of 
the one addressed; as, Cassius, I am armed in honesty. Forms no part 
of subject or predicate. Independent. 

3. See 2, Sept. '98, 2d or 3d Grade. 

4. See 4, June '98, Second or Third Grade and 3 Sept. '98, Second or 
Third Grade. 

5. An appositive is a noun used to explain, identify, or emphasize 
another noun or pronoun. Usually set off by commas. 

6. See 5, June '98, First Grade and 3 (d), Sept. '94, Second or Third 
Orade, and 2, June 1902, Second Grade. 

7. Oender is a distinction of nouns and pronouns with regard to sex. 
Person is that distinction of nouns and pronouns which shows whether 

they represent speakers, persons spoken to, or persons spoken of. 

Number is that form of a word which shows whether the word refers 
to one thing or to more than one. 

For case, see 1 (b), Sept. '99, Second or Third Grade. 

8. See 7, Sept. '98, Second or Third Grade. 

9. The boy can fly his kite. The bird can fly swiftly. 
Horses draw wagons. The time draws nigh. 

We taste the apple. Oranges taste sweet. 

Mercy becomes a monarch. The child becomes a man. 

He smiles the smile of joy. Babies smile sweetly. 



Sept. 1900. 

1. See 1, Sept. '98, Second ov Third Grade. See 2, Sept. '98, Second or 
Third Grade. See 6, June 1900, First Grade. 

2. Man and beast live and die. 



• 



60 

He that cannot forgive others, breaks the bridge over which he him- 
self must pass. 

4. (a) See 4 (a) June '98, First Grade and 3 (b) Sept. '98, Second or 
Third Grade. 

(b) N. Sing. N. Plu. Pos. Sing. Pes. Plu. 



man 


men 


man's 


men's 


ox 


oxen 


ox's 


oxen's 


goose 


geese 


goose's 


geese's 


calf 


calves 


calf's 


calves' 


fox 


foxes 


fox's 


foxes' 


pansy 


pansies 


pansy's 


pansies' 


turkey 


turkeys 


turkey's 


turkeys' 


tyro 


tyros 


tyro's 


tyros' 


negro 


negroes 


negro's 


negroes' 


thou 


ye or you 


thy or thine 


your or yo 


Mary 


Marys 


Mary's 


Marys' 


Knight- 


Knight- 


Knight's- 


Knights'- 


templar 


templars 


templar's 


templars' 


son-in-law 


sons-in-laws 


son-in-law's 


sons-in-laws' 



The possessive inflection is rarely used except with nouns denoting 
persons, animals and personified objects. 

6. Descriptive adjectives denote qualities of objects. 

Definitive adjectives denote number or quantity or merely point out 
an object without describing it. Many of the forms are inflected. 

Old, older, oldest. 

bad, worse, worst. 

much, more, most. 

fat, fatter, fattest. 

valuable, more valuable, most valuable. 

clumsy, clumsier, clumsiest. 

ample, ampler, amplest. 

decent, more decent, most decent. 

polite, politer, politest. 

beautiful, more beautiful, most beautiful. 

7. (a) Personal pronouns are those that show by their form whether 
they are in the first, the second, or the third person. See 2, Sept. 9'7, 
Second or Third Grade. 

(b) Compound personal pronouns are formed by adding syllable self 
(plural selves) to many of the personal pronouns. 
For emphasis: I did it myself. 
Reflexive sense; He killed himself 
Second Per. — 

Sing. — thyself, yourself Plu. — Yourselves. 

8. Demonstrative: Sing. — this, that. Plu. — these, those. 
Indefinite: all, any, each, either, few, many, none, one, some. 
Reciprocal: each other and one another. 

Each, either, and neither axe always singular. 

Some, any and no are frequently compounded forming nouns and ad- 
verbs; as, somewhere, anyhody, nobody, one, other and another are in- 
flected for the possessive case; as, one's, others', another's. 



10. Classification 




Modificati 


ons. 




Syntax. 


Verbs 


Kind 


Voice 


Mode 


Tense 


Number 


Person 





t 



61 

June, 1901. 

1. "(a)" 'Parsing aids pupils in becoming familiar with the definitions 
and rules of grammar by frequent repetitions and it teaches them to 
express their knowledge in a systematic manner. It requires pupils to 
examine language and ascertain the nature and relation of words of sen- 
tences; and this not only gives power in the analysis of language, but 

cultivates the habit of abstract thought. 

(b) Parsing is the complement of analysis; the latter resolves the 
sentence into its elements, the former going into detail, describes each 
element as to classification^ modification and construction. 

2. (a) See 1 (b), Sept. '99, Second or Third Grade. 
(b),The boy's hat fell into the lake. 

Boy's — possessive modifier of hat. 
Hat — nom. case, subject of verb fell. 
Lake — obj. case, object of prep. into. 

3. Be, was, been, 
lie, lay, lain, 
lay, laid, laid, 
keep, kept, kept, 
sit, sat, sat. 

hang, hanged, hanged. 

bear, bore, borne. 

hang, hung, hung. 

dream, dreamed or dreamt, dreamed or dreamt. 

4. Much, more, most, 
fit, fitter, fittest. 

far, farther, farthest. 

little, less, least. 

perilous, more perilous, most perilous. 

5. Singular and Plu. Sing, and Plu. 
Nom. — who which 

Pos. — 'Whose __ whose 

Obj. — whom which 

(The other simple relatives have no case forms.) 

€. (a) There are six tenses: 

The present tense expresses action or being as present. 

The past tense expresses action or being as past. 

The future tense expresses action or being as yet to come. 

The present perfect tense expresses action or being as completed at 
tlie present time. 

The past perfect tense expresses action or being as completed at some 
past time. 

The future perfect tense expresses action or being to be completed at 
some future time. 

7. (a) See 6 (a), Sept. 1900, First Grade. 

(b) The subjunctive mode is used (1) to denote a contingency; as, 
Jf he ask a pardon, it will be granted, (a) To express a wish; as. 
Would we were at our journey's end. (3) To express an unreal condi- 
tion; as, Had the leader 'been present, we should not have been defeated. 

8. See 8 (b), Sept. '98, First Grade. 



Sept. 1901. 

1. See 4, June '98, Second or Third Grade. 

2. (a) Inflection is a change in the form of a word to show a change 
in its meaning or use. 

(b) Sing. Plu. 

Nom. — man men 



62 

Pos. — man's men's « 

Obj. — man men 

3. Thieves, briefs, altos, fathers-in-law, forget-me-nots, whose, ne- 
groes', oxen's, lilies', John Joneses'. 

4. See 4, June '97, Second or Third Grade. 

5. See 8 (b), Sept. '98, First Grade; 2 (b), Sept. 1900, Second or 
Third Grade. 

7. (a) See 2, June 1900, Second or Third Grade. 

(b) The boy that studies will learn. 

(c) See 7, June 1900, First Grade, 
(d, e) See 4, Sept. '99, First Grade. 



Nov. 1901. 

1. See 4, June '98, Second or Third Grade. 

4. See 4, June '96, Second or Third Grade. 

5. See 6, June 1900, Second or Third Grade. 

6. See 6, Sept. '97, First Grade. 

8. See 8 (b), Sept. '98, First Grade. 

9. See 8 (b), Sept. '98, First Grade. 
9. See 9, June '99, First Grade. 

10. See 10, June. '96, Second or Third Grade. 



June 1902. 

1. See 10, June '99, First Grade. 

2. See 2 (a), Sept. 1901, Second or Third Grade. 
Goose, goose's, geese, geese's. 

Corresponding masculine, gander not properly speaking an inflection 
of goose. 

3. See 8, Sept. '99, Second or Third Grade. 

4. Altos, chiefs, strata, beaux, bureaus, whose, fox's, his, her or hers, 
its, cherub's, phenomenon's. 

5. See 5, Sept. '98, First Grade. 

7. See 8 (a). Sept '98, First Grade. 

9. (1) Incomplete or copulative verb ; (2, 3) complete. 



Sept. 1902. 

1. Oh! it has a voice for those who on their sick beds lie and waste 
away. 

Oh — interjection; expresses strong feeling and is not related to any 
other word in the sentence. 

it — pronoun; used instead of a noun. 

has — verb; asserting word. 

voice' — noun; a word used as a name. 

for — preposition; shows relation of has to those. 

sick — adjective; describes objects designated by noun l)eds. 

and — conjunction; connects lie and waste. 

away— adverb; modifies meaning of verb waste. 

2. (a) See 1 (b), Sept. '98, Second or Third Grade. 

The subject is the part of a sentence which represents the thing of 
which something is thought. 

The predicate is the part of a sentence which represents what is said 
of the thing named by the subject. 

(b) See 1, Sept. '98, First Grade. 

3. (1) Concrete, (a) Common; as, house. (2) Abstract (a) attrib- 
utive; as, goodness; (b) verbal; as, loving, to see; (3) collective; as, 
jury. 



63 

Proper — strictly proper; as, London; used as common noun; as, a, Cae- 
sar. 

(b) See 7, June 1900, Second or Third Grade. 

4. (a) Inflection, in grammar, is a change in the form of a word to 
show a change in its meaning or use. 

(b) See 1, Sept. '96, Second or Third Grade. 

All except (&), which is not properly speaking an inflection. 

5. boy's, boys' 
fox's, foxes' 

thy or thine, your or yours 
calf's, calves' 
mouse's, mice's 
pony's, ponies' 
donkey's, donkeys' 
burro's, burros' 
son-in-law's, sons-in-law's 

6. (a) See 1, Sept. 1902, First Grade. 
(b) Rich, richer, richest. 

polite, politer, politest, 
much, more, most. 

beautiful, more beautiful, most beautiful, 
able, abler, ablest, 
divine, diviner, divinest. 
old, older or elder, oldest or eldest. 
, holy, holier, holiest, 
ill, worse, worst, 
fore, former, foremost or first. 

7. See 2, Sept. '97, Second or Third Grade. 
See 7 (b), Sept. 1900, Second or Third Grade. 

8. A regular verb is one whose past tense and perfect participle are 
formed by the addition of d or ed to the root; as, The boy rowed his 
boat. 

All other verbs are classed as irregular. Ex. : I saw the tower. 

A transitive verb is one that expresses an action, feeling, or emotion 
which takes effect upon some object; as, Lions eat flesh. 

An intransitive verb is one that expresses being or state, or an action 
that does not take effect upon any object; as. The eagle screams. 

A complete verb is one that without help will form a complete predi- 
cate; as. Trees grow. 

An incomplete verb is one that requires the addition of one or more 
words to complete the predicate; as, Washington crossed the Delaware. 

Copulative verbs are intransitive verbs that require a complement. 
So called because they connect the complement with the subject; as. Life 
is real. 

Intransitive verbs that do not require a complement, and all transitive 
verbs may be resolved (sometimes with no change of meaning) into a 
copula and an attribute. Such verbs are called attributive for they con- 
tain in themselves attributes of the subject. 

Examples : The wind blows. The wind is blowing. 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
FiKST Grade. 



Sept. '94. 

1. (a) The change made in the form of a word, either to show changes 
of its own meaning or to adapt it to be used along with other words. 

(b) Their structure and history. 



64 

(c) Etymology treats of the classification and modification of words; 
Syntax, of the structure of sentences. 

The one deals with the icord as the unit; the other with the sentence. 

2. Nouns regularly form their plurals by adding s to the singular; 
as, boy, boys. 

Nouns ending in the sound of s, x, z, sh, ch, or zh form their plurals 
by adding es. If word ends in silent e, s only is added; as, box, boxes; 
bridge, bridges. 

Nouns ending in y after a consonant, add es for the plural, changing 
the y to i, as lady, ladies. 

A few nouns ending in f or fe form their plurals by changing the f or 
fe to ves; as, wife, wives. 

Some nouns ending in o after a consonant add es to form the plural; 
as, cargo, cargoes. 

3. (a) Simple, complex and compound. 

(b) Declarative, interrogative, imperative and exclamatory. 

4. (a) A phrase is an expression containing two or more words, but 
not having both subject and predicate. 

(b) A claiise is an expression containing both subject and predicate, 
but not making a complete sentence. 

(c) When used with the value of simple adjectives, that is, to modify 
noun or pronoun. 

(d) when used with the value of simple adverbs — that is, to qualify a 
verb, adjective or adverb. 



Oct. '94. 

1. See 3. Sept. '94, First Grade. 

(b) Use — substantive, adjective, adverb. 
Form — simple, complex compound. 

2. Handkerchiefs, sons-in-law, Joneses, chimneys, firemen, larvae, 
Knights-templars, Messrs., 3's. 

4. (a) What! do you mean that? (interjection). 

(b) What man is absolutely happy? (adjective). 

(c) You did what was right (relative pronoun). What did he say? 
(interrogative pronoun). 

(d) What with sickness and lohat with trouble, he soon died, (ad- 
verb = partly). 

10. (a) Conjunction introducing substantive clause. 

(b) Demonstrative adjective modifying following word. 

(c) Used as a noun. Subject of clause. 

(d) Relative pronoun introducing relative clause. 

(e) Dem. adj. modifying "boy." 

(f) Dem. adj. modifying "that." 

(g) Used as noun. Predicate nominative, 
(h) Rel. pronoun introducing clause. 

(i) Dem. adj. modifying "teacher." 



May '95. 

1. Oxen's, children's, foxes', mice's, heroes,' whose, their, Messrs., 
Brown's, Mrs. Clarks', Knights-templars'. 

2. (a) Adjectives of one syllable are regularly compared by adding 
er or r to positive to form comparative degree and est or st to positive 
to form the superlative. 

Dissyllabic adjectives ending in le, re, w, y or me — in short, those 
that can be easily pronounced after adding r or er and st or est — may 
be regularly compared. 



65 

Most adjectives of more than one syllable are compared by joining 
the adverbs more and most to positive degree, 
(b) Thin, thinner, thinnest, 
clever, cleverer, cleverest, 
wooden (not compared.) 

merry, merrier, merriest, 
nigh, nigher, nighest or next, 
ampler, ampler, amplest, 
grey (not compared), 
universal (not compared), 
shy, shyer, shyest. 

beautiful, more beautiful, most beautiful. 
See (a) above. 

3. Personal — I, thou, you; he, she, it. 

Interrogative: who? which? what? — whose? which? what? 

Demonstrative : this, that, these, those. — Entire list. — Entire list. 

Indefinite: one, none, some, any; aught, naught, each; every, either, 
neither, other, else, sundry, several, cretain, all. — One, none, some, any, 
any, every, each, other, another, either, neither, certain, 
aught, naught, each, another, others, either, neither, certain. — One, some, 

Relative : who, which, what, that. 

4. (a) The boy ran a race. 

(b) The meat cuts tough. 

(c) Chalk is white. 

(d) It behooves us to study. 

(e) Intransitive verbs do not admit of a passive voice for the action 
expressed by such verbs being confined entirely to the subject, no object 
is acted upon. 

6. Been, hoped, split, sewed or sewn, sown, frozen, flown, trodden, 
sought, sat. 

10. (a) Conj. pronoun; (b) interrogative pronoun; (c) int. adjec- 
tive; (d) adverb; (e) interjection. 



Sept. 1895. 

1. (a) By a change of form; as, count, countess; hero, heroine. 

(b) By the use of different words; as, hoy, girl. 

(c) By prefixing or affixing another word, making a compound; as, 
manservant, maidservant. 

2. Countess, nun, roe, dam, slattern, hind, nymph, donna, czar- 
ina, marchioness. 

3. Ottomans, aldermen, courtsmartial, mouthfuls, nebulae, foci, hypothe- 
ses, goodness, trout, elves, they, aides-de-camp, billets-doux, porte-mon- 
naie, slaves, nerves, n's, Drs., Messrs. Jones, chimneys. 

4. Bad, worse, worst, 
little, less, least, 
far, farther, farthest. 

fore, former, foremost or first. 

lazy, lazier, laziest. 

ill, worse, worst. 

good-natured, better-natured, best-natured. 

evil, worse, worst. 

old, older or elder, oldest or eldest. 

late, later, latest. 

5. Meaning. — Transitive: strike, drive, kill, eat, drink. 
Intransitive : fall, sleep, go, sit, strive. 

Form. — Regular: love, walk, jump, play, shout. 
Irregular: be, did. see, feel, find. 



66 

7. See 1, Sept. 1902, First Grade. 

8. By address; as, James, bring me a pen. 

By exclamation; as, unhappy vian! he is tired of living. 

By pleonasm; as, John, he is my brother. 

In apposition; as, Paul, the apostle, was beheaded. 

"With participle; as. The day being pelasant, we returned. 

By subscription and inscription; John Smith (signature); Hypatia 
(book). 
June 1896. 



1. Fly's, flies', 
child's, children's, 
brother's, brothers', 
sheep's, sheeps'. 

mother-in-law's, mothers-in-law's, 
mouse's, mice's. 

money's, moneys'. 

portico's, porticoes' ot porticos'. 

chimney's, chimneys'. 

2. See 2, May. 895, First Grade. 

3. What as a relative pronoun is equivalent to "that which," and is 
never used with an antecedent, since the antecedent is included in the 
meaning of the word. 

That is a relative only when who, whom or which can be substituted 
for it. 
As is a relative when it follows such, same or many. 

4. Do what pleases you (noun). 

What is your name? (interrogative pronoun). 

What man is perfect? (adjective). 

What by force, and what by strategem, he finally succeeded (adverb). 

What! is it possible? (interjection). 

8. Analysis is more important than parsing for it reveals more clearly 
the structure of the sentence. 

9. Analysis is the separating of a sentence into its elements; the dia- 
gram — being a picture of the offices and relations of the different parts 
of a sentence — shows both the analysis and synthesis of the sentence. 
Relation of diagramming to analysis somewhat analogous to that exist- 
ing between geometrical figures and demonstration of proposition. 



Sept. 1896. 

1. Man's, men's, 
brother-in-law's, brothers-in-law's, 
country's, countries'. 

his, their or theirs, 
enemy's, enemies'. 

2. staff, staves (sticks or canes); staff, staffs (military term). 
Nouns regularly form plural by adding s to singular. Some nouns 

change f or fe into ves. Nouns in ff except staff ( 1 ) are regular. 

Miss Smith, Misses Smith or Miss Smiths. 

Mrs. Jones, Mcs. Joneses. 

Compounds consisting of a proper name, preceded by a title, form the 
plural by varying either the title or the name; but when title Mrs. is 
used the name is usualy varied. 

Dr. Coe and Lee, Drs. Coe and Lee. 

A title used with two or more different names is made plural. 

Fish, fish (collection); fish, fishes (individuals). 

Where singular ends in a sound that cannot unite with *, es is added. 



67 

Heathen, heathen or heathens. 

Four pair, four pair. 

By score, by scores. 

Some nouns have same form in both numbers when used with numer- 
als, but add s in other cases. 

Politics. 

Form does not vary; originally plural, now treated as singular. 

3. See 5, May '95, Second Grade. 

6. Pronoun must agree in number with its antecedent. Every being 
grammatically singular requires singular pronoun. 

Verb must agree in number with its subject. 



June 1897. 

1. (a) Each season has its own peculiar charm (pro. adj.). 
Summer and winter — each has its charm (pro). 

(b) Whatever is done must be done quickly (com. rel.). 

(c) The sound broke the charmed silence (part. adj.). 
The music was charming (part. adj.). 

(d) To be or not to be is the question (inf. as noun). 

(e) We will strive to please you (inf. as adv. mod.). 

2. The man who serves his day and generation well dies when his 
allotted work is done, but the influence which he leaves will live while 
time lasts. 

4. Voice, mode, tense, number, and person. 

6. (a) What (1) adv. meaning partly, modifies phrase "with en- 
treaty." 

What (2) adv. meaning, partly modifies phrase "with threatening." 
(b) Worth — pred. adj. While — adverbial objective modifying worth. 

(d) Worse — adj. use^ as a noun after "for" understood. Objective case. 

(e) Once — adverbial objective modifying "forgive." Just — adjective 
modifying "once". 

7. "Oh! it has a voice for those who on their sick beds lie and waste 
away." 

8. Lie, lay, lain. 
sow, sowed, sown, 
bare, bore, borne, 
hew, hewed, hewn, 
hold, held, held, 
lay, lay, laid. 

seethe, seethed, seethed or sodden, 
shake, shook, shaken, 
strow, strowed, strown or strowed. 
strive, strove, striven. 



Sept. '97. 
7. See 6, June '98, Second Grade. 



June 1898. 

1. (a) English grammar teaches the usage of our best writers and 
speakers and reveals the principles that underlie their use of language. 

(b) By practical language lessons. 

2. The sentence and its elements should be taught first, for it is the 
true grammatical unit — words being but fractional units of the integral 
sentence. Principles and rules should be learned from study of lan- 
guage and not the latter from the former. 

3. (a) A declarative sentence is one that declares or asserts a fact. 
An interrogative sentence is one that asks a question. 



68 ' ' 

An imperative sentence is one that makes a command or an earnest 
request. 

An exclamatory sentence is one that expresses strong feeling or emo- 
tion. 

(b) Mary studies lier lessons (declarative,'. 

Mary, do you study you lessons? I interrogative). 

Mary, study you lessons, (imperative). 

How Mary studies her lessons! (exclamatory). 

4. See 1, Sept. '94, First Grade and 3 (b), Sept. '98, Second or Third 
Grade. 

5. Sing., Nom. and Obj. — thyself or yourself. 
Plural, Nom. and Obj. — yourselves. 

See 2, June '9G and 2, Sept. '97, Second or Third Grade, 
man-of-war, men-of-war. 
man-of-war's, men-of-war's, 
man-of-war, men-of-war. 

6. Hot, hotter, hottest. 

cheerful, more cheerful, most cheerful. 

sincere, sincerer, sincerest. 

g,ble, abler, ablest, 

capable, capabler, capablest. 

angry, angrier, angriest. 

fore, former, foremost or first. 

well, better, best. 

worldly, worldlier, worldliest. 

-much, more, most. 
Rules: see 2 (a) May '95, First Grade. 

10. Wherever — compound relative pronoun; subject of studies; noun 
clause "whoever studies" subject of sentence. 

Every — adjective pronoun performing office of adjective; modifies 
"gift." 

Above — adverb used as a noun; object of prep, "from." 
All — adverb modifying "awry." 

All— adjective pronoun performing office of noun; pred. nom. 
Like — adjective modifying "cattle." 

Than — usually a conjunction; in this case a preposition. 
None — adjective pronoun subject of verb "sat." 
Sept. 1898. 

1. (a) See 3, June '98, First Grade. 

(b) The way of the Lord is strength to the upright (simple). 
Man dies, but his memory lives (compound). 
"When pride cometh, then cometh shame (complex). 
He that hath pity upon the poor lendeth unto the Lord, and that 
which he hath given will he pay him again (compound-complex). 

2. Thy or thine, your or yours, 
goose's, geese's. 

its, their or theirs 

deer's, deer's. 

mouse's, mice's. 

negro's, negroes'. 

tyro's, tyros'. 

staff's, staves' (sticks), staffs' (military). 

son-in-law's, sons-in-law's. 

Knight-templar's, Knights-templars'. 

3. My, thy and your are used when thing possessed is mentioned; 
mine, thine and yours when thing possessed is omitted. 

4. (1) An appositive is an explanatory modifier. 



69 

{'2> The principal appositive only takes the sign and should be placed 
immediately preceding the thing possessed. 

(3) This was Franklin the philosopher and statesman's motto. 

5. (1) To denote mere futurity, shall is used in the first person and 
will in the second and third. 

(2) To express determination loill is used in the first person and shall 
in the second and third. 

(3) In asking questions shall or will is used according as one or the 
other is to be used in reply. 

6. (a) The present participle is formed by adding ing to the verb 
root; the perfect by adding ed to the verb root (irregular verbs, how- 
ever, have a variety of endings for this form; as, d, t, n or none at all)., 
the compound participle is a combination of a simple participle with one 
of the auxiliary participles being, having or having been. 

(b) A verbal noun in ing is the name of an action and hence may be 
used as the subject or object of a verb. 

A verbal adjective in ing is a descriptive word used to qualify ^nouns. 
as other adjectives do. 

(c) To see is to believe — equivalent to seeing is believing. 

(d) Rise, rises, rising, rose, risen. 
Talk, talks, talking, talked. 

(d) Verbs that have same form for past tense and past participle 
have only four forms; those that have distinct forms for each have 
five. 

(e) See 8, Sept. 1902, Second or Third Grade. 
8. Noun — 

To live for others is noble (subject). 

We should learn to govern ourselves (object of verb). 

He is about to leave us (object of prep.) 

To bear our fate is to conquer it (pred. nom.). 

Delightful task! to rear the tender thought (explanatory mod.). 
Adjective — His title to command rested on force (mod. of "title.") 
Adverb — 'We will strive to learn (mod. of "please"). 
Noun Clause — 

When he will come is not known (subject of sentence). 

We know that the earth is round (object of verb). 

Things are not what they seem (comp. of verb be). 

The fact, that he is not here, is significant (appositive). 

Give careful attention to what you read (object of prep.) 



June 1899. "; 

4. See 5, June '99, Second and Third Grade, 

5. See 1, Sept. 1902, First Grade. 

6. See 7, June '98, Second or Third Grade. 

8. (a) See 8, June '98, Second or Third Grade. 

(b) As the non-restrictive clause adds a thought, or makes an explana- 
tion in a parenthetical sense, it must be set off from the rest of the 
sentence by a comma. 

9. Neither you nor I can go (correlative). 

A fish breathes though it has no lungs (subordinate). 
Longfellow is the poet who wrote "Evangeline" (conj. pronoun). 
I love him because he is kind (conj. adverb). 
The tree lies where it fell . . (com. conj. adverb). 

10. That day was gloomy (adjective). 

He is one that lives for others (conj. pronoun). 
They say that we are weak (conjunction). 
That is preferred (adj. pronoun). 



70 

Sept. '99. 

1. By the conjugation of a verb is meant an orderly arrangement of 
its forms in the different modes and tenses. 

2. (a) See 8, June '99, Second or Third Grade, 
(b) (1) Verbal noun, object of at. 

(2) Predicate adjective, or imperfect participle, complement of the 
verb is; combined with the verb is, it makes the progressive form of the 
verb play. 

(3) Verbal adjective modifying the noun boy. 

3. (a) See 4, Sept. '94, First Grade. 

(b) Adjective adverbial and substantive. 

(c) See 8 (b), Sept. '98, First Grade. 

4. (a) The speaker addressing the audience is a deep thinker. Si- 
mon Peter having a sword, drew it. 

(b) The cackling of geese saved Rome. 

True worth is in being not seeming. 

To succeed requires perseverance. 

6. Do — ^Infinitive; principal word of infinitive phrase. 

All — Adjective pronoun, object of do. 

Complain — Infinitive, object of prep, except. 

What — Conj. pronoun equivalent to ' that which. 

Into — Preposition, introducing phrase. 

8. (a) See 4 (a), Sept. '94, First Grade. 

(b) See 1 (a), Sept. '94, First Grade. 

(c) An expletive is a word used in such a way as to give fulness to a 
sentence, or to render it agreeable to the ear. 

(d) Reject such as are shop-worn (conj. pronoun). 

The house was abandoned, as it was unsafe (conjunction). 

What other toil is as hard? (adverb). 

I con3ulted him as a physician (preposition (or sign of apposition).). 

9. (a) Any noun not ending in s must add the apostrophe and s ('s) 
to denote possession. 

A plural noun ending in s expresses ownership by addition of apos- 
trophe only. If plural does not end in s, ownership is expressed in the 
same way as in singular nouns. 

Singular proper nouns ending in s take the full possessive sign ('s) 
to denote possession. 

(a) See 2, Sept. '97, Second or Third Grade, 
man, men 
man's, men's 
man, men 
bird, birds 
bird's, birds' 
bird, birds j 

10. Personal — 

He has arrived (simple). 

You yourself should go (compound). 
Relative — 
Whoever studies will learn (compound). 

I remember ivhat you said (double relative, simple). 
Take whatever seems best (double relative, compound). 
Interrogative — ; 

Who is there? 
Adjective — • ' 

That book is mine (demonstrative). 

Some men are scholars (indefinite). 

He gave each boy an apple (distributive). ! 

Each child loves the other (reciprocal). 



71 

June 900. 

1. See 1, Sept. '98, First Grade. 

2. Boy's, boys'; plaintiff's, plaintiffs'; bridegroom's, bridegrooms'. 
For other forms, see 4, Sept. 1900, Second Grade. 

3. See 5, Sept. '98, First Grade. 

4. Noun — 

Subject of a sentence. 

Object of a transitive verb. 

Complement of a verb. 

Appositive. 

Object of for. 

Independent. 
Adjective. 

Adverb. i" i | 

He came to see me (infin. phrase used as adv.; mod. came; expresses 
purpose. 

I told him to come home. 

5. See 8, June '99, First Grade. 

6. A noun clause is one performing the office of a noun; as. That the 
earth is round has been proved. 

The object complement of a verb is that part of the predicate of a sen- 
tence which represents the receiver of the action; as, Brutus stabbed 
€aesar. 

An attribute complement is a noun, pronoun, or adjective completing 
the predicate of a sentence, and relating to the subject; as. He is a 
teacher: I am he; You are weary. 

7. Conjunctive adverbs are words that perform, at the same time, 
the office of a conjunction and of an adverb; as, We listen when pleas- 
ure calls, 

8. A noun or pronoun used to complete the meaning of a transitive 
verb is called a direct object; as, I have the book. 

When added to a verb to denote that to or for which anything is, or 
is done, or that from which anything proceeds, it is called an indirect ob- 
ject; as, I bought him a book. 



Sept. 1900. 

1. In such cases, the real subject follows the verb and there is an ex- 
pletive — ^used merely to introduce the sentence. 

It, the apparent subject, is an expletive — serving merely to introduce 
the predicate and give it a prominent place. 

2. See 8, June 99, First Grade. 

4. (a) Who (whose, whom), which and what when used in asking 
questions and not followed by a noun, are interrogative pronouns; 
whose, which and what used before nouns in questions are interrogative 
adjectives. 

(b) A conjunctive pronoun is one that connects a clause of which it 
forms a part to some word which the clause modifies, usually called rel- 
ative pronouns. Who, which what, and that are used as conjunctive pro- 
nouns — also as, after the words such, many and same. 

The conjunctive pronoun that is preferred to who or which when the 
antecedent includes both persons and things, and usually after an adjec- 
tive in the superlative degree. 

5. (a) The man saw me. The man rode by. 
The boy flies his kite. The bird flies swiftly. 

(b) Trees grow. Dewey destroyed the Spanish fleet. 

6. (a) The subjunctive mode is used only in subjoined dependent 
propositions. 



72 



(b) It has only three tenses; viz., present, past and past perfect, 

(c) As regards terminations, — s gives place to the root of the verb 
as, If it rai7i (not rains) I shall not go. 

(d) If the weather he fine {to-morrow) , the company will be large. 
Here be, though present in form, expresses future time. 

If the weather were fine (to-day), the ship would sail. 

In this sentence, tcere is past in form, but expresses present time. 

(e) "When the conjunction is omitted before subjunctive clause, the 
first auxiliary precedes subject; as, Had I been you, I would have spoken. 

8. See 9, June '99, Second or Third Grade. 

9. See 8, Sept. 98, First Grade. 



^■tl 



June 1901. 

1. See 1 and 2, Oct. '94, Second or Third Grade. 

2. (a) See 5, Sept. '97, Second Grade. 

(b) See 1, Sept. '94, First Grade. 

(c) Prince, prince's, princes, princes', princess. 

3. (a) Beeves, beliefs, pennies, attorneys, 5's. 

(b) Moses', ladies', people's, McKinley-Roosevelt's, fox's. 

4. See 7, Sept. '98, Second Grade. 

5. See 4, June '98, Second Grade, 
7. See 6, Jne 1901, Second Grade. 

Present tense in its simple form is the root form of the verb. 

Past tense is formed (a) by a change in the body of the word; (b) 
by adding d or ed to the present. 

Perfect tenses, except in the progressive form, are formed by means of 
the indefinite present, past and future of have, followed by the past par- 
ticiple. 

The progressive tenses are formed by the parts of the verb be; fol- 
lowed by the imperfect participle. 

The future tenses are formed by means of the auxiliary verbs shall 
and will followed by the infinitive mode. 

9. See 6, June '98, Second Grade. 



Sept. 1901. 

1. (a) See 2, Sept. '94, First Grade. 

(b) See 1, Sept. '95. 

(c) See 9, Sept, 99, First Grade. 

2. See 5, June '99, First Grade. 

See 4, June '97, Second or Third Grade, 

See 10, Sept. '99, First Grade. 

See 3, Sept. 99, Second or Third Grade. 

3. See 3, Oct. '94, Second or Third Grade. 
See 3, Sept. '94, Second or Third Grade. 
See 6, June '96, Second or Third Grade. 

4. Active — He gave me a dollar. 

Passive — A dollar was given me by him, I was given a dollar by him. 
Active — The tailor made me a coat. 
Passive — A coat was made for me by the tailor. 
Active — I promised him a book. 

Passive — He was promised a book by me. A book was promised him: 
by me. 
Active — ^My friend offered me a position. 
Passive — ^I was o:ffered a position by my friend. 
Passive — ^A position was offered me by my friend. 
Active — The dealer sold me a book. 



73 

Passive — I was sold a book by the dealer. A book was sold me by tbe 
dealer, 

5. An objective attribute is a noun or adjective showing the office, 
name, class, or quality conferred through the action expressed by the 
verb. 

Ophelia thought Hamlet really insane (adjective). 

Teaching had made her irritable (adjective). 

We should consider time as a sacred trust (noun). 

8, 9. See 8, Sept. '98, First Grade, 



Nov. 1901. 

1. (a) See 2, Sept. '94, First Grade, 
(b) See 1, Sept. '95. 

(e) See 9, Sept. '99, First Grade. 

2. See 2, Sept. 1901, First Grade. 

3. See 3, June '96, First Grade. 

4. See 4, May '95, First Grade. 

5. See 8, June '99, First Grade. 

6. See 8 (a), Sept. '98, First Grade. 



June 3, 1902. 

1. See G, June '96, Second or Third Grade. 

See 1 (a), Sept. '94, First Grade. 

Classifying the words of a sentence as parts of speech and naming 
their relations to other words is called parsing. 

4. See 8 (b), Sept. 98, First Grade. 

5. See 5, June 1900. 

6. See 10, June '98, Second or Third Grade. 

7. See 4, June '98, Second or Third Grade. 



Sept. 1902. 




NOUN. 


VERB. 


I. Common 


I. Form 


1. Concrete 


1. Regular 


2. Abstract 


2. Irregular 


3. Collective 


3. Redundant 


II. Proper 


4. Defective 




II. Use 


PRONOUN. 


1. Transitive 


I. Personal 


2. Intransitive 


1. Simple 


III. Rank 


2. Compound 


1. Principal 


II. Relative 


2. Auxiliary 


1. Simple 


ADVERB. 


2. Compound 


I. Use 


3. Double relative 


1. Simple 


III. Interrogation 


2. Interrogative 


IV. Demonstrative 


3. Conjunctive 


V. Indefinite 


II. Meaning 




1. Place 


ADJECTIVE. 


2. Time 


I. Quality 


3. Number 


1. Common 


4. Manner 


2. Proper 


5. Degree 


II. Quantity 


6. Cause 


1. Cardinal numerals 


7. Assertion and denial 



74 



III. 



2. 


Indefinites 

[ONSTRATIVE 


CONJUNCTION. 
I. Co-ordinate 


1. 


Articles 


1. Copulative 


2. 


Ordinal numerals 


2. Disjunctive 


3. 


Pronominals 


3. Adversative 

4. Illative 
II. Subordinate 

1. Time 

2. Reason or cause 

3. Supposition or condition 


5. 


Comparison 


4. End or purpose 



2. (a) See 2, Sept. '96, Second or Third Grade. 
See 4, June '98, First Grade. 

(b) Inflections may be made in four ways: 

(1) By adding a letter or syllable (see 4, May '95, Second Grade). 

(2) By an internal change in the word; as, ride, rode; man, men. 

(3) By the use of helping words; as, learn, will learn, have learned, 
had learned; more happy, etc. 

(4) By the use of word quite different in spelling and sound; as, 
be, am, is, was; good, better, best. 

3. (a) See 4 (a, b), Sept. '94, First Grade. 

(b) Nouns, pronouns, verbs, adjectives and adverbs. 

See 3. June 1900. Second or Third Grade. 

The eye is the window of the soul. 

/ am here without hope. 

We will strive to please you. 

You are prompt to obey. 

The retreat began a day later. 

4. The principal parts of a verb — the three forms from which the 
other parts are derived — are the root, the past tense, and the perfect par- 
ticiple; as, love^-loved, loved; do, did, done. 

The tenses are named present, past, or future, according as they ex- 
press present, past or future time. These are called the three primary 
tenses; as, I see, I saw, I shall see. 

Historical present: see 7 (a), Sept. '99, Second or Third Grade. 

The perfect participle — representing action as completed — is formed 
from many verbs by adding ed to the root; as, refuse, refiised. From 
certain other verbs is formed irregularly; as, do, done. 

The participle in ing is called an imperfect participle because it repre- 
sents an action or state as incomplete, or continuing. Combined with 
some form of be, makes progressive form of the verb from which it is 
derived; as, is speaking. 

A verbal adjective is a participle or an infinitive performing the office 
of an adjective. 

A verbal noun is a participle or an infinitive performing the office of 
an adjective. 

A verbal noun is a participle or an infinitive used as a noun. See 4, 
Sept. '99, First Grade. 

The ancient form-, or solemn style, is used in the Bible, in religious 
worship, and sometimes in poetry and burlesque; as, art, wast, wert, 
Shalt or wilt, hast, hadst, workest, workedst, worketh, doth, hath. 

The emphatic form represents an act with emphasis; as, I do write. 
He did go. 

Used in the present and past indicative and subjunctive, and in the 
present imperative. Formed by prefixing the present and past tenses of 
to do to the simple form of the verb. 



75 

Two or more words used together in a sentence to make an assertion, 
are called a verb phrase; as you have been whispering. 

Potential verb phrases express action, being or state, as possible, nec- 
essary, obligatory, etc.; as, You can learn. 

(1) I think that he is right. (2) I think him to be right. 

First sentence containing an objective noun clause; second an objec- 
tive noun phrase equivalent in meaning to the clause. The meaning of 
the two sentences is the same, but the clause has been abridged to a 
phrase. These are called grammatical equivalents. 

5. See 6, Sept. 1900, First Grade. 

6. See 8 (a), Sept. '98, First Grade. 

7. (a) See 8 (b), Sept. '98, First Grade. 

(b) When pleasure calls, we listen, (conjunctive adverb). 

ivhat is approved is not always just. (com. conjunctive pronoun). 

There is no occasion for anxiety, (conj. adverb). 

That plants do grow is learned from observation, (conjunction). 



GEOGRAPHY. 

Sept. '94. — Second Grade. 

1. (a) Fifteen degrees, (b) Every circle contains 360 degrees. The 
-earth, rotating on its axis, requires twenty-four hours (approximately) 
for each rotation. One twenty-fourth of three hundred and sixty de- 
grees is fifteen degrees; hence the earth travels through fifteen degrees 
of longitude in one hour of time. 



2 . States. 
Louisiana 



Mississippi 

Arkansas 

Tennessee 

Missouri 

Kentucky 

Illinois 

Iowa 

Wisconsin 
Minnesota 



Cities. Industries. 

New Orleans Production of cotton. 

Production of sugar-cane. 
Baton Rouge Cotton-shipping. 
Natchez Manufacture of cottonseed-oil. 

Vicksburg Cattle-raising. 

Production of corn, lumbering. 
Memphis Tobacco-raising, sheep-raising. 

St. Louis Production of wheat. 

Manufacture of flour. 
Quincy Manufacture of agricultural implements. 

Davenport Dairying. 

Dubuque Hog-raising; production of hay. 

LaCrosse Coalmining. 

St. Paul Fruit-raising; production of oats, rye 

and barley. 



3. Nova Scotia, in Canada, on Atlantic coast, with Gulf of St. Law- 
rence north, the Atlantic east, Bay of Fundy south, and New Brunswick 
west. 

Florida — projects from south-eastern coast of the United States; Geor- 
gia and Alabama north, Atlantic Ocean east and south, and Gulf of Mex- 
ico and Alabama west. 

Yucatan — projects into the Gulf of Mexico, and is bounded on north, 
east and west by it; Central America is south. 

Lower California belongs to Mexico, California is north, Gulf of Califor- 
nia on east and Pacific Ocean south and west. 

Alaska Peninsula — projects from northwest coast of North America; 
Behring Sea, and mainland north, Pacific Ocean, east, south and west. 

4. Countries. Capital. Form of Government. 



76 



Venezuela 
Guiana 



Caracas 

British — Georgetown. 

Dutcla — Paramaribo. 

French — Cayenne. 

Rio Janeiro. 

La Paz. 

Asuncion. 

Montevideo. 

Buenos Ayres. 

Santiago. 

Lima. 

Quito. 

Bogota. 



Republican. 

Colonial dependencies. 

Republican. 
Republican. 
Republican. 
Republican. 
Republican. 
Republican. 
Republican. 
Republican. 
Republican. 
Republican. 



Brazil 
Bolivia 
Paraguay- 
Uruguay 
Argentina 
Chile 
Peru 
Ecuador 
Colombia 

5. Cuba, Havana; Haiti, Santo Domingo; Jamaica, Kingston; Porto 
Bico, San Juan. 

G. (a) 180 degrees either east or west, (b) 90 degrees either north- 
or south, (c) Parallels on which longitude is measured are circles; 
hence contain 360 degrees; therefore 180 degrees east and 180 degrees- 
west are identical, being half the distance around the earth. 

Latitude is measured on the meridians north and south of the equa- 
tor, each meridian being half a circle or ISO degrees. Hence 90 degrees,. 
or one fourth an entire circle, falls at the poles and is the greatest 
latitude possible to a place. 

7. (a) The Apalachicola and Suwanee Rivers. 

8. (a) The most important railroad systems are the Atlantic Coast 
Line, Seaboard Air Line. Florida East Coast System, Georgia Southera 
and Florida^ and the Louisville and Nashville. 

(b) Over three thousand miles. 

9-10. Jacksonville — Northeastern part of Florida near the mouth of 
St. Johns river. 

Key West — Situated on one of most western of the Florida Keys south- 
west of the mainland. 

Pensacola — Situated in the northwestern part of the State on Pensa- 
cola Bay, an arm of the Gulf of Mexico. 

Tampa — On western coast at head of Tampa Bay. 



Sept '94— First Grade. 

1. The axis of the earth is the diameter on which it performs itst 
diurnal rotations. 

2. North Frigid Zone (from Arctic Circle to North Pole), 2Si4° irt 
width. North Temperate Zone 43° in width. Torrid Zone 47° in widths 
South Temperate Zone 43° in width. South Frigid Zone (from Antarc- 
tic Circle to South Pole) 23i^° in width. 

3. (a) England; Mediterranean and Red Seas. 

4. Lake Michigan, Strait of Mackinac, Lake Huron, St. Clair River 
and Lake, Detroit River, Lake Erie, Erie Canal, Hudson River, New 
York Bay, Atlantic Ocean, Strait of Gibraltar, Mediterranean and Aegean 
Seas, Strait of Dardanelles, Sea of Marmora, the Bosphorus, Black Sea„ 
and Danube River. 

5. (a) United States, Portugal, Spain, Italy, Turkish and Russiart 
Empires, Bokara, China, Korea and Japan. 

(b) California, Nevada, Utah, Colorado, Missouri, Illinois, Indiana^ 
Ohio, West Virginia, Pennsylvania and New Jersey. 

6. (a) In Holland, (b) To redeem the land which is very low, front 
the sea. 

7. Ivory, diamonds, gold, ostrich plumes, India rubber, hides, cotton^ 
wool, coffee and palm-oil. 



77 

8. Spain, Madrid; France, Paris; Italy, Rome; Austria-Hungary, 
Vienna; Turkey, Constantinople; Greece, Athens. 

9. Europe and North America belong to the same realm of animal 
life, and hence resemble each other. Most of our domestic animals are 
natives to Europe though imported to America by the early settlers. 

Many fur-bearing animals are found in the northern part of both con- 
tinents, as are also the elk, of Europe and his American cousin the 
moose. The reindeer belongs to both Europe and America, the bear 
also is indigenous to both. Animals living in the highlands are the big- 
horn of America and the chamois and ibex of the Alpine region. 

10. London — In England on Thames River. 
Paris — France on Seine. 

Berlin — Germany, on the Elbe. 
Vienna — ^Austria-Hungary, Danube River. 
St. Petersburg — Russia, on Gulf of Finland. 
Constantinople — Turkey, on the Bosphorus. 



Oct. 94. 

1. A peninsular kingdom, bounded by Siberia and China on the north 
and west and projecting from the mainland of Asia in a southeasternly 
direction. It separates the Sea of Japan from the Yellow Sea. 

2. (a) The group of islands known by that name constitutes the 
Japanese Empire, (b) Tokyo, (c) Population, 46,495,000. (d) Exports: 
rice, silk and tea. (e) The Japanese are the most intelligent and pro- 
gressive of Asiatic people. They possess good schools, railway and tel- 
egraph lines, and manufactories. 

3. (a) The Chinese Empire is bounded on the north by the Russian 
Empire; east by Korea, Yellow Sea, East China Sea and Pacific Ocean; 
south by Indo-China, Hindustan and Himalaya Mountains; and on the 
"west by the Russian Empire, Hindoostan and the Thian Shan Moun- 
tains. 

(b) Hoang, Yangste and Si Rivers. 

(c) Yellow Sea, East and South China Seas — all arms of the Pacific 
Ocean. 

(d) Pekin, Tientsin. Canton, Shanghai, Hong Kong and Fuchan. 

(e) Tea and silk. 

4. See (7) Sept. 1900. 

5. "Western Hemisphere — Capes Horn and Blanco, South America. 
Eastern Hemisphere — ^Cape of Good Hope, Africa, and Cape Otway, 

Australia. 

6. (a) Sues — Canal connecting Mediterranean and- Red Seas. 

(b) Bogota — City, capital of Colombia, South America. 

(c) Dneiper — River in Russia flowing into Black Sea. 

St. EUas — Mountain in Canada, second highest peak in North Amer- 
ica. 

(e) Blanco — Cape on west coast of Africa and also on southeast coast 
of South America. 

7. (a) Nearest distance 48° or 3320 statute miles. 

(b) When noon Thursday at 137° east longitude, it lacks twelve min- 
utes of four o'clock P. M. Wednesday at 175° west longitude. 

8. The cutting of the Panama Canal would afford a much shorter 
and hence cheaper water route between Atlantic ports of Europe and 
America and North and South America ports on the Pacific, and would 
facilitate commerce between the former and the Orient, Australia and 
the Islands of the Pacific. 

9. The Mississippi rising in Lake Itasca in northern Minnesota flows 
southward to the Gulf of Mexico. It drains an area of 1,250,000 square 
miles. As it is navigable as far as St. Paul, it furnishes water transpor- 



vs 

tation for all the Central States to the Gulf, and thence to the Atlantic. 
By the Illinois and Michigan Canal it is connected also with Chicago 
and the Great Lakes. 

10. Occasional elementary lessons given orally and laying the foun- 
dation for the formal study of geography, should be a part of the first 
three years of school work. After that the book should be taken up 
and the study pursued systematically. 



May '95. 

1. Promontory — A high point of land on rock projecting into the sea 
beyond the coast line; a headland. 

Peninsula — A portion of land nearly surrounded by water. 
Inlet — A bay or recess in the shore of the sea, of a lake or large river. 
Sound — A narrow passage of water, or a strait between the main- 
land and an island. 
Strait — A narrow body of water joining two larger bodies of water. 

2. Japan comprises a chain of islands lying east of Asia, having an 
area of 161,135 square miles. Much of its surface is ragged and vol- 
canoes abound. The rivers though short are useful. The people are 
Mongolians and number 46,495,000. They are noted for the weaving 
of silk and carving of ivory; possess large manufactories for the pro- 
duction of glass, paper, cotton, silk and iron, and export silk, rice and 
tea. 

3. (a) See (1) Oct. '94. (b) The peninsula is traversed by moun- 
tains along its northeast coast, but. little is known of the interior, (c) 
The people,, numbering 9,160,000, resemble the Chinese in appearance, 
manners and customs, (d) Agriculture is the chief industry, and the 
principal products are rice, beans and wheat. Gold, iron, copper and 
coal are mined, but not extensively. 

4. (a) Latitude is the distance north or south of the equator, meas- 
ured upon a meridian. Longitude is the distance either east or west 
from any given meridian and is measured on the parallels and the 
equator. 

(b) A degree of longitude is greater in Florida than in Michigan, be- 
cause parallels decrease in circumference as they approach the poles 
but every circle contains 360°, therefore the length of a degree varies 
with its distance from the equator. 

5. (a) "The physical features of a country have much to do with 
moulding the character and shaping the history of its people. Moun- 
tains isolating neighboring communities and shutting out conquering 
races, foster the spirit of local patriotism and preserve freedom." (b) 
Mountain barriers are unfavorable to routes of trade, while "the sea, in- 
viting abroad, and rendering intercourse with distant countries easy, 
awakens the spirit of adventure and develops commercial enterprise." 
In like manner the industries of a country are determined largely by its 
physical features. Temperate climate and fertile soil favoring agricul- 
ture; convenient fuel supply and water-power, manufacturing; mineral 
deposits, mining, etc. 

6. (a) Twenty -two. (b) Prussia, Bavaria, Wurtemburg and Badin. 
(c) The Germans are industrious and celebrated for their learning. 

■Their soldiers are said to be the best disciplined in the world. 

(d) Farming, mining, and manufactures. The chief articles of man- 
ufacture are cloth, iron and steel goods, beet sugar, liquors, glass and 
porcelain. 

(e) Compulsory system of education; all departments under super- 
vision of the State; best in Europe. 

7. (a) Mexico — In shape, a rude triangle, is situated south of the 
United States, its eastern shores being washed by the Gulf of Mexico, 



79 

and its western by the Pacific Ocean. To the south eastward lies Cen- 
tral America, 

(b) Its shores afford no good harbors and along the Gulf coast, which 
is fringed with long sand-bars, the climate is exceedingly unhealthful. 
(c) With the exception of narrow coast plains, it is a lofty highland, 
narrow in the south but broad in the north where it merges into the 
Rocky Mountains. The population consists of Indians and Caucasians 
of Spanish descent. Mexico is a republic. 

8. Cuba contains 45,884 square miles, and is about as large as Penn- 
sylvania; its surface is mainly lowland; its people are Caucasians of 
Spanish decent and negroes with a few Chinese. Tropical fruits, sug- 
ar, coffee and tobacco are the chief productions. Government is repub- 
lican in form. 

10. Florida is divided by the Apalachicola and Suwanee Rivers into 
West, Middle and East Florida. 

(b) See Preface. 



Sept. '95. 

1. (a) The equator is a great circle equally distant from the poles. 

(b) Meridian circles are great circles conceived to be drawn so as to 
pass through the poles. 

A meridian is half a meridian circle and terminates at the poles. 

Parallels are those imaginary circles drawn east and west around the 
earth parallel with the equator. 

Tropic of Cancer and Capricorn, those parallels 23i^° north and south 
of the equator respectively and marking the boundary between the tor- 
rid and temperate zones. 

Arctic and Antarctic Circles, those parallels lying 66i/^° north and 
south of the equator respectively and making the boundary between the 
frigid and temperate zones. 

2. North and South Frigid Zones, boundaries, the Arctic and Ant- 
artic circles respectively, width from pole to circle 1625 5-12 miles 
each; North and South Temperate Zones, the former bounded on the 
north by the Arctic Circle and on the south by the Tropic of Cancer, 
the latter on the north by the Tropic of Capricorn and on the south by 
the Anartic Circle, width of each 2974 1 -6 miles each. Torrid Zone, bounded 
by the Tropics, width, 3250 5-6 miles. 

3. In a country having sea coast and good harbors, fishing and com- 
merce naturally engage the attention of the people; in one having rich, 
fertile land, agriculture and stock-raising; while in a mountainous 
country, mining is a chief industry and if the streams furnish abund- 
ant waterpower manufacturing enterprises thrive. 

4. See Second Grade (4), Sept. '94. 

5. See (8), May '95. 

6. See (8), Oct. '94. 

7. The Missouri-Mississippi, the Colorado, Columbia and Rio Grande 
river systems. 

8. (a, b). See 6 (a and b). May '95. 

(c) The German Empire is a federal State, composed of four king- 
doms, six grand duchies, five duchies, seven principalities, three free 
cities and the imperial domain of Alsace-Lorraine. These lands being 
united in a great corporation of public law under the hereditary presi- 
dency of the king of Prussia. 

The Bundesrath or upper house of the legislature is in form and 
theory a body of ambassadors. Residuary legatee of the constitution. 
Possesses, in addition to legislative functions, administrative function 
of oversight, also judicial functions. In this body states are unequally 
represented according to size. 



80 

The ReicJistag represents the whole German people. Representation 
on basis of one representative to every one hundred thousand inhabi- 
tants. This really the controlling body. Powers not enumerated but as 
wide as the activities of the Empire. 



June '96. 

1. (a and b) See 4 (a), May '95. 
(c and d) See 1, Sept. '95. 

(e) The ecliptic is a great circle whose plane passes through the 
earth's orbit and the sun's centre. 

2. Amazon — River of South America, rising in the Andes and emp- 
tying into the Atlantic Ocean. 

Vesuvius — Active volcano near Naples, Italy. 

Gu'ba — Island republic, one of the Greater Antilles, south of Florida. 

Nile — River in Africa, flowing northward through Egypt and empty- 
ing into the Mediterranean sea. 

Liverpool — Seaport on west coast of England. 

Gibraltar — Strait between Spain and Africa, and fortress belonging to 
Great Britain on the European side of the strait. 

Sahara — Great desert of northern Africa. 

Honolulu — City, the capital of the Hawaiian Islands. 

Yukon — River of Alaska flowing westward into Bering Sea. 

Venice — City in Italy at the head of the Adriatic Sea. 

3. (a) Tropic of Cancer, (b) June 21st. 

4. The streams of Florida belong either to the Atlantic or Gulf drain- 
age systems. The St. Johns River, belonging to the former, and the 
largest river wholly within the State, flows northward for 350 miles 
through the eastern part of the penisula and is navigable for more than 
220 miles. The Suwanee, Caloosahatchee and the Apalachicola Rivers 
flowing into the Gulf, are also navigable. 

Jacksonville — Near the mouth of the St. Johns River; Key West on 
one of the Keys to the southwest of the mainland; Tampa, at the head 
of Tampa Bay; Pensacola, on Pensacola Bay and St. Augustine, on the 
Atlantic coast. 

Area of Florida — 58,680 square miles; population in 1900 — 528,542. 

5. When this examination was given ('96), Cuba belonged to Spain 
but owing to Spanish misrule revolted and with the aid given by the 
United States, became an independent nation. 

6. Alaska's comparatively mild climate is due to the Japan current. 
Labrador is ice-bound because of the Greenland current which chills its 
shores. 

7. The largest cities of the world are London, England, on the Thames 
River; Paris, France, on the Seine River; New York, U. S. A., at mouth 
of Hudson River; Berlin, Germany, on the Elbe River; and Canton, 
China, a seaport on South China Sea. Five largest cities in the United 
States are New York, N. Y., at the mouth of the Hudson River; CM- 
cago, 111., on Lake Michigan; Philadelphia, Pa., on the Delaware River; 
St. Louis, Mo., on the Mississippi River; and Boston, Mass., on Massa- 
chusetts Bay. The longest rivers of the United States are the Columbia, 
rising in British Colombia, flowing southwestward and emptying into 
the Pacific Ocean; the Colorado, formed by the junction of the Green 
and the Grand in Utah, flowing southwest into the Gulf of California; 
the Missouri, rising in the Rocky Mountains of Montana, flowing south- 
east into the Mississippi; the Mississippi, rising in Lake Itasca, Minne- 
sota, and flowing south to the Gulf of Mexico; and the Ohio, rising in 
Ohio and flowing southwest and emptying into the Mississippi River. 

8. Tea — China, Japan and India. 

Sugar — Brazil, Peru, Guiana, Cuba and other West -Indies, Mexico, 



81 



Germany, Austria-Hungary, Belgium, and Holland. 

Coffee — Brazil, Colombia, Venezuela, Asiatic Turkey, Congo State, Li- 
beria, Cuba and the East Indies. 

Cotton — Egypt, India, China, East Indies, Brazil, Guiana. 

Opium — India, Persia. 

Cinchona — Bolivia and Peru. 

Wool — Argentine Republic, Uruguay, Peru, South Africa, Australia,. 

Watches — Switzerland. 

Jute — ^India. 

Tin — Australia and Sumatra. 



Country. 

Great Britain 

Germany 

France 

Belgium 

Holland 

Denmark 

Spain 

Portugal 

Italy 

Turkey 

Greece 

Russia 

Austria-Hungary 

Switzerland 

Sweden 

Norway 

Roumania 

Bulgaria 

Servia 

Montenegro 



Capital. 
London 
Berlin 
Paris 
Brussels 
The Hague 
Copenhagen 
Madrid 
Lisbon 
Rome 

Constantinople 
Athens 

Sf. Petersburg 
Vienna 
Berne 
Stockholm 
Christiana 
Bukharest 
Sofia 
Belgrade 
Cretinje 



Form of Government. 
Constitutional Monarchy. 
Constitutional Monarchy. 
Republic 
Monarchy 
Monarchy 
Monarchy 
Monarchy 
Monarchy 
Monarchy 
Despotism 
Monarchy 
Despotism 
Monarchy 
Republic 
Monarchy 
Monarchy 
Monarchy 
Monarchy 
Monarchy 
Monarchy 



Sept. '96. 

1. United States, Washington; Great Britain, London; Germany, Ber- 
lin; France, Paris; Russia, St. Petersburg; Austria-Hungary, Vienna; 
Sweden, Stockholm; Japan, Tokyo; China, Pekin; Mexico. Mexico. 

2. (a. b) The tropics are those parallels lying respectively 23%° 
north and south of the equator. Their position is determined by the 
inclination of the earth's axis to the plane of its orbit 23i^° and marks 
the limits north and south of the equator beyond which the sun's rays 
are never vertical. 

(c) See 4 (a). May '95. (d, e) See (6) Sept. '94, Second Grade. 

3. Cuba — See September '95 (5) and June '96 (5). 

4. Pyrenees — Mountain range between France and Spain. 
Blanc — Mountain peak in the Alps. 

Danube — River flowing westward through Austria-Hungary into the 
Black Sea. 

Gibraltar — See 2, June '96. 

Selvas — ^Dense forests, wooding the valley of the Amazon River. 

Sardinia — Island in the Mediterranean Sea, west of Italy. 

Pekin — City, located in eastern part of China, and the capital of the 
Chinese Empire. 

Tanganyika — Lake in Central Africa, one of the sources of the Congo 
River. 

Olympia — City on Puget Sound, Capital of the State of Washington. 

Orinoco— River in South America, flowing through Venezuela into the 
Atlantic Ocean. 

5. See Map of United States. 



82 

6. The Connecticut, Hudson, Delaware, Potomac and Savannah Riv- 
ers flow into the Atlantic Ocean. 

Florida, Alabama, Misssissippi, Louisiana and Texas border on the 
Gulf of Mexico. 

7. Its general physical features — surface sloping gently to the north- 
west from the Cerennes, and drained by the Seine, the Loire and the 
Garonne rivers; the opposite 3lope being drained by the Rhone, com- 
parative size, about four-fifths that of Texas; in population, ranking 
second in Europe; people noted for intelligence, vivacity and thrift; 
their earnings and wealth surpassing any country on the mainland of 
Europe. 

Chief industries, agriculture and manufacturing— ranking second of 
European countries in the production of cloth, first in that of silks and 
velvets, and third in commerce. Wines, silks, velvets, woolens and 
fancy articles are the chief exports. Paris, the capital, is the third city 
'in the world. 

8. Gold — ^California. 
Cotton — Georgia. 

Wheat — Minnesota. ' , 

Tobacco — Virginia. 

Manufactured Articles — Connecticut. 

9. Florida was discovered by Ponce de Leon in 1513; settled by Span- 
iards in 1565; became English territory in 1763 and passed again into 
Spanish hands in 1783. Finally it was ceded to the United States in 
1819 and admitted to the Union in 1845. 

It has a comparatively low and smooth surface. 

Citrus fruits, vegetables grown in large quantities for northern mar- 
kets, lumber, turpentine, phosphate, kaolin and lime, are produced. See 
4, June '96. 

10. Exports — Cotton, meats, flour, iron and steel goods, lumber, pe- 
troleum and coal. Imports — Sugar, coffee, cloth, drugs and chemicals, 
raw fibres — flax, wool and silk, and raw India rubber. 



June 1897. 

1. See 1, Sept. '95. 

2. (a) Geography should be taught for the mental discipline that 
may be obtained from it; for the knowledge it contains; for its value 
in connection with commerce; because of basis it affords for the intel- 
ligent study of other subjects; for its refining influence. 

(b) That the perceptive faculties as well as the memory may be 
trained, use visible illustrations, as maps, globes, relief, forms, pictures, 
etc. Use the topical method — that is, each set of related subjects should 
be taught together. Connect Geography and other work, as History, 
when practicable. Unimportant facts and details should be avoided. 

4. Section Chief Industries. 

New England Fishing, manufacturing, lumbering, quarrying 

and commerce. 
South Atlantic States Agriculture, mining, lumbering, manufacturing 

and commerce. 
North Central States Agriculture, grazing, mining, manufacturing 

and commerce. 
Rocky Mountains Mining, stock-raising, fruit-raising, fishing and 

manufacturing. 
Gulf States Agriculture, lumbering, commerce, cattle-rais- 

ing and manufacturing. 
Florida's area is .58,680 square miles; California's 158,360 square 
miles. Their population is 528,542 and 1,485,053 respectively. The cli- 
mate of the former is moist and warm, with summer rainy season, that 



83 

of the latter is warm and dry with wet season in the winter. Florida 
has a low, level surface, while that of California is diversified by chains 
of lofty mountains, intersected by fertile valleys. Both excel in the 
production of semi-tropical fruits. Florida's mineral wealth consists of 
deposits of phosphate, lime and koalin; California's in gold and silver. 
Early vegetable raising is an important industry of the former, the pro- 
duction of wheat of the latter. In wealth, California is far ahead, and 
San Francisco, its metropolis, numbers 342,000 population, against 
Jacksonville, Florida's chief city's 28,000. The water courses of the 
former are generally swift and short, those of Florida sluggish streams, 
and for the most part, unimportant. Florida abounds in game animals, 
birds, and fish. Alligators are numerous. In California are the griz- 
zly and black bear, elk, deer and mountain sheep; fish, as salmon and 
sturgeon abundant and about 350 species of birds. 

6. Ivory — Kongo State. 

Carpets — Belgium and Persia. 

Silk — China, Japan, Switzerland, France, Spain and Italy. 

Sponges — Florida and Bahama Islands. 

Wheat — Canada, United States, Mexico and Russia. For other prod- 
ucts see 8, June, '96. 

8. See 3, Sept. '96. 

9. Africa lies between 28° N. and 35° S. latitude. South America 
between 13° N. and 56° S. latitude. Similar in outline. Africa has 
nearly twice the area and population. The latter are negroes and Cau- 
casians principally. In South Africa are many people of European ex- 
traction. South American people are largely Indians and Europeans of 
Spanish descent. Both continents produce cotton, cattle, hides, wool 
and grain. Productions peculiar to Africa are diamonds, indigo, ivory, 
palm-oil and ostrich plumes; those of South America are Peruvian bark, 
coffee, dye-woods, quicksilver, silver, copper and caoutchous. In general 
importance South America leads. 

10. (a) Coffee from Brazil, sugar from the West Indies; ruh'ber from 
Brazil; tin plate from England; and cloth from England, Germany and 
France. 

(b) Meats — Illinois, Indiana, Ohio and Kansas; Cotton — Georgia, Ala- 
bama, Mississippi, Louisiana, Texas and the Carolinas; Petroleum — 
Pennsylvania, Ohio and West Virginia; Flour — Minnesota and Missouri; 
Copper — Montana and Northern Michigan. 



Sept. '97. 

1. (a) An indefinite number. Because every circle drawn on the 
earth's surface north and south, passes through the poles and divides it 
into hemispheres. 

(b) One. Because the equator is the one circle drawn on the earth's 
surface from east to west which divides it into hemispheres. 

2. Utah, Colorado, Nebraska, Iowa, Illinois, Indiana, Ohio^ Pennsyl- 
vania, New Jersey, New York, Connecticut, Massachusetts. 

3. Nova Scotia — Fishing, mining. 
Prince Edward Island — Fishing. 
New Brunswick — Fishing, lumbering. 
Quebec — Fishing, lumbering and commerce. 

Ontario — Agriculture, chiefly fruit growing and dairying. • 

Manitoba — Agriculture, chiefly the production of wheat. 
British Columbia — Fishing, lumbering and mining. 

4. Omaha — Shipping point for cattle and grain. 
Milwaukee — Manufacture of liquors and flour. 
Augusta (Ga.)— Cotton manufacture. 

Cleveland — Iron and steel manufactures, refining of oil. 



84 

Pittsburg — Manufacture of steel and iron goods. 

5. The longest day is June 21st; the shortest December 21st. The 
vertical rays of the sun fall farthest north of the equator on the former 
date, and north of the Arctic Circle there is perpetual day; on the lat- 
ter date the sun's rays are vertical farthest south of the equator, and 
within the same limits there is darkness. 

6. Pacific Ocean, South America; Atlantic Ocean, Africa, Indian 

7. (a) Because the sun appears to rise in the east, and (b) the mo- 
tion of falling bodies — which dropped from a high tower, will strike 
outside the base on the east side of the tower, but inside of the base 
on the west side. 

8 See 9 June '9G. 

9. Between 20° and 23i^° N. latitude. 

See 8, May '95. 



June '98. 

1. To define with mathematical precision the location of points on 
the earth's surface. 

2. Springfield, 111.; Indianapolis; Columbus, O., and Philadelphia. 

3. Number of islands in Philippine from 480 to 2,000; area, 114,400 
square miles; population, 6,961,339. 

(b) 15^/2° N. latitude and 121° E. longtitude, approximately. 

4. (a) Belts or divisions of the earth bounded by the tropics and 
Polar Circles. 

(b) See 2, Sept. '95. 

6. Chinese Empire, British India, Russia, United States, and Ger- 
many. 

7. Between 7,000 and 8,000 miles. 

Mediterranean Sea; Suez Canal; Red Sea; Indian Ocean; Strait of 
Malacca; China Sea. 

8. Length of Cuba, 720 miles; breadth, 80 miles; population, 1,573,- 
000; climate, tropical; soil, very fertile; exports, sugar, tobacco, mo- 
lasses, lumber and fruits; imports, wheat, flour, rice, petroleum and 
manufactured articles. 

9. Mexico, south of the United States, between Pacific Ocean on the 
west and Gulf of Mexico on the east, comprises twenty-seven states, 
two territories and a federal district; area 767,000 square miles; and 
has a mixed Indian and Spanish population of 12,000,000 people. Ex- 
ports, silver, coffee and cattle; imports, cloth and hardware. 

10. (a) See 4, Sept. '94, Second Grade, (b) Combined population, 
39,000,000; (c) Brazil, Colombia, Argentina, Chile and Peru, (d) Por- 
tuguese and Spanish are spoken in all South American countries ex- 
cept the Guianas, where English, French and Dutch predominate in 
the colonies of those countries respectively. 



Sept. '08. 

1. See 2, Sept. '95. 

2. See 3, June '90. 

3. See 4. Second Grade. Sept. '94. 

4. Ohio River, Mississippi River, Gulf of Mexico, Strait of Florida, 
Atlantic Ocean, English Channel, Strait of Dover, North Sea, Skager 
Rock, Cottegat, Baltic Sea and Gulf of Finland. 

5. See 4, June '97. 

6. See 5, May. '95. 

7. See 7. Oct. '94. 

8. See 3, Sept. '97. 



85 



9. See Preface. 
10. See Preface. 



June 1899. 

1. (a) Bering Sea, Sea of Okhotsk, Japan Sea, Yellow Sea, Bast Chi- 
na Sea, South China Sea and the Gulf of Tartary. 

(b) Kamchatka and Korea. 

(c) Plateau of the Dekkan. It is composed of old outflows of lava 
like those of the Columbia plateaus. 

2. Agriculture — In the eastern half and a narrow strip along the 
Pacific coast. 

Herding — In the Central States and westward over the Great Plains. 

fishing — On the northeast and northwest coasts. 

Lumbering — In New England, the Appalachian Highland, the South- 
eastern States, and those bordering the Great Lakes, and those on the 
Pacific Slope. 

Mining — Those sections occupied by the Appalachian highland, the 
Central States and the Rocky Mountain States. 

Manufacturing — In New England, the Middle States and Central States. 

Commerce — Northeastern quarter of the country. 

3. Torrid and North Temperate Zones. (b) Twenty-seven, (c) 
The lowlands have a hot climate, the plateau is always temperate, and 
the mountain region is cool. There is a rainy season in the summer 
and a dry season in winter. Plants of both the North and South Ameri- 
can regions are found there, (d) Mines. 

4. (a) See 4, (a, b) Sept. '94, Second Grade. 

(b) Lake Titicaca, situated in the plateau of Bolivia, and lying partly 
in that country and partly in the southeastern part of Peru. Its size 
is about half that of Lake Ontario. 

5. (a) Both are triangular, (b) The western highland of South 
America is only a continuation of that of North America; but is higher, 
narrower and is much less broken. 

(c) The highest peaks of the Rocky Mountain highland are Mt. St. 
Elias. 18,010 feet and Mt. McKinley, 20,464 feet high, those of the An- 
des on Aconcagua 23,082 feet and Chimborazo 20,.517 feet in height. 

(d) The plateau regions of North America are of great extent, but 
not as high as those of South America. 

(e) The mountain ranges of North America are more irregular and 
the number exceeds that of South America but three of the latter are 
much longer, extending the entire length of the continent in an almost 
unbroken wall. The ranges of the eastern highland are more numerous 
ad more irregular in outline in South America. 

6. (a) Capes Hatteras and Matapan respectively. 

(b) France bounded on the northwest by the English Channel, on 
the northeast by Belgium, on the east by Germany, Switzerland, the 
Alps and Italy; on the south by the Mediterranean Sea and the Pyren- 
ees Mountains; and on the west by the Bay of Biscay. 

Switzerland is bounded on the north by the German Empire, on the 
east by Austria-Hungary, on the south by the Alps Mountains, and on 
the west by the Alps and France. 

7. (a) Belgium. 

(b) Because the Gulf Stream warms their shores, while the North 
American coast in the same latitude is chilled by the ice-bearing Green- 
land current. 

8. The Nile rises in Lake Victoria in Equatorial Africa, flows north- 
ward, receiving tributaries, draining the Abyssinian Highland, and emp- 
ties into the Mediterranean Sea. 

The Niger rises in the Kong Mountains, flowing northeastward, then 



southeast, draining the Soudan and emptying into the Gulf of Guinea. 

The Kongo, ranking next to the Amazon in the volume of water dis- 
charged, and receiving more tributaries than any other African river; 
rises in a group of equatorial lakes, and flows north, then west, and 
southwest through the Kongo State into the Gulf of Guinea. 

The Orange River flows from east to west across the southern end of 
the continent, discharging its waters into the Atlantic Ocean. 

The Zambesi, the only important river of the Indian Slope, rises in 
Angola and flows eastward into the Mozambique Channel. It contains 
waterfalls rivaling those of Niagara in grandeur. 



Sept. '99. 

1. Soil consist* of detritus mixed with decaying animal and vegeta- 
ble matter. 

Detritus consists of fragments of rock, detached by the action of heat, 
cold, wind and rain, many of which are in time reduced to powder. 

Vapor is the gaseous state of water. 

Dew — Condensed vapor, formed by vapor-laden air, being chilled on 
coming in contact with cold substances, as vegetation. 

Rain is the precipitation of a cloud, caused by the air about it be- 
coming chilled and hence capable of holding less moisture in suspension. 

2. 1^ Physical Features 

1^ Location. 
2= Extent. 
3^ Coast features. 
4^ Surface. 

1' Highlands. 

2' Lowlands. 
5^ Drainage. 
6' Climate. 

T Vegetation and animals. 
8^ Races. 
2^ Political Features. 

V Countries and People. 

V Government. 

2' Religion. 

3' Industries. 

4^ Products. 

3. See text-book for subject matter under topics given above. 

4. Gold and silver are usually found in veins in very old rocks or in 
volcanic rocks in the mountain regions. The United States, Alaska, Mex- 
ico, South America, the Eurasion Highland and Australia supply these 
metals. They are used for the coinage of money throughout the world. 

Iron is found, combined with other substances, forming ore, in almost 
every country, but those mines most worked are located near the great 
coal fields. It is the most useful of metals, and is used in the manufac- 
ture of machinery, as a foundation for tinware and in the form of steel, 
in the construction of buildings and bridges. 

Copper, used in electrical work, in the manufacture of hardware, and 
mixed with zinc to form brass. More than half the world's supply of 
copper comes from the United States and a large part from the Eurasian 
highland. 

Tin is used in the manufacture of hardware and is found chiefly in 
Sumatra and other islands of the East Indies, in parts of the Eurasian 
highland and in Australia. 

5. Western Europe and Southeastern Asia. 

6. Texas, Louisiana, Florida and Morocco, Algeria, Tripoli, Egypt,^ 
Arabia, Turkey in Asia, Persia, Afghanistan, India and China. 



87 

7. (a) Gautemala, Salvador, Honduras, Nicaragua and Costa Rica. 

(b) They comprise five independent republics and unsuccessful at- 
tempts have been made to join them in a federal union. Coffee, sugar, 
cocoa beans, and cabinet and dye woods are exported. 

(c) Lake Nicaragua. 

8. England, Scotland, Wales and Ireland, the colonial possessions, 
Canada, Newfoundland, India, Australia and South Africa, and numer- 
ous islands in both the Atlantic and Pacific. 

9. (a) A vessel might sail from San Fra:ncisco, around Cape Horn, 
thence across the Atlantic, through the Strait of Gibraltar, the Mediter- 
ranean and Adriatic Seas to Venice with flour, grain and sugar and re- 
turning bring a cargo of raw silk, olive oil and sulphur. 

(b) From Boston to Madras, a vessel might cross the Atlantic to the 
Strait of Gibraltar, ^passing through the Mediterranean Sea, the Suez 
Canal, the Red Sea, Gulf of Aden and Indian Ocean, thence by way of 
Ceylon to Madras, carrying cotton cloth and machinery, and returning 
with jute, rice, opium, tea and oil seeds. 

10. (a) Escambia, Santa Rosa, Walton, Washington, Calhoun, Frank- 
lin, Wakulla, Jefferson, Taylor, LaFayette, Levy Citrus, Hernando, Pas- 
co, Hillsboro, Manatee, DeSoto, Lee and Monroe. 

(b) Nassau, Duvol, St. John, Volusia, Brevard and Dade. 

(c) Holmes. Jackson, Liberty, Gadsden, Leon, Madison, Hamilton, Su- 
wanee, Columbia, Baker, Clay, Bradford, Alachua, Putnam, Marion, 
Sumter, Lake, Orange, Osceola and Polk. 



June 1900. 

1. See 1. Sept. 1900. 

2. See 2, Sept. 1900. 

3. See 9, June 1896. 

4. The New England State form an irregular quadrilateral; the 
Southern States approach a trapezoid in shape. The former have a com- 
bined area of less than one one-fourth that of Texas alone. In the 
northern part we find extensive forests, but though the river valleys 
are fertile, the surface is for the most part rugged, unproductive and 
covered with glacial boulders. The winters are long, cold and bleak, 
the summers short and temperate. Manufacturing is the chief indus- 
try. 

The surface of the Southern States is much more even, being flat for 
a hundred miles or more from thci coast, then occurs the Piedmont re- 
gion in the east and the gently rolling plains in the west, the only rug- 
ged portion being near the Appalachian and Ozark ridges. The great 
Industry of this section is agriculture and the climate is warm, moist 
and equable, most of the year. 

5. See 4, Sept. '99. 

6. Sell-as are the equatorial forests of the Amazon valley. 

(c) Llanos are the grassy plains of the Orinoco valley and are treeless 
except for palms and mosses along the streams and on the low hills. 

(c) Pampas are the southern plains of South America. They are cov- 
ered with coarse grass suitable for pasturage. 

(d) The three lowlands of South America. 

7. See 10, Sept. 1900. 

8. (a) Through Tampa Bay, Gulf of Mexico, Caribbean Sea, Atlantic 
Ocean, around South America to the Strait of Magellan, thence through 
the Pacific Ocean via San Francisco to Honolulu. 

(b) Down St. Johns River across the Atlantic Ocean through the 
Strait of Gibraltar, the Mediterranean Sea, Suez Canal, Red Sea, Gulf 
of Aden, Indian Ocean, Strait of Malacca, South China Sea, Balabac 
Strait and Sulu Sea to Iloilo. 



88 

(c) From Kissimmee pass through Lake Tohopekaliga, a canal, Lake 
Kissimmee, Kissimmee River, Lake Okeechobee, drainage canal, Caloo- 
sahatchee River, and Gulf of Mexico to Key West. 

9. (a) See 8, Sept. '94, Second Grade. 

(b) Jacksonville, Pensacola, Key West, Tampa, St. Augustine, Lake 
City. 

(c) Six most important rivers: St. Johns, Suwanee, Caloosahatchee, 
Appalachicola, St. Mary's and Indian. 

10. See (10) Sept. '99. 



Sept. 1900. 

1. Dunes, long ridges of sand and fine rocky material, brought to- 
gether by the winds. 

Caiiyons are valleys unusually deep and narrow, their sides having 
been deepened by their swift flowing streams much faster than they have 
been widened by weathering. 

A Delta is a triangular tract of land formed by the deposit of sedi- 
ment at the mouth of a river, and by impeding its outflow, dividing it 
into several channels, through which it discharges its waters. 

A Bayou is a swampy place or sluggish stream formed during low 
water along the lower outside edge of a flood plain. 

A glacier is a sheet of slowly moving ice found' where the climate is 
so cold that more snow falls during the year than can be melted. 

2. (a) The Rocky Mountain system extending from Alaska to the 
Isthmus of Panama, and the Appalachian system extending from the 
Laurentian plateau in a southwestwardly direction to the Gulf slope. 

(b) The Andes, extending from Trinidad to Cape Horn; the Brazilian 
Mountains, extending from the narrow coast plain on the northeast to 
the great central lowland, and the ranges of the highland of Guiana, lo- 
cated in the northern part of the grand division. 

3. See 9, June '96. 

4. See 5, Sept. '94, First Grade. 

5. See 7, Sept. .'94, First Grade. 

6. See 3, Oct. '94. 

7. On the north are the Arctic Ocean, with the following arms and 
channels : Melville Sound, Baflin Bay, Fox Channel, Hudson Bay, Hud- 
son Strait and Davis Strait; on the east the Atlantic Ocean with the 
Gulf of St. Lawrence, Bay of Fundy, and Chesapeake Bay as indenta- 
tions; on the southeast, the Gulf of Mexico and the Caribbean Sea, and 
on the southwest and west is the Pacific Ocean, with the Gulf of Cali- 
fornia, Puget Sound. 

Bering Sea and Bering Strait; the last two separating the grand di- 
vision from Asia. 

Inland waters are the Great Lakes : Superior, Michigan, Huron, Erie 
and Ontario, between Canada and the United States; Lake Winnipeg in 
the Province of Manitoba, and the Great Bear, Great Slave and Atha- 
basca Lakes in the Arctic basin. 

8. Such a canal would enable large ocean steamers to cross from 
the Atlantic to the Pacific. At present it is necessary for them to sail 
thousands of miles out of their course around Cape Horn, or discharge 
their cargoes at the Isthmus of Panama to be taken up by other vessels 
on the other side of, the Isthmus, hence it would be a great saving of 

■time and expense. 

9. See 3, June '99. 

10. The Philippines extend from .5i4° to about 18° N. latitude, and 
the 120th meridian, E. long., passes through Luzon, the largest island. 

The climate is purely tropical, most of the population are of Malay 



89 

descent, and the chief productions are sugar-cane, coffee, rice, Manila 
hemp and tobacco. 



June 1901. 

1. (a) Sand hars are formed when a swift stream enters a more 
level region, and the current is so checKed that it can no longer carry 
so much solid material. Part of it is therefore deposited, forming 
.sand banks or bars. 

(b) Deltas. See 1 (c), Sept. 1900. 

(c) Glaciers. See 1 (e), Sept. 1900. 

(d) Petroleum deposits are formed by the decay of animal and vege- 
table matter, deeply buried beneath sediment, and gradually changed 
into rock oil. 

(e) Coal beds are formed from the accumulation of decayed vegetable 
matter at the bottom of immense swamps, ages ago. After their forma- 
tion they were depressed below the sea and covered by layers of sedi- 
ment which in time hardened to rock, while the vegetable matter became 
coal. 

2. (a) Kangaroo, Casswary, Emu, Koala, echidma and duckbill, 
(b) An ancient land connection between Australia and Euracia, 

which afterward ceased to exist, the forms of life now found in the 
former corresponding to the fossils of forms existing ages ago in the 
latter. 

3. (a) Savagery, barbarism and civilization. 

(b) Savages — many African tribes; barbarians — numerous tribes in 
the Philippines; and civilized— Americans and Europeans. 

4. Christianity — The nations of North and South America and those 
of Europe with the exception of the Turks. 

Jewish religion is the faith of the Jews who are found in all civil- 
ized countries. 

Mohammedanism prevails in Turkey, Egypt, Arabia and Persia. 

Brahmiiiism in India. 

Buddhism in Indo-China, China, Korea and Japan. 

Confucianism — China. 

7. (a) States — Pennsylvania, Ohio, Indiana, Illinois, Kentucky, Mis- 
souri, Tennessee, Arkansas, Mississippi, Lrouisiana. 

(b) Important Cities — Alleghany, Pittsburg, Wheeling, Cincinnati, Lou- 
isville, Memphis, Vicksburg, Natchez, Baton Rouge and New Orleans. 

(c) Indiistries — Iron and coal mining, the refining of petroleum, iron 
and steel manufacture, and that of agricultural machinery, plate glass, 
railroad cars, flour, liquors and clothing, sheep-raising, dairying and to- 
bacco raising, the production of corn, hemp, sorghum, stock-raising, 
meat packing, tanning, cotton, gro*wing, the manufacture of cotton-seed- 
oil, lumbering, fruit-raising, the growing of sugar-cane and rice and the 
refining of sugar. 



8. See 4, Sept. 94, Second Grade. 

9. Philippines— (a) See 10 (a), Sept. 1900. (b) 7,000,000. (c) Ma- 
nila, (d) The surface is broken by volcanic mountains, and is drained 
by many streams. The land area is over 114,000 square miles and the 
number of islands variously estimated at from 480 to 2,000. (e) Colo- 
nial possession of the United States. 

Hawaiian Islands — (a) They lie between 18° and 23° N. latitude and 
between 155^° and 160i4° W. longtitude. (b) 154,001. (c) Honolulu, 
(d) They consist of a series of volcanoes, most of which are extinct. 
The surface is broken by valleys and streams and the islands are partly 
surrounded by reefs, (e) Agriculture. 

10. (a) Florida has been formed by the uplifting of the sea bottom, 



90 

by the work of coral polyps, and the deposit of sand and sediment by 
the waves. 

(b) The surface is comparatively even. The shore of the mainland 
is protected by long lines of sand bars and barrier beaches. The coral 
reefs along the shores are still building up and will eventually be con- 
nected with the mainland thus extending the surface of the land far- 
ther into the sea. 

(c) See 4 (a), June '96. 



Sept. 1901. 

1. (a) See 2, June '98. 
(b) See 4 (b), Sept. 1900. 

2. (a) Westward. Because the trade winds blow constantly from 
the east, thus urging the equatorial waters in a westward direction. 

(b) "Western coasts. Because warmed by the currents from the 
equator. 

3. (a) Lakes Superior, Michigan, Huron, Erie, Ontario, Winnipeg: 
and Athabasca. 

(b) The action of glaciers. 

4. (a) Wheat, one-third as much, (b) Cotton, and (c) Corn, each 
four times as much; (d) Beef, one- third, and (e) Coal, one-half a& 
much as the rest of the world. 

5. (a) Northern boundaries, Michigan and Lake Erie; eastern, Penn- 
sylvania, West Virginia and the Ohio River; southern, West Virginia^ 
Kentucky and the Ohio River; western, Indiana. 

(b) Maumee River. (c) Columbus, centrally located on the Scioto 
River, (d) Toledo, Sandusky and Cleveland, (e) Cincinnati, Dayton 
and Springfield. 

G. (a) Ecuador, Colombia, Brazil, Bolivia and Chili, (b) Lima, (c) 
The raising of cotton and sugar-cane, herding of llamos, alpacas and 
goats, the mining of silver, and the gathering of cinchona, and rubber. 

(d) The desert coast, and the inland forests are almost uninhabita- 
ble. Farming is carried on by irrigation on the western slopes of the 
mountains. 

7. The Eurasian Highland extends continuously northeast and south- 
west from Bering Strait to the shores of the Mediterranean Sea. Here 
it is broken through by the outlet from the Black Sea, but extends 
through Southern Europe as a narrower highland to the Spanish Penin- 
sula. In Central Asia it is nearly 3,000 miles wide, consisting of a 
broken succession of mountain ranges with broad desert plateaus be- 
tween, some of which are three miles high. The mountains are the 
highest in the world. 

9. (a) ValuaMe woods are yellow pine, cedar, live oak, cypress, satin- 
wood and magnolia. 

(b) Minerals are phosphate rock, lime and Kaolin. 

(c) Products of the sea are food, fishes, oysters, sponges, sea turtles 
ard coral. 



June 1902. 

1. (a) See 2, Sept. '94, Second Grade. 

(b) The inclination of the earth's axis 23%° to the plane of its orbit 
causing the sun's rays to fall 23^° short of the regions about either 
pole during part of the year, and fixing the northern and southern limits 
of the sun's perpendicular rays at 23^° on other side of the equator. 

2. See 4, Sept. '94, First Grade. 

3. See 2, June, 1900. 

4. See 9, June '96. 

5. (a) Because the unsuitability of this section for agriculture 



91 

forced the people to take up other occupations and manufacturing, 
which necessitated the gathering of the population into cities and towns, 
became the chief pursuit. 

(b) See 3, Sept. '94, First Grade. 

6. (a) See 2, June '99. (b) The United States ranks first in each. 

7. That part of western highland region known as the Great Basin, 
because the clouds, formed by evaporation from the Pacific Ocean in 
traveling eastward are robbed of their moisture by the Sierra Nevada 
Mountains on the western side of the Basin; and those from the east 
lose what moisture they contain on the eastern slopes of the Rockies. 

8. Cotton Section — Georgia and Mississippi; Grain — Minnesota and 
Iowa; Manufacturing — Massachusetts and Pennsylvania; Counties in 
orange section — Manatee and DeSoto; Marion and Citrus. 

9. (a) At the Isthmus of Panama and Cape Parina, the most west> 
ern point of the grand division. , 

(b) In northern Africa and Southern Asia. 

10. See 9, Sept. '96. 



Sept. 1902. 

1. Erosion is the wearing away of the solid materials which form the 
bed of a stream and is caused by the solvent power of water and by its 
mechanical force when in motion. The effects of erosion are the deep- 
ening and widening of the valleys of streams as shown in the Falls of 
Niagara, anie the Canon of the Colorado, and the products are deposited 
as sand bars which obstruct the channel of streams, or as deltas, if the 
currents at their mouth are not strong enough to carry away the sedi- 
ment brought down and discharged there. 

2. Variation in the length of day and night is due to the inclination 
of the earth's axis 231^° to the plane of its orbit which causes the ap- 
parent movement of the sun northward in the summer, producing in the 
northern hemisphere an increased circle of illumination and therefore 
longer days, while in winter the same movement exists in the south- 
ern hemisphere, increasing there the circle of Illumination and hence 
the length of the day and decreasing our circle of light, thus producing 
shorter days. 

3. North American region — opossum, raccoon; South American re- 
gion, ant-eater, llama; Eurasian, wild boar, camels; African, hippopota- 
mus, giraffe; Oriental — elephant, rhinoceros; Australia — kangaroo, duck- 
bill. 

4. The Continental Plateau, stretches from Cape Horn, its most 
southern point, northwestward, South and North America forming its 
western arm, and sweeps around the North Pole, in its eastern arm 
forming solid land masses extending past the equator (with Australa- 
sia as an offshoot to the southward) to the Cape of Good Hope, the 
Southeastern extremity of its eastern arm. Its widest part is eastern 
Asia, its narrowest the Isthmus of Panama. 

5. (a) In the northeastern part, (b) Northeastern, (c) Southeast- 
ern, (d) Because most of the European immigrants land on our north- 
east coast, moving inland to seek new homes, the northeastern quarter 
of the country is not only most decidedly settled but has the largest 
foreign population. Few immigrants land in the southeastern quarter, 
hence most of the people are American born. 

6. (a) Cotton and corn, four times as much; coal, one-half as much; 
in extent and variety of manufactures, more than twice that of any 
other two countries; railroad mileage, nearly as much as all of the rest 
of the world. 

7. (a) Tokyo, (b) Yokohama, (c) Agriculture, (d) See 2 (b), 
May '95. • 



92 

(e) California and Japan have nearly the same area but the latter 
supports a population more than thirty-one times as great. 

8. Co7-k — Spain. 
Sponge — Florida. 
Tin — Sumatra. 
Sugar — ^West Indies. 

Quicksilver — Spain and Pacific section of the United States. 

Silver — 'Nevada and California. 

Diamonds — South Africa. 

Coffee — Brazil. 

Hemp — Kentucky and the Philippines. 

Copper — Northern Michigan and Montana. 

9. (a and c) See 9 (b and a), Sept. 1901. 

(b) Corn, cotton and tobacco in the northern part; sugar cane, vege- 
tables for northern markets and citrus fruits form the chief agricultu- 
ral products of Florida. 

10. (a) See 10 (a), Sept. '99. 



COMPOSITION. 



Sept. '94. 

1. To make thoughts stand out with definiteness in their logical rela- 
tion, thereby representing to reader the divisions that writer wishes to 
make in his subject. 

2. (a) Heading, salutation, body of the letter, conclusion, superscrip- 
tion. 

(b) The several parts of heading should be separated by commas and 
period placed after date. The Salutation should be followed by com- 
ma; likewise every line in the conclusion except the last which requires 
period. 

3. Making a properly co-ordinated arrangement of important facts 
which are to be included in the theme. 

4. (a) Metaphor, simile, metonymy, synecdoche, hyperbole, 
(b) Life is an isthmus between two eternities. 

Like a shattered column, lay the king. 
Gray hairs should be respected. 
Give us this day our daily bread. 
The tumult reaches the stars. 

5. (a) Should be ranked as the most important form. Allays self- 
consciousness in writing. 

(b) Should be taught as soon as pupil has learned to write. 



Oct. 1894. 

1. (a) The period should be used to mark the close of every com- 
plete sentence which is neither interrogative nor exclamatory. 

Every abbreviation should be followed by a period. 
In letter-writing, period should follow date and signature, 
(b) Double quotation points are used to enclose direct quotation; sin- 
gle points, to enclose a quotation within a quotation. 

2. (a) Capitalization is an auxiliary to enable the writer to distin- 
guish or emphasize terms especially prominent or significant — in short, 
a mechanical device to guide in construction and meaning. 

(b) (1) Begin with a capital letter, first word of every sentence, 
proper names and adjectives, and first word of every line of poetry. 

3. Choose words that are national as opposed to provincial, current 
as opposed to the obsolete, and only those sanctioned by good usage. 



93 

4. A modifier should be so placed as to leave no doubt as to word 
modified — that is, should be placed as near to it as possible. 

5. As regards language, the requisites are : 

Accuracy in the use of words; simplicity of words; conciseness; purity. 
As regards construction, the requisites are : Unity, clearness and 
strength. 



Sept. 1895. 

See Sept. 1894 (duplicate). 
June 1896. 

1. Composition is the art of expressing thought by means of lan- 
guage. 

2. (a) Style is the special manner in which thought is expressed, 
(b) Accuracy in the use of words, simplicity of words, purity of 

words, and conciseness or brevity of language. 

3. Redundancy is a needless use of words. 
Tautology is a direct repetition of the thought. 
"Every man has duties to perform." 

The consequences of such corruption are deplorable. 

4. The comma (,) is used to separate grammatically independent 
elements from the rest of the sentence; to separate parenthetical or 
intermediate elements from the context; to separate appositional ele- 
ments from the context; to mark the omission of words; where the 
separation is not sufficiently complete for semicolon; wherever it pre- 
vents ambiguity. 

5. (a) The period (.) is put at the end of every declarative or im- 
perative sentence; after abbreviations, headings and sub-headings. 

(b) The interrogation point (?) is put after complete questions; af- 
ter elliptical questions having a common dependence. 

(c) The exclamation point. (!) is put after exclamatory sentences; 
after interjections; within curves to denote irony. 

(d) The colon ( :) is placed between the great divisions of a sen- 
tence when subdivisions require the semicolon; before an enumeration 
of particulars formally introduced, given, or separated by semicolons; 
after promissory words, phrases and propositions. 

The semi-colon ( ; ) is put between the large divisions of a sentence 
when minor divisions require to be marked by commas; between serial 
clauses and phrases having a common dependence. 

(e) The dash ( — ) is used to indicate a break in the transition; to 
enclose a parenthesis; for rhetorical effect. 

(f) Curves are used to enclose independent elements breaking unity 
of context. 

(g) Brackets () are used when words not the author's are inserted to 
explain the meaning or supply an omission. 

(d) Double quotation marks (" ") are used to enclose a direct ques- 
tion. 

Single marks (' ') to enclose a quotation within a quotation. 



Sept. 1896. 

1. Spelling, capitalization and punctuation, use of words, construc- 
tion of sentences, paragraphing, thought. 

2. Begin with capitals: every sentence; every line of poetry; every 
direct quotation; proper names and proper adjectives. The pronoun "I" 
and interjection "O" should always be capitals. 

.S. See 4. June '96. 

4. See 4, Sept. '95. 

5. As the outline consists of the few absolutely necessary topics ex- 
pressed as concisely as possible and arranged in proper order, it enables 



94 

one to maintain unity of thought, arrange material in a logical way, 
and give the important topics their proper proportion. ^ 

(b) Clearness, force and attractiveness. 
June 1897. 

1. By short daily practice in composition pupil is made to feel that 
writing is very much like talking, and that what he talks about is a 
fit matter to write about. This method extends the pupil's writing vo- 
cabulary and renders written expression easy and natural. Where long 
and less frequent composition work is required, expression becomes a 
conscious artitlcial task, irksome to contemplate, and the completed 
product is leathery in texture. Expression becomes a distasteful and 
foreign occupation. 

2. See 4, 5 and 2, June '96. 

3. (a) The object of the paragraph is to indicate to the reader where 
the consideration of any chief thought begins and where it ends. By 
the use of this device, thoughts are made to stand out with definiteness 
in their logical relation. Incidentally pleases reader's eye, and rests his 
brain. 

(b) Each paragraph should have reference to the subject, and as re- 
gards relation to other paragraphs, there should be such coherence and 
logical sequence that the reader will be conducted clearly and logically 
from beginning to end of them. In short, paragraphs should be pro- 
gressive in meaning and sound. 

(c) All sentences should have reference directly to the paragraph. 
Each sentence should naturally grow out of its predecessor. 

4. Simile is a comparison of objects based on resemblance; as. Pleas- 
ant words are like oil poured upon the waters. 

Metaphor is an implied comparison, an abridged simile; as. Candor is 
a delicate flower. 

Metonymy is a figure in which one object is described by the name of 
another to which it is related; as, Strike for your altars and fires. 

Synecdoche is a figure in which a name is given to an object that sug- 
gests more or less than we intend; as, All America was aroused by the 
contest. 

Vision represents past events or imaginary objects and scenes as if 
actually present to the senses; as, Csesar crosses the Rubicon and enters 
Italy. 

Epigram is that form of expression in which there seems to be a 
contradiction between the real and the apparent meaning; as. Language 
is the art of concealing thought. 

Personification is that figure in which the attributes of living beings 
are ascribed to things inanimate; as, "Truth crushed to earth shall 
rise again." 

Climax is a figure in which the strength of the thought increases to 
the close of the sentence or paragraph, as, "In form and moving, how 
express and admirable! in action, how like an angel! in apprehension 
how like a god!" 

Irony is a figure employed to express the opposite of the idea enter- 
tained; as, "For Brutus is an honorable man! So are they all, all hon- 
orable men." 

Hyperbole is a figure in which the object is either exaggerated or 
disparaged; as, The trembling Tiber dived beneath his bed. 

5. (a) Observation, conversation, reading, imagination, and reflec- 
tion. 

(b) See 5, Sept. '96. 



95 

Sept. 1897. 

1. (a) Letter-writing. 

(b) Heading, address, salutation, body of letter, complimentary close, 
subscription and superscription. 

2. See text for forms. 

3. Direct quotations are frequently used to give vividness and force; 

also to prevent ambiguity. 

A direct quotation should be enclosed by quotation marks; as, He 
said, "I vi^ill be there." 

When the quotation is indirect, no marks are needed; as, He said, he 
would be there. 

In divided quotations — that is, when other words occur between the 
iQuoted parts — only the quoted words are enclosed by the marks; as, 
■'There is but one way," said the orator, "to ensure success." 

Rules for paragraphing : See 10, June '98. 

4. Diction treats of the selection and right use of words. The most 
important qualities are purity, propriety and precision. 

Diction is pure when only such v/ords are used as are sanctioned by 
the best speakers and writers of the present day. 

Propriety of diction has reference to the use of words in their proper 
sense. 

Precision is that property of diction which requires the exact use of 
words to express the idea intended. 

Elegance of diction can be acquired : 

(a) By extending one's vocabularly and thereby gaining power over 
words. ' 

(b) By carefully observing the fitness of a given word to express 
idea intended. 

(c) In short, by a careful study of best writers. 

.5. There should be daily exercise in some form of composition work 
as oral exercises, sentence-making, reproduction work and written reci- 
tations. 
June 1898. 

1. (a) Written recitations minister largely to ease and facility of 
expression, by enlarging pupils' vocabulary and giving practical drill 
in the use of language. His power to express clearly and correctly 
what he knows is increased and appreciation of this power enhanced. 

(b) Yes, for two ends are subserved — testing knowledge and giving 
drill in expression. 

2. (a) Conversation exercises; writing sentences from board and 
dictation; writing sentences expressing facts observed; copying exer- 
cises; writing descriptions of pictures, familiar objects, and actions; 
writing stories which pupil has learned to tell. 

(b) Early after the first lesson in reading. 

3. (a) By means of conversation lessons, the child beginning with 
phrases and sentences, gradually learns expression with combination of 
hoth. Thus language is used unconsciously as a medium by means of 
which thought is expressed. 

(b) Copying exercises familiarize the pupil with the written form of 
language. 

(c) This exercise trains the imagination and inspires child to observe 
closely and tell his thoughts in his own fashion. 

(d) By committing choice extracts, pupil's vocabularly is extended 
and refined. 

4. 1-4. Should be taught from beginning of school work. Reached 
mainly througli reading exercises and sentence making in connection 
with them. 



96 

(5) In connection with language work and reading lessons. Not 
earlier than 3d or 4th reader. 

5. The first word of a sentence, a line of poetry, a direct quotation, 
phrases or clauses separately numbered or paragraphed, proper names, 
proper adjectives, appellations of the Deity, things personified, most ab- 
breviations, titles of office, honor or respect when applied to a particular 
person. 

6. (a) See 5, Sept. '95. 
(b) See 4, June '96. 

7. (a) In general composition, avoid the use of foreign words, new 
words, obsolete words, provincialisms and technical terms. 

(b) Avoid confounding words derived from same root. 

(c) Use words in their accepted sense. 

(d) Use words in their proper sense. 

(e) Avoid the use of general for special terms. 

(f) Distinguish between the different degrees of intensity expressed 
by words. 

(g) Distinguish between words having respectively active or passive 
meaning. 

(h) Distinguish between negative and privative words. 
(ij Reject all unnecessary words, 
(j) Distinguish between auxiliaries. 

8. (a) A sentence should be so constructed that it can have but one 
meaning. 

(b) Unity should be maintained — that is, a sentence should be the 
development of one idea. 

(c) There should be such a use and arrangement of words as to make 
a forcible impression on the mind of the reader or hearer. 

(d) A sentence should be so constructed as to produce a pleasing 
effect upon the ear. 

(e) Solecisms should be avoided. 

9. See 4, Sept. '94. 

10. (,aj See o, June '97. 

Make an analysis of the topic to be discussed. 

Make each point in the analysis the subject of a distinct paragraph. 

Preserve the unity of the paragraph. 

Make the paragraphs progressive in meaning and sound. 

Connect the sentences of a paragraph so as to show their relation. 



Sept. '98. 

1. (a) Main object is to develop power of expression and enable one 
to represent to others whatever thought or feeling he may have in his 
mind. 

(b) Correlation; practical application. 

2. (1) Not less than 20 minutes. 
(2) See 1, June, 1897. 

3. (1) By stimulating thought. Impression before expression. Then 
too, an important principle to be observed is "Talking before writing." 

(2) Impression and thought. 

4. (1) See 5, June '97. 

(2) Maximum of practical work, minimum of theory and set prin- 
ciples. Thought-awakening exercises should be given for all fruitful 
training must begin with the thought and end with its expression. 

5. (1) See 3, June '96. 

(2) A quotation within another quotation should be enclosed by single 
quotation marks; as, Says Whittier, "I was told that a foreigner had 



07 

applied for lodging; 'What if my son were in a strange land ' my 
mother said to herself." 

(3) (a) Personification, (b) Synecdoche, (c) Metaphor, (d) Sim- 
ile, (ej Hyperbole. 

(4) Clearness, energy and elegance. 
6. See 5. June '97. 



June 1899. 

1. Composition is the art of expressing thought by means of language. 
A sentence is the expression of a single complete thought. 

A paragraph is a group or combination of related sentences, treating 
of one topic and forming one step in the development of a theme. 

The development of a whole subject constitutes discourse, written or 
spoken, in one of its manifold forms. 

Diction: See IV, Sept. '97. 

2. Elements — 

I had often received an invitation from my friend Sir Roger de 

Coverly to pass away a month with him in the country. 
I last week accompanied him thither. 
I am settled with him some time at his country house. 
I intend there to form several of my ensuing speculations. 
Combined — 

Having often received an invitation from my friend, Sir Roger 
de Coverly, to pass away a month with him in the country, I last week 
accompanied him thither, and am settled with him for some time at 
his country house, where I intend to form several of my ensuing spec- 
ulations. 

Synthesis is the process of combining separate statements into a sin- 
gle sentence. 

3. A simple sentence may be converted into a complex sentence by 
changing some word, or phrase, into a clause. 

A complex sentence may be converted into a compound sentence by 
changing a clause into an independent member. 

The process by which these changes are made is called expansion; as, 
Simple — No one doubts the roundness of the earth. 
Complex — No one doubts that the earth is round. 
Compound — The earth is round and no one doubts it. 
Contraction consists in reducing compound sentences to complex and 
to simple sentences by converting one of the independent members of 
the compound sentence into a clause and in converting the clause of the 
complex sentence into a phrase or word; as. 

Compound — Egypt is a fertile country and is watered by the river 
Nile, which annually inundates it. 

3. Complex — Egypt is a fertile country, which is watered by the river 
Nile, and which is annually inundated by it. 

Simple — Egypt is a fertile country watered by the river Nile, and 
annually inundated by it. 

By comhination in this connection is meant the bringing together of 
detached statements into wey-constructed sentences and into short 
compositions. See Ans. 2. 

4. (a) See V, Sept. '96. 

Violations : Impropriety, the use of pompous expressions and unus- 
ual words, redundancy, tautology, circumlocution, the use of barbarisms. 
See II June '96. By circumlocution is meant a roundabout, diffuse way 
of expressing a thought. 

5. (a) See 9, June '98. 

(b) Unity, coherence and emphasis. 



98 ' 

Sept. 'U'J. 

1. The Sentence. 

4. See 4, Oct. '94, 4 and 5, June '96. 

Adjectives that represent the most important qualities are placed 
nearest the noun. When the signitication does not determine the place 
of the adjectives, put the shortest first and the longest nearest the noun. 

Act/verTys and adverbial pTirases should be placed as near as possible 
to the words which they modify. 

5. (a) With no small difficulty, after much fatigue, through deep 
roads and bad weather, we came, at last, to our journey's end. 

(b) The first two are periodic. 

(c) In "3," complex sentence is periodic. 

(d) Periodic. Tendency of young pupils is to use loose sentences al- 
most exclusively; hence little variety and force. 

6. Unity is that property in a sentence which keeps all its parts in 
connection with the principal thought, and logically subordinate thereto. 

Clearness requires that the parts of a sentence — words, phrases and 
clauses — should be so arranged as to leave no possibility of doubt as to 
the writer's meaning. 

Strength is that property of style which causes a sentence to pro- 
duce a forcible and vivid impression. 

The essential principles of these three qualities of style apply to the 
paragraph and theme as well as to the sentence. 

7. (a) We had no lack of entertainment during the time which wsef 
spent in the city, which seems very gay and attractive. {Loose arrange- 
ment of relative clauses.) We had no lack of entertainment during the 
time which we spent in the gay and attractive city. 

(b) James told John that he would never abandon his friends. 
{Pronouns used aniMguously.) 

James said to John, "I will never abandon my friends." 

(c) Silence reigned and not a sound was heard. {Tautology). 
Not a sound was heard, 

8. In order to maintain unity of thought in a paragraph, it is requi- 
site that the sentences comprising it shall relate, each and all. to one 
definite division of the subject which they illustrate and explain. 

In order that a paragraph shall possess the quality of continuity, it 
is requisite that the sentences be so stated and arranged as to carry 
the line of thought naturally and suggestively from one to the other. 

In order that a paragraph shall possess the quality of variety, it is 
requisite that the constituent sentences shall differ both in length and 
in structure. 



June 1900. 

1. (a) See 1, June '96. 

So much of the subject as writer intends to develop, whether implied 
or formally stated, is technically known as the theme. 

An essay is a composition on any subject — usually short, but may be 
extended to many pages. 

2. A simple sentence is a single statement and contains but one 
subject and one predicate; as. The eye is the organ of sight. 

A compound sentence is one that consists of two or more simple sen- 
tences connected together; as. Light has spread and bayonets think. 

A complex sentence is one composed of a principal clause and one or 
more dependent clauses; as. As I drew near the camp, I heard a loud 
shout. 

3. (a) Style is the manner of expressing thought by the selection and 
combination of words. 



99 

(b) See 2, June '96. ■ 

(c) The arrangement and connection of words in a sentence. 

(d) Unity, coherence and emphasis. 

4. See 4, June '97. 

5. (a) A period is a sentence in which the complete sense is suspended 
until the close. 

A loose sentence is one complete in meaning at one or more points 
before its close. 

(b) See 5, Sept. '99. 

Sept. 1900. 

1. By synthesis of compound sentences is meant the process of com- 
bining separate statements into one compound sentence. See 2, June 
'99. 

2. (1) By variation of the arrangement or structure of the sentence; 
as, Wide is the gate and broad is the way that leadeth to destruction. 

How wonderful is sleep! 

(2) By variation of phraseology; as, There is as much beauty in the 
earth as there is gi-andeur in the heavens — eq.uivalent to, There is no 
less beauty in the earth than grandeur in the heavens. 

3. - (a) Accuracy in the use of words, simplicity of words, concise- 
ness, or brevity of language and purity of words. 

(b) See 3, June '96, and 4, June '97. 

Circumlocution — Pope professed to have learned poetry from Dry- 
den whom, whenever an opportunity presented itself, he praised 
through the whole period of his existence with a liberality which never 
varied. 

(c) See 6, Sept. '99. 

Unity — The subject should be changed as little as possible in the 
course of the sentence. 

Ideas that have but little connection should be expressed in separate 
sentences and not crowded into one. 

Long parenthesis in the middle of a sentence should be avoided. 

Clearness— Words, phrases and clauses that are closely' related should 
be placed as near to each other as possible, that their mutual relation 
may clearly appear. • 

The subject should be repeated when its omission would cause ambi- 
guity or obscurity. 

A preposition should be repeated after an intervening conjunction, 
especially if a verb and an object also intervene. 

Strength — Most important words should occupy most prominent places. 

Avoid excessive use of adjectives, improper repetition of a word, and 
recurrence of unpleasing similarity of sound. 

4. See 5, June 1900. 
(b) See 5, Sept. '99. 

5. The pen is mightier than the sword — Metonymy. 
Trade, like a restive hor^e, is not easily managed — Simile. 
The face of the deep is frozen over. — Personification. 

Death knocks alike at the palace and the cottage. — Personification. 
Am I a soldier of the cross? — Interrogation and metonymy. 



June 1901. 

1, See 5, June '96. 

2. (a) Personification and apostrophe. 

(b) Simile. 

(c) Metonymy. 

(d) Metonymy. 



100 

(e) Synecdoche. 

3. See 3, Sept. 1900. 

Accuracy is that quality of language which consists in using the- 
"right word in the right place." 

Conciseness consists in using the smallest number of words for the 
complete expression of a thought. 

Purity requires that the words we employ shall be good, reputable 
English. (See 3, Oct. '94). 

4. See 3, Sept. 1900. 



Sept. 1901. 

4. See 4, June '97. 

In English verse, a foot consisting of an unaccented syllable followed 
by an accented one. Term sometimes applied to a verse composed of 
iambic feet. Ex. — "Thy gen|ius calls|thee not|to pur|chase fame." 

Meter is poetical measure depending on number and accent of sylla- 
bles. 

See 4, June '96. 



Nov. 1901. 

2. See 2, Sept. '90. 

3. See 3, June 1901. 

4. See 2, June 1902. 

5. See 10, June '98. 

June 1902. 

1. See 2 and 3, Sept. '96. 

2. See 4, June '97. 
5. See 6, Sept. '99. 



Sept. 1902. 
3. Adjective clause : He that steals my purse steals trash. 
Adverbial clause : While the band played, the soldiers rested. 
Substantive : What a day loill bring forth is uncertain. 
5. See 6, Sept. '99. 



PHYSIOLOGY. 

Sept. '94 — Second Grade. 

1. (a) Gives form to the body, supports the various organs in their- 
positions, protects the vital organs, and its bones serve as levers in 
producing motion. 

(b) No such term occurs either in physiology or zoology. Probably 
the question refers to "upper extremity." If so, there are in the 
shoulder the clavicle in front and the scapula behind; in the arm the 
humerus; in the forearm, the radius and ulna; in the wrist eight carpal 
bones; and in the hand five metacarpal bones and fourteen phalanges. 

2. (a) Organic matter (Gelatin and blood vessels) 33.30 

Inorganic or earthy matter — 

Phosphate of lime ° 51.04 

Carbonate of Lime 11.30 

Fluoride of Calcium 2.00 

Phosphate of Magnesia 1.16 

Soda and Common Salt 1.20 



100.00' 
(b) A watery fluid, turning to a gristly substance within a fortnight, 
oozes out of the fractured ends, bone-matter is then slowly deposited 
and in five or six weeks complete union takes place. 



101 

3. (a) With the exception of five single ones, the muscles are ar- 
-ranged in pairs, each with its antagonist, so that they expand and con- 
tract alternately. 

(b) They are covered with strong, inelastic membranes, called fasciae. 
(c) Contractibility. 

4. Mouth, Pharynx, Oesophagus, Stomach, Small Intestine, Large In- 
testine. 

5. If the blood be bright red and spurting in jets, it comes from an 
.artery and a compress or bandage should be placed between the 

wound and heart; but if it be dark and flowing in a steady stream it is 
from a vein and the compress must be placed on the vein on the side 
of the wound away froTn the heart. 

- 6. (a) It throws off its load of carbonic acid gathered in the sys- 
temic capillaries, and takes a new supply o£ oxygen trom the air cells 
of the lungs. The color is changed irom dark purple to scarlet. 

(b) Because elements which have just been rejected by the body, are 
taken back, instead of the invigorating oxygen, and the whole system 
becomes obstructed by refuse matter injurious to health. 

7. (a) Because it excretes, in perspiration and exhalation, waste mat- 
ter, and in proper action tends to purify the blood. 

(b) It protects and supports the soft parts of the body, is the organ 
of touch, and is one of the chief excretory organs. 

8. The brain is an egg-shaped body, weighing about fifty ounces, 
and composed principally or a white substance, whose surface is cov 
ered by a layer of gray matter dipping down into its fissures. 

9-10. It is masticated and mixed with the saliva; swallowed, acted 
upon by the gastric juice in the stomach, and by the other intestinal 
juices in the small intestine. When it is absorbed by the lacteals and 
further prepared for entrance into the blood, after which it is con- 
veyed through the lymphatics and the thoracic duct to the veins and 
so taken up by the circulation, (b) It furnishes heat to the body. 



Sept. '91r— First Grade. 

1. Physiology is the science of the functions of organized bodies. 
Anatomy is the science of the structure of organic bodies. 
Hygiene — is the science of health. 

Ossification is the process by which cartilage turns to bone. 
Assimilatio,n is the process by which digested food becomes flesh and 
bone. 

2. The femur or thigh-bone has almost a globular head at its uppei 
extremity, which is fitted into a very deep socket in the innominatum or 
hip-bone. The socket is called the acetabulum; also the cotyloid cavity. 

3. (a) The stretching of the nerves supplying the muscles brought 
into play during violent exercise. 

(b) The effect is soothing and if an exudate has been formed within 
the muscle, bathing and rubbing will tend to hasten absorption, thua 
lessening pressure on nerves, and hence decreasing pain. 

4. (a) The brain, (b) The bones, (c) The blood. 

5. (a) Gastric Circulation: From the left auricle, the blood is forced 
past the bicuspid valve into the left ventricle, thence through the semi- 
lunar valve into the great aorta; from here it passes through the arter- 
ies, capillaries and veins, returning through the venal canal to the right 
auricle. 

(b) Lesser Circiilations. The blood is now venous or impure blood 
and going through the tri-cuspid valve, it empties into the, right ventri- 
cle. Thence it passes through the semilunar valve into the pulmonary 



102 

artery, thence to the capillaries of the lungs, whence puritied it returns 
through the pulmonary veins to the left auricle. 

6. The lungs, kidneys, liver and skin. The chief function of the 
lungs as excretory organs is the removal of carbonic acid from the 
blood; that of the kidneys is the removal of nitroganous waste from 
the blood. The function of liver is not well understood, but its secretion^ 
the bile, is thought to be an excrementive substance, containing carbon 
and hydrogen. The skin excretes watery vapor, carbonic acid, urea 
and common salt. 

7. (a) The nervous system includes the I) rain, the spinal cord and 
the nerves, and is composed of two kinds of matter, the white and the 
gray. The former consists of minute glistening white fibres, the latter- 
of gray cells of pulp-like consistency. These are generators of nerve 
force while the white fibres are its conductors. 

(b) Psychology is the science of mind, but to understand the mind we 
must know the gi'oss and microscopical structure of the brain and nerve 
tissue without which mind is impossible. 

8. No. 

9. (a) The apparently stimulating action of alcohol on the heart is 
due to the paralysis of the nerves governing the capillaries which 
check the flow of blood. Hence the organ is "over-worked" and long- 
continued use causes a "degeneration of the muscular fiber." 

(b) The delicate linings of the stomach become inflamed, and fre- 
uently ulcers form, sometimes terminating in cancer of the stomach. 

(c) Vascular enlargement of the capillaries results and their walls 
become inelastic and brittle. 

(d) The brain absorbs more alcohol than any other organ. Inflam- 
mation and hardening of the brain substance result from its use. 

10. (a) See 6 (b), Second Grade, Sept. '94. 

(b) Not enough saliva is mixed with food; those pieces not masticated 
resist the action of the digestive fluids; the food is washed down with 
drinks that dilute the gastric juice, and thus hinder its work; and 
lastly, we do not realize the quantity eaten until the stomach becomes 
over-loaded. 

(c) Tobacco inflames the tissues of the stomach, lungs and heart; 
thins and vitiates the blood; produces cancerous affections of the 
throat; chronic indigestion; palpitation of the heart; uncertainty in the 
control of the voluntary muscles; deadens the nerves of special sense; 
and in the young, arrests the development of both mind and body. 



October 1894. 

1. (a) See 6 (a), Sept. '94, Second Grade. 

(b) In the capillaries, the blood gives up the oxygen carried by its 
cells, and the materials for the renovation of the tissues, and gathers 
up waste products to be carried to some excretory organ. On account 
of this exchange, the color of the blood is changed from bright red to 
dark purple. 

2. (a) An organ whose functions are secretive, elaborative and ex- 
cretive. 

(d) The liver, a large reddish-brown gland situated in the abdominal 
cavity immediately beneath the diaphragm, at the right of and overly- 
ing a portion of the stomach, is the largest gland of the body and 
weighs from three to four pounds. 

The pancreas, a long, tongue shaped gland of yellowish color, is sit- 
uated behind the stomach. The spleen, a gland whose ofiice is not 
known, is situated on the left side of the spine. 

3. Saliva, a thin, watery frothy fluid, slightly alkaline, secreted by 



103 

tne mucoufc membrane of the mouth and by the salivary glands. Its 
action on the starch contained in food, changes it to grape-sugar. 

The gastric juice, a thin, colorless, acid fluid secreted by the glands 
of the stomach. Its active principle is pepsin, which converts nitroge- 
nous principles into soluble substances called peptones, capable of be- 
ing absorbed througii the coats of the stomach and intestines. 

Tiie bile, a viscid fluid of dariv golden color extremely bitter and 
slightly allialine to the taste. It is secreted by the liver, and its action, 
though not understood, is necessary to life. 

Tlie pancreatic juice, a viscid, alkaline fluid, slightly milky in appear- 
ance and possessing the power of changing starch to sugar. It is se- 
creted bj' the pancreas. 

4. See lU (b), Sept. '94, First Grade. 

5. (a) The crossing of nerves. (,bj In the medulla oblongata and 
the spinal cord, also the optic nerves in the cranium. 

(j. See Sept. '94, Second Grade. 

7. (a) The limb should be bound with handkerchiefs to a strip of 
board, or even to umbrellas or walking sticks, as temporary splints, 
and if patient lias to be carried some distance care should be taken to 
prevent injury to the fleshy parts by the ends of the fractured bone. 

(b,l In a fracture there is crepitus and mobility of parts, whereas in 
a sprain these symptoms are absent, and early swelling with general 
pain in joint is presenc. In case of severe sprain bandage joint tightly, 
and pour iee-vi^ater over sprain. 

8. (a) Excretory, (bj See 6 (bj, Sept. '94, First Grade. 

9. That bright pupils are more fond of out-door games than dull 
ones is by no means an established fact. 

10. Because the brains of children becoming easily fatigued, require 
frequent relaxation, and their muscles demand relief through exercise 
from the tension of a sitting posture. 

Permanent mental and physical injury may. be done young children 
by prolonged periods of study and insulficient exercise. 



May. 1895. 

1. They form a single row of Ave bones in the palm of each hand. 

2. See 7 (b). Second Grade, Sept. '94. . 

3. The skeleton contains at maturity 206 bones— classified according 
to form as long, short, flat and irregular. A transverse section of bone 
shows first an investing membrane called the Periosteum, a compact 
outer layer of bone tissue, an inner layer more porous, and a central 
canal containing a fatty substance called "marrow." For composition 
of bones see 2 (a), Second Grade, Sept. '94. 

4. By means of the Haversian Canals, the entrances to which from 
the surfaces of bones and the medullary cavities are called Nutrient 
Foramina. 

5. The Jieart, which is a hollow, pear-shaped muscular organ about 
the size of a man's fist, and weighs from ten to twelve ounces; the 
arteries, which are strong elastic tubes through which the blood passes 
from the ventricles to all parts of the body; the veins, tubes througli 
which the blood returns to the heart after being forced out through the 
arteries and the capillaries, miscroscopic tubes joining the termini of 
the arteries to the commencement of minute veins. 

6. (a) The larynx, trachea and the lungs. 

(b) Respiration consists of the two processes, inspiration and expi- 
ration. When we inhale a full breath, the diaphragm descends, press- 
ing the abdominal walls outward; the size of the chest being thus en- 
larged the lungs expand to occupy the extra space and the air from 



104 
without, through the foi'ce of gravity, rushes in, and fills every cell. 
In expiration we draw in the walls of the abdomen and raise the dia- 
phragm, thus diminishing the size of the chest and forcing the air out- 
ward. 

7. (a) The alimentary canal, consisting of the following divisions : 
mouth, pharynx, oesophagus, stomach, small intestine and large intes- 
tine; and the accessory glands; viz., the salivary glands, those of the 
stomach which secrete the gastric juice, the liver and the pancreas. 

(b) See 3. Oct. '94. 

8. Milk, eggs, cheese, flesh and the gluten in wheat. 

9. A cold climate requires much carbonaceous or fatty food, for the 
production of heat and force, but in tropical regions, a low unstimu- 
lating diet consisting principally of fruits and vegetables, should be 
adopted. 

10. (a) The blood becomes thin and watery, and alcohol, if present 
in sufficient q.uantities, because of its affinity for water, absorbs the 
moisture from the blood corpuscles, causing them to shrink up, and 
lose their ability to carry oxygen. 

(b) The nerves become partially paralyzed, thus lessening general 
sensibility and producing disordered motion, which, beginning with un- 
steadiness of the nerves, frequently ends in true paralysis. 

(c) See 9 (d). First Grade, Sept. '94. 

(d) Tobacco, opium and cocaine. 
Tobacco, see 10 (.c), Sept. '94, First Grade. 

Opium poisoning causes the body to become emaciated, produces ner- 
vous derangement and destroys the intellect. 

The use of cocaine causes derangement of the vital centers and in- 
duces a gloomy sort of inania. 
Sept. 1895. 

1. See 1, Sept. '94, First Grade. 

2. See 2, Oct. '94. 

3. See 3 (b), Sept. '94, First Grade. 

4. See 10 (b), Sept. '94, First Grade. 

5. (a) See 7, June '98. 

(c) Lymph is merely the plasma of the blood, containing a few white 
corpuscles. 

(d) The lacteals are the lymphatic vessels of the intestines and carry 
chyle through the process of digestion. 

(e) The pulse- is the throbbing of an artery, caused by the spurting 
of the blood set in motion by the contraction of the heart. 

6. S.ee 6, May 1895. 

7. (a) See 7, May, '95. 

(b) Food is first broken by mastication into small particles to enable 
the digestive fluids of the mouth and stomach to act upon it. During 
this process it is mixed with saliva which moistens it and changes 
starch, an insoluble substance, into grape sugar, a soluble one, after 
which it is forced to the back of the mouth by the cheeks and tongue, 
and passes through the pharynx into the oesophagus by the contraction 
of the muscles of the throat and thence to the stomach. Here it is con- 
verted into a semi-liquid state by the peristaltic motion of the stomach 
and is thoroughly mixed with the gastric juice which converts its ni- 
trogenous elements intol soluble Isubstancqs called peptones. In this 
state it is called chyme. Chyme passes from the stomach through the 
pyloric valve to the duodenum, where it is mingled with the bile and 
pancreatic juice which convert it into a milky emulsion called chyle. With 
the exception of some of the fats which undergo further changes in the 
lacteals, the food is now ready for absorption by the capillaries which 
deposit where needed for the repair of the body. 



105 

8. It connects the middle ear through the pharynx with the external 
"■ear, and thus equalizes the pressure on the inner and outer, sides of the 

tympanum, preventing injury to this membrane and securing accuracy 
in its vibrations. 

9. (a) High mental power. 

(b) A vertical section through each hemisphere of the cerebellum ex- 
hibits a tree-like structure, the trunk being composed of white nerve 
matter and the branches of gray. This is called the "Arbor Vitae" or 
tree of life. 

10. (a) See 9 (d), First Grade, Sept. '94. 

(b) See 10 (a), May, '95. 

(c) See 10 (b), May, '95. 

(d) See 9 (a), First Grade, Sept. '94. 

(e) See 9 (b), First Grade, Sept. '94. 
Also 10 (c), First Grade, Sept. '94. 



June '96. 

1. See 1, Sept. '94, First Grade. 

2. (a) See 1 (a), Sept. '94, Second Grade. 

(b) The muscles give form and symmetry to the body and produce its 
varied movements. 

3. The shoulder — clavicle and scapula; the arm — humerus; the fore- 
arm — ulna and radius; the hand — eight wrist or carpal bones, five me- 
ta-carpal bones, and fourteen phalanges. 

4. See 7, Sept. '95. i 

5. See 5, May '95. 

6. See 6, May '95. 

7. The cerebrum and cerebellum — The former is the center of intel- 
ligence and thought, the latter controls the voluntary muscles. 

8. The eyes should never be used to read by a dim light, and the 
light should always come from one side, and never in front. They 
should never be strained by reading fine print, and should not be used 
Ijeyond the point of fatigue. 

9. (a) See 7 (a), Sept. '94, First Grade. 

(b) Classified as to function, nerves are either motory or sensory; as 
to origin, either cranial or spinal. 

(c) Motory nerves are those that convey impressions from the nerve 
centers outward. 

10. (a) Take care to eat slowly, and at regular hours; to masticate 
food thoroughly and to avoid drinking while the mouth contains food; 
to abstain from drinking very cold and very hot beverages, also from 
the use of alcoholic stimulants and highly seasoned dishes; to cultivate 
cheerfulnesss at table and to vary the diet to suit the season of the year. 

(b) See 9 and 10 (c), Sept. '94, First Grade, also 10, May '95. 

(c) The greatest importance because human happiness depends upon 
•obedience to a few simple laws of health. Their study therefore is bind- 
ing upon all who would promote their own happiness or that of others. 

(d) From, 70 to 72 degrees. 

(e) To make the schoolroom a model in these respects. 



Sept. 1896. 

1. See 1, Sept. '94, Second Grade. 

2. (a) A body of contractile tissue, constituting a motor organ and 
liaving a distinct office, (b) A collection of five hundred distinct muscles 
which in discharging their respective functions, produce the different 
movements of the body. 

(c) The biceps and triceps, in the front and back of arm respectively; 



106 

the pronator and supinator are located in the forearm and turns the palm 
of the hand down and up respectively; the deltoid, upper part of arm 
and shoulder, raises the arm from the side; the sternocleido-mastoid, at 
the side of the neck, bends the head forward and from side to side; the 
sartorius, longest muscle in the body, an'?t the adductors, in the leg; the 
gastrochnemius, largely constituting the calf of the leg, is used in walk- 
ing; and the soleus also in the leg, is used in walking and preventing 
the body from falling forward when erect. 

3. See 6, May '95. 

See 6 (b), Sept. '94, Second Grade. 

4. See 6, Sept. '94, First Grade. 

5. See 7, Sept. '95. 

6. The flow of the gastric juice is seriously retarded, and the diges- 
tive fluids, so diluted that they fail to perform their respective offices. 

7. (a) Alcohol coagulates and precipitates the pepsin of the gastric 
juice and therefore greatly hinders, or stops, digestion. Its moderate 
use causes inflammation of the lining membranes of the stomach, and 
frequently ulcerous patches make their appearance. 

(b) See 9 (a), Sept. '94, First Grade. 
((5) See 9 (d), Sept. '94, First Grade, 
(d) See 10 (c), Sept. '95. 

8. Vegetables, because they are not as stimulating a diet as meats, 
and because nitrogenous or strength-producing foods are needed, rather 
than carbonaceous or heat-producing foods (to which class belong meats) 
are required. 

9. (a) No, because mental or physical work interferes with the pro- 
cess of digestion, 

(b) When angry or worried the digestive process is seriously hin- 
dered. 

For evils of rapid eating see 10 (b), Sept. '94, First Grade. 

10. (a) See 10 (c), Sept. '94, First Grade. 

(b) Chewing is more injurious than smoking, because more of the 
poison is taken directly into the system. 



June 1897. 

1. (a) See 1, Sept. '94, Second Grade. 

2. Lachrymal-glands — located in the bony wall of the eye's orbit. 
Sehaceous — Glands of the skin near the roots of the hair. 
Salivary — Glands opening into the mouth. 

Perspiratory — Minute glands beneath the skin in all parts of the body^ 
Lymphatic — Small, round glands in the lymphatic vessels, which are- 
found interlaced with the blood capillaries, in nearly every part of the 
body. 

3. (a) See 7, Sept. '94, Second Grade. 

(b) It should be kept clean by frequent bathing. The use of cosmet- 
ics should be avoided. 

4. See 7. Sept. '95. 

5. (a) See 10 (b), Sept. '94, First Grade, 
(b) See 6, Sept. '96. 

6. The function of the liver is the secretion of bile by means of the 
bile capillaries which extend among the hepatic cells comprising the 
gland. From these, the bile is conveyed through the cystic duct to the 
gall bladder or through the hepatic duct directly to the common bile 
duct which discharges the bile into the duodenum when digestion Is In 
progress. 

7. (a) Only proper exercise can impart strength and tone to the or- 



107 

gani of the body. An unusued muscle or organ soon becomes unable to 
perform its natural functions. 

(bj Directly after a meal and after long abstinence from food. 

(C) To permit the organs to repair the tissues destroyed by their use. 

(d) Because in childhood nature requires more time for the process 
of building up and repair. 

(e) Eye-lids, eye-lashes, lubricating oilj gland and teax or lachrymal 
glands. 

8. It consists of the brain and spinal cord, the nerves and ganglia, 
and the organs; of special sense. 

9. (a) Yes. 

(b) See 9 (d), Sept. '94, First Grade. 
(.c) See 9 (b), Sept. '94. First Grade. 

(d) "Fatty degeneration" takes place and the tissues become so modi- 
fied that frequently "'Bright's Disease" ensues, 

(e) See 10 (a). May '95. 

10. (a) Nicotine. 

(b) It retards the development of both mind and body. 

(c) See 6 (b), Sept. '94, Second Grade, 
(dj See 0, June '98. 

(e) By opening windows from top and bottom, and if possible, having 
an open fire-place. 



Sept. 1897. 

1. (a) See 1 (.a), Sept.' '94, Second Grade. 

(,bj A transverse section of the spinal cord shows three membranes, 
the dura mater, arachnoid membrance, and the pia mater, enclosing a 
mass of white nerve substance, which contains a core of gray matter ar- 
ranged in two crescent-shaped bodies. It is the center of nerve force 
for thirty-one pairs of nerves, having in it their origin. 

(c) See 2 (a), Sept. '94, Second Grade, (d; 206. 

(e) The sternum, clavicle, scapula, humerus, ulna, radius, the innom- 
inata, femur, tibia, and fibula. 

2. (a) Voluntary and involuntary. 

(b) Voluntary muscles, or those under control of the will, are com- 
posed of fine fibers made up of minute Mlaments, each of which is com- 
posed of a row of small cells. These are bound together by connective 
tissue, by this arrangement added strength being gained. Involuntary 
muscles perform their respective functions without our volition; e. g., 
the heart, and are arranged in layers. 

(c) Tendons are used to attach the muscles to the bones at the 
joints, and are composed of glistening white fibres, strong and flexible, but 
inelastic. 

(d) The Tendon of Achilles, forming the common attachment to the 
heel of the gastrochnemius, and soleus muscles. 

(e) See 7, June '97. 

3. (a) The skin is composed of two distinct layers. The outer one, 
or cuticle, is composed of layers of small, flat cells, soft and moist 
within, and becoming dry, horny scales on the surface. The inner layer 
or cutis is a close net-work of fibrous tissue through which nerves and 
blood-vessels ramify. 

(b) It protects and supports the soft part of the body, is the organ of 
touch, is one of the chief excretory organs, lends beauty and symmetry 
to the body and by means of its appendages, the hair, teeth and nails, 
respectively protects against heat and cold, acts as an organ of digestion, 
and adds to the mechanical perfection of the hand. 

(c) In order to keep the body free from the accumulations of excre- 



108 

mentious substances and dust, which obstruct the pores of the skin. 
The best time is on rising from bed, and a cool bath is more invigorating. 

(d) To protect the body from heat, cold and sudden draughts. 

(e) Clothing, if too tight, hinders the circulation; if too heavy, it pre- 
vents the ready escape of perspiration; if unclean, it contaminates the 
body, and invites disease; if wet, it induces cold, and if cheaply dyed, 
there is danger from poisonous substances being absorbed through the 
pores of the skin. 



4. See 7, Sept. '95. 

5. (a) Physiologically a food is a substance which contains either 
elements of which the body is composed, or fuel for maintaining its tem- 
perature, and must be capable of digestion. 

(b) Nitrogenous, or albuminoid, and non-nitrogenous, or carbonaceous. 

(c) The former are classified as proteids and albuminoids, the latter 
as hydrocarbons and carbohydrates. 

(d) The proteids are obtained from lean meat; the white of eggs; Ca- 
sein from milk and cheese; and gluten from plants; the albuminoids 
from the fibrous tissue of animals. Hydrocarbons are obtained from 
animal fats and vegetable oils, as from tallow and suet, butter and lard, 
and carbohydrates, chiefly from plants; e. g., starch, sugar and gums. 

(e) Water and the chlorides, phosphates, and sulphates of the bases, 
sodium, potassium, magnesium and calcium. 

Lime, for bone, phosphorus for the brain, iron for the blood, and the 
alkalies to aid in digestion. 

6. Albuminoids : fish, eggs, milk, wheat bread, apples, onions. 
Car'bonaceous : butter, sweet potatoes, peas, mustard. 

7. (a) See 9 (a), Sept. '94, First Grade. 

(b) They produce congestion, inflammation and ulceration. Fatty de- 
generation is a common result. 

(c) See 9 (d), June '97. 

(d) See 9 (d), Sept. '94, First Grade. 

(e) See 10 (b). May '95. 

8. (a) Yes. (b) Because they engender an appetite for stronger bev- 
erages. 

(c) See 9 and 10, Sept. '94, First Grade, and 10, May '95. 

(d) See 10 (d). May '95. 

9. Intense heat and fatigue. Symptoms, state of unconsciousness and 
hot, dry skin. The sufferer should have clothing loosened and should be 
carried at once where cold water can be dashed on his head and chest, 
until consciousness is restored. 

10. Improperly cooked food causes indigestion, and as the body is in- 
sufiiciently nourished therewith, other functional disorders and general 
weakness may ensue. A morbid craving for stimulants, as a result, of- 
ten leads to the use of alcoholics and narcotics. 

Right cooking renders food more palatable and serves as an aid to 
digestion. 



June '98, 

1. The spinal column, consisting of twenty-four bones, or vertebrae; 
the ribs, twenty-four long, slender, curved bones forming the walls of 
the thorax; the sternum, a flat bone, situated in the medial line in front 
of the thorax; the os hyoides, a u-shaped bone at the base of the tongue; 
the innominata, two large, irregular bones which with the sacrum form 
the pelvic basin; the sacrum, a wedge-shaped bone situated at the base 
of the spinal column between the innominata and the coccyx, a small 
curved prolongation of the sacrum. 



109 

2. These bones are so flexible on account of their cartilaginous state,, 
that the weight of the dangling feet will bend the thigh bones over the 
edge of the seat and produce deformity. 

3. (a) See 2 (b), Sept. '97, 

(b) Their use — To give form and symmetry to the body, and produce 
its varied movements. 

4. A perspiratory gland is a minute tube coiled into a globular mass 
and discharging the perspiration which it secretes from the blood, 
through a spirally-coiled duct upon the surface of the skin. 

5. See 6, ay '95. 

6. Rebreathing air in crowded rooms, owing to the presence of car- 
bolic acid, causes drowsiness and headache, which besides impairing the 
health, unfits pupils for mental activity. In addition to this children 
come, frequently, from sick-rooms bringing with them the germs of dis- 
ease, or may themselves, even, have poisoned organs, or bear traces of: 
illness, making their breath and exhalations poisonous. 

The best ventilation is secured by having a strong entering current of 
pure warm air from a hot-air furnace. In Florida, however, there are 
few days when ventilation may not be provided simply by opening the 
windows at the top and bottom, on the sheltered side tit the building to 
avoid injurious draughts of air. 

7. The heart is a hollow, pear-shaped, muscular organ, about the size 
of a man's fist, composed of several layers of stiratfed fibres. Its walls 
vary in thickness from one-twelfth to one-half inch, and inclose two 
entirely distinct cavities, each of which is separated into two connecting 
chambers, an auricle and a ventricle. 

The contraction of a chamber of the heart is called a systole, and its 
expansion, a diastole. 

8. (a) It is first accelerated but ultimately becomes feebler. 

(b) See 9 (a), Sept. '94, First Grade. 

(c) See 10 (a). May '95 

(d) Congestion of the lungs and pneumonia are frequently caused by 
their use. 

9. See 7, Sept. '95. 

10. (a) See 7, Sept. '96. 

(b) Nearly all the diseases springing from indulgence in alcoholic 
beverages are liable to become hereditary, and the appetite itself trans- 
mitted through at least three or four generations. 



Sept. '98. 

1. (a) Osseous, muscular, articulatory, digestive, absorptive, circula- 
tory, respiratory, excretory, and nervous systems. 

(b) Sclerous or bone tissue, connective, cartilaginous, muscular, adi- 
pose or fatty, and nervous tissue. 

2. One occipital, two parietal, two temporal, one frontal, one sphe- 
noid and one ethmoid in the cranium, two molar, two superior maxil- 
lary, one inferior maxillary, two lachrymal, two nasal, one vomer, two 
turbinated and two palate in the face, and one molens, one incus and one 
stopes in each ear. 

3. (a) Nitrogenous or albuminoid, carbonaceous and mineral. 

(b) Eggs, wheat bread and lean meat; butter, sugar, and Irish pota- 
toes; and salt, iron and water, respectively. 

4. See 7 (b). May '95. 

6. A vertical section shows a solid portion composed mainly of ivory 
or dentine, which is covered in the body of the tooth with a thin layer 
of enamel, and in the root by cement; and a cavity containing a soft 
sensitive substance called dental pulp. 

7. Transfusion — The process by which blood from a healthy animal 



110 

is infused into tlie veins of another animal or human being for the 
purpose of restoring strength and saving life. 

Trepanning or trephinning is the perforation of the skull and remov- 
ing a portion of the bone to relieve pressure or irritation of the brain. 
Scalp is shaved and washed ahtiseptically, patient anesthized and the 
trephine turned gradually but firmly until button of bone is detached. 

Grafting is the process of cutting strips of epidermis and laying same 
on raw surface.* 

Peristalsis is the vermicular shortening and narrowing of the intes- 
tine resulting in propelling its contents downward. 

8. See 7 (a) Sept. '94, First Grade. 

Sensory — Those nerves which carry impressions from the various 
parts of the body to the nervous centers. 

Vaso-motor — Those nerves that supply the walls of the blood vessels. 

Sympathetic nerves are those branching from a central, double chain 
of ganglia and distributed throughout all the thoracic, abdominal and 
pelvic viscera. 

Cranial — One of twelve pairs of nerves springing from the lower part 
of the brain and the medulla oblongata. 

9. Lacunae — ^Small, irregularly-shaped cavities between the Lamellae 
found in compact osseous tissue. 

Fasciae — Strong, inelastic membranes, investing the muscles and bind- 
in their fasciculi firmly together. 

Cochlea — ^A spinal canal, somewhat resembling the common snail 
shell, which extends from the vestibule of the inner ear into the sub- 
stance of the temporal bone. 

Meninges — The membranes enveloping the brain and spinal cord. 

Masseter — A short thick muscle, situated below the ear at the angle 
of the lower jaw, and used in chewing. 

10. The larynx is a small triangular cartilaginous box, placed just 
behind the tongue, and at the top of the wind-pipe. The opening into 
it from the throat is called the glottis, and the cover the epiglottis. 

The vocal cords are elastic membranes on each side of the glottis and 
projecting from the sides of the larynx across the opening. 

Other organs of speech, which need no description, are the lips, teeth, 
tongue and palate. 
June 1899. 

1. (a) To make good the loss caused by the constant elimination of 
waste matter from the body. 

(b) Albuminoid or nitrogenous foods containing, as their name indi- 
cates, nitrogen as one of their chief constituents; e. g., the white of 
eggs and gluten of wheat; carhonaceous, those containing much carbon, 
viz., the sugars and fats; and mineral foods, such as salt, iron and wa- 
ter. 

(c) Because both nitrogen and carbon are necessary to the growth 
and repair of the body, and no one food contains both elements in the 
proper proportion to support life. 

2. Mastication, insalivation, chymefication and chylification. For de- 
scription, see 3, Oct. '94, and 7, Sept. '95. 

3. Roast beef and mutton, the most nutritious of meats, require three 
and three and a quarter hours respectively; potatoes and bread, two and 
one-half; eggs and milk about two. The last mentioned food can sus- 
tain life for a longer time than any other article of diet as it contains 
all the essential elements of food. Roast pork requires five and a quar- 
ter hours for digestion and contains much carbon. Oysters are very 
nourishing, as is also cheese. 

4. (a) See 10 (b), Sept. '94, First Grade. 
. 5. (a) See 7, Sept. '96. 



Ill 

(b) It consists in a change in the fibre of an oi-gan, its place bein^ 
taken by a deposit of unhealthy fat. 

6. See 7 (a), Sept. '94. 

7. The sense of taste is located in the papillae of the tongue and 
palate. They absorb the liquid to be tasted and convey it to the nerves. 
It was intended to guide in the selection of food. 

8. It consists of the external, middle and internal ear. 

The external ear consists of the auricle, an irregularly folded sheet of 
cartilage attached to the side of the head for the purpose of collecting 
vibrations of sound; and the auditory canal, an irregular, cylindrical 
tube, about an inch and a quarter long, which conveys the waves of 
sound to the middle ear, which is an irregular cavity about the size of 
a small cherry, separated from the auditory canal by the membrane of 
the tympanum or ear drum. It is filled with air and traversed by a 
chaia of little bones — the malleus^ incus, and stopes. 

The internal ear consists of the vestibule, or anti-chamber; the semi- 
circular canals, these channels, about one-twentieth of an inch in diam- 
eter, arching out into the bone, separately from the vestibule, and re- 
turning to it after completing the greater parts of circles; and the 
cochlea, a spiral canal somewhat resembling a snail shell and extending 
from the vestibule into the substance of the temporal bone. 

(f) Use warm water to wash the ear, and never remove accumulated 
wax with a hard instrument. 

9. The essential parts of the eye are the eye-hall and the optic nerve. 
The former consists of three coats, the outer or sclerotic coat, a tough, 
opaque, fibrous membrane covering the back and sides of the eyeball, 
known as the "white of the eye"; the clioroid, a black lining to absorb 
superfluous light; and the retina, a delicate membrane formed by the 
expansion of the optic nerve. 

The front part of the sclerotic coat is a transparent window, the cor- 
nea, between which and the crystalline lens, which brings the rays of 
light to a focus, is a refracting medium called the aqueous humor. 

The concave space between the crystalline lens and the retina is oc- 
cupied by a transparent jelly-like substance, called the vitreus humor. 

(b) Far-sightedness results from the globe of the eye being flattened 
so that the rays of light strike the retina before they are brought to a 
focus and is remedied by convex glasses; near-sightedness, from an elon- 
gation of the eyeball, so that rays of light are brought to a focus he- 
fore they reach the crystalline lens, and is remedied by concave glasses. 

10. (a) Carbonic acid, carbonic oxide, and ammonia gases; carbon or 
soot and nicotine. 

(b) See 10 (c), Sept. '94, First Grade. 



Sept. 1899. 

1. (a) In front of the knee-joint; (b) in the forearm, on the side 
next the thumb. 

(c) The Tickets is a disease of the bones in which there is lack of 
mineral matter, and a consequent crookedness and deformity of the bod- 
ily frame. 

(d) St. Vitus' dance is a chronic, involuntary contraction or twitching 
of those muscles usually controlled by the will, especially those of the 
face and extremities. 

(e) A transparent, yellowish, lubricating fluid resembling the white of 
an egg, secreted by the synorial membrane surrounding the joints. 

2. (a) The organs of circulation, digestion and respiration. 

(b) Fibrils — Minute filaments made up of small cells arranged in a 
row which, bound firmly together by connective tissue, compose the 
muscular fibres. 



112 

(c) Muscular sense — That faculty by which we determine by pressure- 
and resistance the weight and texture of substances, and maintain the 
equipoise of the body. 

(d) Mucous membrane — The delicate, sensitive membrane, having the- 
same structure as the skin, with which every part of the body is lined. 

(e) Because a chicken uses the muscles of its breast but little, while 
a pigeon is almost constantly on the wing. 

3. (a) See 3 (a), Sept. '97. 

(b) See G. Sept. '9S. 

(c) Because the pigment cells beneath the skin have been destroyed, 
(d, e) They should be carefully brushed after each meal and particles- 

of food removed by soft, wood toothpicks. 

4. (,a) Trachea — A rigid cylindrical tube, somewhat less than an inch, 
in diameter and four and a half inches in length, extending from the 
larynx down into the thorax where it divides into the bronchial tubes. 
It is composed of elastic fibres and cartilaginous rings and is lined by 
a mucous membrane. 

(b) See 10, Sept. '98. 

(c) Cilia — Minute filaments found along the air passages, whose con- 
stant motion serves to fan the air in the lungs and to produce an out- 
ward current which is useful in catching fine particles drawn inward by 
the breath. 

(d) Pleura — The double covering investing the lungs, one layer being, 
attached to the lungs and the other to the walls of the chest. 

(e) Air contains oxygen, an element so vital that it must be supplied. 
the body every moment or we die. 

5. (a) Plasma — The nearly colorless, transparent fluid in which. 
fioat the corpuscles of the blood, composed of serum and albuminous, 
substances called fibrin factors or fibrin. 

(b) See 7 (a), Sept. '98. 

(c) See 7, June, '98. 

(d) See 5 (e), Sept. '95. 

(e) See 5 (bj, Sept. '94, First Grade. 

7. See 7 (a), Sept. '94, First Grade. 

8. Touch — This sense is located in the papillae, minute conical projec- 
tions of the cutis, spread over the whole body. Each of these contains 
its tiny nervelets that receive impressions and transmit them to the 
brain. 

Taste— See 7, June '99. 

Hearing — See 8, une '99. 

Sight— See 9, June "99. 

Smell — This sense is located in the nose, whose walls are formed of 
plates of bone and cartilage and its cavity divided into two large, irreg- 
ular chambers called nostrils, over whose inner surface are distributed 
the branches of the olfactory nerves. 

9. (a) See 7 (a), Sept. '96. 

(b) It becomes inflamed, and sometimes unsightly blotches make their 
appearance. 

(c) See 8 (a), June '98. 

(d) See 10 (b), ay '95. 

(e) It is hardened because of absorption of its moisture thereby. 

10. See 10 (b), Sept. '94, First Grade. 
June 1900. 

1. (a) Fibula — The small, outside bone of the leg. 

Scapula — the thin,, flat triangular bone fitted to the top and back of 
the chest and called the "shoulder blade." 

Ulna — A slender bone on the inner side of the forearm, which articu-- 
lates with the humerus at the elbow. 



113 

(b) A stooping position, as in the case of students who bend forward 
to their books instead of lifting them nearer their eyes; also writing at 
high desk which necessitates raising one shoulder higher than the other 
to write. 

(c) When a ligament is strained, twisted or torn from its attachment, 
a sprain is produced. 

2. See 2, Sept. '98. 

3. See 7, Sept. '95. 

4. (a) See 3 (a), Sept. '97. 

(b) Complexion is due to a pigment or coloring matter of varying 
hue, contained in the freshly formed cells on the lower side of the cuti- 
cle. 

5. For description of the ear see 8, June '99. 

When waves of air, caused by the striking of one body against an- 
other, strike the membrane of the tympanum, it vibrates and sends the 
motion along the chain of bones in the middle ear to the labyrinth 
where they produce impression on the end organs of the auditory nerve, 
which conveys them to the brain and produces in the mind the idea of 
sound. 

6. See 6, June '98. 

7. For description of the eye, 9, June '99. Rays of light from an 
object enter the eye and are focussed by the refracting media on the re- 
tina, producing impressions on the optic nerve which are conveyed to 
the brain, giving the perception of light. 

8. See 5, Sept. '94, First Grade. 

9. Because fats supply the body with the heat required by that frigid 
climate, while the acid of fruits and vegetables is cooling, hence appro- 
priate food for a warm climate. 

10. See 9 and 1 0(c), Sept. '94, First Grade, also 10, May '95. 



Sept. 1900. 

1. See 1, June, 1900. 

2. See 2. Oct. '94. 

3. See 3 (a, b and c), Sept. '97. 

4. See 6, Oct. '94. 

5. See 10 (b), Sept. '94, First Grade, and 4, June '99. 

6. See 6. June '98. 

7. See 6, June '98. 

7. See 9, Sept. '97. 

8. See 9, June '99. 

9. See 7, Sept. '97. 
10. See 8, Sept. '97. 



June, 1901. 

1. (a) See 1 (b), June '99. , 
(b) See 4. June '96. 

2. (a) See 6, June '97. 

(b) The secretion of the gastric juice. 

(c) Its function is not understood but probably has to do with the 
production and renovation of blood corpuscles. 

(d) The secretion of saliva. 

3. See 10, Sept. '95. 

4. (a) Asphyxia — Suffocation or "oxygen starvation." 

(b) Pleurisy — An inflammation of the pleura. 

(c) Plasma — See 4 (a), Sept. '99. 

(d) Transfusion — See 7 (a), Sept. '98. 

(e) Serum — The clear, yellow liquid which constitutes the perma- 
nently fluid portion of the plasma. 



114 

5. (a) The pulmonary arteries. 

(b) The pulmonary veins. 

G. Certain diseases are communicated from infected person to unin- 
fected one, by living organisms called microbes, which gain access to the 
body of infected person by air^ food, or drink, and which growing and 
multiplying in body they invade, produce changes characteristic of the 
peculiar disease. 

7. The veins contain valves whose use is to prevent the blood from 
flowing backward. 

S. By increasing the flow of blood to those muscles used, exercise 
builds them up, and they become larger, darker colored, hard and more 
compact. 

9. By the action of oxygen within us, the heat of the body is main- 
tained. "Wherever repairs are needed there the blood corpuscles carry 
oxygen which tears down worn out tissues and consumes them, replac- 
ing them with fresh material. This process sets free the latent heat 
which is distributed by the circulation of the blood and regulated by 
means of the pores of the skin, and the mucous membrane of the air- 
passages. , 

10. (a) See 5 (b), Sept. '97. 

(b) Carbonaceous foods containing starch are first changed by the 
saliva into grape sugar, and further changed by pancreative, an active 
principle of the pancreatic juice; the fats are taken up by the lacteals 
and prepared for assimilation. 

Nitrogenous foods are acted upon by the gastric juice, and converted 
into substances called peptones. They are further changed by the ac- 
tion of trypsin, a principle contained in the pancreatic juice. 



Sept. 1901. 

1. (a) See 2 (b), Sept. '94, Second Grade. 

(b) The broken limb must be properly "set" and held in place by 
splints to prevent a rupture of the partially mended break by any sud- 
den jar. 

2. (a) Food containing lime, 
(b) Curvature of the spine. 

3. (a) See 2 (b), Sept. '97. 
(b) See 2 (c), Sept. '97. 

4. (a) The muscles become pale, soft, and flabby, and general weak 
ness results. 

(b) See 8, June, 1901. 

(c) Often the muscles are strained or ruptured and blood-vessels 
burst. 

5. See 6, ay. '95. 

6. (a) See 9 (a), Sept. '94, First Grade, 
(b) See 10 (c), Sept. '95. 

7. (a, b, d) See 8, Sept. '94, Second Grade. ' - 
(c, e) See 7, June '96. 

8. See 5, June, 1900. 

9. (11) Loosen the clothing about the neck and che^st, and turn the 
patient on his face; open the mouth, draw out the tongue, and cleanse 
the nostrils, so as to clear the air-passages. 

(2) Place the patient on his back, grasp his arms firmly above the el- 
bows, and pull them gently upward until they meet over the head in 
order to draw air into the lungs. Then bring the arms back to the side 
to expel the air. This process should be repeated about fifteen times 
per minute. Excite the nostrils with snuff or smelling salts. 

After respiration has been established, wrap the patient in dry, warm 



115 

clothes, and rub the limbs energetically toward the heart, applying mus- 
tard plasters to the chest and hot water bottles to the limbs and feet. 

10. (a) See 6, June, 1901. 

(b) Because, the mosquito transmits the germs of the malarial and 
yellow fevers to the human family, and by destroying the mosquito we 
may lessen the number of people attacked by these diseases. , 



Nov. 1901. 

1. See 3, May '95. 

2. See 6, June '90. 

3. See 4, June 1900. 

4. See 2. June 1901. 

5. See 9, May '95. 

6. See 7, Sept. '97. 

8. See 3, Sept. '98. 

9. See 10, Sept. '99. 
10. See 8, Sept. '98. 



June 1902. 

1. Hinge-joints, those that admit of motion in two directions only, 
as in the elbow and knee. 

Ball-and-socJcet joints, which are formed by the x-eception of a globu- 
lar head into a cup-like cavity, as in the shoulder and hip. 

Gliding joints, formed by the opposition of plane surfaces and admit- 
ting a gliding movement, as in the wrist and ankle, and joints in which 
the bones are joined by cartilage, and which admit of slight movement 
in all directions, as between the vertebrae. 

2. Tendon— See 2 (c), Sept. '97, 

Ligament — A strong band of fibrous tissue used to bind together the 
ends of bones in articulations. 

Tissues — The simple organic structures composing the organs of the 
human body. 

Membrane — A thin skin or tissue, as the mucous membrane. 

3. (a) Through the capillaries. 

(b) By passing through the right chambers of the heart and perform- 
ing the "lesser circulation," then passing through the left chambers of 
the heart to the great aorta. 

4. See 3, Oct. '94. 

5. See 5, June, 1900. 

6. See 7 (a), Sept. '94, First Grade, 7 and 9, June '96. 

7. (a) If an artery- has been cut bind a ligature firmly above the 
wound; if the wound is bleeding freely, but no artery has been cut, the 
first thing to be done is to wash it with water at an ordinary tempera- 
ture, to every pint of water adding two and a half teaspoonsful of car- 
bolic acid, and two tablespoonfuls of glycerine to prevent irritation of 
the wound by the acid. If neither of these articles are convenient sub- 
stitute four tablespoonfuls of borax in the water. Wash the wound, 
close it and apply a compress of a folded square of cotton or linen, wet- 
ting it in the solution used for washing the wound and bandaging it 
down firmly. 

(b) Give mustard and warm water or syrup of ipecac. Follow with 
flour and water, and cream or sweet oil. 

(c) Loosen the clothing, place the head of the patient as low or lower 
than the feet, bathing the head with cold water and applying camphor, 
hartshorn or smelling salts to the nostrils. 

8. That of an engine without a governor, since the nerves controlling 
the action of the heart and regulating the passage of the blood through 



116 

the capillary system become paralyzed, and the blood speeds through 
the body with increased force. 

(b) Physical languor ensues the apparently stimulating effects of in- 
dulgence in alcoholics, the heart flags, and the brain and muscles feel 
exhausted. 

9. (a) The best preventive of typhoid and similar fevers lies in 
being careful that drinking water contains no fever germs. 

(b) See 6, June 1901, and 10, Sept. 1901. 

10. (a, b, c) See 1, (a, b, c), Sept. '94, First Grade. 

(d) Respiration — Breathing. For description see 6, May, '95. 

(e) Digestion — The process by which food is made fit for assimilation 
by the tissues of the body. 

(f) Cell tissues — Masses of protoplasm containing muscles. 

(g) Sensory nerve — See 8 (b), Sept. '98. 

<b) Lesser circulation — See 5 (b), Sept. '94, First Grade, 
(i) Lymph — See 5 (c), Sept. '95. 
(j) Plasma — See 5 (a), Sept. '99. 



Sept. 1902. 
1. See 5 (a), Sept. '94, First Grade. 
28. See 3, Oct. '94. 

3. By absorption the fluid-food passes rapidly through the porous 
membrane by which it is separated from the veins and lacteals. This 
process continues along the whole length of the alimentary canal. 

4. At the end of a glass tube fasten a bladder of alcohol. Fill the 
jar with water, and mark the height to which the alcohol ascends in the 
tube. The column will soon begin to rise slowly. The alcohol is pass- 
ing out through the pores of the bladder, and mixing with the water, 
while the water is coming in more rapidly. 

5. See 2 (b and c), Sept. '97. 

6. See 9, June 1901. 

7. (a) Stimulant — An agent that temporarily quickens some func- 
tional or atrophic process. 

(b) Narcotic — A nerve poison which in its earlier effects and in small 
doses stimulates, but whose final effects are stupefying. 

(c) See 10 (c), Sept. '95. 

8. (a) See 6, Sept. '98. 

(b) By brushing carefully after each meal. 

9. See 4 (a), June, 1901. (b) By drowning, suffocation, bad air, or 
coal gas. 

(c) See 9, Sept. 1901. 

10. Desks should be so placed that the light will come from one 
side or from the back, never in front; and eross lights from opposite 
windows should be avoided, since through carelessness in these respects 
the eyes are strained, and permanently defective eyesight on the part 
of the pupils may result. 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 

Sept. '94. 

1. (a) Like a magnet, the earth has attractive power, magnetic poles, 
and a neutral line extending around the globe about midway between 
the magnetic poles. 

(b) Those two points on the surface of the earth where its attraction 
is greatest. The north magnetic pole is located in the Boothia Penin- 
sula, which projects into the Arctic Ocean from North America. The 



117 

location of the South Magnetic Pole is not definitely fixed, but lies in 
the Antarctic Ocean to the south of Australia. 

(c) As the geographical and magnetic poles are not the same and all 
magnets point to the magnetic pole, it follows that the magnetic needle 
will point to the east or west of the true north. There are two lines, 
however, in the eastern and western hemispheres respectively where 
there is no declination of the needle. These lines are called "line of no 
variation," 

2. (a) Hot springs and geysers, volcanoes and the high temperature 
in deep mines. 

(b) A volcano is formed of material^ thrown up from the interior 
of the earth through fissures in its surface. This accumulation of rocky 
material forms a cone-shaped heap called a volcanic cone, whose hollow- 
shaped rent is called the crater. 

(c) A geyser is an intermittent hot spring, whose waters rise into a 
deep funnel-shaped basin formed by the immense quantities of mineral 
matter deposited by it about its vent, and on account of the intense 
interior heat, spouts volumes of hot water and steam, with explosive 
violence, many feet into the air. 

3. (a) Plateaus are broad, highland regions which rise above the 
level of the surrounding surface. 

(b) The plateau of Thibet, in Asia, the highest in the world, which 
consists of broad plains and wide basins surrounded by lofty mountain 
ranges; the plateau of Titicaca in South America from which rise the 
gigantic peaks of the Andes and the desert of Sahara, the low, flat pla- 
teau of northern Africa. 

4. (a) The northern hemisphere; (b) In the northern, because the 
advancement of mankind has been favored by climatic and geographical 
conditions. 

5. By two processes; viz., (1) volcanic action and (2) through the 
gradual accumulation of sedimentary deposits over extended areas, and 
the subsequent crumpling of the earth's surface, as successive crusts 
cooled, and contracting, subjected these upper strata to the effects of lat- 
eral pressure, by which they were folded, crushed or fractured and 
thrust upward. 

(b) In the north, the two continents resemble each other in the ar- 
rangement of their forms of relief, but in Europe the main axis of ele- 
vation extends from east to west entirely across the southern portion of 
the continent from the Atlantic Ocean to the Black Sea, while. Africa 
has the primary highland in the east extending from the Isthmus of 
Suez southward to the Cape of Good Hope. Secondary highlands of Eu- 
rope are the Scandinavian and Ural Mountains on the northwest and 
northeast respectively; those of Africa include the Atlas Mountains in 
the north and the Kong and Cameroons Mountains in the west. 

6. (a) Valleys are long depressions whose side slopes are perceptibly 
steep, and through which water-courses usually run. 

(b) Canyons — See Georgraphy question 1 (b), Sept. 1900. 

(c) When they are found betweert parts of the *ame range of hills or 
mountains forming passes. 

(d) When they lie between parallel ranges. 

7. (a) The tides are caused by the mutual attraction of gravitation 
between the earth, the moon and the sun; the effect of this force upon 
the liquid sea resulting in the tidal wave. 

8. (a) As oceanic and continental islands. 

(b) Continental islands are situated near the continents and their 
geological formation, together with the resemblance between their flora 
and fauna, indicate that they once formed parts of the mainland. 



118 

(c) Oceanic islands are found in mid-ocean far from the continents, 
and are either of volcanic or coral origin. 

(d) Volcanic islands are those formed by the accumulation of mate- 
rial thrown out ,bz. eruptions of submarine volcanoes. 

9. (a) Climate, as determined by latitude, altitude and rainfall, 
(b) Prevailing physical conditions. 

10. It is believed that the minerals contained in sea-water were prin- 
cipally derived from the mineral gases of the atmosphere when its wa- 
ter vapor first condensed to form the sea, at an early period in the 
planet's history. Another theory is that sea-water was originally fresh 
and that its saltiness is due to the immense quantities of saline matter 
carried into it by the rivers during the past ages of the world's history. 



October 1894. 

1. Thirty or forty miles only. 

2. Oxygen, silicon, aluminum, calcium, magnesium, potassium, sodium, 
carbon, hydrogen, sulphur, chlorine, and iron. 

3. Because earthquakes are most frequent in volcanic regions. The 
removal of matter from the earth's interior and its deposit upon strata 
already under stress, by volcanoes, may bring about displacements, the 
direct cause of earthquakes. 

4. Upon the amount emptied into it by inlets; the quantity discharged 
through outlets and the rapidity of evaporation as compared with precip- 
itation. 

5. The greater part of Florida is newly uplifted sea bottom, not yet 
well drained by the deepening of river channels, hence numerous lakes 
occupy the slight inequalities in the surface. Many, however, are largely 
aggregations of smaller springs. Limestone substratum. Clearness and 
sweetness of waters due to mineral influence. 

6. The presence in the water of multitudes of animalcules, which 
though invisible to the naked eye, possess the power of emitting light 
either in flashes or in a steady glow. 

7. To polar, equatorial and return currents. 

8. (a) On the occurrence of a tornado at sea, the water sucked up 
into the low, funnel-shaped cloud, and converted into spray by the winds, 
presents the appearance of a whirling column of water, or waterspout. 

(c) A cyclone is the carrying upward of a layer of calm, moist air 
which has become excessively heated by contact with the sun-heated 
earth. The vapor laden air cools as it accends and a part of its mois- 
ture is precipitated in the form of rain. Other currents of air rush in 
from all sides to take the place of that removed and a rotary motion 
is set up which may involve in the whirl all the air within 1000 miles 
of the storm-center, which is always an area of calm and of low barom- 
eter. 

(d) A tornado is a whirl of small diameter, but great depth and ve- 
locity, which forms a short distance above the earth's surface, and into 
which the surface air is 'sucked up" with excessive violence. 

(e) Because that is the direction of the prevailing winds of that re- 
gion, which consist of warm currents blowing toward the North Pole. 

9. See 7, Sept. '99. 



May 1895. 

1. Because the clouds, acting as blankets, prevent the escape of heat 
from the earth, thus keeping the temperature above the dewpoint. 

2. (a) The rainy season of California occurs in the winter because 
the prevailing westerly winds, laden with vapor from tlie Pacific, are 
chilled by coming in contact with the land at that season and their 



119 

moisture is precipitated in the form of rain. 

(b) In Florida, the rainy season occurs in summer because the pre- 
vailing southerly winds at that season, vapor-laden, sweep over the pe- 
ninsula, causing almost daily precipitation. In general, the west side of 
continents has an oceanic climate with high mean, temperature, with 
greatest rainfall in winter, while the east side has a continental climate 
with low mean temperature and greatest rain-fall in the summer. 

o. The eastern coast of the United States is much colder than the 
western. This great difference in climate is due to the atmospheric and 
oceanic circulation, which in both cases is from west to east, bringing 
to the western coast the warm vapor-laden winds from the Pacific and 
warm ocean currents, hence the higher temperature of these shores. 

The westerly winds which have become chilled in passing over the 
land, and the cold Arctic current which comes from Baffin Bay down 
our Atlantic seaboard, reduce the mean annual temperature of the east- 
ern coast. 

4. A mountain range makes the country near it warmer if the wind 
from which it shields it is cold, and vice versa. 

The distribution of rainfall is also affected by the position of mountain 
chains. 

On the side of the prevailing moist winds, which forced up the slope 
and cooled, deposit all their moisture on the land in showers, the coun- 
try is well-watered and fertile; but the opposite slopes are dry and bar- 
ren, since the winds robbed of their moisture, are dry and vaporless. 

5. Because the air receives much of its heat from the surface of the 
earth; hence the farther upward you go from the surface or on the tops 
of mountains where it is relatively insignificant, the colder it grows. 
Furthermore, the decreased density and humidity of the air, in elevated 
regions, prevent it from absorbing either the direct rays of the sun or 
those reflected or radiated from the earth. Hence high mountains in even 
tropical regions are covered with snow. 

6. The grasses, which include wheat, rye, oats, barley, rice, Indian 
corn, sugar cane, and hemp, besides many species furnishing sustenance 
to animals useful to man. 

7. See 7, Sept. '99. 

8. As woodlands retain moisture and protect from the drying effects 
of winds, the cutting away of forests increases the dryness of climate; as 
air in lowlands is warm in winter, forest denudation lowers winter tem- 
perature — change, however, partly due to consequent effect of winds. 
Summer temperature is raised. Forests have equalizing effect, as re- 
gards temperature. Soil is rendered less fertile, and erosion is the re- 
sult of clearing save where surface is virtually level, channels deepened 
and streams deprived of steady water-supply. Inundation more fre- 
quent and destructive. 

9. ' Artificial springs formed by boring through impenetrable strata of 
rock. They depend upon such an arrangement of inclined strata, that 
permeable strata are inclosed between impermeable strata, thus confin- 
ing between the latter the water which sinks into the former at their 
outcrop. 

If the outcrop is higher than the surface region where the well is 
sunk, the water will gush forth in a constant stream. 

10. The barometer is an instrument used to ascertain the amount of 
atmospheric pressure, and essentially consisting of a glass tube, about 
three feet long, closed at the upper end, which, after the air has been 
exhausted, is immersed in a vessel of mercury. Forced upward by the 
atmospheric pressure, a column of mercury will rise in the vacuous tube 
about 30 inches or until the weight of the column becomes just equal to 
that pressure. 



1^0 

Sept. 1895. 

1. See 1, Sept. '94. 

2. By detritus crumbled rock and decayed animal and vegetable 
matter. 

3. See 7. Sept. '99. 

4. Geysers — See 2 (c), Sept. '94. 

Glaciers — Are vast masses of slowly moving ice filling mountain val- 
leys in higher regions where more snow falls anually than is melted. 
The upper parts are formed of soft snow, but the weight and pressure 
of the great fields of snow pressing downward, condense the lower por- 
tions into cl^ar hard ice. 

5. See 6. Oct. '94. 

6. (a) See 7 (a), Sept. '94. 

(b) Flood tide is the name applied to the front slope of the tidal wave, 
while the front slope of its trough is called ebh tide. 

Spring tides are produced by the combined attraction of the sun and 
moon. They are unusually high, and occur at new and full moon when 
these forces act in harmony. Neap tides, occurring in the first and 
third quarters, are low, because these two forces do not then act in 
harmony. 

7. See 6, May. '95. 

8. See 6, Sept. '94. 

9. Erosion — See Geography questions, 1, Sept. 1902. 

Fossils — The remains of animals or plants which have been buried in 
the earth by natural causes. 

Deltas — See Geography questions 1 (c), June 1900. 

Monsoons — Periodical winds in the region of the trades, blowing six 
months in one direction and during the rest of the year in the opposite 
direction. They are in reality trade winds whose course has been mod- 
ified by the unequal heating of land water. 

10. During the cooler months of the year these monsoons are the reg- 
ular northeast trade-winds, but during the warmer half, the heated 
Asiatic continent deflects the trades and they rush landward to restore 
the equilibrium disturbed there by the ascending current of over-heated 
air, thus almost reversing their direction. A similar deviation is also 
produced south of the equator when Australia becomes heated, and on 
the eastern coast of Africa. 



June 1896. 

1. (a) Physical Geography is that branch of natural science which 
treats of the earth and its phenomena and their relations to the natural 
laws governing them. 

(b) "Laws of Nature" are rules so certain and constant in their ap- 
plication to natural phenomena that it is conceived that their origin is 
in the omniscience of God. 

2. See 2, Sept. '95. 

3. (a) They are caused by the unequal distribution of heat and vapor 
in the atmosphere, producing constant ascending currents within the 
tropics, whose place is taken by strong constant surface currents from 
the poles, known as the trade-winds. Their direction is changed by the 
diurnal movement of the earth from north to northeast in the northern 
hemisphere and from south to southeast in the southern hemisphere. 

• (b) See 4 (b), Sept. '95. 

4. Latitude, altitude, position and direction of neighboring mountain 
ranges, nature of the surface, distance from the sea, ocean currents and 
the distribution of winds and moisture, all affect the climate of a place. 

5. See 7, Sept. '99. 



121 

t>. See 7, Sept. '94, and 6 (b), Sept. '95. 

7. Neither plants nor animals could exist without the other, since 
all the oxygen so necessary to animal life would soon be replaced in the 
atmosphere by carbonic acid, a poisonous gas, incapable of supporting 
life, were it not that ihis gas is appropriated by all forms of plant life, 
undergoing a change which again sets the oxygen free, to be used once 
more by the animal world. 

8. (a) That time when the earth's position relative to the sun pro- 
duces everywhere on the globe days and nights of equal length. 

(b) Two. (c) March 21st and Sept. 22nd. Because its rays reach 
both poles at the same time. 

9. Slightly to the southwa,rd at noon, because the sun is north of the 
equator in its journey toward the Tropic of Cancer. 

10. (a) Because the atmosphere is cooler on a mountain and precipi- 
tation is due to the cooling of warm currents of air ascending from the 
heated lowlands, where the atmosphere can retain more moisture than 
when cooled. 

(b) See 8, May. '95. 



Sept. '96. 

1. (a) Norway and Sweden, (b) From last days of May to end of 
July, (c) Always seen north of observer on account of earth's position. 

2. (a) Yes. (b) Because at Jacksonville, which is the nearer of the 
two to the equator, a pendulum whose vibrations are of any given length, 
is shorter than one at Upermairk (in Greenland), having equal vibra- 
tionf. This difference being due to the difference in the force of gravity 
at the two places. 

3. All of South America, north of the southern limit of Brazil, in the 
region of the south east trades, would receive southwest winds. These 
would be robbed of their moisture on the western slopes of the Andes, 
making the valleys of the Amazon and Orinoco Rivers barren wastes. 
Below 38 degrees the eastern slopes would be well watered by the pre- 
vailing winds, and forests would occupy the present area of the pampas. 
The eastern coast would be colder than at present because a cold current 
from the Antarctic would take the place of the equatorial current, and 
the western coast wou^ld be warmed by a current from tropical waters. 

4. See 9 (d). and 10, Sept. '95. 

5. See 7, Sept. '99. 

6. See 5 (b), June '97. 

7. The Caucasian race inhabits southwestern Asia, northern Africa, 
nearly all of Europe and America, together with large portions of Aus- 
tralia and South Africa. 

Mongolia — Nearly all of Asia, portions of northern Europe, Turkey and 
Greenland chiefly. 
Negro — Chiefly Africa. 

8. No. Because its natural course is toward the north pole, hence it 
would not seek a channel to the westward. 

9. See Geography questions 1 (c), Sept. 1900. 

10. Yes. By protecting the forests, on mountains and other slopes. 



June '97. 

1. Chemistry, physics, botany, zoology, geology and astronomy. 

2. See 8, Sept. '94, examples, Hawaiian Islands and British Islands 
respectively. 

3. Winds are caused by the unequal distribution of heat and vapor 
in the atmosphere, producing in heated regions, constant ascending cur- 
rents. The lower air from the surrounding cooler regions blows in to 
take their place, and a constant circulation is set up. 



122 

Tides— See 6, Sept. '95. 

Ocean currents are caused chiefly by the difference of density of their 
water produced by the differences in the temperature of the equatorial 
•and polar regions. Other causes are the winds and differences of den- 
sity and level brought about by evaporation. The cold polar waters be- 
ing denser, sink, which causes an influx of the surface waters from the 
■equatorial regions and effects a constant interchange of waters between 
the equator and polar circles. 

4. See 4, Sept. '95. 

5. Volcanoes are supposed to be outlets of the pressure created by 
the highly heated conditions of the earth's interior. Earthquakes may 
be the forces thus created seeking vent, or the result of the increasing 
forces produced by contraction of the earth's crust. 

Earthquakes are most frequent in mountainous and volcanic regions 
because subterranean pressure undergoes rapid changes, this being espe- 
-cially true of the Pacific side of the continental plateau, which is bor- 
dered by the highest and youngest mountains. 

6. Fossiliferous rocks show that the first forms of animal life were of 
the most rudimentary type. Through the lapse of ages covering thous- 
ands or even millions of years, these forms were gradually replaced by 
succeeding higher forms until the earth arrived at that stage of devel- 
opment which made it a suitable dwelling place for the highest of organ- 
ized beings — man. 

7. Erosion — See Geography questions, 1, Sept. 1902. 
Fossil— See 9 (b), Sept. '95. 

Delta — See Geography questions 1 (c), Sept. 1900. 
Canyon — See Geography questions 1 (b), Sept. 1900. 
Monsoon — See 9 (d), Sept. '95. 

8. (a) See 5, May. '95. (b) See 4, May '95. 

9. Snow is the moisture that falls from the clouds, frozen In flakes 
and condensed at any temperature below 32 degrees Fahr. 

Hail stones are pellets of ice falling in showers, occasioned by great 
differences in the temperature of higher and lower strata of air. 

Dew — See Geography questions 1 (d), Sept. '99. 

Frost — Vapor precipitated in a solid form, when the dew-point of the 
air is below 32 deg. Fahr. 

Rain is the moisture of the atmosphere precipitated from the clouds 
in liquid form at any temperature above 32 deg. Fahr. 

10. (a) See Geography questions 1 (e), June, 1901. 

(b) Coal-oil is one of the compounds resulting from the slow decom- 
position of various animal and vegetable matters, found in the strata of 
various rocks. It is obtained by boring and rises from the large reser- 
voir in which it is contained, as a constant spring. 



Sept. 1897. 

1. See 1 (a), June '96. 

2. (a) The rotation of the earth on its axis from west to east every 
twenty-four hours causes alternations of light and darkness, called day 
and night, as each hemisphere is turned toward or away from the sun. 

(b) The changes of seasons are caused by inclination of the earth's 
axis to the plane of its orbit 23^° together with the earth's annual revo- 
lution in its orbit around the sun. 

3. (a) Mercator's projection represents the earth on a map in whicli 
all the parallels and meridians are straight lines. 

(b) In an equatorial projection of the entire earth, the equator passes 
through the middle of each hemisphere and a meridian circle forms the 
borders. 



123 

(c) In a polar projection the poles occupy the centres of each hemis- 
;rphere, the eauator forming the border. 

(d) In a conical projection the earth's surface is represented as if 
drawn on the frustum of a cone and afterward unrolled, and is suitable 
■only for representing portions of the earth's surface not hemispheres. 

4. See 2 (a), Sept. '94. 

5. (a) An atoll is a coral reef encircling a lagoon or body of water 
entirely free from islands. 

(b) That that region of the earth is subsiding. 

6. See 7, Sept. '94, and 6 (b), Sept. '95. 

7. The fall of the mercury in the barometer with an increase of ele- 
vation until at By^ miles it stands only half as high as the sea level. 

(b) See 3 (a), June '97. 

8 (a) North American faunna is characterized by a large number of 
iierbiverous, auatic and fur-bearing animals. Ex., the moose, reindeer, 
bison, grizzly bear, beaver, mocking bird, blue jay, and rattle snake. 

(b) South American by its numerous forms of insect life, reptiles, 
aquatic birds, and parrots and among mammals by the ant-eater, sloth, 
taper and prehensile-tailed monkey. 

(c) Australian as being the home of the marsupials, e. g., the kanga- 
roo, and of peculiar birds such as the emu, cassowary and apterix. 

(d) Greenland contains many fur-bearing animals, the polar bear, the 
reindeer and the musk-ox; numerous waterfowl and sea animals as the 
walrus and whale. 

(e) Ciiba — The alligator, manatee, iguana or lizard and turtle are in- 
digenous while most of the domestic animals have been imported from 

.Europe as on the continent. 



9. (a) Horizontal distribution of life is influenced by the latitude of 
.a region; vertical distribution by its altitude, while heat, moisture and 
vegetation form the true basis for each. 

(b) Abundant rainfall, regularly distributed throughout the year. 

10. (a) Area of Alaska, 577,390 square miles, (b) Allentian and Pri- 
bilof Islands, (c) Spruce and yellow cedar, (d) Sea otter, maten, black 
bear, silver fox, fur-seal and among fishes the salmon and cod. (e) The 
Yukon River rises in the Rocky Mountains of British Columbia, flowing 
northward until it crosses the Alaska boundary when its course turns 
westward. It has few tributaries and flows into Bering Sea. 

June 1898. 

1. (a) Mathematical Geography treats of the earth in its relation to 
the solar system; Political Geography in its relations to its countries, 
their people and governments; and Physical Geography in its relation 
to nature and the natural laws by which it is governed. 

(b) See 1. June 1897. 

2. (a) An oblate spheroid, flattened at the poles, (b) Polar diam- 
eter — 7,899.7 miles; mean, 7,917.5 miles; equatorial, 7,926.5 miles, (c) 
Surface 197,000,000 square miles, volume 260,000,000,000,000 cubic miles; 

(d) The sun is 1,300,000 times the size of the earth, (e) The sun. 

3. (a) An agonic line is an imaginary line passing through those 
-places where the magnetic needle points to the true north. 

(b) Isogonic lines are those connecting places having the same decli- 
nation or variation of the needle. 

(c) Isoclinal lines are lines connecting places having the same incli- 
nation or dip of the magnetic needle. 

(d) Magnetic storras are unusual variations in the earth's magnetism 
and usually correspond with outbursts of solar activity as manifested by 
the occurrence of new spots. 



124 

(e) Mercator's projection — See 3 (a), Sept. '97. 

4. (a) Relief is the elevation of the earth above the mean level of the 
sea. 

(b) Less than six miles or 1-65 of the earth's radius. 

(c) See Geography questions 1, Sept. 1902. 

(d) If the mountains were worn down and the valleys filled up by the 
materials from them obliterating all elevations and depressions, the sea 
would surround the globe in an uninterrupted expanse. 

(e) See 8 (a), Sept. '94. 

5. (a) The coral polyp is a minute organism consisting of a kind of 
double sac having an opening in the centre, and surrounded by filaments 
possessing a wave-like motion, thus establishing currents which set in 
toward the "mouth" and supply it with sea-water from which it sepa- 
rates mineral ingredients for the formation of its "skeleton." These 
skeletons are not separate since the polyp propagates its species by a 
budding process. The growth of this coral mass is upward and the 
surface reached, the waves throw up broken fragments above the level of 
the sea, soil is formed, and vegetation appears, planted by seeds borne 
by wind and wave. 

(b) See 5, Sept. '97. 

6. (a) Seismology is the science of earthquakes. 

(b) See 5 (b), June '97. 

(c) When earthquakes occur beneath the sea. a series of sea waves 
may be caused which become fifty to two hundred feet in height, as they 
approach the shore and cause great destruction of life and property. 

7. (a) Waves; cause, friction of the wind, the motion being commu- 
nicated in all directions, by a series of undulations; heiglit. of storm 
waves, thirty to fifty feet; velocity, thirty-seven to eighty miles an hour; 
depth of disturbance of ordinary waves not over half a mile. 

(b) Tides— See 7, Sept. '94. 

Solar tide — One produced by the attraction of the sun; lunar, one by 
the moon, 

The tide is a tidal wave, in the form of a perpendicular wall of water, 
so steep and swift that the crest falls forward into the trough. It is 
seen only in a few estuaries, as in the Bay of Fundy, its formation being 
due to the peculiar shape, depth and situation of the shore and channel. 

The maelstrom in the Lopoden Islands is caused by the complete di- 
vision of the tidal wave by the peculiar shore line, thus forming two 
currents which meet again, giving rise to a whirlpool. 

8. (a) See 7, Sept. '98. and 4, June '96. 

(b) See S (a), June '97. 

(c) See 8 (b, c, and d), Oct. '94. 

9. (a) See Geography questions, 1 (e), Sept. '99. 

Vapor is diffused through the air where, as it is only about three- 
fifths as heavy as air, it remains in suspension. 

(b) The "dew point" is the point of saturation, or that state of the 
atmosphere when it contains as much vapor as it is capable of holding. 
Precipitation takes the form or either hail, dew, rain, snow or frost. 
See 9, June '97, for conditions under which each takes place. 

10. (a) Flora comprises all plant life. The flora of a country is ef- 
fected by the distribution of moisture, heat and light. 

(b) Fauna includes all animal life. For animals found in the several 
life regions see 8. Sept. '97, and Geography question .3, Sept. 1902. 



Sept. 1898. 
1. See 1 (a), June '96. 



125 

2. (a) 1. Appearance of approaching objects, as of a ship, whose top 
masts appear first, then the sails and finally the hull. 

(2) Circular shape of the horizon. 

(3) Circular shape of the earth's shadow as cast on the moon during 
an eclipse. 

(4) Measurement of an arc of a meridian, which has resulted in an 
accurate calculation of its shape. 

(5) Shape of the great circle of illumination, 
(b) See 2 (b), Sept. "J7. 

3. (a) See 2 (a), Sept. '94. (b) See 5, June '97. 

4. The winds, which carry sand from the deserts and distribute it over 
fertile plains, or pile it up as dunes and sandhills along the seashore, the 
action of running water causing a decrease in the mean heights of the 
continents and an increase in their breadth, by transporting material in 
solution from the highlands and depositing it as sediment near the 
mouth of streams; the action of ocean waves, changing the outlines of 
coasts; the moisture of the atmosphere, which soaks into porous rocks, 
freezes and rends the rock to fragments, which are transported by 
stream's or winds; the agency of man, mainly in the destruction of for- 
ests over extended areas; and the contraction of a cooling crust result- 
ing in earthquakes, volcanoes and gradual uplifts and subsidences, are 
all bringing about extensive changes in the crust of the earth. 

5. (a) See 2 (c), Sept. '94. 

(b) Iceland; Yellowstone National Park; Wyoming; and New Zea- 
land. 

(c) By causing the rainfall in a river basin to be drained rapidly 
away instead of soaking quietly iato the ground, thus causing an over- 
flow from the main channel. 

G. (a) See (b), Sept. '95. 
(b) In the South Pacific Ocean. 

7. (a) Climate is the condition of the atmosphere as regards heat, 
cold and moisture. 

(b) See 4, June '96, and 4 May, '95. 

8. (a) See 3 (a), June '97. (b) Cyclones are most severe in the 
neighborhood of islands and along the shores of continents; are most 
powerful near their origin; the wind rotates invariably from right to 
left in the northern hemisphere and from left to right in the southern; 
its fury decreasing as the cyclone advances. 

9. See 10 (a), June '9cS. 

The flora of the tropical zone — Palms, bananas, spices, aromatic plants 
and tree-like grasses are most characteristic. 

Sub-tropical zones — Trees with thick, shining leaves such as laurels, 
magnolias and myrtles are peculiar forms. 

Warm temperate zones — Evergreen trees, shrubs, and the vine are most 
characteristic. 

Cold temperate zone — Forests of deciduous trees are its characteristic 
feature. 

Suh-Arctic zone — Grassy meadows and forests of evergreen, coniferous 
trees, such as the pine, spruce, hemlock, cedar and fur abound. 

Polar ^.one — The absence of trees and abundance of mosses and lich- 
ens mark this zone. 

10. (a) North temperate zone, (b) Warm temperate and sub- tropi- 
cal zones. {c\ 40 deg. F. on the north and 75 deg. F. on the south, 
(d) See 3, May '95. (e) Zone of variable winds. 

June 1899. 

1. See 1 (a). June '96. 

2. See 2 (a), Sept. '98. 



12G 

3. (a) See 2 (a), Sept. '94. 

(b) Proofs of the earth's original fluidity are: its spherical shape; the^ 
fact that the rocks which were first formed give evidence of having, 
been greatly heated; and the fact that the general climate of the earth 
during the geological past was much warmer than at present. 

4. (a) Facts regarding earthquakes — The origin of the shock is prob- 
ably never deeper than thirty miles, and often much less; the area of 
disturbance depends upon depth of origin as well as upon energy of the 
shock; the shape of origiyi is generally that of a line; the direction of 
the motion at the surface is nearly upward over the origin, and more 
inclined as the distance from the origin increases; and the shape of the 
area of disturbance depends upon the nature of the materials through 
which the wave is moving. 

(b) Motions of earthquakes are either wavelike, upward or rotary, 
(c) Their velocity varies according to the intensity of shock and nature 
of materials through which it is transmitted, (d) Causes, see 5 (1) 
June '97. (e) They occur more frequently in winter than in summer, at 
night than during the day; and during the new and full moon, when the 
attractive forces of the sun and moon act in harmony, (e) They are 
most common in volcanic regions and mountainous countries. 

5. Formation of atolls and barrier reefs; a blank area of several mil- 
lion square miles in the middle of cordal regions; submerged forests in 
deltas. 

6. (1) The continents have, in general, high borders and a low inte- 
rior. (2) The highest border lies near the deepest ocean. (o) The 
greatest prolongation of a continent is always that of its predominant 
mountain chain. (4) The prevailing trends of the mountain masses are- 
the same as those of the coast lines and are, in general, either northeast 
or northwest. 

7. The size of the river basin; the amount of rainfall; the climate 
of the basin, and its physical features; i. e., whether wooded or open; 
and the nature of the bed or channel; i. e., whether leaky or not, deter- 
mine the quantity of water discharged by a river. 

8. See 4. June '96. 

9. Forests— See 9 (b), Sept. '97. 

Prairies are found in regions of occasional drought, as in the temper- 
ate zones, where the rainfall is insufficient to support forests. They are 
covered with tall grass. 

steppes are extended areas covered with grass during the wet season, 
but nearly destitute of vegetation the rest of the year, in regions where 
the rainfall is periodical. 

Deserts are due entirely to the absence of rain and moisture. 

10. See 6 (b), Sept. '95 and 6 (b), Sept. '98. 



Sept. 1899. 

1. (a) See 2 (b^. Sept. '97. 

(b) June 21st on the Arctic Circle. At the horizon, south. 

2. See 4, Sept. '98. 

3. (a) Volcanoes eject mainly, melted rock or lava, ashes or cinders, 
and vapors or gases, (b) See 5 fa), June '97. (c) They occur (1) along 
the shores of the Pacific from Cape Horn on the east to the Antarctic 
continent on the west; (2) in the islands of the Pacific; (8) in the vi- 
cinity of seas that divide the northern and southern continents; (4) in 
the islands of the northern and central part of the Atlantic Ocean and 
(5) in the western and central parts of the Indian Ocean, (d) With 
few exceptions they are found near the shore of continents or on islands. 



127 

occur most frequently in mountainous regions, and lie along lines ttiat 
are comparatively straight. 

4. (a) Springs, according to the large or small size of their reservoirs, 
are either constant or temporary — according to the shape of the reservoir 
if provided with a siphon-like outlet they are periodical; and according to 
depth below the surface of the earth, they are divided Into cold and. 
thermal or hot springs, 

(b) See 9, May '95. 

5. (a) See 3 (a), June '97. 

(b) Constant winds maintain the same direction throughout the year; 
periodical winds, for regular periods, blow alternately in opposite direc- 
tions, and variable winds blow in any direction. 

6. (a) Actual humidity of the air, is the amount of vapor actually 
present in a given volume; relative humidity expresses the relation be- 
tween the amount present and that required to saturate the air at the 
given temperature. 

(b) Rain is caused by the cooling of large masses of air below the 
temperature of its dew-point and occurs on its undergoing (1) a change 
of latitude bringing it from a warm to a cold region; a change of alti- 
tude, as when ascending currents reach the cold upper regions, or on the 
mingling of masses of cold and warm air. 

7. In the eastern continent, the Desert of Mongolia, prevented from 
receiving rain by the Himalaya Mountains, the Persian Desert due to 
the high mountain borders which rob the clouds of their moisture be- 
fore they cross the plateau, and the Sahara, whose winds having pre- 
viously crossed Asia, arrive dry and vaporless. In the western conti- 
nent the Great Interior Plateau of North America, is deprived of rain- 
fall by the mountain borders on both east and west, and in South Amer- 
ica the Desert of Atacama on the western slope of the Andes, is rain- 
less because these mountains condense the moisture of the trades on 
their eastern slopes. 

8. (a) See 3 (c), June '97. ^ 
(b) The earth's rotation, the position of land masses, the winds, and 

differences of density and level caused by evaporation. 

9. (a) For glacier see 4 (b), Sept. '95. Icebergs are floating moun- 
tains of ice, broken off by the action of the waves, from glaciers extend- 
ing into the sea. 

(b) Lateral moraines are accumulations of dirt and stone along the 
sides of glaciers, medial moraines are those formed at the junction by 
the meeting edges of glaciers flowing into a common valley, and termi- 
nal moraines are those accumulations deposited at the end of a glacier, 
and extend in a wide curve across the valley. 

10. The sameness of anatomical structure, similarity of earlier- 
myths and legends, close resemblance of language of widely separated. 
races, and the gradual modification of types presented by different races, 
all point to the probable unity of the human race. 



June 1900. 

1. See 1 (a), June '96. 

2. (a) The sidereal year is the time required for the earth to make 
a complete revolution or oG5 days 6 hours 9 minutes 9.6 seconds. 

(b) The tropical year is the time from one vernal equinox to the 
next and is approximately 365 1-4 days. 

(c) The latter. 

3. (a) Laplace's nebular hypothesis assumes that the solar system 
originally consisted of nebulous matter scattered throughout space and. 
that this matter began to accumulate about a center and acquired a rot- 



128 

ary motion whose rapidity increased as the mass cooled. Through the 
centrifugal force, ring-like portions were thrown off, which collected in 
spherical masses and formed the planets. In a similar manner, the sa- 
tellites became detached from the planets, 
(b) See 2 (b), Sept. '97. 

4. Yo^cono— See 2 (b), Sept. '97. 

Tufa is rock formed by the hardening of volcanic mud. 

Soffataras occur in volcanic regions and are places where sulphur va- 
pors escape and from incrustation. 

Earthquakes — See 5 (b), June '97. 

Dyke are masses of melted rock which have been forced up from the 
interior of the earth through fissures in the rocks and often project con- 
siderably above the general surface. 

5. Archaean Time is that time in which appeared the simplest forms 
of life. 

Paleozoic Time included the time during which forms of life bore only 
slight resemblance to those now existing. 

Mesozoic Time included the time during which the plants and animals 
began to resemble those now living. 

Cenozoic Time is the most recent division of geological time. 

6. (a) See Geography questions 1 (e), June, 1901. (b) See 5, June 
'98. 

T. See 7, Sept. '98 and 4, June '96. 

8. (a) Tides are the periodical rising and falling of the water caused 
by the attraction of the sun and moon. 

(b) Because of its proximity to the earth. 

9^ (a) See 3 (b), June '98. (b) See 3 (c), June '98. 

(c) Isoclinal lines are lines connecting places having the same incli- 
nation or dip of the needle while isothermal lines connect places having 
the same mean temperature. The two correspond in a remarkable de- 
gree. 

10. The temperate fauna include the animals most useful to man. 
Representative carnivora are, lyon, hyena, wolf, jackal, dog, fox, .rac- 
coon, bear, seal and walrus. The principal herbivora are the wild boar 
and hog, the horse, ass, ox, goat, sheep and chamois, the moose, elk, rein- 
deer, stag, buffalo, camel and llama. 



Sept. 1900. 

1. See 1 (a), June '96. 

2. See 2, Sept. '95. 

3. (a) See 2 (a), Sept. '94. 
(b) See 5, June '97. 

4. See 4, Sept. '98. 

5. See 3 (a), June '97, and 5 (b), Sept. '99. 

6. See 4, June 1899, and 4 (b), June '97. 

7. See 7, June '99. 

8. See 8, Sept. '97. 

9. See 9, June '99. 
9. See 9, June '99. 

10. See 10, Sept. '98. 



June 1901. 

1. (a) Stars are self-luminous heavenly bodies; planets are heavenly 
bodies which move around the" sun and shine by reflecting its light. 

(b) See 1, Sept. 1901. 

2. Rotation, which is the movement of the earth from west to east, on 
an imaginary diameter called its axis, taking place once In twenty-four 



128 

hours; and revolution, the orbital motion of the earth around the sun, 
once a year. For effects of each movement, see 2, Sept. '97. 

3. See 5, June '97. 

4. See 5, June '98. 

5. See 9, May '95, and 4 (b), Sept. '99. 

6. See 7, Sept. '98 and 4, June, '96. 

7. (a) Warm moist air which becomes easily chilled below the point 
of saturation and clear, still nights are favorable to the formation of 
heavy dews. 

(bj See (a), June '96. 

8. See 9 (b), Sept. '978. 

9. See 10 (b), June '98. 

10. (a) Phosphate, kaolin and lime, (b) Cotton, sugar-cane, corn, 
tobacco, Tice, early vegetables, such as tomatoes, cabbage, cucumbers, let- 
tuce and Irish potatoes, which are grown for northern markets, and 
fruits as oranges, lemons and pine-apples of commercial importance to 
Florida. 

(c) Yellow pine, water-oak, cedar, red bay, hickory, live oak, cypress, 
satin-wood, and magnolia trees furnish valuable woods, and palmetto pro- 
duces a useful fibre. 
Sept. 3, 1901. 

1. The sun, eight planets and their satellites, between two and three 
hundred smaller bodies called planetoids, together with numerous com- 
ets and meteors comprise the Solar System. 

The planets are Mercury, Venus, Earth, Mars, Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus 
and Neptune, and all have two movements — rotation on their axes from 
west to eastj and revolution, an orbital motion around the sun. 

2. See 2 (a), June '01, and 2, Sept. '97. 

3. See 3 (c), Sept. '99. 

4. (a) See 5, June '98. (b) Coral islands can be formed only in 
tropical waters whose depth is little over 100 feet, and which are pro- 
tected from cold ocean-currents, from contact with fresh river waters, 
muddy bottoms^ and remote from volcanoes whose action kills the coral 
polyp. 

5. Erosion or the wearing away of the land; transportation, the car- 
rying in solution or by the force of its current, eroded material and de- 
posit, by which this material is left at different parts of its course or at 
its mouth, forming sand-bars or deltas. 

6. (a) See Geography questions 1 (b), Sept. 1900. (b) Salt marshes 
are grass lands along the coast, subject to overflow by salt water. 

7. See 6, Sept. '95. 

8. (a) See 9 (c), June 1900. 

(b) The isotherm of 30 deg. crosses the 60th parallel on the western 
coast of Alaska, where the warm Aleutian Current causes it to curve 
upward until its course is modified by cold winds of the interior, caus- 
ing it to dip downward until in the vicinity of Hudson Bay it touches 
the 52nd parallel. The cold Greenland current keeps it in nearly this 
latitude as it crosses Labrador, after which the temperature is modified 
by the Atlantic and as Europe is approached by the Gulf Stream and it 
veers far to the northward, reaching its limit north of the Scandinavian 
peninsula, at about 75 deg. N. latitude. It then falls, crossing the Arctic 
circle above Archangel and reaching its southern limit just north of 
China (at about 49 deg. N. lat), this deflection being caused by the great 
mass of the Eurasian continent. As it reaches the Pacific it swerves 
again to the north until off Alaska it reaches 60 deg. 

9. (a) See 5 (b), Sept. '99. 

(b) See 9 (d), Sept. '95. The monsoon regions are the Indian Ocean, 
the Gulf of Guinea and the Gulf of Mexico and Caribbean Sea. 



, 129 

10. (a) The Caucasian race is charactei'ized by a round or oval head, 
symmetrical features, vertical teeth, round or oval face and arched fore- 
head, the Mongolian by a broad head, angular face, high cheek bones, 
and small, obliquely set eyes; the Negro by narrow and elongated head, 
projecting jaws and thick lips. 

(bj See S (b), Sept. 't)7. 



Nov. 1901. 

1. See 1, June 1901. 

2. See 2, May '95. 

3. See 4, May '95. 

4. See 6 (b), Sept. '99. 

5. See 8, June 1900. 

6. See 5, June '99. 

7. See 5, Sept. '97. 

8. See 9, Sept. '97. 

9. See 8, Sept. 1901. 
10. (a) See 1, June '98. 

(b) See 1, June '97. 



June, 1902. 

1. See 2 (b), Sept. '97. 

2. (a) The atmosphere serves to retain and modify the heat of the 
sun; it absorbs and distributes moisture, and supplies animals with oxy- 
gen and plants with carbonic acid. 

(b) See 9 (c), June 1900. 

(c) Cirrus clouds are fleecy masses of condensed vapor suspended high 
in the atmosphere. Cumulus clouds consist of rounded masses of con- 
densed vapor, found in the lower regions of the atmosphere. 

Nimhus or storm clouds are any clouds from which rain falls and may 
be formed by a collection of the various other forms of cloud. 

Stratus or layer clouds form in long, horizontal sheets or bands. They 
form close to the earth and may fall to the surface and become a fog. 

3. (a) Winds Avhich blow in a counter direction to that of the trades, 
in the zones of prevailing westerly winds north and south of 30 deg. 
from the equator in the northern and southern hemispheres respectively. 

(b) See 8 (b), Oct. '94. (c) See 9 (d), Sept. '95. 

(d) Tvi^ilight is caused by the reflection of light from the upper re- 
gions of the atmosphere after the sun has disappeared below the hori- 
zon. 

(e) Thunder is the crackle of the lightning sparks, the sound being 
prolonged by being' reflected or echoed from the surface of clouds, the 
earth, and masses of air of unequal density. 

4. (a) The oceans, in order of their size, are the Pacific, Atlantic, 
Indian, Arctic and Antarctic. The Pacific Ocean is the deepest, the At- 
lantic next, then the Indian, the Antarctic and Arctic. 

(b) Broad and extensive rises in the bed of the ocean. 

5. (a) See 10, Sept. '94. See 7, Sept. '94. 

6. For mountains of North and South America, See 21, June 1900 
(Geography questions). The predominant mountain system of Europe 
extends from the Straits of Gibraltar, along the northern shores of the 
Mediterranean to Asia Minor. The Alps form its highest point. The 
secondary mountain systems of Europe comprise the ranges of the Scan- 
dinavian peninsula, the Ural Mountains separating Europe from Asia, on 
the west, and the Caucasus Mountains on the south. 

In Asia, the mountains really form one vast system extending in the 
line of the northeast trend from the Arctic to the Indian Ocean. The 
Himalaya, the highest mountains in the world, lie north of Hindoostan. 



130 

North of them are the Kuenlum Mountains, with the Karaliorum between 
them. 

The principal mountain system of Africa extends the entire length of 
the eastern shore from the Mediterranean sea to the Cape of Good Hope. 
Other mountains are the Kong along the northern shores of the Gulf of 
Guinea and the Atlas in the extreme north. The predominant system of 
Australia lies in the east, the Australian Alps forming the highest point. 

7. (a) See 5 (b), June '97. (b) See 3 (c), Sept. '99. 
(c) Martinique. 

8. See 7, June '90. 

9. See 9 (a), Sept. '94. 

10. Extensive and fertile land areas in a temperate climate favor the 
development of civilization. In Europe, Western and Central Asia and 
North America except in the northern and southern extremities. 



Sept. 1902. 

1. (a) A great circle is one formed on the earth's surface by a plane 
passing through the centre and dividing it into hemispheres. 

(b) Meridian — See Geography questions 1 (c), June '96. 

(c) Tropics — See Geography questions 2 (a), Sept. '96. 

(d) Mercator's Projection — See 3 (a), Sept. '97. 

(e) By parallelism of the earth's axis is meant that since the axis 
points always to the north star, it is always parallel to any former posi- 
tion. 

2. See 2, Sept. '94. 

3. See 4, Sept. '98. 

4. (a) See 5 (a). Set. '94. 

''b) The short, steep slope on the ocean side of the mountain systems 
and the long, gentle slope facing the interior; the metamorphosis of the 
strata on the steep slope; the situation of mountain systems on the bor- 
der of the continents, and the slaty cleavage of the rocks of many moun- 
tains. 

6. (a) See 3 (c), June '97. 

(b) The rotation of the earth from west to east causes the polar wa- 
ters to reach the equatorial regions with an eastward motion less than 
that with which they started, and they cross the ocean from east to 
west. On their reaching the western borders of the oceans, the conti- 
nents divide them into north and south branches and they move toward 
the poles. They now move faster than that portion of the earth from 
whence they start and are deflected to the northeastward and southeast- 
ward respectively. 

7. See 5, May '95. 

8. See 9 (5), June '99. 

9. LeConte's theory is that once the southern coast line of Florida 
was much farther north than the present, one which was then a coral 
reef. Upon this reef, coral islands formed and the channel between them 
and the, shore gradually filled up and formed the Everglades. Meanwhile 
another reef formed which became in time the present keys. 

10. See 3, May '95. 



CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 

Sept. '94. 

1. To inspire patriotism, obedience to just authority and loyalty to 
civic duties — in short, to give us better citizens. 

2. The law making power of a State is vested in the legislature, com- 
posed of two bodies, called respectively the Senate and the House of 
Representatives. 



131 

Bill must pass House in which It originated, pass other House, haye- 
approval and signature of chief executive or pass both Houses again 
over his veto. 

3. Legislation is more conservative. Each branch acts as a check, 
upon the other. Prevents legislative department from encroaching on 
the executive and serves as a check upon hasty and inconsiderate legis- 
lation. 

4. Must pass both Houses again by a two-third vote. 

5. (a) Clerk — Clerk of circuit court, clerk of board of county com- 
missioners, recorder of deeds and all conveyances of lands, custodian of 
records, issues, processes on state judgments, disburses all moneys a pay 
to jurors, and witness in state cases, etc. Must give bond not less than. 
$1,000 nor more than $5,000. Must be a citizen of the county and not 
an attorney at law. 

(b) County Judge — Records wills, letters testamentary, and of admin- 
istration, issues commissions to administer oaths, requires bond from ad- 
ministrators, issues and keeps record of marriage licenses, has general 
jurisdiction in matters of wills and estates, appoints and has jurisdiction: 
of guardians of infants, requires accounts of executors, administrators, 
and guardians filed in his office, jurisdiction up to $500, also in forcible 
entry and unlawful detention of lands, attachments, garnishments, re- 
plevin, enforcement of liens, original jurisdiction in criminal cases, de- 
termines appeals on writs of error from justice of peace courts, probate 
matters, etc. Must be a citizen and give bond not less than $1,000 nor 
more than $5,000, to be determined by board of county commissioners. 

(c) Sheriff — Executes processes, preserves the peace, ex-officio timber 
agent, serves writs, must in person or by deputy attend every term of 
circuit, county and county criminal court of his county, keep an execu- 
tive docket, etc. Must be a citizen of county, not an attorney at law, and' 
give bond with two sureties. 

6. Must secure teacher's certificate in accordance with the law. and. 
contract with county board. 

7. Must labor faithfully for advancement of pupils in their studies, 
deportment and morals, strive to cultivate in them good habits, protect 
school property, maintain discipline, and in all things, conform to the- 
regulations of the department. 

8. See 9. June '99. 

9. Legislative, executive and judicial. 

(a) County Commissioners. 

(b) Sheriff, constables, deputy sheriffs. 

(c) Justices of peace and county judge. 

10. (a) Must submit final report, and records to county superintend- 
ent. 

(b) Must report annually to State Superintendent of Public Instruction. 

(c) The county school board, having entire control of county school 
fund, apportions same among schools according to their judgment. 

(d) County board of public instruction. Application to this body. 

(e) The vacancy would be filled by the Governor, as are all other va- 
cancies under the Constitution of the State. 



Oct. 1894. 

1. See 3 (a). Sept '94. 

Chosen for different periods in order to make more gradual the change- 
in the composition of the legislature. 

The representation in the Senate was made equal as a concession to- 
the spirit of sovereignty in the State. 

2. All powers not granted to the general government, nor prohibited 
by it to the States. 



132 

3. (a) A law relating to the punishment of acts committed before the 
law was passed. 

(b) An act of a legislative body inflicting the penalty of death without 
a regular trial. 

(c) An official document requiring an accused person who has been 
imprisoned awaiting trial to be brought before a judge to inquire whether 
he may be legally held. 

(d) "No bill of attainder or ex post facto law shall be passed." 

(e) "The privilege of the writ of habeas corpus shall not be suspended 
unless when in cases of rebellion or invasion, the public safety may re- 
quire it." 

"The right of the people to^keep and bear arms shall not be infringed." 

4. (a) See 3 (b), Sept. '94. 

(b) To protect legislative department against abuse of power on the 
part of executive. Balance would be destroyed. 

(5) All bills providing for taxation must originate in the House of 
Representatives because the members of this branch are elected by the 
direct vote of the people, and hence are supposed to represent the peo- 
ple's views. 

G. Nominated by President, subject to confirmation of Senate. Ten- 
ui'e of office is for life, unless impeached. 

7. Chosen by qualified electors of State; number six; term^ six years. 

8. Seven grades, viz : Third grade, second grade, first grade, primary, 
special. State and life certificates. For requirements and conditions, see 
"An Act to Provide for the Certification of Teachers, and to Prescribe 
Requirements for the Various Grades of Certificates," in school laws 
passed this year — 1903. 

9. Each county is required to assess and collect annually for the sup- 
port of public free schools therein a tax of not less than three mills nor 
more than five mills on the dollar on all taxable property in the same. 
County school fund consists, in addition to above provision, of the pro- 
portion of the interest of the State School Fund and of the one mill State 
tax apportioned to the county; all capitation taxes collected within the 
county; and shall be disbursed solely for maintenance and support of 
public free schools. 

10. All State School Funds are distributed from State Treasurer's of- 
fice. Apportioned among the several counties of the State in proportion 
to the average attendance upon schools in the said counties respectively. 
May 1895. 

1. (a) Any citizen born in the United States, thirty-five years of 
age, and fourteen years a resident is eligible. 

(b) No person shall be a senator who shall not have attained to the 
age of thirty years, and been nine years a citizen of the United States, 
and who shall not, when elected, be an inhabitant of that State for which 
he shall be chosen. 

(c) Must have attained to age of twenty-five years, been a citizen of 
United States seven years, and an inhabitant of that State in which he 
shall be chosen. 

2. (a) Two-thirds, or nine. 

(b) Must be ratified by the legislatures of three-fourths of the States 
•or by convention in three-fourths thereof. 

(c) Yes. 

3. (a) The Senate would elect from the two candidates receiving the 
highest number of votes for Vice-President. 

(b) Yes. In 1836 Senate chose Richard M. Johnson, of Kentucky, by 
a vote of 33 to It', over Francis Granger of New York. Only instance. 

4. (a) Treason against United States consists only in levying war 
against them, adhering to their enemies, giving them aid and comfort. 



133 

(b.) Punishable by death. 

5. See 4, Sept. '99. 

6. (a) See Constitution, Art. I., Sec. 9. 

(b) See Constitution, Art. I, Sec. 10. 

7. Governor's term of office is four years; salary $3,500 per annum. 
Each of the following, four years and $2,500 per annum; State Comptrol- 
ler, Treasurer, Attorney-General, Superintendent of Public Instruction, 
Commissioner of Agriculture, three Railroad Commissioners; Supreme 
Court Justices, six years, $3,000 per annum; Circuit Judges, six years, 
$2,500 per annum. 

8. Amendment proposed by either branch of legislature, agreed to by 
three-fifths of all members elected to each house, entered upon their re- 
spective journals, published in one nevi^spaper in each county three 
months previous to general election, at w^hich election amendment must 
be submitted to the electors of the State for approval or rejection. Ma- 
jority of electors voting upon amendment adopts. Each amendment 
voted on separately. 

(a) Granted privilege of a free market in the United States to those 
countries alone which were willing to reciprocate by granting in their 
markets exceptionally favorable rates of entry for American products. 

9. (b) See 9, June, '99. 

10. (a) See 10, Oct. '94. ] 

(b) 6 — 21. 

(c) If the holder proves to be unsuccessful, incompetent, or is proven 
guilty of gross immorality. 

(d) If question merely involves educational judgment appeal should be 
made to State Board of Education. If a question of law, redress secured 
in the courts. 

(e) See United States History, 1st Grade, June 1900, question 10. 



Sept. 1895. 

1. See 1, Sept. 1894. 

2. (a) "Government is defined as rule or control. In its political sense, 
it means the supreme authority of a State or other political community 
or the act by which the authority is applied." 

2. (a) Without some sort of government, there would be continual 
warfare, no security to life, liberty or property; each one could look ta 
himself alone for safety; the weak would have no protection, for the 
strong would know no restraint. 

(c) See 5, June '99. 

3. (a) "Every citizen has the right to be secure in his person, to De 
free from attack and annoyance; to go when and 'Adhere he may choose; 
to keep, enjoy and dispose of his property; and to provide in his own 
"way for the welfare of himself and of those dependent upon him. But 
for every right a citizen has a corresponding duty : It is his duty tO' 
obey the law, to aid in securing justice, to respect authority, to love 
his country, to study the interests of his country, to take part in elec- 
tions and vote for men and measures that will best promote the general 
welfare." 

(b) To secure and protect their rights. 

4. (a) "The Constitution is a written instrument — the supreme law 
of the whole land. Neither the laws of the States nor of the United 
States must conflict with it. It is the basis of our government, and the 
model of State constitutions. Defines limits of national government, 
enumerates powers of each department, declares what public interests are 
within th« scope of the national government, reserves certain powers to> 
the States and provides that neither State nor nation shall enact certain 
specified laws." 



134 

(b) See History, 5, Sept. '97. 2 (c), Sept. '98, and 2^ June '99, First 
Grade. 

5. Constituent functions : Protection of life, liberty and property, to- 
gether with all other functions that are necessary to the civic organization 
of society. 

Ministrant functions : Those other functions — such as regulation of la- 
bor, trade and industry, maintenance of thoroughfares, education posts, 
etc. — which are undertaken not by way of governing, but by way of ad- 
vancing the general interests of society. 

6. Impeachment is a mode of trial of a public officer charged with 
wrongdoing. House must first pass bill of impeachment. The Senate 
then sits as a court to try the offender. If a President is on trial, the 
Chief Justice must preside over Senate. Two-thirds vote of Senate nec- 
essary to convict. See 5, June '97. 

7. Divisions of power: Legislative, judicial and executive. Must be 
a qualified elector, must have been ten years a citizen and resident of 
Florida, next preceding time of his election. 

Commander-in-chief of military forces, transacts executive business, civil 
and military, may require information from executive officers relative to 
their respective departments, see that the laws are faithfully executed, 
power to fill vacated offices for unexpired term, can convene legislature in 
extraordinary session, send message to each session of legislature giving 
information as to condition of State and recommending measures for 
consideration, in case of disagreement as to time of adjournment between 
the two branches of legislature, may adjourn to such time as he thinks 
proper, may suspend collection of fines and forfeitures, grant reprieves, 
require opinion of Supreme Court Justices, may remove officers for cause, 
shall appoint commissioned officers of State militia, chairman of board 
of^ commissioners of State institutions, may approve or disapprove of any 
portion or the whole of a bill passed by the legislature, sign warrants 
for disbursement of State funds, member State Board of Education. 



8. Secretary of State : Keeper of records of official acts of legislative 
and executive departments — must lay same before respective departments 
when requested — custodian of great seal, has charge of capitol building. 
State librarian, member of State Board of Education, issues letters pat- 
ent for corporations, etc. 

Attorney-General : Legal adviser of Governor and of each of the offi- 
cers of the executive department, reporter for Supreme Court decisions, 
member State Board of Education. 

Comptroller : Examines, audits, adjusts and settles the accounts of all 
officers of the State, issues warrants for State moneys. 

Treasurer : Receives and keeps all bonds, funds and other securities 
but disburses no funds except upon warrant signed by Comptroller and 
countersigned by Governor, member State Board of Education. 

Superintendent of Public Instruction : See 9, June '96. 

Commissioner of Agriculture : Has charge of public lands, matters re- 
lating to agriculture, bureau of immigration, etc. 

(The Governor, Justices of the Supreme Court, and Attorney-General 
constitute State Board of Pardons.) 

9. See United States History, Second Grade, June, 1900. 

0. (a) By convention; also by vote of electors. See 8, May '95. 

(b) Interest on State School Fund and all other means provided, in- 
cluding special tax for support and maintenance of public free schools, 
to be proportioned among counties in proportion to average attendance. 

Citizens of United States, twenty-one years old, having resided in Flor- 
ida one j-ear and county six months, can vote. 



I - 135 a 

June '96. 

1. (a) See 4, Sept. '99. 

(b) By naturalization. See 9, Sept. 1898. 

2. (a) By electors chosen by the people. See Amendments to Consti- 
tution, Art. XII, Clause 1. Term of office, 4 years. 

(b) By State legislature. Six years. 

(c) By direct vote of people. Term, 2 years. 

(d) By Presidential appointment. Senate confirms. Term, 4 years. 

(e) By Presidential appointment. Senate confirms. During good be- 
havior. 

3. (a) See 4, Sept. 1895. 

(b) Constitution was framed by a convention of delegates from twelve 
of the thirteen original States, Rhode Island alone being unrepresented. 

(c) Was adopted by ratification of all the States. Ratification of two- 
thirds — or nine — was required for adoption. 

(d) See 2, May '95. 

4. (a) See 3, Sept. 1900. 

(b) The legislative authority is vested in Congress, consisting of a Sen- 
ate or upper House, and a House of Representatives or lower House. The 
senators represent the States, the representatives, the people. One-third 
of Senate is elected every two yars. 

(c) See 7, June 1900. 

5. See 1, May '95. 

Foreign born citizen might favor interests of his native country to the 
detriment of the United States. Might not be in absolute accord with 
our form of government. 

6. See 8, Sept. '94. 

7. See 4, May '95. 

Originally a freebooter. Term now applied to one who delays legisla- 
tion by dilatory motions or similar artifices. 

8. (a) Territories are governed by the laws of Congress, by the com- 
mon law, and the laws passed by the territorial legislatures. 

(b) See 3, Sept. '99. 

(c) The office of governor becomes elective. 

Laws passed by legislature are no longer submitted to congress for 
approval. 

Is given representation in Congress on basis of population, instead of 
delegate or agent without the right to vote. 

Office of chief justice and associates becomes elective. 

People acquire a voice in election of President and affairs of the United 
States gov^x-nment. 

9. Governor— See S, Sept. '96. 

Superintendent of Public Instruction : Has oversight, charge and man- 
agement of all matters pertaining to public schools. Apportions school 
moneys, decides upon appeals, prescribes regulations for management of 
his department, prepares questions for county examinations. 

County Superintendent of Public Instruction : Visits and examines 
each school, looks after school funds, holds examinations, and issues cer- 
tificates. 

Couiity Board : Employs teachers, disburses school funds, prescribes 
•course of study. 

School Trustee : Nominates teachers, apportions district funds, pre- 
pares itemized estimate showing money necessary to be raised to supple- 
ment county school funds. 

Supervisor : Supervises school and makes monthly reports to County 
Superintendent, supervises school property, reviews suspension of pupils 
and reports same to county superintendent. 

Public School Teacher: See 7, Sept. 1894. 



136 

10. (a) See 9, Sept. '96. 

(b) The proceeds of all lands that have been or may hereafter be 
•granted to the State by the United States for public school purposes. 

Donations to the State when the purpose is not specified. Proceeds of 
■•escheated property. Twenty-five per cent, of the sales of public lands 
which are now or may hereafter be owned by the State. 

(c) The interest on the common school fund^ and the fund raised by 
the one mill tax authorized by the Constitution, are apportioned by the 
State among the several counties in proportion to the average attendance 
upon schools in said counties. 

(d) Bach county is required by Constitution to assess and collect an- 
nually for the support of public free schools therein a tax of not less 
than three mills nor more than five mills on the dollar on all taxable 
.property in the same. 

County fund consists, in addition to this tax, of county's proportion of 
the ii.ierest on common school fund and the one mill tax apportioned to 
■the county; also all capitation taxes collected within the county. 

(ej See 10 (c), Sept. '94. 



Sept. 1896. 

1. See 2 (a), Sept. '95. 
See 3, June, 1900. 

2. (a) See 2, June '96. 

(b) The presiding officer of the House of Representatives is called the 
Speaker. He is a member of the House and is nominated for the speak- 
ership by a convention or caucus of the representatives who are of his 
political party. 

(c) Presiding officer of the Senate is called President of the Senate. 
■Office is filled by Vice-President of the United States (for mode of elec- 
tion, see Amendments to Constitution Art. XII.) Senate also elects pres- 
ident pro tern. 

3. (a) At present (1903), one member to 191,182 population. 
Apportionment based on census of 1900. 

(b) See 5, Oct. 1894. 

4. See Constitution, Art. I, Section 8 and 9 respectively. 

5. See Amendments to Constitution, Art. XII, Clause I. 

6. See 6 (a), Sept. '95. 

The House of Representatives has the sole power of impeachment. 
Tried by Senate. Judgment cannot extend further than to removal from 
office, and disqualification to hoM and enjoy any office of honor, trust or 
jirofit under the United States. Party convicted shall nevertheless be 
liable and subject to indictment, trial, judgment and punishment accord- 
ing to law. 

The Vice-President presides in case a Senator is being tried. 

7. See 5, Sept. 1900. 

8. (a) In the legislature, consisting of Senate and House of Represen- 
tatives. 

(bj The supreme executive power is vested in the Governor. 

(c) Governor has veto power. 

(d) Not eligible for two successive terms. Is eligible, however, after 
lapse of one term. 

9. The Governor, Secretary of State, Attorney-General, State Treasu- 
rer, and State Superintendent of Public Instruction constitute State 
Board of Education of which the Governor is President and the Super- 
intendent of Public Instruction Secretary. 

10. See 8, Oct. '94. 



137 

June '97. 

2. See 3, June 1900. 

3. (a) The Electoral College. 

(b) The people. Five, at present (1903). 

(c) See 1, May 1895. 

4. (a) See 1, May 1895. 

(b) A joint session is one in whi;ch members of both branches of Con- 
gress meet as one body. An executive session is one where, practically, 
the administrative body acts as a committee of the whole. Business is 
sometimes expedited by this method owing to the fact that it is then 
governed by different rules. 

(c) By the legislature of his State. 

(d) That election may be by direct vote of the people. Change may 
be secured by constitutional amendment. 

(e) See 4, Sept. 1900. 

If State legislature meets and elects before next session of Congress. 

5. (a) See 6, Sept. 1895. 

(b) Charges affecting official conduct of civil officer of the United States 
are formulated and presented to Senate by House of Representatives. 
(Corresponds to indictment by grand jury.) The Senate then sits as a 
court of impeachment, hears the evidence, listens to the argument and 
then condemns or acquits. (See 6, Sept. '96.) 

6. (a) A 'patent is a grant by a government to the author of a new 
and useful invention, the exclusive right of exploiting same a specified 
term of -years. 

b) A copyright is an exclusive privilege given to any citizen or resi- 
dent of the United States to print, publish and sell any book, map, chart, 
dramatic or musical composition of which he is the author or proprietor. 

(c) Felony is the highest of the principal classes into which crimes 
are divided by statute. 

(d) Piracy is depredation or willful and aggressive destruction of life 
or property by persons having no commission or authority from any es- 
tablished State. 

(e) See 7, June '96. (f) A person born in or belonging to another 
country who has not been naturalized, (g) An alien who has been re- 
ceived into the condition and invested with the rights and privileges of 
a natural citizen, (h) A document issued by competent civil authority 
granting one permissin to travel or authentieating his right to protection. . 
(i) Merchandise brought from one country into another, (j) See History 
4, Oct. '94. 

7. (a) A State is a member of the Union with all the rights and priv- 
ileges of self-government; a Territory is under the Union, subject at all 
times, and in all things, to regulation by the Government of the United 
States. 

(b) See 8, Sept. '95. 

8. (a) Senate 32; Lower House, 68. 

(b) Regular sesion, 60 days; special, 20. Six dollars per diem; mil- 
eage, ten cents, to and from homes to seat of government. 

(c) See 2, Sept. '94. 

9. See 3, October '94 and 7, June '96. 

Gerrymander : A term of reproach for those who change boundaries 
of districts for partisan purposes. 

10. (a) County Boards of Public Instruction. 

(b) Same authority. Contract is necessary. 

(c) All qualified voters residing within the territory that pay a tax on 
real or personal property are entitled to vote in sub-district election. 
There are no school elections except for voting sub-district taxes and 



138 

electing trustees for the sub-district funds. The other school officers are 
elected in the regular election, 
(d) See 10, June 'UG. 

(f) No. 

(g) Between ages of six and twenty-one. 

(h) Pupils from other States, or from other counties. Teacher must 
turn over tuition to County Superintendent. Tuition fees to be reported 
hy latter to County Board. 

(i) Not less than five nor more than six hours exclusive of recesses. 

Twenty-days constitute a school month. Board has no right to demand 
greater number for a month's salary. 

(j) Monthly report must be filed with county superintendent. Salary 
is withheld until report is made. Likewise, if incomplete or incorrect, 
until report is made in full, or corrected. 



Sept. 1897. 

1. See 2, Sept. 1895. 

2. See 8, Sept. '99. 

3. (a) In 1215, King John having incurred the hatred of his subjects, 
was met by his great lords in arms at Runnymede, on the Thames River, 
and compelled to sign a document which contained a summary of all the 
rights, privileges and immunities which were then reckoned as belonging 
to Englishmen. This document is known as Magna Gharta. 

(b) How taxes shall originate and in whom lies the right to levy them. 

4. (a) By the supreme law of the United States is meant the Consti- 
tution. It is the fundamental law with which neither the laws of any 
State nor the laws of the United States must conflict — the basis of our 
system of government. 

(b) For legislative, see 4, June '96 and 4, Sept. 1900. 

The executive power of the national government is vested in the Pres- 
ident of the United States. : 

See 2, June '96, and 1, May, '95. 

For judicial department, see 7, Sept. 1899. The Supreme Court of the 
United States is the highest judicial tribunal in the country. Consists tof 
the Chief Justice and eight associate justices, nominated by the Presi- 
dent and confirmed by the Senate. Hold office for life unless impeached. 

5. (a) See 10, Set. '99. 

(b) See 10, Sept. '99. 

(c) Convention system removes choice from the people and allows 
more "wire-working." If, however, members of convention are the proper 
men, they are better able to select a good man than are the people as a 
whole. 

(d) The national convention. 

6. (a) A State is a community of free citizens living within a terri- 
tory with fixed limits, governed by laws based upon a constitution of their 
own adoption, and possessing all governmental powers not granted to the 
United States. 

(b) Legislative, executive and judicial. 

(c) See 7, June '97. 

(e) See 3, Sept. '99. 

7. (a) See 1 (a), Oct. '94. 

(b) See 2, June '96. 

(c) See 1, May '95. 

(d) See 4, Sept. 1900. 

8. Department of State, Treasury Department, War, Navy, Post-office, 
Interior, Justice, Agriculture, Commerce. 

9. (a) To prevent bribery and intimidation. 
The two essential features of the system are : 



139 

First — An arrangement of polling, by which compulsory secrecy of vot- 
ing is secured, and intimidation or corruption of voters is prevented. 

Second — One or more official ballots, printed and distributed under au- 
thority, on which names of all candidates are found. 

10. (a) Courts have never decided a case on this point, hence an open 
question. 

Term has been applied, however, not only to parents and guardians of 
school children, but to other resident tax payers, as well. 

(b) The county school board. 

(c) See 9, June '96. 

(d) County School Board. 

(e) Constitution provides that a special tax of one mill on the dollar 
of all taxable property in the State, in addition to the other means pro- 
vided, shall be levied and apportioned annually among the several coun- 
ties of the State in proportion to the annual attendance upon schools in 
said counties, for the support and maintenance of public free schools. 
Forms a part of State School Fund. 



June 1898. 

1. (a) Virginia. 

(b) Sept. 1786. Annapolis. 

(c) Because only five States were represented. 

(d) May 14, 1787, at Philadelphia. 

(e) Some of the delegates delayed in arriving, hence delay in organi- 
zation. George Washington was elected President of convention. Session 
lasted four months. 

2. (a) Nine. 

(b) Eleven. 

(c) First Wednesday in January, 1789. 
<d) Slow methods of travel. 

(e) April 30, 1789. New York. 

3. (a) (1) To form a more perfect union. 
<2) To establish justice. 

(3) To insure domestic tranquility. 

<4) To provide for the common defense. 

(5) To promote the general welfare. \ 

(6) To secure the blessings of liberty to ourselves and to our posterity, 
(b) Seven. 

<c) Fifteen. 

(d) Twelve were proposed, only ten adopted. 

(e) 13th, 14th and 15th. 

4. (a) Legislative, executive and judicial. 

(b) The President vetoes legislative acts; the Senate checks the exec- 
utive in appointments and treaties; the judiciary is appointed by the 
President and confirmed by the Senate. 

(c) Senate and House of Representatives. 

(d) Congress. 

(e) Annually. 

5. (a) Because the members thereof represent the people, by whose 
direct vote they are chosen. 

(b) See 5, June '96. 

(c) Sixty-five. 

(d) 1790. Population, 3,929,827. Primary object, apportionment of 
representatives. 

6. (a) Eleventh (1890), 62,622,250. Twelfth (1900), 76,303,387. At 
present (1903), Senators, 90. Reps. 386. 

(b) Each State one member for each 33,000 of its population. After 
the eleventh census, 173,901; twelfth, 194,182. 



140 

(c) Yes. 

0. (d) Originating bills for raising revenue. Power of impeachments 
Choosing President in case no person has a majority of whole number 
of electoral votes. 

(e) Twice. Thos. Jefferson and J. Q. Adams. 

When an election is thrown into the House (see Cons., Art. 12) each 
State through her representation has one vote. Supposing her represen- 
tatives present, a State would practically have no voice in the election, 
if her representatives were evenly divided as to their choice. 

7. (a) Ninety (1903). 

(b) See 4, June 1897. Are not elected by popular vote because they 
represent the States. 

(c) The Vice-President of the United States is its presiding officer — in 
his absence the President pro tem. The Chief Justice presides during 
impeachment trial of the President of the United States. 

(d) All treaties made by the President of the United States with for- 
eign countries must be laid before the Senate for ratification. 

The Senate has the sole power to try impeachments. 

(e) See 6 (e), above. 

8. (a) Because Senators are elected by the State legislatures and rep- 
resent the States; Representatives are chosen by direct popular vote and 
represent the people. 

(b) Fourteen years. Continuous residence of at least five years to ac- 
quire citizenship by naturalization; then nine years actual citizenship. 

(c) Annual salary of $5,(X)0 each. 

(d) Annual salary of $8,000 each. 

(e) In case a vacancy occurs, when State legislature is not in session.. 

9. See 5, Sept. 1900. 

10. (a) See 8, Sept. 1900. 
(b) See 4, June 1899. 



Sept. 1898. 

1. (a) See 1, Sept. 1896. 

(b) See 4, Sept. '97. 

(c) The President has veto power over acts of Congress. 

The House of Representatives has power of impeaching President. The 
Senate tries impeachments. It may refuse to confirm President's ap- 
pointments to ofl5ce. 

The Supreme Court can call in question acts of President when he 
fails to conform to law. Acts as a check upon legislative department by 
deciding upon constitutionality of laws. 

On the other hand, Justices may be impeached. 

2. See Constitution, Art. IV., Sec. II. 
See Amendments, Arts. I-IX. 

See Amendments, Art. XIII. Sec. 1, Art. XV., Sec. 1. 
Bill of Rights : Formal declaration of the various rights of the citi- 
zen. 

3. See Constitution, Art. I, Sec. 8. 

4. Besides the ordinary powers of local legislation the state legislature 
often commits to counties or townships the duty of deciding specific ques- 
tions such as restraining domestic animals from running at large, regu- 
lating or prohibiting the liquor traffic within their limits, etc. 

This is called ''Local Option." 

The frequenting of the lobby of a legislature, or other deliberative body, 
for the purpose of influencing the official action of members, is termed 
lobbying. 

The term high seas is used to designate the area which is not within 



141 

the territorial jurisdiction of any nation but the free highway of all 
nations. 

Ex post facto law: See 3 (a), Oct. '94. 

Letters of marque and reprisal : See 6, June, 1900. 

5. (a) See Amendments to Constitution, Art. XII, Clause 1. 
(b) See Constitution, Art. II, Section 1, Clause 3. 

6. (a) For cabinet offices see VIII., Sept. 1897. 

(b) Treasury Department, Department of State, Department of War 
and Department of Justice. 

7. The Articles of Confederation left the States sovereign free and 
independent. The government was in the nature of a league. 

There was no distribution of legislative, executive and judicial powers. 
There was no chief executive. 
There were no United States Courts. 

Voting in congress was by States, each State having one vote. 
Power to coin and issue money shared with the States. 
Consent of nine States necessary to carry any important measure. 
No State could be represented by less than two or more than seven 
members. 

No adequate provision for enforcement of federal laws. 

8. Excise is a tax levied upon certain articles produced in this coun- 
try, such as tobacco and spirituous, liquors. 

Duties are taxes levied upon certain goods imported from foreign 
countries. 

A direct tax is levied directly at a given rate upon property or polls, 
as city, town and State taxes. 

An indirect tax is assessed upon the property of one person, but is in- 
directly paid by another. All taxes now levied by the national govern- 
ment are indirect. 

Joint and executive sessions: See 4 (b), June '97. 

To reprieve is to delay or postpone for a time the execution of the sen- 
tence of death upon a criminal. 

To pardon is to annul a sentence by forgiving the offense against the 
law, and by releasing the offender. 

9. la) See IV (a), Sept. '99. 

(b) An alien is a subject of a foreign country. 

A five years term of residence is required before naturalization. A 
notice of intention to become a citizen must be filed in a court of record 
two years previous to naturalization. At the expiration of the two years, 
must appear in open court, renounce upon oath all foreign allegiance, and 
swear to support the Constitution of the United States. 

10. (a) See 9, Sept. '96. 

(b) See 10, June '96. 

Source of Sub-District Fund : Special tax levied and collected within 
this division. Tax must not exceed three mills on the dollar in any one 
year on the taxable property therein. This fund supplements county 
school fund appropriated to sub-district. 

(c) County School Board. 

(d) See 9, June '96. 

(e) See 9, June '96 and 7, Sept. '94. 
June '99. 

1. See 1, Sept. '94. 

2. Family, school, township or civil district, village or city, county, 
State, nation. 

Board of county commissioners — Usually from three to five, has charge 
of the public interests of the county. 

T;he county attorney is the county's counsellor at law. 

The superintendent of schools is the chief school officer of the county. 



142 

Administers public school system, and supervises public school interests 
of the county. 

The sheriff is the guardian of the peace of the county, and the executive 
officer of its courts. 

The auditor is the guardian of the county's financial interests. 

The county clerk is the recording ofiicer of the county court, or probate 
court, and in some States of the circuit court. 

The county treasurer receives all county taxes, licenses and other money 
paid into the treasury. In most States, custodian of county's financial 
records. Pays out funds upon warrant of county commissioners. 

The surveyor surveys tracts of land to locate lines, determine areas, and 
to settle conflicting claims. 

The coroner investigates the death of persons who have died by vio- 
lence, or in prison, or from causes unknown. 

Duties of superintendent of the poor, tax collector, county jailer indi- 
cated by title of office. 

The judicial power of the county is vested in the county judge or pro- 
bate judge. 

4. For executive officers of this State, see 8, Sept. '95. 

(b) The legislative power of the State is vested in the legislature. This 
body enacts laws upon a great variety of subjects. 

and criminal cases, also appeals from lower courts. 

(c) The judges of the Supreme Court are chiefly engaged in the trial 
of cases in which appeals have been taken from decisions of lower courts. 

5. (a) See 2 (c), Sept. '9-5. 

(b) The tendency is toward aristocracy rather than pure democracy. 
Due to the influence of wealth. 

6. No. It is the duty of a citizen to vote, in order to purify politics. 

7. (a) Question for individual, 
(b) Death. 

8. Introduction or presentation of bill. 
Reading of bill three times — on different days. 
Passage by house in which bill originated. 
Passage by other house. 

Governor's signature or passage by both houses over his veto. 

9. The Australian system provides at each polling place a private 
apartment, called a booth, where each voter in private, prepares his ballot 
from a printed list of all the candidates and then hands it to the officer 
who deposit it in the ballot "-box. 

10. See 5, Sept. '97. 
Sept. '99. 

1. The term civil district includes the "Beat," "Hundred," "Election 
Precinct," "Militia District" and other classes embracing about one-half 
the States of the Union. 

Size varies, taut there are seldom less than five or more than twelve dis- 
tricts to the county. 

Purpose is security and convenience. Justice is brought to the very 
doors of the people. Voting place easily accessible. 

Governmental functions are judicial and executive within a narrow 
range. 

Officers are the justice of the peace and the constable. The Justice of 
the Peace may issue warrants for the arrest of offenders, try minor of- 
fenses, minor civil suits, hold examining trials and preserve public peace. 

The constable serves warrants, writs and other processes, preserves the 
public peace and makes arrests for its violation. 

2. Legislative power is vested in the city council. This body makes 
laws or ordinances, regulating police force, fixes rate of city taxation; 



143 

orders issue of bonds and construction of public works, and makes appro- 
priations for public purposes. 

Executive authority is vested in mayor, city attorney, city clerk, asses- 
sor, collector, treasurer, city engineer, board of public works, street com- 
missioner, school board and superintendent of schools. 

It is the ^uty of the mayor to see that the laws are enforced. Duties- 
of other executive officers similar to those of county officers of the same 
name. 

Judicial power is vested in the city court, police court, justice's courts 

(c) The judge of'tiircuit courts try the great body of important civil 
and higher courts of the county. 

3. An organized territory having necessary population sends a mem- 
orial to congress asking for admission. Congress then passes a law 
called "an enabling act," authorizing people of the territory to form a. 
State constitution. When constitution — not in conflict with the United 
States Constitution — has been framed, Congress passes another act admit- 
ting the new State into the Union. 

4. (a) "All persons born or naturalized in the United States, and sub- 
ject to the jurisdiction thereof." 

(b) (1) The right of the people to be secure in their homes. 

(2) The right of trial by jury. 

(3) The right to iteep and bear arms. 
(,4) The right of requisition. 

(5) The right of life, liberty and property. 

((>) The right of enjoying privileges and immunities of citizens of the- 
several States. 

5. (a) On the basis of population. Present ratio based on census ot 
1900, one member to 194,182 population. (190«). 

(b) 386 (1903). 

(,c) Term of office two years. Salary, $5,000. 

(d) See 5, Oct. '94. 

6. (a) If no person receives a majority of all the electoral votes, 
(b) See 4 (b), June 1902. 

7. (a) "The Supreme Court of the U. S., the circuit courts of appeals,, 
circuit courts, district courts, the supreme court of District of Columbia,- 
the court of claims, a territorial court for each of the Territories, and. 
several commissioner's courts in each of the States." 

(1) All cases arising under laws passed by congress. 

(2) Those affecting ministers, consuls and other agents of the United 
States and foreign countries. 

(3) Suits arising on the high seas. 

(4) All suits to which the United States is a party. 

(5) Controversies between a State and the citizens of another State. 

(6) Cases between citizens of different States. 

(7) Suits betwen citizens of the same State claiming lands under grants- 
by different States. 

(8) Cases betwen a State or its citizens and a foreign State or its citi- 
zens. 

8. Civil rights are chiefly those rights with which we are endowed by 
nature; as, the right to personal security, the right of personal liberty 
and the right of private property. 

By industrial rights is meant the right of each person to provide in his 
own way, providing it is legal and honest, for himself and those depend- 
ent upon him. Each member of society has rights as such, and these are- 
called social rights. They include rights of personal security and pro- 
tection. . 

9. (a) Laws exist for the purpose of securing the rights of the peo- 
ple. 



■ : ■ • i! 145 

(b) Liberty is the enjoyment of rights. 

(c) Moral, common, civil, statute, international, criminal, parliamen- 
tary, martial, maritime, and commercial. 

10. (a) Parties usualy grow out of questions of legislation and are 
formed to influence the passage of laws rather than their execution or 
their application by the courts. 

Parties serve as a check upon one another, as the party in power is 
responsible for the public policy of the country. 

(b) The towsnhip holds a convention and sends delegates to the county 
convention. The county convention sends delegates to the State conven- 
tion. The latter, as a body, selects four, representing the two United 
States Senators, and the members of the convention from each congres- 
sional district select two, representing the lower house of Congress. For 
each delegate, an alternate delegate is selected. 



June 1900. 

1. See 1, Sept. '94. 

2. The necessity of government should be conveyed to mind of child 
by illustrations from life in school and home. 

3. Legislative, executive and judicial. 

"If the same officers could make the law, enforce the law, and explain 
the law, there would be no limit to their authority and therefore no se- 
curity to the people." 

An abuse of power would inevitably result. 

4. (a) Members of the House of Representatives are chosen by direct 
vote of the people. 

Senators are elected by the legislature, 
(b) See 5, Oct. 1894. 

5. (a) A tax is a portion of private property taken for public purposes. 

(b) The United States must pay its debts just as a corporation or in- 
dividual must. If by reason of war or other occurrence, money is re- 
quired beyond the contents of the treasury, of course it must be bor- 
rowed. This is accomplished by issuing bonds. 

(c) The government cannot lend money to individuals. 

6. Letters granted by the government to private citizens in time of 
war, authorizing them, under certain conditions, to capture the enemy's 
ships. 

7. A Mil is a formal writing presented to the legislature for enact- 
ment. 

Te become a law the concurrence of both Houses is necessary, and 
approval of President. Can be passed again, however, by a two-thirds 
vote. 

Bill is introduced by asking leave of body to bring measure before it. 
It is usual then to refer it to a committee for careful consideration. 
Committee reports it to the body. If important, discussed by members 
of the body. Passage in house where it originated. Transmission to 
other house for action. Passage. President's signature. 

8. See 3, Oct. '94. 

It may be suspended in times of rebellion or invasion, for public 
safety. 

9. Delegates representing the States or congressional districts as- 
sembled in convention and nominate by ballot. Generally the delegation 
from a State votes as the majority inclines, but not always. 

10. See 12th Amendment to Constitution. 
Sept. 1900. 

1. The Articles of Confederation proved unsatisfactory. The Confed- 
eration had the power of incurring debts, but no power of paying them, 
for each State was left independent in the matter of taxes; no power to 



146 

make general laws Dor regulating commerce. (See 7, Sept. '98.) After 
muctL discussion and planning, each State was requested to send dele- 
gates to a convention to revise Articles of Confederation. In place of 
mending the old Constitution, it was decided that a new Constitution 
should be formed, so faulty were found the Articles of Confederation. 
See 1, June '98, and 1, Sept. 1901. 

2. (a) First Congress proposed twelve amendments, of which ten 
were adopted. 

(b) Two after that date to 1860. 

(c) Three adopted subsequent to 1860, relating to abolition of slavery 
and the establishment of negro suffrage. 

3. (a) Legislative, executive and judicial. 

Sets forth purposes for which Constitution was adopted. 

During the period following Declaration of Independence, the union 
between the States was weak and unsatisfactory. Instead of justice 
and tranquility, the States were constantly quarreling. There was no 
power to provide for common defense. No provision could be made for 
the general welfare by the passage and enforcement of broad measures 
for the whole country. Under the Articles of Confederation, the true 
blessings of liberty had not been enjoyed. 

4. (a, b) Congress, consisting of a Senate and a House of Represen- 
tatives. 

(c) See 2, June '96. 

(d) See 1, May '95. 

A vacancy in a State's representation in the lower house of Congress 
is filled by special election called by the Governor for that purpose. If 
vacancy in Senate occurs, when the legislature is not in session, it is 
filled by appointment by the Governor of the State until legislature 
meets again and fills vacancy by election. 

5. (a) See 7, June 1900. 

(b) A bill becomes a law when it is signed by the President or is 
passed by a two-thirds vote of each house over his veto, or has been 
kept by him ten working days while Congress is in session. 

6. See Constitution, Art. I., Sec. 9. 

7. See Constitution, Art. I., Sec. 10. 

8. Distribution of powers of government into three departments : 
Legislative power vested in two houses; same mode of making laws. 
Executive power vested in chief executive. Judicial systems analogous. 

9. (a) See 4, June '99. 

(b) See 2, Sept. '94 and 8, June '99. 

10. Public lands and taxation most usual sources. The young must 
be equipped for the duties and responsibilities of citizenship. 



June, 1901. 

1. (a) See 1, Sept. 1900. 
(b) See 4, Sept. '97. 

2. (a) See 1, May. '95. 
(b) See 4, June 1902. 

(3) See 1, Oct. '94; 1, May '95; 2, June '96, and 8, June '98. 

4. (a) Required by the Constitution. 

(b) Every ten years. 

(c) Gives State an additional Representative. 

5. Constitutional Convention or method, described in answer to 
question 8. May. '95. 

6. See 9, Sept. '97. 

7. (a) See 4, May '95. 

(b, c, d) See 3, Oct. '94 and 6, June 1900. 

8. State legislatures possess only the law-making powers not given to 



147 

Congress. Laws passed by them must not be in conflict witli the United 
Stat'es Constitution. State Constitutions also impose certain limita- 
tions. 

9. (a) State: State Board of Education, State Supt. of Public In- 
struction. 

County : County School Board, County Superintendent of Public In'- 
struction. 

District : Supervisors and Trustees, 
(b) See 9, June '96 and 10, Sept. 1902. 

10. (a) The President, 
(b) The Governor. 



Sept. 1901. 

1. In compliance with recommendations of Congress, delegates were 
chosen in the several States for the purpose of revising the Articles of 
Confederation. Convention numbering fifty-five members met in Phila- 
delphia, May 14, 1787. Every State represented except Rhode Island. 
Entirely new Constitution was prepared, was adopted and signed by all 
members present Sept. 17, 1787. First transmitted to Congress, then 
sent to the several legislatures and submitted to convention of delegates 
chosen in each State by the people thereof. By the end of July, 1788, all 
the States except Rhode Island and North Carolina had ratified. On 
Sept. 13, 1788, Congress set March 4, 1789, as the day when the new 
government should go into operation. 

2. See Constitution, Art. I., Sections 8 and 9. 

3. The Supreme Court has original jurisdiction in all cases affecting 
foreign ministers, consuls, and other agents of the United States and 
foreign countries, and cases in which a State is a party. 

Hears cases of appeal from the inferior Courts of the United States, 
involving chiefly questions of jurisdiction of inferior courts, constitu- 
tionality of laws, validity of treaties, and the sentences in criminal and 
prize causes. 

Appeals can be made from a State court only upon ground that the 
•decision of the latter is in conflict with the Constitution or laws of the 
United States. 

4. See 2 and 5, June '96, also 2, Sept. '96. 

5. (a) See 6 (b), June '97. 

(b) Book, periodical, map or chart, dramatic composition, musical 
•composition, engraving, cut or print. 

(c) Twenty-eight years. May be renewed. 

6. See 2, Sept. '98. 

7. See Constitution, Art. V. 

8. Board of County Commissioners of each county in State, not oft- 
«ner than once in every two years upon application of one-fourth of the 
registered voters of any county, shall call for and provide for an election 
in the county in which application is made, to decide whether the sale 
of intoxicating liquors, wines or beer shall be prohibited therein, deter- 
mined by majority voting in said election, provided that intoxicating 
liquors shall not be sold in any election district in whch a majority vote 
ivas cast against same at said election. 

9. Circuit Courts, Criminal Courts, County Courts, County Judges 
■and Justices of the Peace. 

10. Governor, W. S. Jennings; See'y of State, H. C. Crawford; Comp- 
troller, A. C. Croom; Attorney General, J. B. Whitfield; Treasurer, W. V- . 
Knott; Supt. of Public Instruction, W. N. Sheats; Com. of Agriculture, 
B. E. McLin. For duties, see 8, Sept. '95. 

JSTov. 1901. 

1. See 1, Sept. '94. 



148 



2. 


See 2, 


Sept. 


'95. 


3. 


See 4, 


Sept. 


'99. 


4. 


See 1, 


Sept. 


'98. 


5. 


See 2. 


June 


'96. 


6. 


See 7, 


Sept. 


'99. 


7. 


See 7, 


Sept. 


'90. 


8. 


See 8, 


June 


1901. 


9. 


See 9, 


Sept. 


1901 


10. 

rune 


See 8, 
1 1902. 


May 


'95. 



1. See 6th Amendment. 

2. By a class arrangement through which one third of Senate is; 
elected every two years. 

(See Constitution^ Art. I, Section III., Clause 2.) 

This is done in order that Senate may be a continuous body — that is, 
always organized, and when it meets, ready to proceed, at once, to busi- 
ness. 

3. Customs, or duties, and excises. 

4. (a) See 12th Amendment, Clause 1. 

(b) The Secretary of State, the Secretary of the Treasury, the Secre- 
tary of War, the Attorney-General, the Postmaster-General, the Secretary 
of the Navy, the Secretary of the Interior. (This law of succession was 
passed during Cleveland's administration. Secretary of Agriculture not 
then a cabinet officer. Department of Commerce recently established as 
cabinet office.) 

5. The Speaker is the presiding officer. Elected by the members of 
the House of Representatives. He is a member of the House, and is 
nominated for Speakership by a convention, or caucus, of representatives. 
who are of his political party. 

6. (a) See IV (a), May '95. 

(b) Schedule of duties on merchandise imported or exported. 

(c) Negation of chief executive on legislative measure. 

(d) Merchandise sent out of a country. 

(e) See 3(c), Oct. '94. 

7. Each territory elects a delegate. Territorial delegates serve upon, 
committees, and have the right to debate, but not to vote. Their real 
duties are as agents of their respective Territories. 

8. County commissioners' districts, county school boards' districts,. 
justice' of peace districts, towns' wards, school district. 

9. Warrants signed by comptroller, countersigned by Governor, then, 
payment by Treasurer. 

10. See United States History, 10, Second Grade, June '99. 
Sept. 1902. 

1. (a) See Sixth and Seventh Amendments. 

Grany jury and trial jury, or petit jury. It is the duty of the former 
to investigate crime and to present charges, called indictment for trial 
by court. It is the duty of trial jury to hear testimony and argument, 
and then decide upon the truth of facts in dispute, and render a verdict. 
or decision in the suit, and in criminal cases, convict or acquit. 

2. See 3 (a), June '98. 

3. Electors are first chosen by the people. For further steps neces- 
sary, see 12th Amendment, Clause 1. 

4. In its general signification, the word elector means voter. 

By presidential electors are meant those who are chosen to cast the 
vote of the State for President and Vice-President, according to provis- 
ions of Twelfth Amendment. 



149 

5. See Constitution, Art. I, Section VIII. 

6. See Constitution, Art. I, Section X. 

7. By a requisition — tliat is, a formal demand by Governor of State 
from which accused fled. See Constitution, Art. IV, Section II, Clause 2. 

8. Expression put into Constitution because English Parliament had 
passed Mils of attainder. Such a bill was an act of Parliament — voted 
upon like any other bill — naming a person and declaring him guilty of 
treason or some other crime. If passed by a majority of the houses, per- 
son attainted was usually executed, his property confiscated and his fam- 
ily degraded and deprived of civil rights. 

8. Treason: See VI, last exam. 

Letters of marque and reprisal. See 4, Sept. '98. 

Naturalization : The legal process by which a foreigner becomes enti- 
tled to the rights and privileges of a citizen of the United States. 

9. Tax Collector — Collects taxes. 
Tax Assessor — Assesses taxes. 

Treasurer — ^Receives, keeps and pays out moneys. 
Supt. of Public Instruction — See 9, June '96, 
Registrar — Registers voters. 
For others see 5., Sept. '94. 

10. State Board of Education : Management and oversight of school 
lands, management of educational funds of the State, decides upon ap- 
peals referred by State Superintendent, fills vacancies on county boards. 

State Superintendent of Education, County School Board, County 
School Superintendent, Trustees. For functions of last four, see 9, 
June '96. 



150 
ARITHMETIC . 
(Second Grade. 



1. (a) 27 bu. X 640 = 17,280 bu. 

(b) Product is in bushels, hence 27 is 
the multiplicand. Multiplicand 
and product must be like num- 
bers. 

2. (a) Divisor, 
(b) Dividend. 

3. 99 X 909 = 89,991. 

89991 + 9 == 90000, dividend. 

4. 31570 = 7 X 5 X 11 X 2 X 41. 
Prime factors, 7, 5, 11, 2 and 41. 

5. 2116 20 24 30 



1 

3| 
1 


8 


10 


12 


15 


1 
4 


8 


10 


4 


5 


2 


2 


10 


1 


5 


5| 
1 


1 


5 


1 


5 



11111 

L. C. M.— 2x3x4x2x5=240. 

2373)6667(2 
4746 

1921)2373(1 
1921 



452)1921(4 
1808 



G. C. D. = 

240h-113=2 7 



113)452(4 
452 



Ans. 



2 1 1 

6. 4— + 5— = 10— 

3 12 4 

1 3 13 

3 1— = 1— 

7 14 14 

1 13 17 

10— -^ 1— = 5— 

4 14 54 

5 1 14 

4— of — = 1— 

9 3 27 



17 14 1 

5 ^- 1— z= 3— Ans, 

54 27 2 

7. ( 1260x3.49 )H-1.047=r4200 
88.62 ^ .00211=42,000 
4200 — 42000 = —37800. 

8. 11 in. X 7 in. x 3 in. = 231 cu. in, 
231 cu. in. = 1 gal. or 32 gills. 

9. (a) V2 of %, 1/2 of 1/4, % of 14 

and 14 of 14 = % Sec. = 240A 
240x2.00=:$480; cost. 

(b) By same method, it is seen that 
he sold 5-16 of a section, leaving 
him 1-16 of a section (c) being 
composed of the W. 3^ of the N. 
W. 14 of the S. E. 1^ and the E. 14 
of the N. E. % of the S. W. J4. 

(d) 40 (2.50+3.00+1.20+2.00+1/^ of 
4.00) +14 of 5.00 = $528. $528, or 
proceeds of sale — $480 cost — $48 
profit, besides land now owned or 
10 per cent, of $480. 

10. $1522.92 — $1301.64 = $221.28 int. 
Int. on $1301.64 at 5 per cent, for 
1 yr. = 65.082. 

$221.28^65.082 = 3.4+ yrs. = 3 yrs. 
4 mo. 24 da. 

. •. The time is 3 yrs. 4 mo. 25 da. 

Ans. 



Oct. '94. 

1. $56000 — $64 = $55936. 
$55936^76 = $736, divisor. 

2. Prime factors of 10010 are 2, 5, 7, 
11 and 13. 

3. G. C. D. of $630, $1134, $1386 is 
$126 Ans. 
Number A can buy=: 630-^126= 5 
Number B can buy = 1134r^l26= 9 
Number C can buy = 1386^126=11 

4. L. C. M. of 36, 48, 80, 320 and 
432 is 8640, no. bji. 



5. 


$23 7 

A 




3 .3 




1 7 
3 69 



151 



5. — Continued 

3 7 

$lor— = — A 

3 23 

5 5 7 

65— = 65— X — == 20A. Ans. 
7 7 23 

6. (1.26x34.9^.1047) — (88.62-^-.211) 
=420 — 420 = Ans. 

7. 525 sq. 1. = 21-25 poles or rods. 

9iM sq- ch. = 149|f poles or rods. 

1^ rods + 9i rods-l-149 |f rods = 160 

rods = lA 
Vs sq. mi. = 80 A. 
lA + 80A = 81A. Ans. 

8. 48x1% cu. ft. = 60 cu. ft., con- 

tents of box. 
4x5 = 20 sq ft. 
60 ^ 20 = 3 ft. Ans. 



$110, cost of 
$90, cost of 



9. 99 -^ 90 per cent, 
one. 
99 -^ 110 per cent 
other. 

$110 + $90 = $200, cost of both. 
$99 -1- $99 = $198, selling price. 
$200 — $198 = $2, loss. 
$2.00 -^ $200 = 1 per cent. loss. 

Ans. 
10. 
$500 1st principal. 
20flst interest. (6 mo. 2 da.) 



520f 

220f 1st payment. 



$300 2d. prin. 

10 2d. int. (5 mo.) 



$310 

10 2d payment. 



$300 3d prin. 
131 3d int. (6 mo. 20 da.) 



$300 4th prin. 

5 46f 4th int. (2 mo. 22 da.) 
13.331 3d int. 



$318.80 
218.80 3d and 4th payments. 



$100.00 5th prin. 

.66f 5th int. (1 mo.) 



May '95. 

l..a) 29,000,095,045. 

(b) Twenty billion, two hundred 
million, ten thousand ten. 

(c) DCV. • 

(d) 1550. 

(e) Six hundred twenty-five, and 
six hundred twenty-five thous- 
andths. 



subtrahend + remain- 
= minued — remain- 
subtra- 
multi- 



2. Minuend = 

der. 

Subtrahend 
der. 

Remainder = minued - 
hend. 

Multiplicand = product 
plier. 

Multiplier = product -^ multipli- 
cand. 

Product = multiplicand x multi- 
plier. 

Dividend = quotient x divisor. 

Divisor = dividend -f- quotient. 

Quotient = dividend -f- divisor. 

3. G. C. D. of 360.288,648,720 is 72. 

Hence 72A. (a) 

3604-28&f648+720 

= 28, number of 

72 farms (b) 

4. 
5 1 23 

8 3 24 



8 3 24 

5 15 

8 3 24 

5 1 15 



23 7 5 15 4025 

24 24 24 8 36864 



Ans. 



I00.66f Ans. 



. A can do 1-3 of work in 1 day. 
B can do 1-5 of work in 1 day. 
C can do 1-6 of work in 1 day. 
All can do 1-3 + 1-5 + 1-6 = 7-10 in 

1 day. 
7-10 of work can be done in 1 day. 
1-10 of work can be done in 1-7 day. 
10-10 of work can be done, in 10-7 
= If days. Ans, 



1.52 



6. .000050^.0625 = 
thousanths. 



.0008, eight ten- 



7. 320 rods = 1 mile. 

1 rod =^ 1-320 of a mile. 

1-10 rod = 1-3200 of a mile. 

9-10 = 9-3200 of a mile. 

9-3200 = .0028125, twenty-eight thous- 
and one hundred twenty-five 
ten-millionths. 

8. 160 sq. rd. = 1 acre. 

160 X 40 = 6400 sq. rods area. 

V6400'= 80 rods, side of square. 

80 X 4 = 320 rods, perimeter of 
square. 

320 rd. X .$21/2 = $800, cost of fenc- 
ing square. 

Breadth of rectangle, 40 rds. 

Length of rectangle, 160 rds. 

4044(>l-160-fl60 = 400 rds, perimeter 

of rectangle. 
400x$2i^ =^ $1000, cost of fencing 
rectangle . 

$1000 — $800 = $200. Ans. 

9. See 9, Oct. '94, 2d or 3d grade. 

10. cows horses. 

6=5 



1 = — as much as horse 
6 

8 horses -i- 12 cows would eat as 
much as 18 horses. 
18 horses in 40 days eat 12 tons of 
hay. 
1 horse in 40 days eats j| tons of 

hay. 
1 horse in 1 days eats ^ tons 
191/^ horses in 1 day eat ^ tons 
19y2 horses in 65 days eat ^-^^ 
=2iys tons. Ans. 



of 110, 140, and 680 are 5 and 
hence product, 10, is G. C. D. 
630 ^ 10 = 63. Ans. 

3. 

i+i+i+85 = 1, or whole amount. 
If + 85 = 1 or fg 
Hence, |^ = $85. 

|f= $200, whole amt. 

$200 — (75% + $65i+$18f)=$40T\, 

remainder. 
$40tVh-|2jL = 20, number sheep 
bought. Ans. 

4. 600.0025 + .056 = 600.0585. 
600.0585 — 596.0585 = 4 
4 X 6.034 = 24.136 
24.136 -^ .6034 = 40. Ans. 



2; 



5. 


, 375 ^ .75 r 
.75 H- 375 = 


- 500 
= .002. 








500 X .002 = 


: 1 (one). 


Ans. 




6 


$1297.60 X 
1 yr. 


.07 = $90, 


,832, int. 


for 




$90,832 X 3 


= 272.496, int. for 3 




years. 










$272,496 — 


$3,027 = 


269.469 


int. 




for 3 years. — 12 


da. 





7. Int. on $1 at 7 per cent, for 5 

years is $0.35. 
$33.25 -^ .35 = $95. Ans. 

8. Amt. of $1 at 7 per cent, for 1 

year is $1.07. 
$321 -^ $1.07 = $300, present worth 

9. 70 : 300 

:: 800 : ? 
8 : 15 

300x15x800 450000 

= $6428 f 



8x70 



70 



June '96. 

1. |a) 20,000,019,019. 



(b) DCV. 

(c) 1.550. 

(d) Six hundred twenty-five, and 
six hundred and twenty-five 
thousandths. 

2. 7x3x2x.5x3 = 630. L. C. M. 

The pnly common price factors 



10. 100 per cent. = amt. rec'd for 
flour. 
98 per cent. — net proceeds. 
2 per cent. — commission on flour. 
4^^-i; per ct. = commission on bacon. 
6y»o per ct. = $150. 
1 per ct. = $21.73H 
100 per ct. = $2173.91, rec'd for 

flour. 
98 per ct. — 4^"^ per ct. = 93iV 
per ct. invested in bacon. 
$2173.91 x .931 = $2023.91 +, cost of 
bacon. A.ns. 



•Sept. '96. 

1. 100.1 -r- .013 = 7700, Ans. 

■2. f of t=|, sold to B. 

I — |=jj, part still owned by A. 
iot|=3-\, sold to C. 
I — j^jT^j^^, part still owned by B. 
-l-vfj%=^\, sold to D. 
j\ — ij=i%, part still owned by C. 

.3. 20 cows = $15.50. 
1 cow =: .771/^. * 

8 cows = $6.20. A. 
12 cows = $9.30. B. 

4. .325 of a yr. = .325 of 12 mo. = 
3.9 mo. 
.9' of a mo. = .9 of 30 da. = 27 da. 
Hence, 3 mo. 27 da. Ans. 

.5. 122° — 30' 
82 — 25 



153 

June '97. 

1. (17 X 16) + 15 = 287. Ans. 

The whole is divided into a differ- 
ent number of parts. 



15)40° — 5', dif. in longitude. 

2 hr. 40 min. 20 sec — , dif. in 
tiniie. 
.-. 19 min. 40 sec. past 10 A. M. 
in San Francisco. 

•6. 2484 ~ 1.08 = $2300, cost of 1st 

house. 
2484 ^ .92 = $2700, cost of 2d 

house. 
$2300 + $2700 = $5000, cost of both. 
$2484 X 2 = $4968, selling price 

of both. 
$5000 — $84968 = $32, loss. 
$32 -^ $5000 = .0064 = 4-625 per 

cent. Ans. 

7. 3 5 6 

; = — =1.20 = 120 per ct. 

4 8 5 Ans. 

«. 1.33i X .15 = .20. 

•9. Int. on $1200 for 45 da. at 8 per 

cent. = $12, bank disc. 

$1200 — $12 = $1188, proceeds. 

Ans. 

10. $1800 X .05 = $90.00, com. on 
farm. 

$1800 — $90 = $1710, net proceeds. 

$1710 -4- $1.03 = $1660.19+, invest- 
ed in oranges. 



1 


2 2 1 




2 


2 4 2' 




1 


2 2 1 




2 


2 4 2 




8 


2 3 17 

3 8 18 ' 


5 


9 


9 




23 153 61 

— + = 2 

36 90 180 









4. 6.0004 + 64.004 = 70.0044. 
70.0044 — 69.0004 = 1.004. 
1.004 X .04 = .04016. 

.04016 -^ .0020080 = 20 = XX. 

5. 41/^)109 mi. 7 fur. 29 rds. 7 ft 3 in. 

24 mi. 3 fur. 19 rds. 14 ft. 5^ in. 



157° 

77 



50' — 35" W. 
— 15 W 



15)80° — 50' — 20" 



5 hr. 23 min. 21 1-3 sec — , dif- 
ference in time. 
36 min. 38 2-3 sec. past 7 P. M. 
July 3. 

7. $2.40 X 116 1 per ct. = $2.80, sell- 
ing price. 
$2.80 -^ .80 = $3.50 marked price. 

Ans. 

(8 ) 100 per cent. = selling price of 
wheat. 

4 per cent. = commission on wheat. 

100 per cent. — 4 per cent. = 96 
per cent., proceeds from sale. 

96 per cent, x 3 per cent. = .0288, 
commission on corn. 

$735 -i- .0688 = $10683.13 fi, selling 
price wheat. 

$10683. 13fi less 4 per cent, commis- 
sion = $10255.81. 
$102.55.81 -^ 1.03 = $9957.097, in- 
vested in corn. 

$9957.097 -^ .33 1-3 = 29871.291 
bushels. Ans. 



154 



9-10. (a) Int. on $1 at 6 per ct. for 1 
yr. 6 mos. is .09. 
.$9000 X .09 = $864.00, simple in- 
terest 

(b) $864 remains unpaid y^ yr. 

$864 
.06 

2)51.84 

25.92 



+ $25.92 = $889.92, annual 
interest. 



(c) $881.28; J890.179. 

(d, e) $9600 H- 1.09 = $8807.34, net 

procGGds 
$9600 — 8807.34 = $792.6,6. true 

discount. 
Int. on $9600 for 1 yr. 6 mo. 3 da. 

at 6 per ct. = $868.80, bank 

dis. 



1 1 


11 


— ' X 5 — = 


= — 


8 2 


16 


2 7 


37 


3— + 4— 


rr: 7 — 


9 24 


72 


11 541 


99 


— -^ 


= 


16 72 


1082 



Sept. '97. 

1. f of 4i bu. or y bu. = $5f. 
1 bu, = $f 

I of f of 20 bu. or 6 bu. = $9. Ans. 

2. (a) 3 2 1 

4 3 2 



8 2 8 




5 2 3 




4— -f- 3— = — 




6 9 2 




3 3 15 


7 


— + — = — or 1- 


— 


8 2 8 


8 


7 7 1 




4— + 1— = 6— 


Ans. 


24 8 6 




(b) 7 3 1 




= — 1 




8 4 8 




2 5 1 




_ + 4— = 5— 




3 6 2 





Ans. 



3. 16 X .16 = 2.56 

2.56 -^ .0016 = 1600, MDC. 

4. (a) 10% ft. X 51 ft. X 614 ft. = 

350 cu. ft. 
4. (a) 101/2 ft. X 

1 bu. = 11/4 cu ft. nearly. 
350 -f- 114 = 280 bu. 
280 bu. at $11/8 per bu. = $315. 

Ans. 

4. (b) 1-20 of 350 cu. it.^VlVi cu. ft.. 
171/2 ^2 = 8% cu. ft. = 15120 cu.- 

in. 
15120 cu. in. -^ 231 cu. in. = 65 ff 

gal. 
10 francs = $1.93. 
65f| X $1-93 = $126.82ff. 

5 66f per cent. = $200, cost. 
100 per ct. = $300, list price. 
$300 X 116 f per ct. = $350, selling- 
price. 
$350 — $200 = $150. 
$150 ^ $200 = 75 per cent. gain. 

6. See ex. 9, 2nd or 3d grade, Oct.,. 
1894. 



8)2 sq.mi. 120A. 8 sq.ch. 12p. 500 sq.l. 
175 A. 1 sq.ch. IP 375 sq.L 

8. (1.6)» = 4.096. 



V 4.09600000 = 2.0238. 

9. (a) $360 -^ .06 = $6000 = 60 
shares. 

$1101^ + .25 = $110%. 
$110% X 60 = $6645, invested, 
(b) $180 at 1 per ct. per mo. 6 mos. 
= 10.80. 



($180x2) +10. 80 



6645 



= ^iih P®r ct. 



155 



10. 6 

3 : 

2 


8 

9 


:: 41/4, : 
Ans. 4^ 








June '98. 







22^ 



5 hr. 10 min 
15 



77° — 30' 
75 — 10 



1. a) Six hundred five thousand six. 

(b) 800.008,008,800,080. 

(c) $55816.05. 

(d) 10,822. 

(e) M. 

2. 4 + Jl X 3 — (5 + 28 -H- 4 + 24) -^ 

6 = 31. Ans. 

3. Prime factors are 2, 11, 13 and 17. 

4. L. C. M. of 12, 15, 18 = 3x2x2x5x3 

= 180. Ans. 



2° — 20^ East. 

8. 100 X IVi cu ft. = 125 cu. ft. con- 

tents of required box. 
125 cu. ft. -V- 25 sq. ft. = 5 linear 
ft . Ans . 

9. Int. on $1 at 6 per ct. for 3 mos. 3 

da. is .0155, bank discount. 
$1.00 — .0155 = .9845, proceeds of 
$1. 
$354.42 H- .9845 = $360, face of 
note. 

10. Int. on $1 at 6 per cent, for 3. 

yrs. 6 mos. is .21. 
$42 -^ 21 = $200, cash value. 



15, A 
= 12, B 
= 18. C. 



180 

12 
180 

15 
180 

10 

5 , 28 34 

25 ' 30 

L C. M. of 28 and 34 is 476. 
G. C. D. of 25 and 30 is 5. 

476 1 

= 95 — sec. 

5 5 

6. ( 1 3 6 4) 1 

(3 + 2 of — + — ) ' ^ 4 — 

(2422) 5 



Sept. '98. 
1. 296 — 



132 
— = 82, remainder 



296 — 82 = 214, subtrahend. 

2. .7-4- .007 + 129 = 229, CCXXIX. 
3. See ex. 2, 2nd or 3d Grade, June' 
2, 1902. 



4. 5x3x3x5x2x7x3x10=94500, L. 
5x3 = G. O. D. 
94500 -i- 15 = 6300. Ans. 



C. M. 



5. 180 x IVi cu. ft. = 225 cu. ft. con- 

tents of bin. 
225 cu. ft. -^ 25 sq. ft. = 9 linear 
ft. Ans. 

6. 74° W 

2 — 30' E. 



= ( 1 

(5— 
( 2 



1 ) 1 

2— + 6) -^ 4— 

4 ) 5 



= 37 

4 
7. Difference in time is 5 hr. 10 min. 



1 17 

4— = 2— 

5 84 



15)76° — 30' 

5 hr. 6 min. Hence 10:21 P. M> 
7. See 9, Oct. '94, 2d grade. 

8 30 : 300 

:: 15 



30 
6 
3 

60 

8 



6 
12 
12 



8. — Continued 
300x8x6x12x12x15 
30x6x3x60x8 



120 days 



9. $1200x 8 =- $ 9600 for 1 mo. 
900x10 = 9000 for 1 mo. 
850x12 = 10200 for 1 mo. 



$28800 for 1 mo. 
$28800 gives $1296, gain. 
1296 9 
200 
9 
200 



1 gives 

28800 

9600 gives 9600 x 



$432 



A's share. 



9000 gives 9000 x = $405 

200 
B's share. 



156 

4. 288 rd. yd. ft. 
120 rd. 4 yd. 2 ft. 

167 rd. yd. 2 ft. 6 in. Ans. 

5. 436 rds. circumference. 

436 -^ 3.1416 = diameter of circle. 

Diameter divided by 2 = radius. 

(Radius)^ x 3.1416 = area of cir- 
cle in sq. rods. Divide area of 
circle in sq. rods by 160, and 
result will be number of acres, 
viz.: 94.5457+. Ans. 

6. 20 -per ct. of 85 per ct. = 17 per 

cent. 
85 per ct. — 17 per ct. = 68 per ct. 
68 per ct. = $3859. 
100 per ct. = $5675. Ans. 

7. Int on $1 at 6 per cent, for 63 

days = .0105. 
$17.78 -^ .0105 = $1693.33. Ans. 

8. See 8, Sept. '98, 2d or 3d grade. 

9. 1200 bu. x 2150| cu. in. = 

2580480 cu. in. 



10200 gives 10200 x = $459 

200 
C's share. 

10. 31/2 x 3.1416 X 30 = 329.868 sq. ft, 
surface one col. 
329.868 X 12 = 3958.416 sq. ft. = 

439.824 sq. yds. 
439.824 X .193 = $84.886032. Ans. 



V2580480 = 137.16+ in. = 11 ft. 
5.16 in. Ans. 

10. 4 ft. X 4 ft. = 16 sq ft. 

16 sq. ft. X 2f ft. = 42| cu. ft. 
421 xl71 lbs. = 7296 lbs. Ans. 



June '99. 

1. See 3, June '98, 2d or 3d grade. 



2. 5 1 17 

— + — or — = $1020. 
8 12 24 



60 



24 



Sept. '99. 




1. 8 1 31 

6— X 2— = — 

9 4 2 




5 31 1 

3— + — = 19— 

6 2 3 




4 4 7 




5*7 10 




1 7 19 

19 = 18—. 

3 10 30 


Ans. 



24 

— == 1440, A's money. Ans. 

24 

3. .00144 ~ .000012 = 120 or CXX. 

Ans. 



2. .35 X .4 = .14, part sold C. 
.35 — .14 = .21, part left 
.21 X .500 = .105, B's loss. 
.105 = 1680 
The whole, or 1, = $16,000. Ans. 



3. 18 X li X 11 — 264 ft, one piece 
5 X 264 = 1320 ft., five pieces. 
1320 X my2 = $46.20. Ans. 

4. 14 mi. = 80 rd. = 1320 ft. 
1320 ft. X 60 ft. = 79 200 sq. ft. 
79,200 X .22 = $17,424. 

79,200 -^ 9 = 8,800 sq. yds. 
8,800 sq. yds. x $3.10 = $27,280. 
$27,280 — $17,424 = $9,856, cheap- 
er. Ans. 

5. 100 per ct. = bushels bought by 

measure. 
10114 per ct. = bushels sold by 

weight. 
1.0125 X 1.05 = 1.063125, selling 

price. 
$4910.976 H- 1.063125 = $4619.377+, 

cost. Ans. 

6. 24.000 lbs at 6 cts. per lb. = 

$1440. 
$1440 X .05 = $72.00, commission 

on sales. 
$1440 — $72 = $1368, net proceeds. 
$1368 + $3000 = $4368. 
$4368 X .05 = $218.40, commission 

on investment. 
$72 + $218.40 = $290.40, total com. 

Ans. 

7. 100 per ct. — 12i^ per ct. = 87% 

per ct. 

$2.00 -r- .871/^ = $2.28f retail 



157 
June 1900. 

1. 1 3 2 1 1 

2— + 7— X 3 2 H 4— 

2 4 5 3 2 



1 527 

"2 20 



14 179 

— = 28 . Ans> 

27 540 



6 



2. 1 yr., or — = $216. 
6 



— = $36. 
6 



lo mos or — = $180. 



price. 
?2.28f — $2.00 = 



.28f gain. 
.28f H- $2.00 = 14 f per ct. gain. 

Ans. 
8. $1.00 — .0155 = 9845. 
$150 -^ .9845 = $152.36. 

9 6 X 3.1416 = c ire. of base. 
1% + 6 X 3.1416 = area of base. 
6 X li/4 X 6 X 3.1416 = 169.6464 cu. 

ft. or 293148.9792 cu. in. 
293148.9792 -=- 231 = 1269.0432 

gals, or 40.287+ bbls. 

10. 135 + 135 + 60 + 60 = 390 rods, 
perimeter of rectangle. 
390 X 1.35 = $526.50 cost of fenc- 
ing rectangle. 
135 rd. X 60 rd. = 8100 sq. rds. 



6 



$180 — $175 = $5, two month's sup- 
plement. 
$5 -^ 2 =r $250, one month's sup- 
plement. 
$5 -=- 2 = $250, one month's supple- 
ment. 
$2.50 X 12 = $30, twelve month's 
supplement or value of suit. 
Ans. 

3. .000012 —■ .012 = .001. 

4. hr. min. sec. 
12 

6 52 40 



5 7 20 
15 



V8100 = 90, one side of square. 
90 X 4 ^ 360 rds, perimeter of sq. 
360 X 1.35 = $486.00, cost of fenc- 
ing square. 
$526.50 — $486 = $40.50. Ans. 



76° 50' west. Ans. 

5. 27 in. = 21/i ft. 

16 -=- 214 = 71 . Hence 8 strips 
required. 

i yd == f ft. 

ISf X 8 = 148i ft or 49 f yds. ' 
49f X 1.85 = $91.76. Ans. 

6. 16f per ct. of 54 per ct. = 9 per 

cent. 
100 per ct. — 9 per ct. = 91 per ct. 
385.84 -^ 91 per ct. = $424. 

7. $3600 --- 125 per ct. = $2880, cost 

of first. 



158 



7 — Continue d 

3G00 -4- 75 per ct. = 4800, cost of 

second. 

$7680 (cost) — $7200 (selling 

price) = $480 (loss) Ans. 

S. 3493.50 -=- 4.25 = 822, number bbls. 
bought. 

3493.50 X .02% = $96.07125, com- 
mission. 

3493.50 X .Oli/s = 39.301875, insur- 
ance. 

$96.07125 + $39.301875 + $268.25 = 
$403.623125, expenses. 

403.62312 -H 822 = .491+, expenses 
per bbl. 

4.25 + .491 = $4,741, total cost per 
bbl. 

4.741 X .10 = .4741, gain per bbl. 

4.71 + .4741 = 5. 21+, selling price 
per bbl. 

9. Int. on $1.00 for 2 mo. 20 da. 
at 7 per cent is .015f 
Proceeds, .984| 

-^ .984| = $909.14. 



10. 20 X 20 = 400 sq. ft., area of 
lower end. 
10 X 10 == 100 sq. ft, area of upper 

end. 
400 X 100 = 40,000, product of 
areas. 

V 40,000 = 200, square root of pro- 
duct. 

400 + 100 + 200 = 700, sum of areas 
and sq. root of product. 

1-3 of 20 = 6 2-3 = one-third of 
altitude. 

.-. 700 X 6 2-3 = 4666 2-3 cu. ft. 

Ans. 



Sept. 1900. 

1 Twenty-five quadrillion, two hun- 
dred ten billion, forty million, 
five thousand, eight hundred 
sixty-one. 
(2) 100,001,001,001. 

(3) $1049.095. 

(4) 10879. 

(5) MMDCCCXCIX. 

2. (1) Minuend, subtrahend, re- 
mainder. 
(2) 10 — 5 = 5. 



(3) Only like numbers can be sub- 

tracted. The sum of the sub- 
trahend and the remainder is 
equal to the minuend. 

(4) An abstract number is one used 

without reference to any par- 
ticular thing; as, 4. 
A concrete nwrmber is one used in 
connection with some thing; 
as, 4 books. 

(5) Multiplicand, multiplier, product. 

(6) 4 X 3 is read 4 multiplied by 3 

whein 4 is the multiplicand, 
but it is read 4 times 3 when 

4 is the multiplier. 

(7) (a) The multiplier must be re- 

garded a s an abstract number. 

(b) The multiplicand and product 

must be like numbers. 

(c) Either factor may be used as 

multiplier or multiplicand 
when both are abstract. 

(8) The number to be divided is 

called the dividend. 

The number by which we divide is 
called the divisor. 

The result obtained by division is 
called the quotient. 

The part of the dividend remain- 
ing when the division is not 
exact is called the remainder. 

(9) The dividend and divisor must 

be like numbers. 
The quotient must be an abstract 

number. 
The product of the divisor and 

quotient, plus the remainder, 

is equal to the dividend. 

(10) . 25-+5 = 5 = 25 — 5 — 5 — 

5 — 5 = 5. 

"When we wish to record how many 
fives in twenty-five, if we re- 
call the fact that 5 fives are 
25, the answer is found at 
once. Hence, division is con- 
verse of multiplication. 



III. (54 — 16) X 11 + 4 — 15 X 20 
= 270. 



(1) 27 + 3 X 10 — 27 = 30. 
270 -=- 30 = 9, Ans. 

(2) Multiplying the dividend or di- 

viding the divisor by any num- 
ber multiplies the quotient by 
that number. 
Dividing the dividend or multiply- 
ing the divisor by any num- 
ber, divides the quotient by 
that number. 



159 



JMultiplying or dividing both divi- 
dend and divisor by the same 
number does not change the 
quotient. 



(1) 5, 2, 2, 


2, 7, 11. 


Ans 


5 21 

— of = 

4 llf 


525 

228 


175 
76 


3 175 


559 




1— + = 

8 76 


152 




559 1 


1525 




152 3 


456 




1525 305 
45G ' 114 


5 
4 


1 

1— 

4 



2.1 ( 1 ) 1 11 

— + 3(— ) +— = — 
3 ( 6 ) 12 12 

12 11 1 

or — = $1850 

12 12 12 

12 

— = $22,200. 
12 

3. 9 -^ .09 = 8.91; .0009 x 8.91 = 
.008019; 
.008019 

= 810 

.0000099 
Eight hundred ten. Ans. 



Ans 



V. .000012 -T- .012 = .001. 
12 X .00012 = .00144. 
.00144 -f- .001 = 1.44, One, forty- 
four hundredths. 



4. 120° 

84 



12' 26" 
15 30 



YI. 74= 



3' 

20 



15)70= 



23' 



5 hr. 5 min. 32 sec. dif. in time. 

12 P. M. 5 min. 32 sec. 
5 hr. 5 min. 32 sec. 

7 A. M., time at New York. 

VII. i^ pt. = 614 per ct. of 8 pts. or 
one gal. 
$500 X .O614 = $31.25. Ans. 

■8. $6000 X 2 = $12000, selling price. 

$6000 -f- 120 = $5000, cost of first. 

$6000 -^ SO = $7500, cost of second. 

$7500 + $5000 = $12500, cost of 

both. 

$12500 — 12000 = $500, loss. 
$500 -^ $12500 = 4 per ct. loss. 
(9) See 8, Sept. 1901, 2d or 3d grade. 
10. See 8, Sept. '98, 2d or 3d grade. 



June 1901. 

1. L. C. M. of 42, 63, 49. 91, 70 -4- G. 
C. D. of 3038, 5394 and 8308 
57330 21 

= = 924— 

62 31 



15)35° 56' 56" dif. in longi- 
tude. 
2 hrs. 23 mins 47^^! sees. dif. 
in time. 
Hence, 36 mins. 12 4-15 sees, past 
9 A. M. 

5. Let 100 per cent. := cost. 
130 per ct. = marked price. 

117 per ct. = selling price. 

100 per cent. = $650, cost. 

1 per cent. = $6.50. 

117 per cent. = $760.50, selling 

price. 
760.50 — $650 = $110.50, gain. 
$110.50 -^ $650 = 17 per ct. gain. 

6. $460.75 in one yr. at 6 per ct. will 

earn 27.645. 

95.00 2413 

= 3 yrs. 

27.645 5529 

= 3 yrs. 5 mo. 7 da.-t- Ans. 

7. Let 100 per ct. = cost of horse. 
f cost of carriage = % of 100 per 

cent. = 75 per cent. 

I or cost of carriage = 112% per 
cent. 

125 per cent. -I- 112r/^ per ct. + 11% 
per ct. or 248% per ct. = $597. 

100 per ct. = $240. cost of horse. 

112^ per ct. = $270, cost of car- 
riage. 

8. See 8, Sept. '99, 2d grade. 



9. Length = 100 rods. 

Width 100 J 
100 X 1001 



160 

8. 



160 




"3 




10. 1 : 


6% :: 


(7, 


,13)= : 


X- = 


380.43985 




X = 


18.178 


rds 


. Ans, 


Sept. 1901. 






1. |yd. 


: 5f yd. 


: : 


$3| : ! 


5|X3f 


== $24. 


Ans. 



4. 1 mi. = 5280 ft. 
5 mi. = 26400 ft. 
26400 -^ 9.00013 = 2933.29+. 



Ans. 



5 y\ A or 160 sq. rd. = 116i\ sq. rd. 
j\ of 301/i sq. yd. = 11 sq. yd. 
.-. 8 A. = 116 sq. rd. 11 sq. yd. 



6 



cu. 



m. =: 



ft. 

sq. 



ft. 



1 bu = 2150.42 
1.244456+ cu. ft 

100 bu. = 124.4456+ cu. 

124.4456+ cu. ft. -f- 25 
4497824+ ft. Ans. 

By approximate measurement (1 
bu. = 114 cu. ft.), height re- 
quired = 5 ft. 

7. 120 per ct. = $15.40. 

100 per ct. = $12.83i , cost. 
$16.50 — $12.83 i = $3.66f 
gain. 

$3.66fH-$12.83i=28fper ct. Ans. 



Amt. of $1.00 at 5 per cent, for 

1 yr. 6 mo. 18 da. is 1.0775. 
$12000 -+ $1.0775 = $1113.69, pres. 

worth. 
$12000 — $1113.69 = $886.31, true: 

disc. 
Int. on $12,000 at 5 per cent, for 1 

year 6 mos. 21 da. is $935, bank: 

discount. 
$935 — $886.31 = $48.69. Ans. 

. 3' X .5236 = 14.1372 cu. in., voL 

of smaller ball. 
12'' X .5236 = 904.7808 cu. in., vol. 

of larger ball. 
904.7808 H- 14.1372 = 64. Ans. 



Vs 

2. 1 sq. mi. = 640 acres. 
5-16 of 640 A. = 200 acres. 
% of 200 A. = 150 A. 

150 acres at $14.50 per acre = 

$2175. 
50 acres at $15.75 per acre = 

$787 50 
$2175 + $787.50 = $2962.50, selling 

price. 
$2962.50 — $2000 = $962.50. 
$962.50 -7- $2000 = 481/8 per ct. 

Ans. 

3. 141^ yd. X IVs yd. = %i 
2^1 sq. yd. -^1 yd. = 19|| yds. 





10. 










12 men 


( 


30 men 




30 ft. 300 ft. 


15 days 




? days 




: 6 ft. : 8 ft. 


12 hours 




8 hours 


3 ft. 6 ft. 










4 deg. 7 deg. 






210 days. 


Ans. 


Nov. 


1901. 








1. 


See 


1, 


Sept. 


1901, 2d grade. 


2 


See 


2 


June 


'99, 


2d grade. 


3. 


See 


3, 


May. 


'94, 


2d grade. 


4. 


See 


4, 


June 


'96, 


2d grade. 


5. 


See 


5, 


June 


'01, 


2d grade. 


6. 


See 


6, 


Sept. 


'99. 


, 2d grade. 


7. 


See 


7, 


June 


'99, 


2d grade. 


8. 


See 


8, 


June 


'99, 


2d grade. 


9. 


See 


9. 


Sept. ' 


97, 


2d grade. 


10. 


See 


10, June 


! 1900. 


June 


J 1902. 









1. 5.103791 — .289 = 4.814791. 
4.814791 H- .1306 = divisor. 

2. 31/2 21 

5 = 5 — , sum of the two num- 

74 44, hers. 



493 
110 
111 

45 



11 

221 
9 



1st number. 



2 — Continued 

493 111 17 

110 45 990 ' 

21 17 61 

5 2 = 3 , other num- 

44 990 132 ber 

Ans. 

3. See 2, June 1900, 1st grade. 

4. 45 ft. X 9 ft. X 1% ft. ^ 708% 

cu. ft., one longer wall. 

708% cu. ft. X 2 = 141714 cu. ft., 
both longer walls. 

37 ft. X 9 ft. X 1% ft. = 582% cu- 
ft., one shorter wall. 

582% cu. ft. X 2 = 11651/2 cu. ft., 
both shorter walls. 

141714 + II6514 = 2583 cu. ft., to- 
tal contents. 

2583 X .32 = $826.56. Ans. 

5 100 per ct. = amt. spent for but- 
ter and eggs. 
133} per ct. = amt. spent for veg- 
etables. 
1331 per ct. = 36.48. 
lOO' per ct. = 27.36. 
Hence $36.48 + $27.36 = $63.84. 

Ans. 

6- $1 — .0125 = .9875 cost of $1 of 
draft. If payable at sight. 
.9875 — .0181 = 96941 , cost of 

$1 of time draft. 
$1750 X .9694i = $1696.48, cost of 
draft. Ans. 



161 

Sept. 1902. 



1. 



7. V202 — 16= = 12 ft. Ans. 

bu. pk. qt. pt. 

8. 28 3 5 1 
14 

404 3 5 = 404|fbu. 

404ff X .60 = $242.94 1 Ans. 

9. If on 56 pounds $1.12 is lost, 
On 1 pound .02 is lost. 

8 per ct. = .02. 

100 per cent. ^ .25, cost per lb. 

Ans. 

10. $72 yield $6. 

$6 -^ $72 = 8| per cent. 
8i per ct. — 8 per ct = i per ct. 
Former, | per ct. Ans. 



5 7 17 
— 4- $11— = $16— 

6 8 24 



17 

$16 

24 



11 
3— 
12 



19 

$6— 
24 



5 3 

If $— = — yd. 
16 8 

1 3 

$— = — yd. 
16 40 

16 48 1 

— or $1 = — = 1— yd. 
16 40 5 

19 1 19 

$6 — = 1— yds. X 6— 
24 5 24 



= 8— yds. 
20 



Ans. 



2. 100.25 X .00018 = .0180450. 
.0180450 -;- .0002006 = 89, quotient; 

1916 remainder. 
89 expressed in Roman notation, 
LXXXIX. 

3. 2150.4 cu. in. -^57% cu. in. =37i'^i 

qt. 

375I qt. X .10 = $3.72i-'V selling 

price per bu. 
$3.72/t — .$1.60 = $2.12i\ gain 

per bu. 

$2 12,^ X 5 = $10.61 j?V total gain. 

Ans. 
hr. min. sec. 

4. 3 1 33.8 

15 



45° 


23' 


27" 


77° 


2' 


48" 


45 


23 


27 



122"^ 



m. 
38 



26' 



m. 
20 



15" "West. Ans. 

in. in. 
? : 609. 



609 X 38 



20 



1157.1 in. 
ft. 



= 96.425 

Ans. 



162 



G. See 7, June 1900, 2d or 3d grade. 5. 

7. $1400000 X .002 = $2800, annual 
payment. 

$12,500 -f- $2800 = 4 with 1300 as 
remainder. 

Hence, 5 jrrs. required. Last pay- 
ment = $1300. Ans. 

S. See 8, Sept. 1901, 2d or 3d grade. 

9. See 3, Sept. 1902, 1st grade. 

10. See 10, Sept. 1901, 2d or 3d 

grade. 



ARITHMETIC. 
(First Grade.) 



Sept. '94. 



115 

4 6 12 



12 
12 



12 



12 



— of — = — 
7 12 G 



.20. 



— = $1.20. 
G 

bu. 

1.4 = $1.50 

1 = .$1.07 f 
7 = $7.50. 



Ans. 



Ans. 



2 


11 


1 


84 


1— 
3 


+ 1— + 
15 


2 . 

"5 


15 


84 
15 


= $537G. 






1 

15 


= $G4. 






25 
15 


= $1600, 


1st heir. 


26 









= $1664, 2d heir. 



15 

33 

— = $2112, 3d heir. 
15 

. 7000 gr. = 1 lb. Avoirdupois. 

480 gr. = 1 oz. Apothecaries. 

7000 -^ 480 = 14tV oz. 

14y'% oz X .48 = $7.00, selling price. 

$7.00 — $5.00 = $2.00, gain. 

$2 -H $5 40 per cent. 
. See 9, Sept. 1900, 2d or 3d grade. 
. See 10, Sept. 1901, 2d or 3d grade. 



V 1906624 = 124 cu. ft, each di- 
mension. 



V(124)- + (124=) = V30752 = 
175.36+ ft, length of line from 
lower corner to diagonally op- 
posite lower corner. 
(175.36+)= + (124)= = 30,752 + 
15376 = 46128. 



V46128 = 214.77+ ft. Ans. 
10. Lateral surface of a cone = pe- 
rimeter of base x l4 slant ht 



(a) 1 bu. = 2150.42 cu. in. 
2150.42 -+- 1728 = 1.24 cu. ft 
1.24 cu. ft. = 1 bu. 
1 cu. ft. =: .8+ bu. Ans. 



(b) 1 bu. = 1.24+ cu. ft., hence ap- 
proximately 1% cu. ft. See 
(a) above. 

4. 100 per ct. — 5 per ct. = 95 per 
ct. 
$9120 H- .95 = $9600, total funds to Oct. '94 
be raised. 



V(40)-" + (9)^ = V1681 = 41, hy- 
potenuse, or slant height. 

18 ft. X 3.1416 ^ 56.488 ft., circ, or 
perimeter of base. 

56.5488 X 201/0 = 1159.2504 sq. ft., 
lateral surface. 

1159.2504 X $.193 = $223.73+. Ans. 



$9600 — ($2x200) = $9200, proper- 
ty tax. 
$9200 -+ $2300000 = .004, rate. Ans. 



17. 



-m-4i 



91^ 

^21 



fX9f 



186 
325 



Ans. 



163 



2. 375 -f- .75 = 500. 
.75 -^ 375 = .002. 
Sum, 500.002. 
Difference, 499.998. 

3. 100 per ct. x 25 per ct. = 125 per 

cent. 
12 per cent, of 125 per cent. = 15 

per cent. 
125 per ct. — 15 per cent. = 110 

per ct., profit. Ans. 
4 Compound int. on $1.00 at 6 per 

cent, for 1 yr. 4 mo. .0812. 

Amt., $1.0812. 
$2703 H- $10812 = $2500. Ans. 

5 . $8000 used 4 mo. = 32000 for 1 mo. 
$2000 used 6 mo. = 12000 for 1 mo. 



3/ . ... 

V30. 625000000 = 3.128+. Ans. 

81° 47' 50" 
71 7 45 


)10° 41' 


5" 


42 min. 
in time. 


401- sec, difference 



44,000 for 1 mo. 
A's capital. 
$16000 used 3 mo. = 48,000 for 1 mo. 
$8000 used 5 mo. = 40,000 for 1 mo. 



88000 for 1 mo 
B's capital. 
.$13,.500 used 7 mo. = 94.500 for one 10 
mo., C's capital. 
44000 + 88000 + 94500 = 226500, en- 
tire capital for 1 mo. 

A's share of gain is ^%^t%% or 4%^ 

of $12000 = $2331.12+ 
B's share of gain is AVtVo or i|f 

of $12000 = $4662.25+. 



tl, 
Jacksonville is farther west than 
Boston, hence 42 mins., 40 1 
sees, earlier than 10 o'clock = 
17 mins. 19 1 sees, past nine. 

. $5000 H- 120 per ct. = $4166 f 

cost of house. 
$4166| — $4000 = $166 1 , loss 

if sold at $4000. 
^$4166|= 4 per ct. loss. Ans. 



C's share of gain is--9-^J>J>-^o_ 
of $12000 = $5006:62+. 
. 1 1 2 92 

7 



Bank discount of $250 for 10 
mo. at 7 per ct. is $14.7294. 

Amt. of $1.00 for 10 mo. at 7 per 
cent. = 1.05-1 " 

$250 -^ 1.05f = 236.22+, present 

, worth. 

$250 — $236.22+ = $13.7S+, true 
discount. 

$14,729 — $13.78 = .949 difference. 

Ans. 



-, part left. 



3 7 5 105 

105 92 13 

105 105 105 

13 

105 

1 

105 

105 

$21,000, original amt. 

105 



5 
92 
105 

= $2600. 
= $200. 



May '95. 

1. (a) L. C. M. of 4, 9, 16, 24, 36 sq. 

in. is 144 sq. in. 
1 square yd. = 1296 sq. in. 

1296 9 J"' 

(b) 144 H- 24 = 6 pieces 

2. 625 X .003 = 1.875. 



92 

105 

-•$18400 



V 39. 0625 = 6.25. 

1.875 -^ 6.25 = .3, three tenths. 

Difference in time = 4 hrs. 30 
mins. 

4 hr. 30 min. 
15 



of $21,000 = $18,400, amt. lost 07° 30' = difference in longi- 
tude. 
$21000 = 87 M per ct. (a) B is west from A. 

Ans. (b) 67^ x 50 = 3375 miles apart. 



164 



4. Vol. of cylinder =: area of base 

X alt. 
(Ij4 ft.)=' X 3.1416 sq. ft., area of 

(IVa ft)"' X 3.1416 X 12 = 84.8232 cu. 

ft., volume. 
84.8232 cu. ft. x 1728 = 146574.4896 

cu . in . 
231 cu. in. — 1 gallon. 
146574.4896 cu. in. -^ 231 cu. in. 

= 634.5216, number gals. Ans. 

5. First find contents of bouse of 

given dimensions, but six ft. 
in height on each side; now as 
one side is eight ft. high, prism 
havng right triangle as base, 
still remains. Altitude of this 
triangle is two ft., and base 
ten ft. 

Area of a triangle = base x i/^ al- 
titude. 

Vol. of a prism = area of base x 
altitude. 

10x6x12 = 720 cu. ft., contents of 
rectangular part. 

10x1 = 10 sq. ft., area of triangle 
or base of prism. 

10x12 = 120 cu. ft., contents of 
prism. 



10. (30)2 _ (18) = 



576. 



720 + 120 
1% 



= 672, capacity in bush- 
els. Ans. 



6. 10 per cent, of $2 = .20, deduc- 
tion. 
$2.00 — .20 = $1.80, selling price. 
$1.80 -^ 120 per ct. = $1.50 cost. 
Ans. 
t. 1 oz. Av. = 4371^ gr 
1 oz. Troy ^= 480 gr. 

4371/2 175 
1 oz. Av. = or of 1 oz. 

480 192 Troy. 

i|f of $1 = .9114+, selling price 

per oz. Av. 
.9114f — .75 = .1614+, gain per oz. 
Av. Ans . 

8. 10 : X :: (3)= : (8)^ 
27x = 5120. 
X = 189i| lbs. Ans. 
9 1 share yields $4. 
Vi per cent, of $100 

age per share. 
$4 — .25 = $3.75, net income. 
$3.75 -^ .05 = $75, cost of one 
share. Ans. 



V570 = 24. 

30 ft. — 24 ft. = 6 ft. 



Ans. 



Sept. '95. 

1. (a) Prime factors, 17, 19, 23, 31. 

(b) 24, 48, 72, 144. 

(c) Half the sum of two numbers + 
their difference = greater. 

Half the sum of two numbers — 
half their difference = less. 



(d) DXXXVIII. 

2. 876 + 94 X 16 = 2380. 



72 X 19 ^ 9 = 152. 



9 X 144 
8 



162. 



152 + 162 — 175 = 139. 

2380 — 139 = 2241. Ans. 
3. (a) $47.73 -^ .0645 = 740, number 

shingles, 
(b) $90 -^ 7.50 = 12, number tons. 



2000 X 12 
50 



= 480, number bales. 



36 sq. 



4. 8 yds. long, 18 in. wide 
ft. 

20 X 16 = 320 sq. ft., ceiling. 

16 X 10 X 2 = 320 sq. ft, 2 ends. 
20 X 10 X 2 = 400 sq. ft., 2 sides. 

1040 sq. ft., entire 
area. 
1040 sq. ft. -=- .36 sq. ft. = 28f 

hence 29 rolls. 
1040 sq. ft. -f- 100 sq. ft. = lOf 

number of squares. 
$.85 X 29 = $24.65, cost of paper. 
10# X .371/4 =3 $3.90, cost of labor. 
$28.55, entire cost. Ans. 

5. 97i/< per cent. + $1508 = amt. 
invested in flour + com. 
97^ per cent. $1508 = 104 per 
cent., amt. invested in flour. 



.25, broker- Qiy^ per ct. + $1508 

( ) 

income. 104 



) X 100 — 93% 

per ct. + $1450 

= 100 per ct. 

amt. in flour. 



165 



5 — Continued. 

90 per ct. of (93% per ct. + $1450) 
= 84% + $1305, realized from 
sale of flour. 
jfoOf 90 per cent. = .027 per ct., com, 
for selling. 

.90 — .027 = 873 per ct., pro- 
ceeds of sale. 

100 per ct. of amt. in flour — .873 
per ct. = .127 = 677.90, loss. 

100 per ct. = 5337.80, invested in 
flour. 

93% per ct. + $1450 = $5337.80. 

93% per ct. = $3887.80. 

100 per ct. = $4146.99, cotton sold. 

97^^ per ct. = $4043.31, invested in 
cotton. 

40O X .05 = $20, value of eacli bale. 

404.. 31 -f- 20 = 202.165+. Ans. 

6. 100 per ct. = what horse cost 

Jones. 

233^ per ct. — 100 per ct. = 133^ 
per ct. = $600, Jones' gain. 

$600 -f- 1331^ per ct. = $450, what 

horse cost Jones, (a) 
$450 + $600 = $1050, what horse 

cost Brown. 
$1050 X 33^ per ct. = $350. 
$1050 — $350 = $700, price paid to 

Brown (b). 

7. DeFuniak Springs, Fla., 

Sept. 10, 1895. 
:$250. 

Ninety days after date, I promise 
to pay C, or order. Two Hundred 
Fifty Dollars, with interest at 8 per 
cent, from date, for value received. 

B. 

Discounted Oct. 17, at 10 per ct. 

Note falls due Dec. 12. 

Int. on $250 at 8 per ct. for 93 da. 
is $5.16| 

Amt. $255.16| " ~~^T^ 

Int. on $255.16 1 at 10 per cent, 
for 56 days is $3.97, bank discount. 

(c) From Oct. 17 to Dec. 12 = 56 
days, time note has to run. 

(d) $255.16| — $3.97 = $251.20, 
proceeds. 

8. See 8, Nov. 1901, 1st Grade. 



(345)== + (345)2 = 238,050 sq. ni. 



V 238050 + 119025 = 597.557+ in., 
diam. circ. sphere. 

597.557 in. -^ 2 = 298.7785 in., ra- 
dius circ. sphere. 
10 5 -f- 2 = 2i^, radius of base. 

(21^)^ X 3.1416 X 10 -= 196.35, cu. 
ft., vol. of cylinder. 

(2%) 2 X 3.1416 X 3| =65.45 cu. 
ft., vol. of cone. 

196.35 cu. ft. — 65.45 cu. ft. = 
130.9 cu. ft. 

Hence 130.9 cu. ft. was cut away. 

130.9 2 

= — , part cut away. 

196.35 3 



June '96. 

1. 12| X 2r^ = 32. 
32 — 20% = 11%, Ans. (a) 
314 cords = $11,371/2. 



1 cord 



11.37^ 



20ys cords = 



31/2 

11.371^ X 20% 



3^ 



= $65.40%. Ans. (b) 

2. 25 ft. X 25 ft. = 625 square ft. 
2(121^ ft. X 121/^ ft.) = 3121^ sq. ft. 
625 sq. ft. — 312^ sq. ft. = 312i^ 

sq. ft. Ans. 

3. 124°— 96' = 28°, dif. in longitude. 

15)28° 

1 hr. 52 min. . :. 1:52 P. M. 
Ans. 

4. 10 acres = 1600 sq rd. 



9. V41063625 = 345 in., edge of cube 
= diam. inscribed sphere. 
345 -4- 2 = 172% inches, radius of 
inscribed sphere. 



V1600 = 40 rd., ide of square. 

40 rd. X 4 = 160 rd. = 2640 ft, pe. 

rimeter of field. 
4 in. + 10 in. + (3x6 in.) = 32 in. 

= 2f ft., sum of widths. 
2640 ft. X 2| ft. = 7040 sq. ft., 

lumber required. 
$12 50 X 7.040 == $88. Ans. 

5. See 6, Sept. '94, Ist grade. 

6. Int. on $1, at 6 per ct. for 9 mo. 

15 da. is .0475. 
$6285 -f- 1.0475 == $6000, pres. 
worth. 



166 



6 — Continued 

$6285 — $6000 = $285, true dis- 
count. 
Int. on $0285, at 6 per ct. for 9 mo. 
18 da. is $301.68, hank dis- 
count. 
$301.68 — $285 = $16.68. Ans. 
7. 6 22.5 — 45 

3 : 17.8 :: 12 : 34.6 
10.25 10.25 8.2 12.3 

= Sm Ans. 

8 (a) V 16499844 = 4062 



194. 

: 245| sq. ft.. 



318 14 sq. ft, 



(b) V 7301384 
9 . 16% X 14| = 
ceiling. 
2(16% X 91/2) 
side walls. 
2(14f X H) = 278f sq. ft. 
end walls. 

= 842| sq.ft., 
total area. 
3(6x 2%) = 491/^ sq. ft., windows. 
2(7 x 3) =42 sq. ft., doors. 
842j-V sq. ft. — (4914 sq. ft. +42 
sq. ft.) = 751^2 sq. ft., to be 
plastered surface. 
751t1j sq. ft. = 83iV8 sq. yds. 
SS/o'V x .25 = $20.86x. Ans. 

10. (11/2)' x 3.1416 x 4 = 28.2744 cu. 

ft. = 48858.1632 cu. in., volume. 

48858.1632 cu. in. -^ 231 cu. in. = 

211.5072+, cap'y in gals. 
211.5072 X $.193 == $40.82+, cost. 

Ans. 



Sept. 96. 

1. , Let f = amt. each girl receives, 
f X 3, or 3 = amt. 3 girls receive. 
% = amt. each boy receives. 

5 X % or 3% = amt. 5 boys, receive. 
3 + 3%, or 6% = 7%. 

1 $31 

If — : vTo's"- 

f = $l/y, amt. each girl receives. 
|l/y X 3 = |3|, amt. girls get. 
f = $fi' ^T^t. each boy receives. 
$M X 5 = $4^1, amt. boys get. 

2. 2 3 

— of time past noon = — of time 
3 4 

till midnight. 



1 3 

— of time past noon = — of time 
3 8 

till midnight. 
3 9 

— of time past noon = — of time 
3 8 

till midnight. 
8 
Let — = time till midnight. 
8 

8 9 17 

— + — = — = 12 hrs. 
8 8 8 

1 12 

— = — ■ hrs. 
8 17 

Time past noon, 
9 108 

— = hrs. or 6 hrs. 21 min. 

8 17 10 if sec*i. 

Hence ,time is 21 min. lOif sec. past 
6 P. M. Ans. 

. See 3, Nov. 1901, 1st grade. 

. See 7, Sept. '95. 

. N. W. corner of Sec. 6, Township 
2N of R.3W is 2 X 6 or 12 miles 
N. of the base line, and 3x6 
or 18 miles W. of principal 
meridian. S. E. corner of Sec. 
35, Township 3 S. R. 3B. is 3 
X 6 or 18 miles E. of the prin- 
cipal meridian. Hence, line 
joining these points is the hy- 
potenuse of a rt. triangle whose 
legs are 12 + 18 == 30 miles and 
18 + 17 = 35 miles respective- 
ly. 



V(35)^ + (30)^ = 46.097+ miles. 

Ans, 

6. 82^ per ct. + % per ct. = 82% 
per ct. 

82% per ct. of $100 =z $82.75, cost 
of 1 share. 

$82.75 X 35 = $2896.25, the entire 
cost 

10914 per ct of $100 = 109.25, sell- 
ing price of 1 share. 
' $109.25 X 35 = $3823.75, entire 
selling price. 

% per ct. of $3823 75 = $14.34, 
com. on sale. 

.$3823.75 — $14.34 = $3809.41, sell- 
ing price, less com. 

$3809.41 — $2896.25 = .$913.16, net 
gain. Ans. 



167 



Due 


Amt. 


Days 1 


Product 


Paid 


Amt. 1 Days 


Product 


April 10 
April 30 
May 16 


$ 150 
400 
100 
500 


75 

55 

39 




11250 

22000 

3900 


April 12 
May 1 
June 7 


$ 250 73 
200 54 
400 17 


18250 

10800 

6800 


June 24 


850 

H 

— 5 days = 

note should h 

for 2 mo. 19 

is $305.27, su 


35850 




1150 
850 


37150 
35850 






1300 -^ 300 = 
June 24, '96 
'96, date 
given. 
Amt. of $300 
per cent, 
due. 


June 19, 
ave been 

da. at 8 
m now 




300 


1300 


. . 



8. 1 gal. = 231 cu. in. 
1000 gal. = 231,000 cu. in. 
133.6805 cu. ft. 



9 



V 133.6805 = 5.11+ ft., edge of cube 
5.11 X 5.11 = 26.1121 sq. ft , area 

of each surface. 
26.1121 sq. ft. X 5 = 130.5605 sq. 
ft. Ans. 
(12)' -H (3)5 = 64, no. balls if 
same material. 
64 X y". = 40^1 lead balls. 
10. 25.1328 in. ~- 3.1416 = 8 in.; 
diameter of cylinder, if solid. 
8 in. — 2 in. = 6 in., diam. of 
smaller cyl. (hollow), 
(i) ? ft. X 3.1416 X 12 = 4.1888 cu. 

ft, vol. of large cyl. 
(%)= ft. X 3.1416 X 12 = 2.3562 cu. 

ft., ol. of smaller cyl. 
4.1888 cu. ft. — 2.3562 cu. ft. = 

1.8326 cu. ft vol of col. 
021^ lbs. X 1.8326 x 7 = 801.7625 
lbs. wt. of col. 



3. G. C. D. of 201| rds. and 4.1^ 
rods = If rods, side of re- 
quired square. 

2 55 

201 ; = 44, lots facing longer 

3 12 side. 

1 55 

41 ^- — = 9 lots facing shorter 

4 12 side. 

44 X 9 = 396 lots. Ans. 



June '97. 

j-g= part A and B can do in 1 day. 

yij = part A and C can do in 1 day. 

9 = part B and C can do in 1 day. 

T8+T2+i=T = twice-' what all to- 
gether can do in 1 day. 

Ys =^ part all together can do in 1 
day. 

Hence. ^ or entire piece of work 
will require 8 days. Ans. 
2. 1 1 3 





2 


5 


2 








3 


17 


109 








— + 


— = 


— 


2 


18 




2 


25 


50 






2 


18 -f- 


.0005 


= 4360. 







4. 100 per ct. — 3 per ct. = 97 per 

ct., proceeds from sale of cot- 
ton. 

.97 X .02 =a .0194, com. on 2d trans- 
action. 

.97 _ .0194 = .9506, invested in 
city lots. 

.03 X .0194 = .0494, entire commis- 
sion. 

$265 -^ .0494 = $5364.37. 

100 per ct. ^ $5364.37. 

.9506 =: $5099.37 +, price of city 
lots. 

5. See 8. Sept. '98, 2d or 3d grade, 

as 8 example. 

6. $1000 -=- $6 50 = 15311 shares. 
153t3 X $100 = $15384t\ inv at 

par value. 
$15384 X 1.05 = $16153.85 inv. 
at 5 per ct. premium. 



36 in. X 16 in. x 3 in. 
bic inches. 



1728 cu- 



12 inches. Ans. 



V1728 

8. 35000 bu. at .32 per bu. = $11200. 
$11200 X .02 = $224, commission for 

selling. 
$11200 — $224 = $10976, proceeds. 



8 — Continued. 

$10976 + $4000 = $14976. 
$14976 -T- 1.02 = $14682.35, invest- 
ed in prints. 
$14682.35 -^ .055 = 266.95+ yds. 
Ans. 

9. (22 ft.) 2 X 3.1416 X 6i^ ft. = 

145.21171 cu. ft. 
145.211711 cu. ft. X .2385 = 
$34.6329984. 

10. 2 ft. = 24 in. 

24 X 24 X 3.1416 = 1809.5616 sq. In. 
1809.5616 sq. in. x .0965 = $174.62. 

Ans. 



168 
4. 



Sept. '! 


57. 








1. 1 




2 


13 




— 


+ 


— = 


= — 




4 




5 


20 




20 




13 


7 




— 




— 


= — 


left. 


20 




20 


20 ' 




3 




7 


3 




— 


of 


— 


= — , 


to D. 


7 




20 


20 




7 




3 


1 


left 


20 




20 


= 5' 




3 




1 


3 




— 


of 


— 


or — 


= 48, left. 


16 




5 


80 




1 










— 


= 


16 






80 










80 










— 


= 


1280 head 


. Ans. 


80 











Let — = B's; then — = A's. 
8 8 

8 32 

— for 4 mos.= — for 1. mo. 

8 8 



— for 8 mos. = — for 1. mo. 
3 3 

5 20 

— for 4 mos.= — for 1. mo. 

8 8 

15 120 

— for 8 mos. = — for 1. mo. 
32 32 

20 
B's cap = — for 1. mo. 
3 

120 
A's cap = — for 1. mo. 
4 

20 25 or 155 

— + — or = $400. 

3 4 12 



Whence, 
20 14 
— = $206 — B. 
3 31 



25 17 

— = $193— A. 
4 31 



2. See 2d ex., 1st grade, Nov. 26, 

1901. 

3. 115^ ft. + 1281 ft. + 1343/4 ft. = 

3785?2 ft. 
G. C. D.^ of 115^ ft, 128^ ft., 134% 

ft. = 6tV ft, length of each 

board. 
3783V ft. -^ 6j\ ft. = 59, boards. 
59 X 5 = 295 boards. 
10 in. + 2(6in.) +2(4 in.) = 2i^ ft. 
378xV ft. X 2^ ft. = 9461^^ sq. ft. 
946H X $71^ = $7.10. Ans. 



5. See ex. 8, 1st grade, Sept. 1896. 

6. 1231/^ per ct. + % per ct. = 123% 

per ct. 

$123%, one share. 

One share yields 5%. 

5% -- $123% = 4|f per ct., in- 
come on inveSstment. 

4% per ct. = $4% per share. Hence 
$4y8 net. 

$4i-H4f|=$J^8r^, per share. 

|100-$88ii=$lltV. 

Hence 11 \ per ct. below par. 

7. Difference in time 5 hr. 12 min. 
hr. min. 

5 12 
15 



78°, difference in longtude. 

77° + 78° = 155°, West. 
;. 21/2 X 160 = 400 sq. rd., area lot 
and walk. 



169 



8— Continued. $600 x 15 =: $9000, cost of land. 

6. 640 polls at $1.50 each = $960. 

,.-— ; ^ ^ .^ „ $10400 — $960 ^ $9440. 

Yfi^ T^ ^.l^-' -.of^ f square. $9440 _^ $2360000 = .004. Ans. 

(20 + 20 + 18 + 18) X 5/, X 1 = 418 ^^ $5^^ ^ '^-^505 = $84.28 bank dis- 

sq. yds., area walk. count 

418 X .25 = $104.50. Ans. $5^0 _ $§4.28 = $475.72, proceeds. 

:9. 2ft. 1 in. : X :: V^ : V^^^ ^'"'wartf''' ^ *^'''-''' ''''''"' 
10. (4); X 3.1416 X 1| = 67.0208 cu. ^486.96 _" $475.72 = $11.24. Ans. 

8. See ex. 10, 2d or 3d grade, May, 



ft. 
67 . 0208 



1^ z= 53.61664 bu. Ans. 



1895. 



June '98. 

lb. 
1. 

27 - 



lb. lb. 

1 2 

4— = 22— 

3 3 



9 1 : X :== V120 : V6400 
1 : X = 4.93+ : 18.55+ 
X = 3.76 in. 
10. See ex. 8, First Grade, Sept. 4, 
1900. 





8 1 
29 — 4— = 24— 


Sept. '98. 

3 11 




9 9 


1 . 2— + 2— = 5— 
4 2 4 




1 3 






40 — 7— = 32— 


5 8 




4 4 


7^ 2— = -- 




lb. lb. lb. lb. 


8 3 




2 1 3 19 


1 8 




22— + 24— + 32— = 79— 


5 — X — = 14 




3 9 4 36 


4 3 




19 


2 12 




'79— lb. cost $28. 






36 


3 2 3 




144 


2 1 




1 lb. cost 


14 = 13— 




409 


3 3 


■2. 


, See ex. 3, 1st grade, June, 1902. 


2^ 10 


3. 


35£ + 13i^£ + 65s + IO21/2 s + 21s 




+ Is = 57.975£. 


3^ 13 




57.975 X $4.8665 = $282,135. Ans. 




4, 


pt. bu. 


10 8 




1 


; =5 




1 = — bu. 


13 52 




64 


1 8 2 




1 1 


13 ^- 5 = — or 2— . 




= 


3 3 3 




100 6400 






65 65 


4 



Ans. 



100 



= =z .01015625 bu. 

6400 



— of 8 acres costs $53 — 
5 3 



5. $150 X 12 = $1800, increase. 
$1800 -^ 3 = $600, original invest- 
ment of each. 



1 5 

— of 1 acre costs $ — 
5 3 



170 



1 acre == — 
3 



.01 acre 



1 

12 

.12 acre. =: $1.00. Ans. 
3. 1240 + .001 + .01 1240.011 



1963.5 sq. ft. x 4^ = 8181.25 cu. ft, 
contents. 
13 251 1745 

81— X $3 = $250 

16 8927 2618 

1 1745 7853 

$249— + 250 = $499 . 

3 2618 7854 
Ans. 



1240.6985 



.6875 



= 1 June '99. 

1240.011 1. longer, shorter. 



Ans. 



4. (a) 100 per ct. — 34 per ct. = 66 

per ct. 
66 cts. -^- 60 per ct. = $1.00, cost of 
hat. 
(b) $12480 at 1 per ct. for 3 yrs. 1 
mo. = $384.80. 
$384.80 -^ $384.80 = 1. Hence rate 
1 per ct. Ans. 

5. 3% : X :: V5145 : V120 

6. 24^f francs --- 5.20 = $4.7619+. 
5 per ct. of -4.7619 = .238095. 

$4.7619+ .238095 = $5.00. 

7. $750 ^ 4 = $187.50, cost of i^ 

of cloth. 

$187.50 — $100 = $87.50, rec'd for 
l^ of cloth. 

$87.50 -r- $1.25 = 70 yds. 

:^ = 70 yds., . •. I = 280 yds. 

280 yd. — 70 yd. = 210 yds., re- 
mainder. 

$750 X 151f per ct. = $113^7.50, to- 
tal selling price to gain 51| 
per ct. 



3 

4 

3 1 
— or — 
12 4 



5 9 

1 + — = — 
4 4 

9 
. • . — == 63 
4 

1 

4 

4 



$5.00. 



Ans. 



71/ 



Ans. 



$1137.50 — 87 50 
210 

8. 82i^ : 110 
10 : 5 

110 X 71/2 X 5 
82i^ X 10 

9. l—ii X 0) 1 

■ =: — =5. Ans. 

1 — f i 

10. (25)^ ft. X 3.1416 = 1963.5 sq. ft. 

= 218^ sq. yds. 
218i sq. yds. at $1} a sq. yd. = 
$2494 . 



2. 
3! 



= 28 ft., shorter piece. 



63 — 28 = 35 ft., longer piece. . 
See 4, Nov. 1901, 1st grade. 

1 
18° = — of 360° 

20 
1 

— = 21 in. 
20 



20 

20 



= 420 in. or 35 ft. circ. 



35 -^ 3.1416 = 11.1408+ ft. diam. 
4. $360 X .12^ = $45. 
$360 — $45 = $315. 
$315 X .08 = $25.20. 
$315 — $25.20 = 289.80. 
$360 — $289.80 = $70.20. 
$70.20 -^ $360 = $191/2 per ct. Ans. 



171 



5. Proceeds of $1 at 5 per ct. for 1 

mo. 18 da. = .9929i 
$1869.35 -i- .9929 J = $1882.G8. 

Ans. 
G. 100 per ct. + li/i per ct. = 101% 
per ct. 
$1.0125 — .0105 = $1,002. 
$650 H- $1,002 = $648.70. Ans. 



7. 5 : 10 :: V100.44 : Vx 
X = 803.52 bu. Ans. 

8. 125 rods = radius of park. 
(125)' X 3.1416 = 49087.5 sq. rds., 

area of park 

125 -^ 3.1416 = 39.7886+ rds., di- 
ameter of lake. 

39.7886 H- 4 = 9.947, ^^ radius of 
lake. 

9.947 X 125 = 1232.375+ sq. rd., 
area of lake. 

49087.5 sq. rds. — 1232.375+ sq. rd. 
= 47855.125. 

47855.125 sq. rds. -^ 160 = 299.025 
acres. Ans. 

9. 3 3 

— of gain. = — of selling price. 
4 16 

1 3 

— of gain. = — of selling price. 
4 48 

4 12 1 

— of gain. = — or — of selling 
4 48 4 price. 

$5 ^ .75 = 6.66| , selling price per 

yd. 

$6.66|x:-^i = $22.22f . Ans. 

10. (li^)= X 3.1416 = 7.0686 sq. ft., 

area of butt. 
(y2)^ X 3.1416 = .7854 sq. ft., area 

upper extremity. 
7.0686 + .7854 = 7.854 sq. ft., sum 

of areas. 
7.0686 X .7854 = 5.55167844, prod. 

areas. 



V 5.55167844 = 2.3562, sq. root of 

product. 
7.854 + 2.3562 = 10.2102 
1. of 40 = 13^, one third of alti- 

titude. 
10.2102 X 13 1 = 136.136+ cu. ft, 
Ans. 



Sept. '99. 

1. 1 acre = 160 sq. rd. 

160 sq. rds. -4- 12 rds. = 13i rods. 

2. 18.36 ch. X 10.54 ch. = 193.5144 

sq. ch. 



19.35144 -- 2 = 9.67572 acres. 
9.67572 X $70 = $677.30+. Ans. 

3. 186 -4- 15 = $12.40, selling price 

muslin. 
$12.40 H- 24 = 51f pounds. 

4. In 1 da. C can dig 2^^, of well. 
In 1 da. C and D can dig j\- of 

well. 
^— 2\=f3, part D can dig in a 

day. 
I — J^l, what remains. 
|-H^?5=.2 2 5 — 28y8 days. Ans. 

5. 1 represents what F earns. 
3 represents what B earns. 

12 represents what D earns. 

16 = $3936. 

1 = $246 F. 
3 = $738 E. 
12 = $2952 D. 

6. 18 X 60 = 1080 yds. 

1080 yds. at .45 per yd. = $486. 
$486 X .35 = $170.10, ad valorem. 

duty. 
1080 X .38 = $410.40, specific. 
170.10 + 410.40 = $580.50. Ans. 

7. $10 -f- .07 = $142 f 

$142i = 142f per ct. of par value. Ans. 

8. 20 + 12 

= 16 in. or li ft, av. 

2 width. 

18 X 1^ = 24 ft. Ans. 

9. Let i| = number of minute 

spaces traversed by min. hand. 
Then ^^ = number of minute spaces 

traversed by hour hand, 
and 50 =: number of minute spaces 

to X on dial. 
(Min. hand to be opposite hour 
hand, between 4 and 5 o'clock 
must obviously be between X 
and XI.) 
12 

— , or spaces traversed by min. hand 
12 

1 
= 50 + — , spaces traversed. 
12 
11 

— = 50 
12 



1 
12 



50 
11 



172 



12 6 

— = 54— 
12 11 



6 



$3468 X 2 per ct. = $69.36. 

$3468 — $69.36 = $3398.64, net cost 

for cash. 
$3398.64 — 3388.922 = $9,718. Ans. 
5. $840 -4- $7 = 120 shares. 
Hence 54— mins. past 4 o'clock. 120 shares = $12,180. 

11 Vs per ct. X 120 = $15, commission. 

10. (18)» X .5236 = 3053.6252 cu. in., $12180 + $15 = $12195, cost of 
or 1.76715 cu. ft., vol of ball. stock. Ans. 

1.76715 X 450 = 795.2175 lbs. Ans. 6. 100 per ct. — 40 per ct. = 60 per 

cent. 

$4.50 -I- .60 = $7.50. 

100 per ct . — 10 per ct. = 90 per ct. 
$7.50 H- .90 = $8.33^ 

7. $1 00 + .0125 =: $1.0125. Int. 2 
mo. 3 da = .0105. 

1.0125 — .0105 = 1.002. 
$1260 ^ $1,002 = $1257.4854-. 

8. 1 =: wt. of cover. 
16 oz. + 1 = 1st wt. with cover. 
(4 X 16 oz.) — 1 = wt. of second 

cup. 
16 oz. + 1 = 3(4 X 16 oz.) — 1 = 

192 oz. — 3. 
4 = 176 oz. 
1 = 44 oz. wt. of cover. 
(4 X 16 oz.) — 44 oz. = 20 oz., wt. 
of second cup. 

9. (18)^ + (16)- = 549. 
(9)2 =- 81. 
549 + 81 = 630. 



June 1900. 

1. $125 = cost of horse. 
f of $125 = $100. 

$100 = 4 times cost of harness. 
$25 = cost of harness. 

2. 3 

— = A's part of work. 
7 



= B's part of work. 



— = 12 da. 

7 



4 da. 



— = 28 da. A. 

7 



= 12 da. 



10 



1 
— 3 da. 

7 



— = 21 da. B. 
7 
B. 7000 gr. = 1 pound Avoirdupois. 
14000 gr. = 2 pounds. 
480 gr. = 1 oz. Troy. 
14O00 H- 480 = 29,1 ounces. 
291 X $16 = $466,661, selling price. 

$220 X 2 = $440, cost. 
$466.66f — $440 = $26.66|, gained. 
4. Amt. of $1 for 3 mo. at 7 per ct. 
= $1,021 



/630 = 


= 


25.09. Ans. 


Let 


3 
3 


- = son's share. 


then 


1 
3 


= wife's share. 


and 


1 
9 


= daughter's share. 


3 


1 


19 3 1 


— + 
3 


3 


9 9 9 9 


13 

— of 
9 


: sons share = entire estate. 


13 
— of 


son's share = $6591. 



$3468 -V $1.02| = $3388.922 
ent worth. 



pres- 



— of son's share = $507, daugh- 
9 ter's share. 



173 ' 



10 — Continued. 
1 3 

— or — of son's share = $1521, 
3 9 wife's share. 

3 9 

— or — of son's share = $4563, 
3 9 son's share. 



Sept. 1900. 
1. 4 3 



$41.25. 



— = $165.00. 
4 

2. 16f per ct. = $300, gain. 
100 per ct. = $1800, cost. Ans. 

3. $1 + .00125 = $1.00125. 

Int. on $1 at 6 per ct. for 2 mo. 3 

da. = .0105. 
$1.00125 — .0105 = .99075. 
$450 -^ .99075 = $454.20. Ans. 

4. Int. on $1000 for 3 yrs. 4 mo. 15 

da. at 1 per ct. = $33.75. 
168.75 -f- 33.75 = 5. 
Hence rate is 5 per ct. 

5. (5)^ X 3.1416 = 78.54 sq. ft, 

area of circ. plot.- 
16 X 78.54 = 1256.64 sq. ft., area 

of similar circ. plot. 
1256.64 -^ 3.1416 = 400, square of 

radius. 

ViOO' = 20 ft. radius. 

2 X 20 =^ 40 ft. diameter. Ans. 

6. 100 per ct. = C's. 
110 per ct. = A's. 
132 per ct. = B's. 

132 per ct. = 100 per ct. + $128. 
32 per ct. = $128. 
100 per ct. = $400 = C's. 
110 per ct. = $440 = A's. 
132 per ct. = $528 = B's. 
7 jj X side of square, in feet = no. 

boards required for one side. 
4 X ^ X side of sq., in feet = no. 

boards required to enclose 

square. 

area i3 x side of square 



43560 



Area = (31680)= = 1,003,622,400 
sq. ft. = 23,040 A. Ans. 

8. Ratio is 2. 
2'^ = 2097152. 

2097152 X .01 = $20971.52. 
20971.52— .01 = $20971.51. 
Ratio 2 less 1 = 1. 
20971.51 -^ 1 = $20971.51 

9. 150 is first term. 

3.207136 X 150 = 481.0704, last 

term. 
1.06 is ratio. 



481.0704 X 1 


.06 — 150 


1.06 — 

LO. 2045 = . 
2025 
9900 


■-" »pt>t7t70.yJLU'i, 

1 sum of series. 
Ans. 

45 20 45 
20— -= + 

99 100 9900 

9 

— Ans. 
44 


L. 8 

— of A's : 
19 


4 
= — of B's. 
9 


1 

— of A's -- 
19 


1 
= — of B's. 
18 


19 
= — of B's. -- 
19 


19 

= — of B's. 

18 


19 

— = A's 
18 


18 

— = B's. 

18 


37 

— = 2553 

18 


1 

— = 69. 
18 


19 

— = $1311 

18 


., A's. 


19 

— = $1242, B's. 



For one acre contains 43,560 sq. ft. 
. •. side of square = 31,680 ft. 



18 



2 — yds. 1 yd. wide = 6 — oz. 
4 2 



26 
1 yard 1 yard wide = — oz. 

9 



174 



2 — Continued. 




3 


83 26 


20 — yds. 1 yd. wide = 


= — X — oz. 


4 


4 9 



3 2 

20 — yds. 1 — yd. wide 

4 3 

83 26 5 49 

= — X — X — = 99 — ounces. 
4 9 3 54 

3. $49.56 — $2850 = $2106, cost of 

thirteen at $12 more eacli. 

$12 X 13 = $156. 

$2106 — $156 = $1950, cost of thir- 
teen, at price of ones bought. 

$1950 H- 13 = $150, cost of one at 
price ones bought. 

$2850 H- 150 = 19 horses. Ans. 

4. Cube root of 15625 = 25. 

Bach edge of equiv. cube is 25 ft. 
Each surface is 625 sq. ft. 
Cube has 6 faces. 
6 X 625 = 37.50 sq. ft. Ans. 

5. 120 per ct. ^ $480, selling price 

of first. 
100 per ct. = $400, cost of first. 
80 per ct. = $480, selling price of 

second, 
100 per ct. = $600, cost of second. 
$400 + $600 ^ $1000, cost of both. 
$480 + $480 = $960, selling price of 

both. 
$1000 — 960 = $40 = loss. 
$40 -^ $1000 = 4 per ct. = loss. 

6. 5 per ct. — 2 per ct. = 3 per ct. 

= $315. 
100 per ct. = $10,500. 
5 per ct. of $10,500 = $525. 
$10500 — $525 = $9975. Ans. 

7. One pound of gold = 5760 grains 

(Troy). 
One pound of lead = 7000 grains 

(Av.) 
One ounce of gold = 5760 -^ 12 = 

480 grains. 
One ounce of lead = 7000 -f- 16 = 

437^ grains. 
480 gr. — 4371/2 gr. = 42i^ grains. 
Grold 42^ grains. Ans. 

8. Int. for 78 da. on sum unpaid = 

Int. 15 da. sum paid. 
(Int. on $1 for one da. at 5 per ct.= 
•GO^L) 



78 



15 



26 5 

— X sum unpaid = — x sum paid. 
24 72 

1 5 

— X sum unpaid = — x sum paid. 
24 024 

24 5 

— X sum unpaid = — x sum paid. 
24 26 

26 
Let — = sum unpaid + sum paid=$100 
26 



— = $19.23, paid Nov. 7. 
26 

21 

— = $80.77, paid Aug. 20. Ans. 
26 

9. 20in^ X 5236 = 4188.8 cu. in., 

contents of solid sphere 20 in. 
in diameter. 

4188.8 -H 10 = 418.88 cu. in., con- 
tents of given hollow sphere. 

4188.8 cu. in. — 418.88 cu. in. = 
3769.92 cu. in., contents of a 
solid sphere that hollow will 
contain. 

3769.92 cu. in. -~ .5236 = 7200, 
cube of diameter. 

V7200 = 19.309+ in. diameter. 
20 in. — 19..309 in. == .691 in., 
thicliness of shell. 

10. 15= in. X 3.1416 = 706.86 sq. in. 

area of grindstone. 
706.86 sq. in. -^ 3 == 235.62 sq. in., 
area each must grind off. 



1235.62 
Y3.I4I6 



8.659-1- in. radius 
central area. 



of 



8.659 X 2 = 17.32-f in. diameter of 
central area, and share of 3d 
man. 



V 



1235.62 X 2 



sum unpaid = — x sum paid 



72 



= 12.247+ in. radius 

3.1416 of central and 

middle areas. 
12.247+ X 2 = 24.494+ 
24.494+ in. diameter of central and 

middle areas. 
24.494 — 17.32 = 7 174 in. share 

of 2nd man. 



i 175 

10 — Continued. 5. (a) West. 

(b) 4 hrs. 30 min. dif. in time. 
30 — 24.494+ = 5.506 in. share of 15 • 

1st man. 

07° 30', or 07i/^°, dif. in longitude. 

Nov 1901 ^^ miles x 67% = 3875 mi. Ans. 

1. See 1, Sept. 1901, 1st grade. ^ g . j ^g„Q . 

2. The seventh man gains on the ^ ^ff ^ Vt f W -. + ^ 

first 01/4 miles per hr.; on the A' ?f ^ J'/^P*" ^^%^'^ f/^,'^^'. 

'* i:' . g_ Depends upon rate. Not given. 

second 5 miles; the third 3ii por method, see 9 Sept. 1.5900, 2d 

the fourth 3; the fifth, 1%; the q^ 3(J grade. 

sixth, 1. " . 

120 9. 1 : X :: V120 : V6400. 

= no. hrs. required to pass 1st x = 3.76 in. Ans. 

6% man once. 10 See" 10, Sept. '99, 1st grade. 

120 

=: no. hrs. required to pass 2nd 

5 man once. 

1. 108 bu. at .65 a bu. = .$70.20. 
120 -55 + .75 = $1.30. 
= no. hrs. required to pass 3rd $70.20 h- $1.30 = 54 bushels. 

SU man once. 2- ^^ ^^ ^i'f: ^^^P- P^P^ ^^ts into cis- 

^2 tern 240 gals. 

19Q In 1 hr. sup. pipe lets into cistern 

=^ no. hrs. required to pass 4th , ""f ga s. ^ , , . ^ 

3 man once ^^P* P^P^ ^^^^ ^^*° cistern 

■ : I ^ 144 gals. 

In 1 lir. dis. pipe lets out of cistern 



120 



no. hrs. required to pass 5th gals. 



1% man once. 

120 



144 

= 9, no. hrs required. 



40 — 24 Ans. 



:= no. hrs. required to pass 6th 

1 man once. o / .->o/ o ^ o 

120 ' '^ ' ^ 

L. C. M. of above intervals = [ ~ "^ ^7^, ^ T "^ '^'^' 

j_ ( 4| 414 ) 9 

13 

= 1440 hrs. Hence 120 da. = .677857+. Ans. 

■3. 1 bu. == 21.50.4 cu. In. 4. 80 x 3.1416 = 251.328 rd, length 

5 bu. = 5 X 2150.4 = 10752 cu. in. of wire fence. 

1 qt_. liquid measure = 57.75 cu. 2.51..328 -^ 4 = 62.832 rd., length of 

in. one side of square field. 

10752 ^ 57.75 - 186 ^^ quarts (li- (62.832)^ = 3947.860224, area in 

quid measure). sq. rds. 

186;v X .10 = $18. 61^^^, selling 3947.860224 ^ 160 = 24.67412.51+A. 

price Ans. 

5 bu. at $3 per b_u. = $1.5, cost. ^ |r/o0%'= ?00%' ^'''" 

$18.61,\- — $15 — $3.61 1'i-, gain. i^^_ ^^ ^ ^,,. ^ p^^, ^^_ ^^^ 33 ^^^^ ^^ 

$3.61 i^j. -f- $15 = 243^ per ct. Ans. ()Q32 

^•5 X '370 'oz '''■ 16S60 ^ ''''• ''• *1 00t-.003t = $1.00259. 

L'of -T5.T5'ori'^25 or %. . $550 x ^l.Ooko = $551.42. Ans. 

16860 oz. X Vi = 4215 oz. < . S^ o, June 1900, 1st grade. 

4215 oz. ^ 16 oz. = 263tV lb. 8. V5 : V20 : : 100.44 : x 

263j-V lb. at 5 cts. per lb. = $13.17 t\" 9 252.96 gr. x 7.21 = 1823.8416 gr., 

Ans. wt of cu. in. of iron. 



6' X .5236 = 113.0976 cu. in., vol. 

of ball. 
1823.8416 gr. x 113.0976 = 206272- 

.10774016 gr., wt. of ball. 
7000 gr. = 1 lb. 

.\ 206272.10774016 gr. -^ 7000 gr. 
= 29.4674+ lbs. Ans. 

10. 115^, 128 , 134% 
231 385 539 



231 385 539 

G. C. D. of ft., ft., ft, 

2 3 4 



77 

= — ft. 

12 



5 

6— ft. 
12 



170 

Amt. of $.360 for 3 mo. 3 da. at S 
per cent. = $365.58. 

From July 15, 1902 to Sept. 27, 1902 
= 74 da. 

Int. on $365.58 for 74 da. at 6 per 
cent. = $4.51. 

$365.58 — $4.51 = $361.07, pro- 
ceeds. Ans. 
4. Dec. 15, 1891 due $300. 

Jan. 1, 1892 due $750. 

Apr. 15, 1892, due $400. 

Jan. 10, 1892, due $300. 

$300 
750 X 17 = 12750 
400 X 121 = 48400 
300 X 26 == 7800 



115y2 ft. + 1281 ft. + 134% ft. = 
378j?3 ft. Perimeter. 

378xV ft. -4- 6r\ ft. = 59, no. of rails 
each strand. 

59 rails x 7 = 413 rails. Ans. 

Explanatory: In order to lap six 
inches at each end, length of 
each rail = Qj\ ft. + 1 ft. = 
7 ft. 5 in. However, each rail 
•covers only 63^ ft- of perime- 
ter. Therefore, perimeter di- 
vided by 6yV and not 1{\, gives 
number of rails required fov 
fence to be one rail high. 



Sept. 1902. 

1. Amt. of $1 for 2 yr. 6 mo. at 6 

per ct. = $1.15. 
$560 -4- $1.15 = $486.96, present 

worth. 
Int. on $560 at 6 per cent, for 2 

yr. 6 mo. = $84. 
$560 — $84 = $476 = proceeds. 
$486.96 — $476- = $10.96. Ans. 

2. 400 -^ 125 peT ct. = $320 = cost 

of 1st lot. 
$400 H- 75 per ct. = $533.33^, cost 

of 2d lot. 
$320 + 533.331 = 853.331, cost of 

lots. 
400 + 400 = 800.00, selling price. 
$853.33^ — $800 = $53.33 1 = loss. 
$53,331 ^ $853.33-1- = 61/1 per ct. 

loss. Ans. 

3. 3 mo. 3 da. after June 24, 1902 

= Sept. 27, 1902. 



1750 



$68950 



68950 da. -f- 1750 = 39 i days. 

Dec. 15, 1891 + 40 days = Jan. 24,. 
1892, av. time. Ans. 

Last debt becomes due earlier than 
any other, hence date it be- 
becomes due is used as the^ 
standard or focal date. 
5. Int. on $100 for 21 yrs. at 6 per 
cent. = $126, last term. 

$126 + 

— X 20 = $1260, total int. or 

2 sum of terms. 

$100 X 21 = $2100, principal. 
$2100 + $1260 = $3360, amount. 

1 = 1st term. 

2 ^ ratio. 

21 = number of terms. 
2-1 = 2.097,152, ratio to power 
equal no. of terms. 



(.01 X 2097152) — .01 



Hence, 



$20,971.51, sum of terms. 

$20,971.51 — $3360 = $17611.51, 

loss. Ans. 
. 1,400.000 X .002 = $2800, annual 

12„500 X .08 = .$1000, interest. 

2800 — 1000 = 1800, annual re- 
serve fund. 

12.500 -T- 1800 = 6 yrs. (approxi- 
mately). Ans. 

Note: If the $2800 is applied to 
debt each year, time required 
is approximately 6 yrs. 



7. See 9, Sept. 1900, 1st grade. 

8. (a) 

1 1 2i 7 28 7 
3 ^ 9 ^ _ ^ 

2' 3 4 2' 3' 12 

G. C. D. of 7, 28, 7 = 7. 
L. C. M. of 2, 3, 12 = 12. 

1 1 21 7 
.:. G. C. D. of 3—, 9—, — = — . 
2 3 4 12 
6 
First clock makes 1 beat in — sees. 

5 

28 
Sec. cloclf makes 1 beat in — secss. 

25 

17 
Third clock makes 1 beat in — sees. 

15 

L. C M. of numerators, 6, 28 and 17 
= 1428. 

G. CD. of denominators 5, 25 and 
15 = 5. 



177 

9. Perimeter = 80 ft. 
Slant ht. = 100 ft. 

80 ft. X 50 = 4000 sq. ft., or 444| 
sq. yds., lateral surface of stee- 
ple. 

1 franc x 444 1 = 444 f francs, 

cost. 
1 franc = $.193. 
444| francs = $.193 x 444f = 

$85. 777 1 Ans. 

10. 3.1416 X 3 X % = 7.0686, area 

lower end. 

3.1416 X 1 X 14 = .7854 area up- 
per end. 

7.0686 XX .7854 = 55.5167844, prod. 
of areas. 



.-. L. C. M. of fractions = 



=285,^ sees. Ans. 



1428 



V 55.5167844 = 7 4509+, sq. root of 
prod. 

40 1 

— = 13 — , one third of alt. 
3 3 

Hence (7.0686 + .7854 + 7.4509) x 

1.^1 = 204.0653+ cu. ft., vol. of 

pillar. 
3' X .5236 = 14.1372 cu. ft., vol. of 

ball. 
(204.0653 + 14.1372)4501^ = 98300- 

.22625 lbs. Ans. 



Sept. '94- 

1. Algebra is that branch of mathe- 

matics which treats of the rela- 
tions of numbers as expressed 

,<b) The signs of operation, relation 
and aggregation and letters and 
figures used to represent num- 
bers are called algebraic sym- 
bols. 

{c) An equation is an expression de- 
noting the equality of two 
numbers. 

<(d> The degree of an equation depends 
on the highest exponent of the 
unknown quantity in the equa- 
tion. 

2. (a» — b«) = (a* + b*) (a^ — b*) 

= (a* + b*) (a^ + b=) (a^* — b^) 
= (a* + lb*) (a^ + b^) (a + b) 
(a — b) 

3. x^ + 3xy -h y'' — 1 -4- X + y — 1 = 

X- — xy -I- X + y- + y + 1. 
(Terms arranged acording to de- 
scending powers of x). 

4 (a). (x -I- y)m (x + y)o = 

(X + y)m-l-o =r (x + y)m 



I? [J 178 
ALGEBRA. 

G. — Continued 

x=— 2x+l|x='— 1 
X- 



-111 



(X + y)o = 



(x + y)m 

(x + y)m 
a" 



<b) But a' + a-« 
a" = 1 

. • . a^ X a-'' = 1 

(That is a'^ and a-^ are recipro- 
cals of each other.) 
1 



Hence a-" = 



a-'b-^c^mn 



bc^m-n 



a^b-^c-'m-n a^ 

Find G C. D. of two of the ex- 
pressions and then of that and 
the third expression. 
x3+7x2 — x — 7 1 x^+5x- — X — 5 



x^+Sx^- 


-X— 


-511 


2)2x^ 

X-- 

x^+5x2— 


— 2 
— 1 

-X— 
-X 


-5|x^— 1 


x^ 


|x+5 


5x^- 


-5 
-5 





— 2)— 2x-h2 



-l)x2 

x=- 



-l(x+l 



X— 1 
X— 1 



G 



C. D. of the first two expressions 
=x=— 1. 
G. C D. of the three expressions = 
X— 1. 



ox- 



14 



■1/2 (x+3) 

x-(-3 
= 14 



lOx— X— 3= 
9x — 31 
X = 3# 



=28 



Let X = ten's digit 

and y = unit's digit. 
Then lOx-l-y = the number. 

Hence 10x+y+ lOy+x = 77 

and lOy+x — (lOx-^y) = i 
From (1) llx+lly = 77 

or x+y = 7 (3) 

From (2) 9y— 9x = 27 

or y — X = 3 (4) 

Add (3) and (4) 2y = 10 

and therefore y = 5 

Substitute in (3) value of y, 
x+y = 7 

and therefore x = 2. 

Therefore the number is 25. 



(1) 
(2) 



x+1 

X— 1 



4x— 3 
x+9 



Therefrom fractions, (x+1) (x+9) = 

(4x— 3) (X— 1) 
Simplify, 3x=— 17x = 6. 
Complete the square, 3Gx= — 204+ (17)^ 

= 72+289 = 361 
Extract the root, 6x — 17 = il9 

6x = 36 or —2 

X = 6 OT — ^ 

10. Let X = breadth 
and 2x = length 
Then 2x- = area 
Hence (2x+20) (x+24) = 4x^ 
Simplify x=— 34x = 240 
Complete square, x= — 34x+(17)- == 
■ 240+289 = 529 



10 — Continued. 

X — 17 = J23 

X = 40 

2x = 80 

2x- = 3200 sq. rds. or 20 acres. 



179 
6. 



Oct. 1894. 

1. ux'y'^+lOx^y^+Sxy* = 5xy- ( x-+2xy+y= ) 
ax^y — axy='+x='y — xy'' = xy(ax^ — 

ay=+x' — y= ) 

Therefore G. C. D. = xy(x+y) = 
x^y+xy^ 

2. X-— y- = (x-'+y-^) (x-i — y-^) 
(X— y) = (x/2+y/2) {xV2 — y/O 

3. (1) a+b a — b 

a — b a+b 
a-+2ab+b-+a2 — 2ab+b^ 



a=— b^ 




2aH2b- 




a^— b= 




a+b a — b 




a — b a+b 




a2+2ab+b- — ( a-- 


-2ab+b-) 



a^— b- 
a-+2ab+b- — a-+2ab — b- 



a- — b- 
(3) a+b a — b a^- 



4ab 



a- — b- 



-b^ 



= 1 



a — 'b a+b 
(4) a+b a — b 



a=— b^ 
a+b a+b 

a^ — b a+b a — b a — b 
a'' + 2ab+b= (a+b)^ 



(a— b) = 



a^— 2ab+b2 

4. xm+x-m = xo 

but x" = 1 

. •. Xmxx-m = 1 

(That is, xm and x-m are recipro- 
cals of each other.) 

1 

Hence x-m = 

xm 

5. (X — ri) (x — To) = 
Substitute (x+7) (x — 5) = 

x=+2x— 3.5 = 
x=+2x = 35. Ans; 



x= — mx = mn — nx 
x" — mx+nx — mn = 
x(x — m)+n(x — m) = 
(x+n) (X — m) = 
x+n =^ 0, whence x = — n 
X — m = 0, whence x = m 

See ex. 7, last paper. 

11 

— + — = 5 (1) 

X y 

1 1 

=1 (2) 

X y 

Add (1) and (2) : 

2 

X 

Ox =^ 2 

1 

X ^ — 

3 

Subtract (2) from (1) : 

1 1 

— + — = 5 
X y 

1 1 

+ — -: — 1 

X y 

2 
— = 4 

y 

4y == 2 
1 

2 



mx=+nx = pq 
4m-x-+4mnx+n- 



4pqm|n* 



2mx+n = tV4pqm+n'^ 
2mx — JV4pqm+n- — n 



X. = iV4pqm+n- 



2m 



10. X = 



X = age m mos. 
y =^ height in inches. 
x+y ^ 300 (1), 



+ y 



84 



(2) 



10 

x+lOy = 840 (3)' 



10 — Continued 

Subtract (1) from (3), 9y = 540 
y = 60 inches or 5 ft. 

Substitute in (1) x = 240 mos. or 
20 yrs. 



180 
7 — Continued 



Com. square, x^+3x^ 



May 1895. 

1. x"— y" = (x=— y3) (x^'+y^) 

^3 — y3 _ (x— y) (x=^+xy+y=) 
x^'+ys = (x+y) (x^— xy+y=) 
,:. x"— y^ = (X— y) (x=+xy+y=) 
(x+y) (x=— xy+y=) 

2. (2a+2b)^ = (2a)*+4[(2a)=(2b)]+ 

6[(2a)=^(2b)-^]+4[2a) (2b)2] + 
(2b)* 

= 16a*+64a«b+9'oa=b=+64ab3+16b* 

3. X— 2x=+x^ = x(l— 2x=+x*) 

=: X(l— X=) (1— X^) 

= X(l+X) (1+X) (1+X) (1— X) 

4. Since ( — a)x(+a=) = — a^, 
— -a^ 



(See text-book for law of signs) 
X X X— 2 

5 4 5 

4x4-60 == ox— 4x+8 
3x = —52 
X = — 17i 



x=+2x — 444-VxH2x— 44 = 42 



Put Vx^4-2x — 44 = y 
Equation becomes, y"+y = 42 

1 1 169 

y'+y + — = 42 + — = 

4 4 4 

1 13 

y + — = t— 

2 2 

y = 6 

y^' = 36 
Therefore x=+2x— 44 = 36 
x2+2x = 80 
x=+2x+l = 80+1. 
x+1 =- S9 
X = 8 

. x'+3x»=10 



10 + 



1 3 



49 

4 



2 2 

1 
x^=2 or -^5 

X == 8 or — 125. 

8. X := rate of river 

12 = rate of boat in still water 
12+x = rate of boat down stream 
12 — X = rate of boat up stream 
Hence (7(12— x) = 5(12+x) 
84— 7x --= 60+5X 
12x = 24 
X = 2 

9. x'^+ys = 189 (1) 
x+y = 9 (2) 

Divide (1) by (2), x=— xy+y==21(3) 
Square (2). x-+2xy+y- = 81 (4) 
Subtract (4) from (3), — 3xy = 

—60 
— xy =—20 (5) 
Add (5) and (3), x=— 2xy+y= = 1 
Extract the root, x — y = tl (6) 
Add (2) and (6), x — 5; y = 4; 

or X ^ 4; y = 5 



10. 2Vx+V4x+V7x+2 



V4x+V7x+2 = 1— 2\/x 

4x+V7x+2 = 1 — 4v'x + 4x 

7x+2 = 1— 8Vx+16x 

SVx" = 9x— 1 
64x = 81x2— ISx+l 
81x2— 82x = —1 

Com. square, x = 1, or — 



81 



x+Vx^ — 9 



= (X— 3) = 



X— Vx^— 9 



(x+Vx=— 9)2 = 9(x— 3)^ 
(xVx^- 9)= = 9(x— 3)^ 



10 — Continued 



181 
3 — Continued 



X+VX-— 9 = 3(x— 3) 



Vx-— 9 = 2x— 9 
X-— 9 == 4x-— 36X+81 
' x=— 12x=— 30 
x=^— 12X+36 = 6 

X— 6 = iV^" 
x=0i-V6~ 



x-+y- 



-y- X— y- 

x-i-y^ 



Sept. 1895. 

1. (a) Arithmetic deals with partic- 
ular numbers; Algebra with 
both particular and general. 
In Arithmetic numbers are rep- 
resented by the Arabic numer- 
als, called figures; in Algebra, 
numbers are represented by 
figures and letters. 

(b) A theorem is the formal state- 
ment of an algebraic truth. 
A problem is a question proposed 
for solution. 

2 (a) An identical equation is one 
in which the two members are 
the same, or can be reduced to 
the same expression by per- 
forming the operations indi- 
cated. 

(b) A quadratic equation is one of 

the second degree. 

(c) The root of an equation is the 

value of the unknown number 
in it. 

(d) The logarithm of a number is the 

exponent of the power to which 
a fixed number called the base 
must be raised in order to pro- 
duce the given number. 

(e) A co-efficient is a linown factor 

prefixed to another factor or 
set of factors. 

3. (2x+y 2y— X) x=+y^ 

( x+y X— y) X'— y- ' 
2x-hy 2y — x = 

x+7 X — y 

2x= — xy — y=+xy — xH2y== x=-t-y^ 

x2_y2 x2— y=^ 



X- — y" x=+y- 
(x=+y-') (x=— y=) 

(x=+y=) (x^— y=) 

. (a) x = distance 
x 

— = time on car 
6 

x 

— = time walking 



Then, 



= 2 



6 - 2 
4x = 12 
X = 3 miles 

(b) a''xani^a''-'-m 
am 



a" 



= 1 



am 



5. By addition or subtraction. 
3x+3y = 18 (1) 
3x— 2y = 1 (2) 

Multiply (1) by 2, 6x+6y=36 (3) 
Multiply (2) by 3, 9x— 6y= 3 (4) 



Add (3) and (4), lox 


=39 


3 




5 




Subs, value of x in (2), 




39 

2y = 1 

5 




2 

y = 3— 


•' 



3x+3y=18 (1) 
3x— 2y= 1 (2) 

Subtract (2) from (1), 5y =17 
2 

y = 3— 



5 — Continued 

Subst. value of y in (2), 



3x 



34 
5 
3 



= 1 



(1) 



By substitution 
3x+3y = 18 
3x— 2y = 1 (2) 

Transpose 3y in (1), 3x=18— 3y (3) 
Divide by coefficient of x, 

18— 3y 

x = (4) 

3 

Subs, value of x in (2), 

(18— 3y) 

3( ) — 2y =: 1 

( 3 ) 



54— 9y 



— 2y = 1 



54 



9y 



6y = 3 



2 
y = 3— 
5 

Subs, value of y in (2), 

34 



3x 



By comparison 

3x+3y=18 (1) 

3x— 2y= 1 (2) 

Transpose 3y in (1), 

3x = 18— 3y (3) 



X = 18— 3y 



(4) 



Transpose 2y in (2), 
3x = l+2y (5) 



(6) 



182 










5- 


—Continued 










Equate values of 


X, 






18— 3y 


l+2y 




(7) 




3 


3 








Reduce (7) 


. 18- 


-3y = 


= l+2y 




2 










y = 3— 










5 










Subst. value of y 


in 


(i), 




51 
3x4— = 

5 


18 








3 










X = 2— 
5 








G 


. x^+xy = 
xy— y' = 


120 

: 16 


(2 


) 



(Let y = vx, and substitute vx for 

y in both equations.) 
From (1), x=+vx' = 120 

120 

x^ = 

v+1 
From (2), vx° — v-x= = \(> 
16 

V— v= 

Equate values of x^ 
120 16 

v+1 V — V- 

120v— 120v- = 16V+16 

— 120v^-+104v = 10 
Divide by 8, 15v=— 13v = —2 
Complete the square 

900V-— 780v+(13)-" = —120+169 
= 49 

30v— 13 = 1-7 

30v = 6 



V : 


= 


— 


or — 






5 


3 






1 




If V 




5 


X 


y 


^ 


vx 


5 


Subst. 


in 


(1), 




x^ 






x=- 


5 


■ = 


120 



6 — Continued 

5X-+X- = 600 

6x= = 600 

x^lOO 

X = 10 Large number. 

Subst. value of x in (1), 
100+lOy = 120 
lOy = 20 
y ^ 2 Smaller number 

7. X = Money A had at first 

9800 — X =^ Money B had at first. 



= A's money now 
6 



183 

10 — Continued 

y = number of yds. B ran in one 
second. 

1760 1672 

— — , = number of sees. A ran 

XX in first and second 
trials respectively 
1716 1760 
, = number of sees. B ran, 

y y in first and second 

trials respectively 
Then 

1716 - 1760 

=51 (1) 

y X 



9800— X 



(9800— X) 
Hence, 



= B's money 
now 



X = (980O— x) — 

6 

30x— 5x = 294000 — 30x 

+6x 
49x = 235200 
X = 4800 



9800— X 

5 

— 58800 



— =: 4000 = Amt. each has 
6 now 



Let X : 
100— X 



larger number 
- smaller number 



Hence Vx+VlOO— x = 14 



By squaring, x+2Vx(V100- 
+100— x 



-X) 



2\/100x— x'^ = 96 



9 



VlOOx— x^ = 48 
By squaring lOOx — x' = 2304 

x= — lOOx = —2304 
Completing square, x^ — 100x+(50)' 

= — 2304+2500 = 196 
Extracting root, x — 50 = ±14 

X := 64, larger number. 

100 — X' = 36 smaller number. 





(a) (X— rj (x— r^) 
(X— 5) (x— 2) = 
x= — 7x+10 = or x^ — 7x = — 10 

l=arn-J 
Substitute. 192 =. 24r3 
(b) r^ = 8. 
■ r = 2 
Hence series = 24. [48, 96], 192. 



10. 



Let X = number of yds. A ran in 
one second 



1672 



1760 



and = = — 75 (2) 

X y 

Multiply (1) by 19. 

33440 32604 



+ 



969 



1500 



X y 

Multiply (2) by 20, 
33440 35200 

X y 

2596 
Add, = —531 

y 

y =4f 

1760 

= 360 sees. = 6 min. 

Substitute value of y in (1), 
X = 5Jf 
1760 
= 300 sees. = 5 min 

513 



June 1896. 

1. (a) See 1(a), Sept. 94. 

(b) Quantity is anything that can 
be measured or compared. An. 
algebraic quantity is a quanti- 
ty expressed in algebraic lan- 
guage. 

(c) The root of a number is one of 
the equal factors of that num- 
ber. 

(d) A radical is the indicated root 
of number; as Vab 

(e) See 1(c), Sept. '94. 



184 



2 a^— b* = (a-+b=) (a^— b=) 
==(a°+b-) (a+b) (a — b) 
a«— b" = (a^+b^) (a=— b^) 
= (a+b) (a= — ab+b^) (a — b) 
(a-+ab+b') 
.:. G. C. D. = (a+b) (a— b) = 
a^"— b^ 

3. a^— b^ = (a+b) (a— b) 
a*— b* = (a-+b-) (a=— .b-) 

= (a^+b^) (a+b) (a— b) 
af— 2ab+b2 — (a— b) (a— b) 
.-. L. C. M. = (a+b) (a— b) (a— b) 
(a=+b=) 



4. Let 
Then, 



number 



XX XX 

— + — > — +• — 

6 5 6 8 

20x+24x > 20x+15x 

. (1— x)" = (1)."— 6[(l) = (x)]+ 
15[(l)Mx)==] — 20(l)Mx)^ 
+15[(l)='(x)*]— 6[(l)(x)'^] 
+x« 

= 1— 6x+15x=— 20x5+15x^— 6xs+x« 

. X = hundred's digit. 

y = ten's digit 

z ^ unit's digit. 
lOOx+lOy+z = number 
x+y+z = 9 (1) 

lOOx+lOy+z = 42(x+y) 
58x— 32y+z = (2) 
z = 2(x+y) 

— 2x— 2y+2z = 0. (3) 

Multiply (1) by (2), 

2x+2y+2z = 18 (4) 

Add (4) and (3), z = 6 
Subs, value of z in (1), 

x+y = 3 (5) 
Subs, value of z in (2), 

58x— 32y = — 6 (6) 
Divide (6) by 2, 

29x— 16y = — 3 (7) 

Multiply (5) by 16, 

16x + 16y =- 48 
Add (8) and (7). x = 1 
Subs, value of x in (51, y = 
Therefore the number is 126. 

( i/x -/y ) ' X 



r t/x1 r Vy^ x= y== 

+ 2<! — ^<! } +- = - 

L y J I X J y X 



(Vxy) y 

+ 2( ) + — 

( xy ) x^ 



(b) (a+Va- — x-)" 

= a-+2ava- — x-+a^ — x^ 



= 2a=+2ava^ — x^ — x^ 

8. 4x = one 
ox = other 
ox— 4x = 81 
X = 81 

4x =324 " 

5x = 405. 

9 X = number bought 

80 

— cost of each 

X 

Hence, 

80 80 

x+4 X 

x=+4x = 320 

x2+4x+4 = 320+4 = 324. 
x+2 = +18 
X = 16 

10. See 10, May '95. 



Sept. 1896. 

1. (a) See 1(a) Sept. '94. 

(b) See 1(b), Sept. '94. 

(c) See 1(c), Sept. '94. 



(d) See 2(a), Sept. '95. 

(e) The exponent of a power is the 

number symbol placed at the 
right of a number to show how 
many times the number is tak- 
en as a factor; as, a^. 

(f) See 2(e), Sept. '95. 

(8) A simple equation is one of the 
first degree — that is, containing 
the first power of the symbol 
for the unknown number, and 
no higher power. 

(h) See 2(b), Sept. '95. 

(i) A Mnomial is a polynomial that 
consists of \wo terms; as, a+b. 

(j) A surd is an indicated root that 
cannot be exactly obtained. 

2. (144xV— 225z^) 

= (12xy^+15z3) (12xy2 — 15z') 



185 



3. x=— 8 = (x— 2) (x=+2x+4) 

x''— C)X=+llx— 6 = (X— 2) (X-— 4x 

+3) 
Therefore H. C. F. = x— 2 

4. a«— b' = (a^4-b*) (a*— b*). 
= (a*+b^) (a=+b=) (a^— b=) 

= (a*+b*) (a=+b=)^ (a+b) (a— b). 

5. See Ex. 3, Sept. 1895. 

6. See Ex. 5, Sept. 1895, same meth- 

ods. 

X = 3. 

y = — 1. 

7. X = part entire work left for A 

to finish. 



2ax = 


= 2a= 


or 


2 




2a- 




2 


X = 




or 


— 




2a 


1 


2a 


X = 


a or 


— 






7. 


a 




June 189 






1. (a) 








a 








— = 


a^-^ 


= 


a" 


a 









8 

1 

12 



= part A can do in one day 
part B can da in one day. 



• — = — . Therefore a''=l. 
a 1 

(b) See 4, Oct. '94. 

2 (a) (x«— 1) = (xHl) (x=— 1) 



(1 1) 5 

( — + — ) or — = part A and B 

( 8 12) 24 can do in 1 day (p) x=— y" = (xVy') (x 

(5) 
Therefore, x + 4( — ) = 1 
(24) 

24x = 4 



= (x+l) (x^— X+1) (X— 1) (x^+x+l) 
(b) 3x^+23x+14 = (x+7) (3x+2) 

y') 
= (x%) (x=— xV+y') (x^— y) 
(xVx*y+y-) 



1 

~ 6 




8 
Then — 
6 


1 

= 1 — days, 
3 


8. 4V50 

2V5 


= 2V10 


9. See 9, 


Sept. 1895. 


10. x+1 


a+1 


Vx 


Va 



Va(x+1) = Vx(a+1) 
Squaring, a(x2+2x+l) = x(a=+2a+l) 

ax2+2ax+a = a^x+2ax+x 
ax- — ^a-x — X = — a 
Com. square, 4a-x^ — ( ) + (a^+l)^ 
= — 4a=+(a*+2a=+l) 

4a^x^— ( ) + (a=+l) = a*— 2a2+l 
Extracting root, 2ax — (a^+1) 

= tra^— 1) 

2ax = a^— l+a=+l or — a^+l+a'fl 



4x2_7xy+3y-) 3x^— 4x=y+3xy=— 2y=' ( 8x 
)4 ( 



12x^— 16x-y+12xy=— 8y= 
12x='— 21x=y+ 9xy- 

v)5x=y+3xy-— 8y' 
5x=+3xy— 8y- 



5x"-+3xy— 8y^ ) 4x=— 7xy+3y^ 
)5 



20x2— 85xy+15y=(4 
20xH12xy— 32y=( 



l:7y) — 47xy+47y== 



X— y ) ox'^+Sxy— 8y= ( 5x— 8y 
) 5x^— 5xy ( 

8xy— 8y^ 
8xy— 8y^ 

Therefore (x— y) = H. C. F. 

4. a^— 3ab+2b= = (a— 2b) (a— b) 
a=— ab— 2b^ = (a— 2b) (a+b) 
a^— b= = (a+b) (a— b) 
Therefore Lr. C. M. = (a— 2b) 
(a+b) (a — b) 



18G 



5. For methods ,see Sept. 1895. 
X = 3 

y = 2. 

0. X = age of son five yrs. ago. 
4x = age of father five yrs. ago. 
x+10 = age of son five yrs. hence. 
4x+10 = age of father five yrs. hence 

1 
Hence, 4x+10 = 2 — (x+10) 



4X+10 



7x+70 



Then. 9x :G(1000— x) :: 1140 : 640 
5700X = (5,840,000 — G840x 
12600X — 0,840,000 
X = 542.8.5+ 
1000— X = 457.14+ 



Sept. 1897. 

1 . a2+b-+c==+2ab+2bc+2ac 



12+30 = 7x+70 

5x = 40 

x = 8 

4+5 = 13, son's age now. 

4x+5 =r 37, father's age now. 

. (2a=^+3bc)^ = (2a=)^+7(2a-)''(3bc) 
+21 ( 2a=' ) ^ ( 3bc ) ^+35 ( 2a=^ ) M 3bc ) « 
+35 ( 2a- ) ^ ( 3bc ) H21 ( 2a^ ) ^ ( 3bc ) ^ 
+7(2a=) (3bc)"+(3bc)^ 

= 128a"+l,344a'=bc+6,048a">b=c-+1520 
a«b^c''+22.680a«b^c*+20,412a*b=c' 
+10,206a=b''c«+2,187b^c^ 

. V6x— 2 4V6x— 9 



a b — c 

a=+b-+c=+2ab+2bc+2ac 

a+b+c 

= a+b+c 

X = rate per hour boy must ride 
(20 min or ^ hr. = time boy rides. 
Then 



distance boy rides 



(50 min. or ^ hr. = time man walks) 

5 20 

Then 4 x — or — = distance he 

6 6 walks 



V6x+2 4V6X+6 

(V6x— 2) (4V6X+6) = 24x— 2V6x— 12 

(4V6x— 9) (V6X+2) = 24X—V 6x^18 

24x— 2\76x— 12 = 24x— V6x^l8 

V6x == 6 
Ox = 36 
X = 6 

9. Let X = number spaces hr. hand 

moves over, 
and, x+45 = number spaces min. hand 

moves over. 

(Min. hand moves 12 times as fast 

as hour hand). 
Hence, x+45 = 12x 
— llx = —45 
1 

II 

1 

x+45 = 49 — 
11 

. •. 49^!,- mins. past 3 o'clock. 

10 Let X = A's stock 
1000— x = B's 



Hence, x 



20 



2x == 20 
X = 10 

Therefore boy must ride at speed of 
ten miles per hr. 

3 . ( a ) m^ — ^n'' = ( m — n ) ( m-+mn+n=' ) 

(b) a^+n' = (a+n) (a^ — an+n=) 

(c) a«— b^ = (a^+b^) (a*— b^) 
= ( a*+b* ) " ( a=+b= ) ( a^— b= ) 

= (a*+b*) (a=+b2) (a+b) (a— b) 

(d) p*+p^+l = (p*+2pHl) — p= 

= ( p^+1 ) =— p=^ = ( p=+l+p ) (p^+1— p ) 

(e) n^ — 2no+o- = (n — o) (n — o) 



(a) G. C. 
June '97. 



D. = x=— 3. See 3, 



4. (b) (Divide each expression by G-. 
C. D. just found) 
Then x*— 2x8+6x— 9 

= (x^— 3) (x=— 2x+3) 

6x*— 4x='— 1 6x=+l 2x— 6 

= (x^— 3) (6x2— 4x+2) 

Therefore L. C. M. = (x=— 3) (x^— 2x 
+3) (6x2— 4x+2) 



187 



■5. X = A's hits 
2x ^ B's hits 

15 — X := A's puts 

15 — 2x = B's outs 
Hence, loxx = Ij (15— 2x) 



1G5— 22x 



15— X = 



105— 7x = 105— 22x 
15x == 60 
X = 4 

2x == 8 
15— X = 11 
15— 2x ^ 1 

6. (2a^+4b'')' = (2a2)^+7(2a2)«(4b3) 
+21 ( 2a- ) ^ ( 4b« ) =+35 ( 2a= ) * ( 4bs ) " 
+35 ( 2a^' ) M 4b^ ) *+21 ( 2a^ ) = ( 4b« ) ^ 
+7(2a=) (.4b^)''+(4b=')^ 
= 128a'*+l,792a^=b^+10,752^0b''+35,840 
a'b»+71,680a«b"+86,016a*b^5+57.- 
344a=b^^+16,384b2^ 



(7) (X— y)« X (x+y)* 

= (X— y)^- X (x+y)'= 



=V(x— y)8xV(x+y)' 



= V(x— y)« (x+y)» 
x— 1 



2 

2+ 

Vx 



2 
X = 3 

Vx 

xVx— 2 = 3Vx 

xVx— 3Vx = 2 

Multiply by Vx, x=— 3x = 2Vx 

Squaring, x* — 6x^+9x= = 4x 

X*— Gx-VOx^^- 4x = 

(X— 4) (X— 1) fx— 1) (X) = 

Hence, x = 4 or 

9. 1 1 

=3 (1) 

X y 
1 1 

=21 (2) 

x= y^ 

Divide (2) by (1), 
1 1 

_ + _ = 7 (3) 

X y 



Add (3) and (1), 
1 1 

X y 

1 1 

'x y 

2 

— = 10 
X 

1 

X = 

5 
Substitute value of x in (1) 
1 
1 1 

__ q 

5 y 

1 
5 = 3 

y 

5y — 1 = 3y 
2y = 1 



y = — 

2 

10. 8x = length of field, in rods. 
5x = breadth of field in rods. 
8x = number dollars paid per acre. 
26x = number rods around field. 
13 x 26x= number dollars paid for 

field. 
8x X 5x or 40x^ =: area of field in 

rods. 



40x2 
160 



= area of field in acres. 



(40x= ) 

Hence, 8x( ) = 13 x 26x = 338x 

(160) 

(x=) 
8x (— ) = 338x 
(4) 



8x» 



= 338x 



188 



10 — Continued 

8x» = 1352X. 

Divide bv x, Sx^ = 1352 

x= = 169 

X = 13 

8x = 104, length of field 

5x = 65, breadth of field. 



June 1898. 

1. (1) See 1, Sept. '94. 
(2) axbxc; abc; a-b:c. 



(3) — ; a-^b 
b 

(4) 6x; bx; xn. 

(5) , — 1 
x* or Vx'; 

a+b 
(4) 6x; bx; xn. 

2. (1) X = a+b 
(2) x< a+b 
(3)x > a+b 

(4) X d= y 

(5) X > y 

(6) X <y 

(7) .-.;--- or . 

(8) The parenthesis, brackets, brace, 

vinculum and bar. 

(9) (a) Plus, (b) One. (c) One. 

(10) (a) A term preceded by no sign 
is positive. 

(b) The coefficient 1 is understood 

when no other is given. 

(c) A letter has the exponent 1 when 

no other is given. 

3.(1) 2a+ ( +a = 3a 
2a+( — a) = a 
— 2a+(+a) = — a 
— 2a+(— a) = —3a 

(2) 2a— (+a) = a 
2a — ( — ^a) = 3a 

— 2a— (+a) = —3a 
— 2a — ( — a) = — a 

(3) ax(+b) = ab 

— a X (+b) = — ^^ab 
a X ( — b) — — ^ab 
— a X ( — b) = ab 

(4) abH — (+a) = b 

— ^ab -^ ( — a) = b 
— ab -^- (+a) = — b 
ab-H( — a) = — b 



(5) (1) The signs (+) and ( — ) are: 
used to indicate addition and 
subtraction. In this sense they 
are signs of operation and are 
common to Arithmetic and Al- 
gebra. 

(2) They are used as signs of opposi- 
tion. In this sense employed in 
Algebra alone. Thus if profit 
is +, loss is — ; if distance in a 
given direction is +, opposite di- 
rection is — . 

4. (a) 1— m° = (l+m") (1— m') 
^ (1+m) (1 — m+m=) (1 — m) 

(l+m+m=) 
(b) x*+7x=+9x^— 7x— 10 

= (I— X) (T+x) (s+x) (Q+X> 

7 + 9—7—10 
—5—10 +5 +10 

Hence (x+5) a factor. 
Determine first two factors by syn- 
thetic division as per above. 

5. (a) H. C F. = 2x— 3. See 3, 

June '97. 
(b) 2x=+5x— 12 = (2x— 3) (x+4) 
6x=— 13X+6 = (2x— 3) (3x— 2) 
6x-— X— 12 = (2x— 3) (3x+4) 
L. C. M. = (2x— 3) (x+4) (3x— 2> 
(3x+4) 



m — n 




m — n 


m 


+ 


n 






m+ n 




m — n 


m 




n 


m — n 




m — n 


m 


; 


n 



m + n m — n 

m(m^ — n) + n(m+n) 

(m+n) (m — n) 

m- — mn+n^+mn 
Therefore, l-^- 



m== — n^ 
m^— n^ (m + n) (m — n) 



1 X 



m=^+n^ 



m^+n^ 



189 



14 


7 


1 


— + 


— = 


4— 


X 


y 


3 


21 


6 




— — 


- — = 


-- 1 


X 


y 




Multiply (1) 


by 6, 


84 


42 


78 


— + 


■ — = 


— 


X 


y 


3 



(1) 



Simplify, 240x = 2100 



(2) 



70 

X ^ — or 

8 



;%, amt. all can earn 
in one day 



70 50 20 

= — or $214, amt. C can 

8 8 8 earn in one day. 



Multiply (2) by 7, 

147 42 

= 7 

X y 

Add (3) and (4), 

231 99 

= — = 33 

X 3 

33x = 231 
X = 7 

Substitute in (1), 



(3) 



(4) 



69 
i 12 


72 

— or $3, amt. B. can 

24 earn in one day 


3 1 

4 2 


1 

= $3 — amt. A can earn 
4 in one day 


1 


1 X 


' 


X+V2 — X- 


X— \/2— x^ 2 



14 7 

7 y 



1 

4— 
3 



9. 



Clearing, 2x— 2 V 2 — x=+2x+2 V 2 — x^ 

= x^— 2x+x3— 2xH6 = 
2x(3— x^) = 
X = or 5V3 

10. X = number sheep bought 

468 

= cost of each 

X 



50 



7 7 

y " 3 

7y = 21 

y = 3 

X = amt. all together can earn in 
one day. 

= Amt. A and B. can earn in 1 
day 



468 



+ 1 ^ selling price 



69 

— = Amt. A and C can earn in 1 

12 day 



X — 8 = number sold. 

(468 ) 

Hence, (x— 8) ( H)= 468+12 

( X ) 

Simplify, x^— 20x = 3744 

Com. square, x-— 20x+100 = 3744-t-lOO 

= 3844 
X— 10 := t62 

x = 72, number of sheep bought 



55 

— = Amt. B and C can earn in 1 Sent '98 

10 day V . . 



50 69 55 

1 1 == Twice amt. earned 

8 12 10 in 1 day by all. 

That is, 

50 69 55 

2x == — + — + — 
8 12 10 



. When a number consists of the 
product of two or more num- 
bers, each of these numbers is 
called a factor of the product. 
Ex. 8a'b = 2x2x2xaxaxaxb 

An algebraic equation is a state- 
ment in symbols that two ex- 
pressions stand for the same 
number. (Ex. 3x+2=13) 



190 



1 — Continued. 

A known factor of a product pre- 
fixed to another factor to show 
the number of times factor is 
taken is called a coefficient. 
Literal coefficients are expressed 
by letters. (Thus, in abx, ah is 
the coefficient of x) 
A numerical exponent is a figure 
written at the right of and a 
little above a number to indi- 
cate how many times the root 
or factor is taken. (Thus a- 
denotes that a is taken twice as 
a factor). 

If the product of two numbers is 
equal to 1, each of the numbers 
is called the reciprocal of the 
other. (Thus, the reciprocal of 
a b b a ba 

— is — , for — X — =: — =1) 
b a a b ab 

The radical sign V indicates that a 

3 

root is to be found. Thus, V27 
means that the cube root of 27 
is to be taken. The number 
symbol written above the radi- 
cal sign is called the index of 
the root. 

The sign >■ read is greater than, 
indicates that the number pre- 
ceding sign is greater than the 
number following it. Thus 4+3 
>■ 6, means that 4-1-3 is greater 
than 6. The sign <;, read is 
less than, indicates that the 
number preceding sign is less 
than number following it. 
Thus 4+3 < 8 means that 4+3 is 
less than 8. 

The sign . •. stands for the word 
"therefore"' or "hence." 

The sign or stands for the 

words "and so on." 

The signs of aggregation are the 
bar I, the vinculum — , the pa- 
renthesis ( ), the bracket [ ], 
and the brace ^ I.. 

a| 

Thus each of the expressions, b|, 
a+b, (a+b), [a+b], ^a+bl,, sig- 
nifies that a+b is to be treated 
as a single number. 

2. (1) An alffebraic term is an expres- 
sion the parts of which are not 
separated by the sign + or — . 



(2) The signs + and — indicate oper- 

ations between terms, while the 
signs X and -^ indicate opera- 
tions within a term. 

(3) The expression a-bx4H-2a is one 

term. 

(4) Monomial: 4xy; binomial: 3x+2y; 

trinomial: 3a+b — c; a polyno- 
mial is an algebraic expression 
consisting of two or more 
terms; as, 3a+2b+2x+y. 

(5) Terms which have the same com- 

bination of letters are called 
similar terms; as, 4ab-, — 9ab-,. 
are similar terms. 



3. 


(a+2b+c) (a- — 2abd) 




-f- \/3b-c— (a-+b) 
== (5+4+3) (5-— 20) 




-- V3 (2^x3) — (5^+2) 




= 12x5 H- V36— 27 




60 

-= — = 20. 
3 


4. 


x^ xy^ y3 

— + — + — 
4 72 12 




x^ x-y xy2 
4 6 8 






x-y xy2 y^ 
6 9 12 






x=y xy= y» 
6 9 12 






x= xy y2 
2 3 4 - 





Ans. 



. x^ — y^ = (x*+y*) (x* — y*) 
= (x*+y^) (x-"xy=) (x2— y=) 
= (x^+yM (x-+y=) (x+y) (x 

m" — n'' = (m^+n^) (m" — n^) 
= (m+n) (m- — mn+n=) (m — n) 
(m'^+mn+n-) 

a^— 10a=+9 = (a=— 9) (a=— 1) 
= (a+3) (a— 3) (a+1) (a— 1) 



y> 



191 



5 — Continued. 

81x^— 72x-y-+lGj'* 

= (9x^— 4y^) (9x-— 4j-) 
= (3x+2y) (3x— 2y) (3x+2y) (3x 
— 2y) 
x' — 2x'* — 16x-+2xfl5 

= (X— 1) (x+1) (x+3) (X— 5) 
By synthetic division. 



( a — b » ( 

(1 + ) ^ (1 

( a +b) ( 



a— b) 
a +b) 



a — b 

1 + 

a+b 



Ka+b) + (a — b) 
a+b 

a+b+a — b 2a 
a+b a+b 
a — b l(a+b) — (a — b) 
a+b a+b 
a+b — a+b 2b 



a+b 


a+b 


2a 2b 


2a a+b 


-i- = 


X 


a+b a+b 


a+b 2b 


2a a 




= — = — 




2b b 





X = B's age seven yrs, ago. 
3x = A's age seven yrs. ago. 
x+14 = B's age seven yrs. hence. 
3x+14 — A's age seven yrs. hence. 
Hence, 3x+14 ^ 2 (x+14) = 2x+28 
X = 14 

x+7 = 21, B 's age now. 
3x+7 = 49, A's age now. 



8. 2Vx— V4x— 11 = 1 



Divide (2) by (1), x— y = 5 (3) 

Square (3), x=— 2xy+y^ = 25 (4) 

Subtract (4) from (1), 3xy = 150 

xy == 50 (5) 

Add (5) and (1), x-=+2xy+y^ = 225 

Extract the root, x+y = $15 (6) 

Add (0) and (3), 2x = 20 or — IQ 

X = 10 or —5 

Substitute in (3), y == 5 or — 10 

(Formula) 1 = a+(n — l)d 
Substituting, 1 l+(n— 1)1 
1 = n 

n 
(Formula) s = — (a+1 ) 
2 

n 
Substitute value of 1, s = — (a+n) 

2 
an+n^ 

9870 — 

2 

n^+an = 19740 

Substitute value of a, n-+n = 19740 

Completing square, 4n-+4n+l 

= 78960+1 = 78961 
Extracting root, 2n+l = $281 
2n = 280 
n = 140 
Therefore 140 days are required. 



June 1899. 

1. (a+b)= = a-+2ab+b- 

(2) (a— b)- = a^— 2ab+b= 

(3) (a+b) (a— b) = a=— b^ 



(4) a=+b^ 
a+b 
a=+b^ 
a+b 



a^^ab+b^ 



— = a*— a='b+a2b---ab»+b* 



Squaring, 4x — 4Vx^ — llx+4x — 11 = 1 



an+bn is divisible by a+b if n is odd, 
and by neither a+b nor a — b if 
n is even. 



Transposing. — 4v'4x^ — llx 
= 12— 8x 



Dividing by - 
= 2x— 3 



(5) a- 



Squaring, 4x2 — -^-^ 
x=9 



V 4x2— llx 

4x=— 12X+9 




xr+xy+y- 



= 175 
875 



(1) 
(2) 



a — b 
a*— b^ 

a+b 



= a=+ab+b^ 



= a^+a^b+ab^+b* 



= a^ — a^b+ab^ 



192 



1 — Continued 



= a*+a'b+a=b=+ab'+b* 

a — b 

an — bn is divisible by a — b if n is 
odd, and by both a+b and a — b 
if n is even. 

2. x^— y« = (x^+y*) (x*— y*) 
= (x*+y^) (x^+y^) (x=— y^) 

= (x*+y*) (x=+y^) (x+y) (x— y) 
m" — n" = (m'+n^) (m^ — n^) 
= (m+n) (m- — mn+n) (m^ — mn+ 
n^) (m^+mn+n") 
x«— 64 = (x^+S) (x3— 8) 
= (x+2) (x=— 2x+4) (X— 2) 
(xH2x+4). 
X*— 2x='— 16X-+2X4-15 
= (X— 1) (x+1) (x+3) (X— 5) 
See 5, Sept. '98. 
x'+7x''+9x"— 7x— 10 
= (x+5) (x+2) (x+1) (X— 1) 
See 4, June '98. 

3. H. C. P. = x+1. See 3, June '97. 

x5_2x^— x= = (x+1) (x^— x^— x=) 
x^+2x=+2x+l = (x+1) (x^x+l) 
Therefore L. C. M. = (x+1) (x*— x^' 
— x^) (x=+x+l) 

(Factors found by first finding H. 
C. F. of the expressions and then 
dividing each expression by this 
H. C. F., x+1.) 



x= + 20 + 96 x^— 8x— 20 x==+10x+lG 

X ' 

x2_15x+50 x' + lOx— 24 x=— 7x+10 

(x+8) (x+12) (x— 10) (x+2) 

~~ (X— 10) (X— 5) (x+12) (x— 2) 

(x+2) (x+8) 



Add (1) and (2), 
2 

— = a + b 

X 

x(a+b) = 2 
2 
a-tb 

Subtract (2) from (I), 

2 

— = a — b 

y ^ 

y(a— b) =2 
2 
a — b 

. Let v= first number. 

X = second. 

y = third. 

z = fourth. 
Then, v+2x+2y+2z = 46. (1) 

x+2v+2y+2z = 43. (2) 

y+2v+2x+2z = 41. (3) 

z+2v+2x+2v = 38. (4) 
Subtract (2) from (1), x=3+v. (5) 
Subtract (3) from (2), — x=2— y. (6) 
Add (6) and (5), y = 5+v. (7) 
Subtract (4) from (1), z=8+v. (8) 
Substitute values of x, y ajid z res- 
pectively in (1), 
Then v+2(3+v)+2(5+v)+2(8+v) 

= 46, or V = 2. 

X = 3+v = 5. 

y = 5+v = 7. 

z = 8+v = 10. 

. 2v'3+3V2 



(X— 5) (X— 2) 

(x+8) (x+2) 



(x+2) (x+8) 



= 



(X— 5)(x— 2) (X— 5)(x— 2) 



1 1 

— + — = a 
X y 

1 1 

X y 



(1) 



3V3+4\/2 

(2V3+3V2) (3V3— 4V2) 

(8V3+4V2) (3V3— 4V2) 

18+V6— 24 6— V6 

27—32 5 

, (X— rj (X— r^) = 0. 
Substitute, (x— 2+\/3) (x— 2- 
= 0. 



-V3) 



(2) 



or, X- — 4x+l = 0. 

or, x^ — 4x = — 1, Equation required. 



193 



X = number lbs. bought. 

GOOD 

= cost per lb., In cents. 

X 



6600 



+ 1 



X 



cost per lb. 
cent rise. 



after one 



0600 



6600 

= number lbs. for same 

money, at advanced 
+ 1 price. 



G600 



Hence, 



50. 



6600 



+ 1 



6600X 



6600+x 



50. 



6G00x = X-+6550X — 3.30.000. 

X-— 50x = 330,000. 

x^— 50X+625 = 330,000+625 

= 330,625. 
X— 25 = ^575. 
x = 600. 



(c) See 1, Sept. '96. 

(d) The degree of a term is the num 
ber of its literal factors. Thus 
4a^ and 4abc are each of the third 
degree. 

(e) A quadratic equation is one which 
contains the square of the un- 
known, but no higher, power. 

2. (a) Additions and multiplications 
may be performed in any order. 
(Thus, a+b = b+a and ab = ba.) 

(b) The terms of an expression, or 
the factors of a product, may be 
grouped in any manner. 

(Thus, cx(axb)=ax(bxc)^bx(axc.) 

(c) The sum of several numbers mul- 
tiplied by a given number equals 
the sum of the products of the 
several numbers multiplied by 
the given number. 

(Thus, a(b+c+d) = ab+ac+ad.) 
The sum of several numbers divided 
by a given number equals the sum 
of the quotients of the several 
numbers divided by the given 
number. 



b+c+d 



b 



( Thus, 



c d 

+ — + — ) 



10. X = length of shorter side. 

3x = sum of diagonal and longer 

side. 
y = longer side. 

Then, 3x— y = diagonal. 

Hence, y — x =4. (1) 

(The square described upon the hy- 
potenuse is equivalent to the sum 
of the square upon the other two 
sides.) 

Hence (3x — y)^ = x'+y^. 
9x"— 6xy+y^ = x^+y^ 
8x^— 6xy = 0. (2) 

Divide (2) by 2x, 4x— 3y = 0. (3) 

Multiply (1) by 4, 
4y— 4x = 16. (4) 

Add (3) and (4), y = 16. 

Substitute value of y in (1), 
16 — X = 4. 
X = 12. 

Therefore the area of the rectangle 
^ 12x16 = 192 sq. yds. 



Sept. 1899. 

IV (a) See 2(e), Sept. 1895. 
(b) See 2(e), Sept. 1895. 



(d) The exponent of the product of 
two or more powers of a number 
is equal to the sum of the expo- 
nents of the given powers. 
(Thus, a-xa==a8-l-^ = a") . 

3. 5x — ^5y— [X— (.3z — 3y)+2z — 

(.5x — 2y — z)] V - 
= 5x— 5y+[x — (3z — 3y)+2z — 

(5x — 2y — z)] 
= 5x — 5y+x — (3z — 3y)+2z — 

(53^ — 2y — z) . - 

= 5x — 5y+x — 3z+3y+2z — 5x-f- 

2y+z 

^ X. 

4. See 4, Sept. 1898. 

5. The greatest common divisor of 

numerator and denominator is 
found to be, x^ — 5x+4.,__ 

Therefore, . - . . 

2x^— 13x=+23x— 12 2x— 3 

7x^— 33x2+18x+8 - 7x+2 

-m) ( m 1 ) 

m ) (1+m 1 — m^) 



in(l+m) 


(1+m) (.1— ni=) 


1 


(l+m)(m=^— 1) 


in(l+m) 


m=+l 


m— 1 


1— m 



in(m^ — m+1) 



m* — m''m 



7. X = number days idle. 

m= — X = number days he worked. 

a+t» = loss each idle day. 

am = dollars received had he 

worked full time. 
(a+b)x = entire loss. 
Hence, am — (a+b)x = n. 

(a+b)x = am — n 

am — n 
X = 

a+b 







a+b 




am+bm— 


-am+n 


bm+n 




a+t 


) 


a+b 


, Let 


X ^ 


numerator. 


y = 


■ denominator. 




Then, 


X 

y 


: fraction. 





2x 



Hence, 



y+2 



1 or 2x— y=2. (1) 



and 



x+3 
2y 



— or X — y= — 3. 
2 



(2) 



9. 


2 


1 1 








— 


+ 1— + 


1 






2V3 


3V2 








"1 


n 








SV 3 


2V2 








72 


n 


\T 






1 — 


+ I— + 


1 — 






6V9 


9VG 


3V3 








1 1 


- 3 


" |1 






— 4V3 


2V 2 



Subtract (2) from (1), x = 5. 
Substitute value of x in (1), 
10-y = 2. 

—y = —S. . ' 

X 5 

Therefore, — = — . Required frac- 
y 8 tion. 



+ 



6V 9 9V G 



I 1 

I- 
2\/2 



I 1 I 1 I 1 I 1 

I— x2+ I— x6— I— x3— I— x2— 3 
= 6V9 9V3G V9 2V 4 



= 2V2 + — V6 
2 

8 

= V2 + — V6 
2 



-V3 — V2 — 3 



-V3 



10. X = greater number. 
y = smaller number. 
Then, x=+y- = 2xy+9 or x^+y^ — 2xy 

=9. (1) 

and, X- — y- = xy — 1 or x^ — y^ — xy 

= —1. (2) 

Rearrange (1), x= — 2xy+y^ = 9. 
Extract root, x — y = t3. (3) 

X = 3+y. 
Substitute value of x in (2), 
9+Gy+y=— y-— (3+y)y = —1. 
— y=+3y = —10. 
y2_3y = 10. (4). 

Completing square. 

9 9 49 

y=— 3y^- = 104— = — 
4 4 4 

3 7 

2 2 

y = 5 
(Same result is given by taking x 

= y— '3). 
Substitute value of y in (3), x = 8. 



195 



June, 1900. 

1. (al See 2(e), Sept. '95. 

(b) See 1(e), Sept. '9(;!. 

(c) See 1(c), Sept. '94 

(d) See Kd), June '9(3. 

(e) See l(j), Sept. '96. 

2. x''— 2(;x-^+(>x-+5x— 1 

:= X-+5X — 1. 



3. 



x' — 5xHl 

.x-+(a — c)x — ac = x-+ax — ex — ac. 
= x(x+a) — c(x-)-a). 
= (X— c) (x+a). 



. X y 

m n 
X y 

n m 

1 
Multiply (1) by — , 

n 
X y 2 

mn n- n 

1 

Multiply (2) by — , 
m 
X y 1 



(1) 



(2) 



(3) 



(4) 



mn m' m 
Subtract (4) from (3), 

y ^ _ J _ ^ 

n= m^ n m 

Clearing of fractions, . 
m^y+n=y = 2m^n — mn^ 



(5) 



y = 



mn ( 2m — n ) 



m-+n- 



Multiply (1) by — , 
m 
X y 2 

m^ mn m 

1 
Multiply (2) by — , 
n 
X y 1 



X X 2 1 

Add,— + — = — + — 
m- n- m n 

Clearing of fractions, 
n'-x+m-x = 2mn-+m-n. 

mn ( m+2n ) 

m-+n- 

. X = ten's digit, 
y = units digit. 
lOx+y =^ number. 
lOxy+y = 4x+4y. (1) 

lOx+y+18 = lOy+x. 
Gx— 3y = 0. (3) 

X— y = — 2. (4) 

Multiply (4) by 3, 
6x— 3y = (3) 

3x— 3y = — 6 (5) 



(2) 



Subtract (5) from (3), 

3x = 6. 

x = 2. 
Subst. value of x in (3), 

12 — 3y = 0. 

— 3y = —12. 

y = 4- 
. •. number is 24. 

(). (2a=+b— c)* 

(2a^+[b— c])« = (2a^)='^-3(2a=^)•Mb-e<• 
+3(2a=) (b— c)^+(b— c)^ 
= 8a<'+12a*b— 12a*c+Gab-— 12a-bc 
+(Ja'c-4-b''— 3b-c+3bc-+c^ 
7 

a''+3a.'+t>a*+Ta='+Ga=+3a+lj a=+a+l 
a'' • ~ 



mn, 



n 



3aHfia^+7a=' 
3a"+3a*+ a^* 

3a*^-Ga^+6a-+3a^-l 
3a*+Ga-''+6a=+3a+l 

3a*+3a=+a'= ' 

3a*+6a='+3a2 

3a-+3a+l 

3a*+6aH6a=+3a+l 

8. 18x=— 27x = 26. 

Multiply by 2, 36x^— 54x = 52. 
Com. square by adding 

(54)^ (9 )2 ( ) (9)^ 

(— ) = (— ), 36x^— ( ) + (— ) 
(12) (2) ( ) (2) 



19G 



= 


52 


81 

+ — -- 

4 


289 
4 


(Ix 


— 


9 

2 


17 

2 


Gx 




2G 
— or 


—4. 



13 2 

X = — or . 

G 3 



X ^ 


first number. 


X 

2 


= second 


number 


X 

3 

X- + 


= third number. 

X- X- 

— + — = 441. 
4 9 


36xH9x2+4x' 
49x= = 15870 
x^ = 324. 

X == 18 ( 1st 


= 15876 
Lumber) 



9 (2d number) . 

6 (3d number.) 
-1 



(1) 



Substitute values of X in 2, 

y = ±2 or ±V — -A 

Sept. 1900. 



1. 



4.3x^' 9 

+ — 

36 16 


x= 


+ 


2x 


3 


2 


3 


4 


2x'' 3x- 


X- 




2x 


3 


6 8 


2 




3 


4 



— 2x» 


59x^' 9 


6 


72 16 


— 2x^ 


4x- 6x 


G 


9 12 



— 3x= 

8 
— 3x^ 

8 



6x 9 

12 16 

6x 9 

12 16 



a-x* — 2abx^+b-x'* — ^^a-y* 
+2aby* — b-y* 
— xMa- — 2ab+b") — y-(a- — 2ab+b=) 
= (X* — y*) (a-— 2ab+b-) 
== (x-+y-) (x+y) (X— y) (a— b) 
(a— b). ■ 
H. C. F. = x+1. See 3, June '97. 



10. 3x^— 7y= 

xy = G. (2) 

Square (1), 9x*— 42x=y-+49y*=l (3) 
Square (2). xV° = 36. (4) 

Multiply (4) bv 84. 

84xV = 3024. (5) 

Add (3) and (5), 

9x''+42x^y-"+49y* = 3025. (6) 

Extract root 

3x^+7 Y= == t55. (7). 
Add (1) and (7). 

6x= = 54 or —56. 



X 

X— 1 

x' 



— 1 — 



x(x— 1) 
-x=+x 1 X 1 



X-- 



x(x— 1) 



(8) 



Let X ^ smaller. 
x+8 ^= larger. 

(1 1 ) (1 

Then, 2(— + ) = 3(— 

( x x+8 ) (X 

( X+8+X ) ( x+8— x) 
2 = 3 



1 ) 



x+8) 



56 

X- = 9 or 

6 



x(x+8) 



x(x+8) 



x= ±3 or/— V=±^i/-21 



4x+16 = 24. 

4x = 8. 

x ^ 2, smaller number. 

x+8 =: 10, larger number. 



197 



G. 


X — 
3 

X — 
3 

X — 
3 


■1 1 

V 

■1 1 
V 

■1 T 

V 


27(x+l.) 






(X— 1)^ 






27(x+l) (X- 


-1) 




(X— l)^(x- 


-1) 




27(x^— 1) 






(X— D" 





X— 1 I 1 

3|27(x=— 1)X 

3 V (X— 1)» 

( 1 )(x— 1 I ) 



= (3)( )( ,,! ) 

(X— 1)( 3 V^— 1) 



= Vx=— 1 



7. Vx+l+Vx = 



Vx+1 



x+l+Vx^+x = 3. 



Vx^+x 



X-+X = 4 — 4x+x* 
5x = 4. 



8. Let X — rate of steamer down 
stream, 
and X — 3 = rate of steamer up 
stream. 

150 

= time required for down 

X trip. 



150 
X— 3 



time required for up 
trip. 



Then, 150 1 150 

X 2 X— 3 

300x— 90(M-5x=— 15x = 300x. 



5x-— 15x==900. 
x^— 3x = 180. 
Completing square, 




9 9 

x^— 3xH — = 180H — = 
4 4 


729 
4 


3 27 




2 2 





x = 15. 

X = one 
y := other. 

xy(x+y) = 180. (1). 
x«+y' _ igQ (2). 



180 



Divide (1) by xy, x+y = (3) 

x+y 
Divide (2) by (3), 



-xy+y-'= 



21xy 
20 



(4) 



324O0 
Square (3), x24-2xy+y= = (5) 

Subtract (5) from (4), 

21xv 32400 

— 3xy = (6) 

20 x=y2 

Simplifying, —60x'y^21x8y3— 648000 
x^v= = 8.000. 
xy = ±20. (7) 
Subtracting value of xy in (3), 

= 9. (8) 

Squaring (7), 



180 

x+y = 

20 



(9) 



x-"+2xy+y^ = 81 
Multiplying (7) by 4, 

4xv = 80. (10) 
Subtracting (10) from (9), 

x^— 2xy+y^ = 1. (11) 
Extracting root, 

X— y = tl. (12) 

Add (12) and (8), x+y = 9. 

X = 5. 
Substitute in (8) value of x, 
5+y = 9. 
y = 4. 
10. (a) (D* 30 

l=arn-i ^ (30) (_) = — = — 
( 3 ) 81 27 
a rl 

1— r 1— r 



10 



198 





1 


10 


30 


3 


27 


1 

1 ■■ 

3 


1 — 


1 


3 


5 

27 


22 
44— 

27 




Therefore 
over in 5 

17 

= 89— ft. 

"27 


entire distance passed 
22 
rebounds = 2x44 — 

27 

1 


(b) 1 = o 
a = 30. 
1 






3 




: . V 1 


a 

s = 

1— r 


rl 




1— r 




30 


rxO 


AK 



3. (a) H. C. F. -- 2x+y. See 3, June 

'97 
(b) 2x-^— 3xy— 2y^ = (2x+y) (x— 2y). 
6x^ — 7xy— ,5y- = (2x+y) (3x— 5y). 
4x2_y2 = (2x+y) (2x— y). 
.-. L. C. M. = (2x+y)(x— 2y) 
(3x— 5y) (2x— y). 



4. 



x^- 7X+12 
1 



1 

x'+x-(-12 



1 



( X— 4 ) ( x+3 ) ( x-l-4 ) ( X— 3 ) 

x+4 — x+4 



1—— 1 

3 3 

Therefore entire distance passed 
over before coming to rest = 2x45 
= 90 ft. •; 



(X— 4) (x— 3) (x+4) 

8 

(X— 4)(x— 3)(x+4) 

X = number spaces min. hand 
moves over. 
X — 20 = number of spaces hour 

hand moves over. 
Since min. hand moves 12 times as 
fast as hour hand, 
12 (X — 20) ^ number spaces min. 
hand moves over. 
Hence x = 12(x— 20) 
— llx = —240. 



X = 21- 



9 

11 



9 



Therefore the time is 21 — mins. 



June 4, 1901. 



1. 



5a=^b ab' 2b=' 

+ + 

36 6 9 

a-b 2ab' 

4 6 



ab 2b= 
2 3 



a b 

— + — Ans. 
2 3 



4a-"b 



36 

4a2b 



36 



ab- 2b' 

+ 

6 9 

ab- 2b= 

+ 

6 9 



2. 6x=— 7xy— 5y^ = (2x+y) (3x— 5y). 



past 4 o'clock. 


11 


2 3 




^- + — = 1 


(1) 


X y 




12 12 




=1 


(2) 


X 7 




Multiply (1) by 4, 




8 12 




— + — = 4 


(3) 


X y 




Add (2) and (3), 




20 




— = 5. 




X 




5x = 20. 




X = 4. 





199 



Subst. value of x ia (1), 


Subtract (5) from (4), 


2 3 


X*— 2x=y-+y^ = 30,625 (6) 


— + — = 1 


Extracting root, x'' — y^=£175 (7) 


4 y 


Adding (2) and (7), 




2x=^ = 800. 


3 1 


X- = 400. - 


• — = — 


X = 20 (length). 


y 2 


Substituting value of x in (1), 




20y = 300. 


y = 6. 


y =; 1,5. (breadth). 




10. 1 = arn-L 


X = first number. 


14,641 = 10,000r* 



y = second number, 
z = third number. 
2y 
Then, x + — = 19 or 3x+2y=57. (1) 
3 

y 3z 

— + — = 23 or 4y+9z=276 (2) 
3 4 

z X 

— + — = y or 3z+2x = 6y. (3) 
2 3 



14641 

10000 

11 
r = — . Therefore ratio of annual 
10 1 

increase is — 

10, or 10 
per cent. 



Multiply (1) by 2, 6x+4y=114 (4) Sept. 1901 
Subtract (4) from (2), 9z— 6x=162 
Add (5) and (3), 3z— 2x=54. (5) 
Multiply (6) by 4, 6z— 6j^=54. 



z — y = 9. 

Add (2) and (7), 4z— 4y=36 (7) 
13z = 312. 

Subsitute value of z in (6), z=24. 
Substitute value of y in (1), 

24— y=9 

y = 15. 
3x+30i557. 

x=9. 

8. (a) V18+V32 



= \/9x2+V16x2 
= 3V2+4V2=7V2 

4 

(b) 4\/a-bx3Vab= 
= 4aV b= X 



l.(a) See 3, Sept. 1902. 
(b) a«— b" = (a^+b^) (a«— b*) 
= (a+b) (a- — ab+b^) (a — b) 
(a^+ab+b') 
2. x^'— 9x2+26x— 24 = (x^— 5x-f6) 
(X— 4). 
x=— 6x2+llx— 6 = (x^— 5x+6) 
(x^t). 
H. C. F. = x=— 5x+6. 
L. C. M. = (x2— 5x+6) (x— 1) (x— 4). 



3. 3 
3x+2 



1 1 



2x— 4 2x— 3 



3Vab2 



=12aVab* = 12abVa 
9. X = length in rods. 

y = width in rods. 
Then, xy = 300 (1) 
The diagonal is the hypotenuse of a 

right triangle. 
Then, x=+y- ==(25)== 625 (2) 
Squaring (1), x-y= = 90,000. (3) 

Squaring (2). x*+2xV+y'^30,625(4) 
Multiplv (3) by 4, 4x'y2 = 360000(5) 



Equation with sign of last fraction 
changed. 
12x^— 42X+36 = 6x=— 5x— G+«x»— 

8x— 8. 

.21 
X = i — . Ans. 
29 

4. X = age ten yrs. ago. 
x+10 = age now. 
x+20 = age ten yrs. hence. 

3x 2 

— = — (x+20). 
5 5 

x = 40. Ans. 



200 



"(x+y) 



-(X— y) 



2. 



1 1 

— (x+y) + — (X— y) = 10. 

2 3 



(1) 



(2) 



(3) 



Simplify, x+lly = GO. 

5x+y = 60. (4) 

Multiply (1) by 5 and subtract (4) 
from resulting equation 



40 
9* 



Substitute value of y, in (1), 
77 

X = 4. 

x 

Simplifying, x- — 4x = 77. 
Completing square, x = 11. 
Substitute in (1), y=7. 



10. 



1 = a.+ (n— l)d. 
600 = 400+5d. 
5d = 200. 
d = 40 . 



Noy. 26. 1901. 



Substitute value of y in (3) to find 

X. 1(a). See 5, Sept. '98. 

(b) See 5, Sept. '98. 

100 2. See 2, June, 1900. 

.X = . 3. See 3, June, 1901. 

» 4. See 4, June, 1899. 

Prove work by substituting values 5. See 5, Sept. 1897. 

thus found, in (1) and (2). 6. See 6, Sept. 1898. 

7. See 7, June, 1899 

8. See 10, Sept. 1899. 
^ 9. See 9, May, 1895. 

X— y+— -^Q ggg 10^ sgp^_ ^ggg^ 

o 



I 4 4x 

\x^+j--i 2xyH — 

V 9 3 



4y 
3 



7. (a) (Vx— V21) (Vx-fV21)= Vx^— 21 
<b) (1+Vx+l) (1— Vx+1) = — X. 



8. I 125 

16 V 12 



|3 

I- 
4V 5 



115^ 
V16 



5 4 1 
= 16x— V15 V15 VIS 



773 




= V15. 




60 




9. X — y = 4. 


(1) 


X'— y« = 988. 


(2) 


Divide (2) by (1), 




x=+xy+y^=247. 


(3) 


Square (1), 




x^— 2xy+y2 = 16. 


(4) 


Subtract (4) from 


(3), 


3xy = 231. 




Divide by 3, 




xy = 77. 




77 




y = — 




X 





June 3, 1902 










1. X^ X 




1 


X 


1 


— + — 


— 


— 





. Ans. 


4 72 




12 

X 


2 


3 


x^' x^ 


X* 

— 4- 


X 1 


4 6 


+ 


8 


2 


3 4 




1 


* 


x= 




X 




6 




9 


12 




x= 




X 


1 




6 




9 


12 





2. See 1, June 1899. 

(8a«— 27b«) = (2a^— 3b=) (4a*+6a2b^ 
+9b*). 

4. H. C. F. = x+1. See 3, June '97. 

x'+2x^+2x+l = (x+1) (x=+x+l). 
x^— 2x='— x= = (x+1) (X*— x3— x^). 
Therefore L. C. M. = (x+1) (x^+x 
+1) (X*— x^— x^) . 



X 

+ 

x=— X— 20 

X 

(x+4) (X— 5) 

X 



201 

5 — Continued. 



X-— 8X+15 



x^— 9x+20 



x^— 8x-+8x 



(X— 5) (X— 3) 



(X— 5) (X— 4) 

x(x— 3 (X— 4)+x(x-1t4) (X— 4) 

— x(x+4)(x— 3) 

(x+4) (X— 5) (X— 3) (X— 4) 
x='— 7x=+12x+x''— IGx— x^*— x=+12x 

(x+4) (X— 5) (X— 3) (X— 4) 



(x+4) (X— 5) (X— 3) (X— 4) 

x(x^— 8x+8) 

(X-— l(j) (X— 5) (X— 3) 

6. See 5, June '99. 

7. Let X = value of first horse, 
and y = value of second horse. 

Then, x+10 = 2y, or x— 2y = —10.(1) 
and v+10=x— 13, or — x+y=— 23. (2) 
Add (1) and (2), — y = — 33. 

y = 33. 
Substitute value of y in (1), 
x— 60 = —10. 
X = 56. 



x^ 2x^y 3x= 4y2 9 

— + + + + y + — 

4 3 4 9 16 



2y 


2x-y 3x- 4y2 


X- + — 


+ — + — 


3 


3 4 9 





2x^y 
3 


4y^ 
+ — 
9 


4y 3 

^^ + — + — 
3 4 




3x=^ 9 

— + y + — 
4 16 

3x= 9 

— + y + — 
4 16 



x^ 2y 3 

I2 - 3 4 



9. x+2 

V2x+r'= + 1. 

V"2xTl' 



10. 1 = am-l. 

Substituting 1 = (50) (50)"-^ (50) 
(50)^ = 15,625,000,000 grains. 



2x+l = X+2-+ \/2x+l 



— V2x+1 = x+2— 2x— 1 



-x+1 



V2x+1 = X— 1 

2x+l = x^— 2x+l. 
x2 — 4x = 0. 
Com. siquare, 

x= — 4x+4 = 4. 

X— 2 = 42. 

X = 4. 



202 



Sept. 2, 
1. 


1902. 










X* ux- 


5x 

+ 

24 


3 


X 




1 


G 12 


le 


2 




4 


x^ x^ 


X' 




4x 9 


6 12 






3 


x= 


12 


4x^ 


5x 




2x 3 


12 


24 






3 


3 4 


4x^ 


4x 

+ — 
24 










12 












9x 

24 


3 






16 










9x 

24 


3 










16 









2(a) . 

ea^x-— 4a-y-— 3bx=+2by= 

= (6a-"x=— 4a-'.v-) — (3bx=— 2by=) 

= 2a^{3x-— 2y=) — b(3x=— 2y=) 

= (2a=— b) (3x=— 2y2) 
(b) 

a^ — la=b+4a=44b?— 8644 

= a*44b=+4— 4a-b+4a=— 8b 

= (a=— 2b+2) (a=— 2b+2) 
(c). 
(5x+2y)= — (X— 3y)^ 

= (5x42y) + (X— 3y) (5x+2y) — 
(X— 3y) 

= (5x+2y+x— 3y) (5x+2y— x+3y) 

= (6x— y) (4x+5y) 
( d ) a=— 2ac— b=— d- — 2bd+c' 

= (a-— 2ac+c'=) — (b=+2bd+d') 

= [(a— c) + (b+d)] [(a— c) — 
(b+d)] 

= (a— c+b+d) (a — c — b — d) 
(e), x^+x— 42. = (x+7) (x— 6). 

3. (a) x«— 1 = (x*+l) (X*— 1) 
= (x*+l) (x=+l) (x=— 1). 
= (x*+l) (xHl) (X+1) (X— 1). 
(b). a«— b" = (a^+b^) (a^— b»). 
= (a+b) (a=— ab+b=,) (a— b) (a^+ab 
+b=). 
(c). a*— 10^+9 = (a=— 9) (a^— 1). 

= .(a+3) (a— 3) (a+1) (a— 1). 
(d). Six* — 72x2y=+16y* 
= (9x^-^y^) (9x2— 4y=) , 
= (3x+2y) (3x— 2y) (3x+2y) (3x 
— 2y). 



(e). X*— 2x^— 16x=+2x+15 = (x— 1) 

(x+1) (x+3) (X— 5). 
(See (5), Sept. '98.) 
4. X'— 1 = (X— 1) (x^+x+l). 

XS+1 = (x+1) (X^— X+1). 

x^— 1 = (x+1) (X— 1). 

x"— 1 = (x^+l) (x«— 1) = (x+1) 

(X=— X+1) (X— 1) (x^+x+1) 

Therefore L. C. M. == (x— 1) (x^-i- 
x+1) (x+1) (x^— x+1). 
5. 

i x+y X — y y i x+y x — y ^ 

( a+b a — b ) ( a — b a+b ) 

(a— b) (x+y) + (a+b) (x — y) 

(a — b) (a+b) 

(a+b) (x+y) — (a— b) (x— y) 

(a — b) (a+z) 

(a— b) (x+y) + (a+b) (x— y) 

(a+b) (x+y) — (a— b) (x— y 

ax — bx+ay — by+ax+bx — ay — by 

ax+bx+ay+by— ( ax — bx — ay+by ) 

2ax — 2by ax — by 



2bx + 2ay bx + ay 
. Let X = the whole. 

x 
Then, — = silver. 

5 

X 

— + 8 = nickel. 
5 

2x 

— + 4 z= copper. 
5 

X X 

Hence, x = — + — + 
5 5 

5x = X+X+40+2X+20 . ■ 
X = 60. 

X 

— — 12, silver. 

5 
5 



2x 

+ — + 4 
5 



4 8 = 20, nickel. 



X 

2x 



+ 4 =: 28, copper. 



203 



i] Let 3x = rate up stream, 
and 5x = rate down stream. 

30 30 

Then, — + — = 12. 
3x .5x 

150 + 90 = 180x. 
180x = 240. 



X = 1- 



3x = 4. 

"i "" 

2 
5x = 6— 
3 
«(a). _ _ 

3Vc — 5\/c- + 2\/c^ 

= 3(c=^— 5(c')+2(c«) 

= 3(c')— .5(e)+2(c') 

3\/c— 5Vc+2Vc = 0. 
(b) See 9. Sept. 1901^ 



9(a), x'+y»=91. (1). 

x+y = 7. (2). 

Diide (1) by (2), 

X— xy+y= = 13. (3). 
Square (2), x^+2xy+-y" = 49. (4) 
Subtract (3) from (4), 

xy = 12. (5). 

Multiply (5) by (4), 4xy=48. (6) 
Subtract (6) from (4), 

x^— 2xy+y- = 1. (7). 
Extract root, x — y=il (8) 

Add (2) and (8), 2x = 8 or 6. 

X = 4 or 3. 
Substitute in (2), y = 3 or 4. 

(b) See 9, Sept. '98. 

10. Let X = ten's digit. 

and y = units' digit. 

lOx+y = number. 



lOx+y 

xy 
lOx^y— 9 



5—. or 30x+3y = 16xy. 
3 (1) 



lOy+x, or X — y = 1 
(2) 
Substitute value of x, y+1, in (1), 

30+30y+3y = 16y+16y^ 
Simplifying, 16y-— 17y = 30. 
Completing square, y=2. 

Substitute in (2). x = 3. 

lOx+y = 32. number. 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 



019 741 184 3 



m 



